2014E Charger OM 4th R1

2014 Charger
2014
OWNER’S MANUAL
Charger
Chrysler Group LLC
14D481-126-AA First Edition Printed in U.S.A.
VEHICLES SOLD IN CANADA This manual illustrates and describes the operation of fea-
With respect to any Vehicles Sold in Canada, the name Chrysler tures and equipment that are either standard or optional on
Group LLC shall be deemed to be deleted and the name Chrysler this vehicle. This manual may also include a description of
Canada Inc. used in substitution therefore. features and equipment that are no longer available or were
not ordered on this vehicle. Please disregard any features
DRIVING AND ALCOHOL and equipment described in this manual that are not on this
Drunken driving is one of the most frequent causes of acci- vehicle.
dents.
Your driving ability can be seriously impaired with blood alcohol Chrysler Group LLC reserves the right to make changes in
levels far below the legal minimum. If you are drinking, don’t design and specifications, and/or make additions to or im-
drive. Ride with a designated non-drinking driver, call a cab, a provements to its products without imposing any obligation
friend, or use public transportation. upon itself to install them on products previously manufac-
tured.
WARNING!
Driving after drinking can lead to an accident. Your per-
ceptions are less sharp, your reflexes are slower, and your
judgment is impaired when you have been drinking. Never
Copyright © 2013 Chrysler Group LLC
drink and then drive.
SECTION TABLE OF CONTENTS PAGE
INTRODUCTION . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3
1
1
2 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9 2
3 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 103 3
4 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 315 4
5 STARTING AND OPERATING . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 393 5
6 WHAT TO DO IN EMERGENCIES . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 509 6
7 MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 537 7
8 MAINTENANCE SCHEDULES . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 597 8

9 IF YOU NEED CONSUMER ASSISTANCE . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 605 9
10 INDEX . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 615 10
INTRODUCTION 1
CONTENTS
䡵 INTRODUCTION . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .4 䡵 VEHICLE IDENTIFICATION NUMBER . . . . . . . .6
䡵 HOW TO USE THIS MANUAL . . . . . . . . . . . . . .4 䡵 VEHICLE MODIFICATIONS/ALTERATIONS . . . .7
䡵 WARNINGS AND CAUTIONS . . . . . . . . . . . . . .6
4 INTRODUCTION
INTRODUCTION When it comes to service, remember that your authorized
dealer knows your vehicle best, has factory-trained tech-
Congratulations on selecting your new Chrysler Group
nicians and genuine parts, and cares about your satisfac-
LLC vehicle. Be assured that it represents precision
tion.
workmanship, distinctive styling, and high quality - all
essentials that are traditional to our vehicles. HOW TO USE THIS MANUAL
This Owner’s Manual has been prepared with the assis- Consult the Table of Contents to determine which section
tance of service and engineering specialists to acquaint contains the information you desire.
you with the operation and maintenance of your vehicle.
It is supplemented by Warranty Information, and various Since the specification of your vehicle depends on the
customer-oriented documents. Please take the time to items of equipment ordered, certain descriptions and
read these publications carefully. Following the instruc- illustrations may differ from your vehicle’s equipment.
tions and recommendations in this manual will help The detailed index at the back of this Owner’s Manual
assure safe and enjoyable operation of your vehicle. contains a complete listing of all subjects.
NOTE: After reviewing the owner information, it Consult the following table for a description of the
should be stored in the vehicle for convenient referenc- symbols that may be used on your vehicle or throughout
ing and remain with the vehicle when sold. this Owner’s Manual:
INTRODUCTION 5
1
6 INTRODUCTION
WARNINGS AND CAUTIONS
This Owners Manual contains WARNINGS against op-
erating procedures that could result in a collision or
bodily injury. It also contains CAUTIONS against proce-
dures that could result in damage to your vehicle. If you
do not read this entire Owners Manual, you may miss
important information. Observe all Warnings and Cau-
tions.
VEHICLE IDENTIFICATION NUMBER

The Vehicle Identification Number (VIN) is on the left
front corner of the instrument panel. The VIN is visible VIN Location
from outside of the vehicle through the windshield. This The vehicle identification number (VIN) is also located
number also appears on the Automobile Information on the right front strut tower inside the engine compart-
Disclosure Label affixed to a window on your vehicle, the ment.
vehicle registration, and the title.
INTRODUCTION 7
VEHICLE MODIFICATIONS/ALTERATIONS
1
WARNING!
Any modifications or alterations to this vehicle could
seriously affect its roadworthiness and safety and
may lead to a collision resulting in serious injury or
death.
VIN Location
NOTE: It is illegal to remove or alter the VIN.
THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE
2
CONTENTS
䡵 A WORD ABOUT YOUR KEYS . . . . . . . . . . . . .12 ▫ To Arm The System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .19
▫ Keyless Ignition Node (KIN) . . . . . . . . . . . . . .12 ▫ To Disarm The System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .20
▫ Key Fob . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .13 ▫ Security System Manual Override . . . . . . . . . . .21
▫ Ignition Or Accessory On Message . . . . . . . . . .15 䡵 ILLUMINATED ENTRY — IF EQUIPPED . . . . . .21
䡵 SENTRY KEY® . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .16 䡵 REMOTE KEYLESS ENTRY (RKE) . . . . . . . . . . .22
▫ Replacement Keys . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .17 ▫ To Unlock The Doors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .22
▫ Customer Key Programming . . . . . . . . . . . . . .18 ▫ To Lock The Doors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .23
▫ General Information . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .18 ▫ To Unlatch The Trunk . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .24
䡵 VEHICLE SECURITY ALARM — IF EQUIPPED . . .18 ▫ Using The Panic Alarm . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .24
▫ Rearming Of The System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .19 ▫ Programming Additional Transmitters . . . . . . .25
10 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE
▫ Transmitter Battery Replacement . . . . . . . . . . .25 䡵 TRUNK LOCK AND RELEASE . . . . . . . . . . . . .43
▫ General Information . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .26 䡵 TRUNK SAFETY WARNING. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .44
䡵 REMOTE STARTING SYSTEM — IF EQUIPPED . .27 ▫ Trunk Emergency Release . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .44
▫ How To Use Remote Start . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .27 䡵 OCCUPANT RESTRAINTS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .45
䡵 DOOR LOCKS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .30 ▫ Lap/Shoulder Belts . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .48
▫ Manual Door Locks . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .30 ▫ Lap/Shoulder Belt Untwisting Procedure . . . . .54
▫ Power Door Locks . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .31 ▫ Seat Belts In Passenger Seating Positions . . . . . .55
▫ Child-Protection Door Lock System — Rear ▫ Automatic Locking Retractor Mode (ALR) — If
Doors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .33 Equipped . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .56
䡵 KEYLESS ENTER-N-GO™ . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .34 ▫ Energy Management Feature . . . . . . . . . . . . . .57
䡵 WINDOWS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .39 ▫ Seat Belt Pretensioners . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .57
▫ Power Windows . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .39 ▫ Enhanced Seat Belt Use Reminder System
(BeltAlert®) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .57
▫ Wind Buffeting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .43
▫ Seat Belts And Pregnant Women . . . . . . . . . . .58
THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 11
▫ Seat Belt Extender . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .59 䡵 SAFETY TIPS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .97
▫ Supplemental Restraint System (SRS) — Air ▫ Transporting Passengers. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .97
Bags . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .59 2
▫ Exhaust Gas . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .98
▫ Air Bag Deployment Sensors And Controls . . . .66
▫ Safety Checks You Should Make Inside The
▫ Event Data Recorder (EDR) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .73 Vehicle . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .99
▫ Child Restraints . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .74 ▫ Periodic Safety Checks You Should Make Outside
The Vehicle . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .101
▫ Transporting Pets . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .96
䡵 ENGINE BREAK-IN RECOMMENDATIONS . . . .96
A WORD ABOUT YOUR KEYS The Keyless Ignition Node (KIN) has four operating
positions, three of which are labeled and will illuminate
Your vehicle uses a keyless ignition system. This system
when in position. The three positions are OFF, ACC, and
consists of a Key Fob with Remote Keyless Entry (RKE)
ON/RUN. The fourth position is START, during start
transmitter and a Keyless Ignition Node (KIN).
RUN will illuminate.
Keyless Enter-N-Go™ Feature
NOTE: In case the ignition switch does not change with
This vehicle is equipped with the Keyless Enter-N-Go™ the push of a button, the RKE transmitter (Key Fob) may
feature, (refer to ⬙Keyless Enter-N-Go™⬙ in ⬙Things To have a low or dead battery. In this situation a back up
Know Before Starting Your Vehicle⬙ for further informa- method can be used to operate the ignition switch. Put
tion). the nose side (side opposite of the emergency key) of the
Key Fob against the ENGINE START/STOP button and
Keyless Ignition Node (KIN)
push to operate the ignition switch.
This feature allows the driver to operate the ignition
switch with the push of a button, as long as the Remote
Keyless Entry (RKE) transmitter is in the passenger
compartment.
Key Fob
The Key Fob also contains the Remote Keyless Entry
(RKE) transmitter and an emergency key, which stores in 2
the rear of the Key Fob.
The emergency key allows for entry into the vehicle
should the battery in the vehicle or the Key Fob go dead.
The emergency key is also for locking/unlocking the
glove compartment. You can keep the emergency key
with you when valet parking.
To remove the emergency key, slide the mechanical latch
on the back of the Key Fob sideways with your thumb
Keyless Ignition Node (KIN)
and then pull the key out with your other hand.
1 — OFF
2 — ACC (ACCESSORY)
3 — ON/RUN
Mechanical Latch On The Back Of The Key Fob Emergency Key Removal
NOTE: You can insert the double-sided emergency key
into the lock cylinders with either side up.
Ignition Or Accessory On Message
WARNING!
Opening the driver’s door when the ignition is in ACC or
ON (engine not running), a chime will sound to remind • When leaving the vehicle, always remove the Key 2
you to cycle the ignition to OFF. In addition to the chime, Fob from the vehicle and lock your vehicle.
the ignition or accessory on message will display in the • Never leave children alone in a vehicle, or with
cluster. access to an unlocked vehicle.
• Allowing children to be in a vehicle unattended is
NOTE: With the Uconnect® system, the power window dangerous for a number of reasons. A child or
switches, radio, power sunroof (if equipped), and power others could be seriously or fatally injured. Chil-
outlets will remain active for up to 10 minutes after the dren should be warned not to touch the parking
ignition is cycled to the OFF position. Opening either brake, brake pedal or the shift lever.
front door will cancel this feature. The time for this • Do not leave the Key Fob in or near the vehicle, or
feature is programmable. Refer to “Uconnect® Settings” in a location accessible to children, and do not
in “Understanding Your Instrument Panel” for further leave the ignition of a vehicle equipped with
information. Keyless Enter-N-Go™ in the ACC or ON/RUN
mode. A child could operate power windows, other
controls, or move the vehicle.
(Continued)
The system uses a Key Fob with a factory-mated Remote
WARNING! (Continued)
Keyless Entry (RKE) transmitter, a Keyless Ignition Node
• Do not leave children or animals inside parked (KIN) and a RF receiver to prevent unauthorized vehicle
vehicles in hot weather. Interior heat build-up may operation. Therefore, only Key Fobs that are pro-
cause serious injury or death. grammed to the vehicle can be used to start and operate
the vehicle. The system will not allow the engine to crank
CAUTION! if an invalid Key Fob is used to start and operate the
vehicle. The system will shut the engine off in two
An unlocked car is an invitation to thieves. Always seconds if an invalid Key Fob is used to start the engine.
remove the Key Fob from vehicle, cycle the ignition
OFF and lock all doors when leaving the vehicle After placing the ignition to the ON/RUN position, the
unattended. Vehicle Security Light will turn on for three seconds for a
bulb check. If the light remains on after the bulb check, it
SENTRY KEY® indicates that there is a problem with the electronics. In
addition, if the light begins to flash after the bulb check,
The Sentry Key® Immobilizer system prevents unauthor- it indicates that someone used an invalid Key Fob to start
ized vehicle operation by disabling the engine. The the engine. Either of these conditions will result in the
system does not need to be armed or activated. Operation engine being shut off after two seconds.
is automatic, regardless of whether the vehicle is locked
or unlocked.
If the Vehicle Security Light turns on during normal Replacement Keys
vehicle operation (vehicle running for longer than 10
NOTE: Only Key Fobs that are programmed to the
seconds), it indicates that there is a fault in the electron- 2
vehicle electronics can be used to start and operate the
ics. Should this occur, have the vehicle serviced as soon
vehicle. Once a Key Fob is programmed to a vehicle, it
as possible by an authorized dealer.
cannot be programmed to any other vehicle.
CAUTION!
CAUTION!
• Do not make modifications or alterations to the
• Always remove the Key Fobs from the vehicle and
immobilizer system. Modifications or alterations to
lock all doors when leaving the vehicle unat-
the immobilization system may result in a loss of
tended.
security protection.
• For vehicles equipped with Keyless Enter-N-Go™,
• The Sentry Key® Immobilizer system is not com-
always remember to place the ignition in the OFF
patible with some aftermarket remote starting sys-
position.
tems. Use of these systems may result in vehicle
starting problems and loss of security protection. At the time of purchase, the original owner is provided
with a four-digit Personal Identification Number (PIN).
All of the Key Fobs provided with your new vehicle have Keep the PIN in a secure location. This number is
been programmed to the vehicle electronics. required for authorized dealer replacement of Key Fobs.
Duplication of Key Fobs may be performed at an autho- • This device must accept any interference that may be
rized dealer. This procedure consists of programming a received, including interference that may cause unde-
blank Key Fob to the vehicle electronics. A blank Key Fob sired operation.
is one that has never been programmed.
NOTE: Changes or modifications not expressly approved
NOTE: When having the Sentry Key® Immobilizer Sys- by the party responsible for compliance could void the
tem serviced, bring all vehicle keys with you to an user’s authority to operate the equipment.
authorized dealer.
VEHICLE SECURITY ALARM — IF EQUIPPED
Customer Key Programming
The Vehicle Security Alarm monitors the vehicle doors
Programming Key Fobs or RKE transmitters may be for unauthorized entry and the Keyless Enter-N-Go™
performed at an authorized dealer. START/STOP button for unauthorized operation. While
General Information the Vehicle Security Alarm is armed, interior switches for
door locks and decklid release are disabled. If something
The Sentry Key® system complies with FCC rules part 15 triggers the alarm, the Vehicle Security Alarm will pro-
and with RSS-210 of Industry Canada. Operation is vide the following audible and visible signals: the horn
subject to the following conditions: will pulse, the park lamps and/or turn signals will flash,
• This device may not cause harmful interference. and the Vehicle Security Light in the instrument cluster
will flash.
Rearming Of The System 2. Perform one of the following methods to lock the
vehicle:
If something triggers the alarm, and no action is taken to
disarm it, the Vehicle Security Alarm will turn the horn • Push LOCK on the interior power door lock switch 2
off after three minutes, turn all of the visual signals off with the driver and/or passenger door open.
after 15 additional minutes, and then the Vehicle Security • Push the LOCK button on the exterior Passive Entry
Alarm will rearm itself. Door Handle with a valid Key Fob available in the
To Arm The System same exterior zone (refer to ⬙Keyless Enter-N-Go™⬙
in ⬙Things To Know Before Starting Your Vehicle⬙ for
Follow these steps to arm the Vehicle Security Alarm: further information).
1. Make sure the vehicles ignition is cycled to the “OFF” • Push the LOCK button on the Remote Keyless Entry
position (refer to ⬙Starting Procedures⬙ in ⬙Starting (RKE) transmitter.
And Operating⬙ for further information).
3. If any doors are open, close them.
make sure the vehicle ignition system is OFF.
• For vehicles not equipped with Keyless Enter-N-
Go™, make sure the vehicle ignition system is OFF
and the key is physically removed from the ignition.
To Disarm The System • For vehicles not equipped with Keyless Enter-N-Go™,
The Vehicle Security Alarm can be disarmed using any of insert a valid key into the ignition switch and turn the
the following methods: key to the ON position.
NOTE:
• Press the UNLOCK button on the Remote Keyless
Entry (RKE) transmitter. • The driver’s door key cylinder and the trunk button on
• Grasp the Passive Entry Unlock Door Handle if the RKE transmitter cannot arm or disarm the Vehicle
Security Alarm.
equipped, refer to “Keyless Enter-N-Go™” in “Things
To Know Before Starting Your Vehicle” for further • When the Vehicle Security Alarm is armed, the interior
information. power door lock switches will not unlock the doors.
• Cycle the vehicle ignition system out of the OFF The Vehicle Security Alarm is designed to protect your
position. vehicle; however, you can create conditions where the
system will give you a false alarm. If one of the previ-
ously described arming sequences has occurred, the
press the Keyless Enter-N-Go™ START/STOP button
Vehicle Security Alarm will arm regardless of whether
(requires at least one valid Key Fob in the vehicle).
you are in the vehicle or not. If you remain in the vehicle
and open a door, the alarm will sound. If this occurs,
disarm the Vehicle Security Alarm.
If the Vehicle Security Alarm is armed and the battery ILLUMINATED ENTRY — IF EQUIPPED
becomes disconnected, the Vehicle Security Alarm will The courtesy lights will turn on when you use the
remain armed when the battery is reconnected; the Remote Keyless Entry (RKE) transmitter to unlock the 2
exterior lights will flash, the horn will sound. If this doors or open any door.
occurs, disarm the Vehicle Security Alarm.
This feature also turns on the approach lighting in the
Tamper Alert
outside mirrors (if equipped). Refer to “Mirrors” in
If something has triggered the Vehicle Security Alarm in “Understanding The Features Of Your Vehicle” for fur-
your absence, the horn will sound three times and the ther information.
exterior lights will blink three times when you disarm the
The lights will fade to off after approximately 30 seconds
Vehicle Security Alarm. Check the vehicle for tampering.
or they will immediately fade to off once the ignition is
Security System Manual Override cycled to the ON/RUN position from the OFF position.
The Vehicle Security Alarm will not arm if you lock the NOTE:
doors using the manual door lock plunger.
• The front courtesy overhead console and door cour-
tesy lights will turn on if the dimmer control is in the
“Dome ON” position (extreme top position).
• The Illuminated Entry system will not operate if the
dimmer control is in the “Dome defeat” position
(extreme bottom position).
REMOTE KEYLESS ENTRY (RKE)

The RKE system allows you to lock or unlock the doors,
open the trunk, or activate the Panic Alarm from dis-
tances up to approximately 66 ft (20 m) using a hand-held
Key Fob with RKE transmitter. The RKE transmitter does
not need to be pointed at the vehicle to activate the
system.
NOTE: Driving at speeds 5 mph (8 km/h) and above Key Fob With RKE Transmitter
disables the system from responding to all RKE transmit- To Unlock The Doors
ter buttons for all RKE transmitters.
Push and release the UNLOCK button on the RKE
transmitter once to unlock the driver’s door or twice
within five seconds to unlock all doors. The turn signal
lights will flash to acknowledge the unlock signal. The
illuminated entry system will also turn on.
If the vehicle is equipped with Passive Entry, refer to Headlight Illumination On Approach
Keyless Enter-N-Go™ under “Things To Know Before This feature activates the headlights for up to 90 seconds
Starting Your Vehicle” for further information. when the doors are unlocked with the RKE transmitter. 2
1st Push Of Key Fob Unlocks The time for this feature is programmable on vehicles
equipped through Uconnect®. To change the current
This feature lets you program the system to unlock either
setting, refer to “Uconnect® Settings” in “Understanding
the driver’s door or all doors on the first push of the
Your Instrument Panel” for further information.
UNLOCK button on the RKE transmitter. To change the
current setting, refer to “Uconnect® Settings” in “Under- To Lock The Doors
standing Your Instrument Panel” for further information. Push and release the LOCK button on the RKE transmit-
Flash Lights With Lock ter to lock all doors. The turn signal lights will flash and
the horn will chirp to acknowledge the signal.
This feature will cause the signal lights to flash when the
doors are locked with the RKE transmitter. This feature If the vehicle is equipped with Passive Entry, refer to
can be turned on or turned off. To change the current “Keyless Enter-N-Go™” under “Things To Know Before
setting, refer to “Uconnect® Settings” in “Understanding Starting Your Vehicle” for further information.
Sound Horn With Remote Key Lock headlights, park lights and turn signals will flash, the
horn will pulse on and off, and the interior lights will
This feature will cause the horn to chirp when the doors
turn on.
are locked with the RKE transmitter. This feature can be
turned on or turned off. To change the current setting, The Panic Alarm will stay on for three minutes unless
refer to “Uconnect® Settings” in “Understanding Your you turn it off by either pushing the PANIC button a
Instrument Panel” for further information. second time or drive the vehicle at a speed of 15 mph
(24 km/h) or greater
To Unlatch The Trunk
NOTE:
Push the TRUNK button on the RKE transmitter two
times within five seconds to unlatch the trunk. • The interior lights will turn off if you cycle the ignition
If the vehicle is equipped with Passive Entry, refer to switch to the ACC or ON/RUN position while the
Keyless Enter-N-Go™ under “Things To Know Before Panic Alarm is activated. However, the exterior lights
Starting Your Vehicle” for further information. and horn will remain on.
Using The Panic Alarm • You may need to be less than 35 ft (11 m) from the
vehicle when using the RKE transmitter to turn off the
To turn the Panic Alarm feature on or off, push and hold Panic Alarm due to the radio frequency noises emitted
the PANIC button on the RKE transmitter for at least one by the system.
second and release. When the Panic Alarm is on, the
Programming Additional Transmitters
Programming Key Fobs or RKE transmitters may be
performed at an authorized dealer. 2
Transmitter Battery Replacement
The recommended replacement battery is one CR2032
battery.
NOTE:
• Perchlorate Material — special handling may apply.
See www.dtsc.ca.gov/hazardouswaste/perchlorate
• Do not touch the battery terminals that are on the back Emergency Key Removal
housing or the printed circuit board. 2. Insert the tip of the emergency key or a #2 flat blade
1. Remove the emergency key by sliding the mechanical screwdriver into the slot and gently pry the two halves
latch on the back of the RKE transmitter sideways of the RKE transmitter apart. Make sure not to damage
with your thumb and then pull the key out with your the seal during removal.
other hand.
new battery with your fingers. Skin oils may cause
battery deterioration. If you touch a battery, clean it
with rubbing alcohol.
4. To assemble the RKE transmitter case, snap the two
halves together.
General Information
This device complies with Part 15 of the FCC rules and
RSS 210 of Industry Canada. Operation is subject to the
following conditions:
• This device may not cause harmful interference.
Separating The RKE Transmitter Case
• This device must accept any interference received,
3. Remove the battery by turning the back cover over
including interference that may cause undesired op-
(battery facing downward) and tapping it lightly on a
eration.
solid surface such as a table or similar, then replace the
battery. When replacing the battery, match the + sign NOTE: Changes or modifications not expressly approved
on the battery to the + sign on the inside of the battery by the party responsible for compliance could void the
clip, located on the back cover. Avoid touching the user’s authority to operate the equipment.
If your RKE transmitter fails to operate from a normal NOTE:
distance, check for these two conditions:
• The vehicle must be equipped with an automatic
1. A weak battery in the transmitter. The expected life of transmission to be equipped with Remote Start. 2
the battery is a minimum of three years.
• Obstructions between the vehicle and RKE transmitter
2. Closeness to a radio transmitter such as a radio station may reduce this range.
tower, airport transmitter, and some mobile or CB
How To Use Remote Start
radios.
All of the following conditions must be met before the
REMOTE STARTING SYSTEM — IF EQUIPPED engine will remote start:
• Shift lever in PARK
This system uses the Remote Keyless Entry
(RKE) transmitter to start the engine conve- • Doors closed
niently from outside the vehicle while still • Hood closed
maintaining security. The system has a range of
approximately 300 ft (91 m). • Trunk closed
• Hazard switch off
• Brake switch inactive (brake pedal not pressed)
• Battery at an acceptable charge level Remote Start Abort Message On Electronic Vehicle
Information Center (EVIC) — If Equipped
• RKE panic button not pushed
The following messages will display in the EVIC if the
• System not disabled from previous remote start event vehicle fails to remote start or exits remote start prema-
• Vehicle security alarm not active turely:
• Ignition in OFF position • Remote Start Aborted — Door Ajar
• Remote Start Aborted — Hood Ajar
WARNING!
• Remote Start Aborted — Trunk Ajar
• Do not start or run an engine in a closed garage or
confined area. Exhaust gas contains Carbon Mon- • Remote Start Aborted — Fuel Low
oxide (CO) which is odorless and colorless. Carbon • Remote Start Disabled — Start Vehicle To Reset
Monoxide is poisonous and can cause serious in-
jury or death when inhaled. The EVIC message stays active until the ignition is cycled
• Keep Remote Keyless Entry (RKE) transmitters to the ON/RUN position.
away from children. Operation of the Remote Start
System, windows, door locks or other controls
could cause serious injury or death.
To Enter Remote Start Mode • The engine can be started two consecutive times (two
15-minute cycles) with the RKE transmitter. However,
the ignition must be cycled to the RUN position before
Press and release the REMOTE START button 2
on the RKE transmitter twice within five sec- you can repeat the start sequence for a third cycle.
onds. The vehicle doors will lock, parking To Exit Remote Start Mode Without Driving The
lights will flash and the horn will chirp twice (if Vehicle
programmed). Then, the engine will start and the vehicle
Push and release the REMOTE START button one time or
will remain in the Remote Start mode for a 15-minute
allow the engine to run for the entire 15-minute cycle.
cycle.
NOTE: To avoid unintentional shutdowns, the system
NOTE:
will disable the one time push of the REMOTE START
• If an engine fault is present or fuel level is low, the button for two seconds after receiving a valid Remote
vehicle will start and then shut down in 10 seconds. Start request.
• The park lamps will turn on and remain on during To Exit Remote Start Mode And Drive The Vehicle
Remote Start mode. Before the end of 15-minute cycle, push and release the
• For security, power window and power sunroof op- UNLOCK button on the RKE transmitter to unlock the
eration (if equipped) are disabled when the vehicle is doors and disarm the Vehicle Security Alarm
in the Remote Start mode.
(if equipped). Then, prior to the end of the 15-minute
cycle, push and release the START/STOP button.
NOTE: The message “Push Start Button” will display in
the EVIC until you push the START button.
DOOR LOCKS
Manual Door Locks
To lock each door, push the door lock knob on each door
trim panel downward. To unlock the front doors, pull the
inside door handle to the first detent. To unlock the rear
doors, pull the door lock knob on the door trim panel
upward. Door Lock Knob
If the door lock knob is down when you shut the door,
the door will lock. Therefore, make sure the Key Fob is
not inside the vehicle before closing the door.
Power Door Locks
WARNING!
A power door lock switch is on each front door trim
• For personal security and safety in the event of a panel. Use this switch to lock or unlock the doors. 2
collision, lock the vehicle doors before you drive as
well as when you park and leave the vehicle.
• When leaving the vehicle, always remove the Key
Fob from the ignition and lock your vehicle.
• Never leave children alone in a vehicle, or with
access to an unlocked vehicle. Allowing children to
be in a vehicle unattended is dangerous for a
number of reasons. A child or others could be
seriously or fatally injured. Children should be
warned not to touch the parking brake, brake pedal
or the shift lever.
• Do not leave the Key Fob in or near the vehicle, or
in a location accessible to children, and do not
leave the ignition of a vehicle equipped with Power Door Lock Switch
Keyless Enter-N-Go™ in the ACC or ON/RUN The doors can also be locked and unlocked with the
mode. A child could operate power windows, other Keyless Enter-N-Go™ (Passive Entry) system. For further
information, refer to Keyless Enter-N-Go™ under authorized dealer per written request of the customer.
“Things To Know Before Starting Your Vehicle” for Please see your authorized dealer for service.
further information.
Automatic Unlock Doors On Exit
If you press the power door lock switch while the
The doors will unlock automatically on vehicles with
ignition is in the ACC or ON/RUN position, and any
power door locks if:
front door is open, the power locks will not operate. This
prevents you from accidentally locking the Key Fob in 1. The Automatic Unlock Doors On Exit feature is en-
the vehicle. Cycling the ignition to the OFF position or abled.
closing the door will allow the locks to operate. If a door
2. The vehicle was in motion, then speed returned to
is open, and the ignition is in the ACC or ON/RUN
0 mph (0 km/h) and the transmission shift lever is
position, a chime will sound as a reminder to remove the
placed in PARK.
Key Fob.
3. The driver door is opened.
Automatic Door Locks — If Equipped
The auto door lock feature default condition is enabled. 4. The doors were not previously unlocked.
When enabled, the door locks will lock automatically Automatic Unlock Doors On Exit Programming
when the vehicle’s speed exceeds 15 mph (24 km/h). The
To change the current setting, refer to “Uconnect® Set-
auto door lock feature can be enabled or disabled by your
tings” in “Understanding Your Instrument Panel” for
NOTE: Use the Automatic Unlock Doors On Exit feature
in accordance with local laws.
Child-Protection Door Lock System — Rear 2
Doors
To provide a safer environment for small children riding
in the rear seats, the rear doors are equipped with
Child-Protection Door Lock system.
To Engage Or Disengage The Child-Protection
Door Lock System
1. Open the rear door.
Child-Protection Door Lock Location
2. Insert the tip of the emergency key into the lock and
rotate to the LOCK or UNLOCK position.
3. Repeat steps 1 and 2 for the opposite rear door.
NOTE: For emergency exit with the system engaged,
move the lock knob up (unlocked position), roll down the
window and open the door with the outside door handle.
KEYLESS ENTER-N-GO™
The Passive Entry system is an enhancement to the
vehicle’s Remote Keyless Entry (RKE) system and a
feature of Keyless Enter-N-Go™. This feature allows you
to lock and unlock the vehicle’s door(s) without having to
press the RKE transmitter lock or unlock buttons.
NOTE:
Child-Protection Door Lock Function • Passive Entry may be programmed ON/OFF; refer to
WARNING! “Uconnect® Settings” in “Understanding Your Instru-
ment Panel” for further information.
Avoid trapping anyone in a vehicle in a collision.
• If wearing gloves on your hands, or if it has been
Remember that the rear doors can only be opened
raining on the Passive Entry door handle, the unlock
from the outside when the Child-Protection locks are
sensitivity can be affected, resulting in a slower re-
engaged.
sponse time.
• If the vehicle is unlocked by the Passive Entry Door
Handle and no door goes ajar within 60 seconds, the
vehicle will re-lock and if equipped will arm the 2
security alarm.
To Unlock From The Driver’s Side:
With a valid Passive Entry RKE transmitter within 5 ft
(1.5 m) of the driver door handle, grab the front driver
door handle to unlock the driver’s door automatically.
The interior door panel lock knob will raise when the
door is unlocked.
Grab The Door Handle To Unlock

NOTE: If “Unlock All Doors 1st Press” is programmed
all doors will unlock when you grab hold of the front
driver’s door handle. To select between “Unlock Driver
Door 1st Press” and “Unlock All Doors 1st Press”, refer to
“Uconnect® Settings” in “Understanding Your Instru-
ment Panel” for further information.
To Unlock From The Passenger Side: If one of the vehicle doors is open and the door panel
switch is used to lock the vehicle, once all open doors
have been closed the vehicle checks the inside and
(1.5 m) of the passenger door handle, grab the front
outside of the vehicle for any valid Passive Entry RKE
passenger door handle to unlock all four doors automati-
transmitters. If one of the vehicle’s Passive Entry RKE
cally. The interior door panel lock knob will raise when
transmitters is detected inside the vehicle, and no other
the door is unlocked.
valid Passive Entry RKE transmitters are detected out-
NOTE: All doors will unlock when the front passenger side the vehicle, the Passive Entry System automatically
door handle is grabbed regardless of the driver’s door unlocks all vehicle doors and chirps the horn three times
unlock preference setting (“Unlock Driver Door 1st (on the third attempt ALL doors will lock and the Passive
Press” or “Unlock All Doors 1st Press”). Entry RKE transmitter can be locked in the vehicle).
Preventing Inadvertent Locking Of Passive Entry RKE NOTE: The vehicle will only unlock the doors when the
Transmitter In Vehicle doors are locked using the door panel switch, a valid
Passive Entry RKE transmitter is detected inside the
To minimize the possibility of unintentionally locking a
vehicle, and no valid Passive Entry RKE transmitter is
Passive Entry RKE transmitter inside your vehicle, the
detected outside the vehicle. The vehicle will not unlock
Passive Entry system is equipped with an automatic door
the doors when any of the following conditions are true:
unlock feature which will function if the ignition switch
is in the OFF position. • The doors are locked using the RKE transmitter.
• The doors are locked using the LOCK button on the
Passive Entry door handles.
• The doors are manually locked using the door lock 2
knobs.
• There is a valid Passive Entry RKE transmitter outside
the vehicle and within 5 ft (1.5 m) of either Passive
Entry door handle.
• Three attempts are made to lock the doors using the
door panel switch and then close the doors.
To Enter The Trunk
CHMSL Button
NOTE: If you inadvertently leave your vehicle’s Passive
(1.5 m) of the deck lid, press the button on the right side
Entry RKE transmitter in the trunk and try to close the
of CHMSL, (Center High Mounted Stop Light) which is
deck lid, the deck lid will automatically unlatch, unless
located on the deck lid.
another one of the vehicle’s Passive Entry RKE transmit-
ters is outside the vehicle and within 5 ft (1.5 m) of the
deck lid.
To Lock The Vehicle’s Doors Do NOT grab the door handle, when pressing the door
handle lock button. This could unlock the door(s).
With one of the vehicle’s Passive Entry RKE transmitters
within 5 ft (1.5 m) of the driver or passenger front door
handles, press the door handle LOCK button to lock all
four doors.
Do NOT Grab The Handle When Locking
Press The Door Handle Button To Lock

NOTE: WINDOWS
• After pressing the door handle LOCK button, you Power Windows
must wait two seconds before you can lock or unlock The window controls on the driver’s door control all the 2
the doors, using either Passive Entry door handle. This door windows.
is done to allow you to check if the vehicle is locked by
pulling the door handle, without the vehicle reacting
and unlocking.
• The Passive Entry system will not operate if the RKE
transmitter battery is dead.
The vehicle doors can also be locked by using the RKE
transmitter lock button or the lock button located on the
vehicle’s interior door panel.
Power Window Switches

There are single window controls on each passenger door
trim panel, which operate the passenger door windows.
The window controls will operate only when the ignition ignition of a vehicle equipped with Keyless Enter-N-
is in the ACC or ON/RUN position. Go™ in the ACC or ON/RUN mode. Occupants,
particularly unattended children, can become en-
NOTE: For vehicles equipped with the Uconnect®, the trapped by the windows while operating the power
power window switches will remain active for up to 10 window switches. Such entrapment may result in
minutes after the ignition is cycled to the OFF position. serious injury or death.
Opening either front door will cancel this feature. The
time is programmable. Refer to “Uconnect® Settings” in AUTO-Down Feature
“Understanding Your Instrument Panel” for further in-
The driver door power window switch and some model
formation.
passenger door power window switches have an AUTO-
down feature. Press the window switch to the second
WARNING! detent, release, and the window will go down automati-
Never leave children unattended in a vehicle, and do cally.
not let children play with power windows. Do not To open the window part way, press the window switch
leave the Key Fob in or near the vehicle, or in a to the first detent and release it when you want the
location accessible to children, and do not leave the window to stop.
(Continued)
To stop the window from going all the way down during • Any impact due to rough road conditions may trigger
the AUTO-down operation, pull up on the switch briefly. the auto-reverse function unexpectedly during auto-
closure. If this happens, pull the switch lightly to the
AUTO-Up Feature With Anti-Pinch Protection 2
first detent and hold to close the window manually.
Lift the window switch to the second detent, release, and
the window will go up automatically. WARNING!
To stop the window from going all the way up during the There is no anti-pinch protection when the window
AUTO operation, push down on the switch briefly. is almost closed. Be sure to clear all objects from the
To close the window part way, lift the window switch to window before closing.
the first detent and release it when you want the window
Reset Auto-Up
to stop.
Should the Auto Up feature stop working, the window
NOTE:
may need to be reset. To reset Auto Up:
• If the window runs into any obstacle during auto-
1. Make sure the door is fully closed.
closure, it will reverse direction and then go back
down. Remove the obstacle and use the window 2. Pull the window switch up to close the window
switch again to close the window. completely and continue to hold the switch up for an
additional two seconds after the window is closed.
3. Push the window switch down firmly to the second
detent to open the window completely and continue
to hold the switch down for an additional two seconds
after the window is fully open.
Window Lockout Switch
The window lockout switch on the driver’s door trim
panel allows you to disable the window controls on the
rear passenger doors. To disable the window controls,
press and release the window lockout button (setting it in
the DOWN position). To enable the window controls,
press and release the window lockout button again
(setting it in the UP position). Window Lockout Switch
Wind Buffeting NOTE: The transmission must be in PARK before the
button will operate.
Wind buffeting can be described as the perception of
pressure on the ears or a helicopter-type sound in the 2
ears. Your vehicle may exhibit wind buffeting with the The trunk lid can be released from
windows down, or the sunroof (if equipped) in certain outside the vehicle by pressing the
open or partially open positions. This is a normal occur- TRUNK button on the Remote
rence and can be minimized. If the buffeting occurs with Keyless Entry (RKE) transmitter
the rear windows open, then open the front and rear twice within five seconds.
windows together to minimize the buffeting. If the
buffeting occurs with the sunroof open, adjust the sun-
roof opening to minimize the buffeting.
Trunk Release
TRUNK LOCK AND RELEASE Button
The trunk lid can be released from inside the vehicle by With the ignition in the ON/RUN position, the Trunk
pressing the TRUNK RELEASE button located on the Open symbol will display in the instrument cluster
instrument panel to the left of the steering wheel. indicating that the trunk is open. The odometer display
will reappear once the trunk is closed.
With the ignition in the OFF position or the key removed Trunk Emergency Release
from the ignition switch, the Trunk Open symbol will As a security measure, a Trunk Internal Emergency Release
display until the trunk is closed. lever is built into the trunk latching mechanism. In the event
Refer to “Keyless Enter-N-Go™” in “Things To Know of an individual being locked inside the trunk, the trunk can
Before Starting Your Vehicle” for more information on be simply opened by pulling on the glow-in-the-dark handle
trunk operation with the Passive Entry feature. attached to the trunk latching mechanism.
TRUNK SAFETY WARNING
WARNING!
Do not allow children to have access to the trunk,
either by climbing into the trunk from outside, or
through the inside of the vehicle. Always close the
trunk lid when your vehicle is unattended. Once in
the trunk, young children may not be able to escape,
even if they entered through the rear seat. If trapped
in the trunk, children can die from suffocation or
heat stroke. Trunk Emergency Internal Release
OCCUPANT RESTRAINTS • Front seat belts incorporate pretensioners that may
Some of the most important safety features in your enhance occupant protection by managing occupant
vehicle are the restraint systems: energy during an impact event 2
• All seat belt systems (except the driver’s) include
• Three-point lap and shoulder belts for the driver and
all passengers Automatic Locking Retractors (ALRs), which lock the
seat belt webbing into position by extending the belt
• Advanced Front Air Bags for driver and front passen- all the way out and then adjusting the belt to the
ger desired length to restrain a child seat or secure a large
• Supplemental Driver Side Knee Air Bag item in a seat — if equipped
• Supplemental Side Air Bag Inflatable Curtains (SABIC) Please pay close attention to the information in this
for the driver and passengers seated next to a window section. It tells you how to use your restraint system
properly, to keep you and your passengers as safe as
• Supplemental Seat-Mounted Side Air Bags (SAB) possible.
• An energy-absorbing steering column and steering If you will be carrying children too small for adult-sized
wheel seat belts, the seat belts or the Lower Anchors and Tether
for CHildren (LATCH) feature also can be used to hold
• Knee bolsters/blockers for front seat occupants
infant and child restraint systems. For more information
on LATCH, refer to Child Restraints under “Things To
WARNING!
Know Before Starting Your Vehicle” for further informa-
tion. • Never place a rear facing infant seat in front of an
air bag. A deploying Passenger Advanced Front Air
NOTE: The Advanced Front Air Bags have a multistage
Bag can cause death or serious injury to a child 12
inflator design. This allows the air bag to have different
years or younger, including a child in a rearward
rates of inflation based on several factors, including the
facing infant seat.
severity and type of collision.
• Only use a rearward-facing child restraint in a
Here are some simple steps you can take to minimize the vehicle with a rear seat.
risk of harm from a deploying air bag:
Children that are not big enough to wear the vehicle seat
1. Children 12 years old and under should always ride belt properly (see section on Child Restraints) should be
buckled up in a rear seat. secured in the rear seat in child restraints or belt-
positioning booster seats. Older children who do not use
child restraints or belt-positioning booster seats should
ride properly buckled up in the rear seat. Never allow
children to slide the shoulder belt behind them or under
their arm.
If a child from 2 to 12 years old (not in a rear facing child 5. If the air bag system in this vehicle needs to be
seat) must ride in the front passenger seat, move the seat modified to accommodate a disabled person, contact
as far back as possible and use the proper child restraint. the Customer Center. Phone numbers are provided 2
(refer to Child Restraints under “Things To Know Before under ⴖIf You Need Assistanceⴖ.
Starting Your Vehicle” for further information)
You should read the instructions provided with your WARNING!
child restraint to make sure that you are using it properly. • Relying on the air bags alone could lead to more
2. All occupants should always wear their lap and severe injuries in a collision. The air bags work
shoulder belts properly. with your seat belt to restrain you properly. In
some collisions, the air bags won’t deploy at all.
3. The driver and front passenger seats should be Always wear your seat belts even though you have
moved back as far as practical to allow the Advanced air bags.
Front Air Bags room to inflate. • Being too close to the steering wheel or instrument
panel during Advanced Front Air Bag deployment
4. Do not lean against the door or window. If your could cause serious injury, including death. Air
vehicle has side air bags, and deployment occurs, the bags need room to inflate. Sit back, comfortably
side air bags will inflate forcefully into the space extending your arms to reach the steering wheel or
between you and the door. instrument panel.
(Continued)
Buckle up even though you are an excellent driver, even
on short trips. Someone on the road may be a poor driver
• Supplemental Side Air Bag Inflatable Curtain and cause a collision that includes you. This can happen
(SABIC) and Seat-Mounted Side Air Bags (SAB) far away from home or on your own street.
also need room to inflate. Do not lean against the
door or window. Sit upright in the center of the Research has shown that seat belts save lives, and they
seat. can reduce the seriousness of injuries in a collision. Some
• In a collision, you and your passengers can suffer of the worst injuries happen when people are thrown
much greater injuries if you are not properly buck- from the vehicle. Seat belts reduce the possibility of
led up. You can strike the interior of your vehicle or ejection and the risk of injury caused by striking the
other passengers, or you can be thrown out of the inside of the vehicle. Everyone in a motor vehicle should
vehicle. Always be sure you and others in your be belted at all times.
vehicle are buckled up properly. Lap/Shoulder Belts
• Being too close to the Supplemental Side Air Bag
Inflatable Curtain (SABIC) and/or Seat-Mounted All seating positions in your vehicle are equipped with
Side Air Bag (SAB) during deployment could cause lap/shoulder belts.
you to be severely injured or killed. The belt webbing retractor is designed to lock during
very sudden stops or impacts. This feature allows the
shoulder part of the belt to move freely with you under
normal conditions. However, in an collision, the belt will
lock and reduce your risk of striking the inside of the
vehicle or being thrown out.
• Wearing your belt in the wrong place could make
your injuries in a collision much worse. You might 2
WARNING!
suffer internal injuries, or you could even slide out
• Do not allow people to ride in any area of your of part of the belt. Follow these instructions to wear
vehicle that is not equipped with seats and seat your seat belt safely and to keep your passengers
belts. safe, too.
• Be sure everyone in your vehicle is in a seat and • Two people should never be belted into a single
using a seat belt properly. seat belt. People belted together can crash into one
• Wearing a seat belt incorrectly is dangerous. Seat another in a collision, hurting one another badly.
belts are designed to go around the large bones of Never use a lap/shoulder belt or a lap belt for more
your body. These are the strongest parts of your than one person, no matter what their size.
body and can take the forces of a collision best.
(Continued)
Lap/Shoulder Belt Operating Instructions
1. Enter the vehicle and close the door. Sit back and
adjust the front seat.
2. The seat belt latch plate is above the back of your seat.
Grasp the latch plate and pull out the belt. Slide the
latch plate up the webbing as far as necessary to make
the belt go around your lap.
Pulling Out The Lap/Shoulder Belt Latch Plate

3. When the belt is long enough to fit, insert the latch
plate into the buckle until you hear a “click.”
WARNING!
• A belt that is buckled into the wrong buckle will 2
not protect you properly. The lap portion could ride
too high on your body, possibly causing internal
injuries. Always buckle your belt into the buckle
nearest you.
• A belt that is too loose will not protect you prop-
erly. In a sudden stop, you could move too far
forward, increasing the possibility of injury. Wear
your seat belt snugly.
Inserting Latch Plate Into Buckle (Continued)

4. Position the lap belt across your thighs, below your
abdomen. To remove slack in the lap belt portion, pull
• A belt that is worn under your arm is dangerous. up a bit on the shoulder belt. To loosen the lap belt if
Your body could strike the inside surfaces of the it is too tight, tilt the latch plate and pull on the lap
vehicle in a collision, increasing head and neck belt. A snug belt reduces the risk of sliding under the
injury. A belt worn under the arm can cause inter- belt in a collision.
nal injuries. Ribs aren’t as strong as shoulder
bones. Wear the belt over your shoulder so that
your strongest bones will take the force in a colli-
sion.
• A shoulder belt placed behind you will not protect
you from injury during a collision. You are more
likely to hit your head in a collision if you do not
wear your shoulder belt. The lap and shoulder belt
are meant to be used together.
Removing Slack From Belt

6. To release the belt, push the red button on the buckle.
WARNING!
The belt will automatically retract to its stowed posi-
• A lap belt worn too high can increase the risk of tion. If necessary, slide the latch plate down the 2
internal injury in a collision. The belt forces won’t webbing to allow the belt to retract fully.
be at the strong hip and pelvic bones, but across
your abdomen. Always wear the lap belt as low as WARNING!
possible and keep it snug.
• A twisted belt may not protect you properly. In a A frayed or torn belt could rip apart in a collision and
collision, it could even cut into you. Be sure the belt leave you with no protection. Inspect the belt system
is straight. If you can’t straighten a belt in your periodically, checking for cuts, frays, or loose parts.
vehicle, take it to your authorized dealer immedi- Damaged parts must be replaced immediately. Do
ately and have it fixed. not disassemble or modify the system. Seat belt
assemblies must be replaced after a collision if they
5. Position the shoulder belt on your chest so that it is have been damaged (bent retractor, torn webbing,
comfortable and not resting on your neck. The retrac- etc.).
tor will withdraw any slack in the belt.
Adjustable Upper Shoulder Belt Anchorage As a guide, if you are shorter than average you will
In the driver and front passenger seats, the shoulder beltprefer a lower position, and if you are taller than average
can be adjusted upward or downward to position the belt you will prefer a higher position. When you release the
anchorage try to move it up and down to make sure that
away from your neck. Push and fully depress the button
above the webbing to release the anchorage, then move it it is locked in position.
up or down to the position that fits you best. In the rear seat, move toward the center of the seat to
position the belt away from your neck.
Lap/Shoulder Belt Untwisting Procedure
Use the following procedure to untwist a twisted lap/
shoulder belt.
1. Position the latch plate as close as possible to the
anchor point.
2. At about 6 to 12 in (15 to 30 cm) above the latch plate,
grasp and twist the belt webbing 180 degrees to create
a fold that begins immediately above the latch plate.
Adjusting Upper Shoulder Belt

3. Slide the latch plate upward over the folded webbing. Driver Center Passenger
The folded webbing must enter the slot at the top of
First Row N/A N/A ALR
the latch plate. 2
Second ALR ALR ALR
4. Continue to slide the latch plate up until it clears the Row
folded webbing.
• N/A — Not Applicable
Seat Belts In Passenger Seating Positions
• ALR — Automatic Locking Retractor
The seat belts in the passenger seating positions are
equipped with Automatic Locking Retractors (ALR) If the passenger seating position is equipped with an
which are used to secure a child restraint system. For ALR and is being used for normal usage:
additional information, refer to Child Restraints under Only pull the belt webbing out far enough to comfortably
“Things To Know Before Starting Your Vehicle” for wrap around the occupant’s mid-section so as to not
further information. The chart below defines the type of activate the ALR. If the ALR is activated, you will hear a
feature for each seating position. ratcheting sound as the belt retracts. Allow the webbing
to retract completely in this case and then carefully pull
out only the amount of webbing necessary to comfort-
ably wrap around the occupant’s mid-section. Slide the
latch plate into the buckle until you hear a ⬙click⬙.
Automatic Locking Retractor Mode (ALR) — If 3. Allow the belt to retract. As the belt retracts, you will
Equipped hear a clicking sound. This indicates the safety belt is
now in the Automatic Locking Mode.
In this mode, the shoulder belt is automatically pre-
locked. The belt will still retract to remove any slack in How To Disengage The Automatic Locking Mode
the shoulder belt. The Automatic Locking Mode is avail-
Unbuckle the combination lap/shoulder belt and allow it
able on all passenger-seating positions with a combina-
to retract completely to disengage the Automatic Locking
tion lap/shoulder belt. Use the Automatic Locking Mode
Mode and activate the vehicle sensitive (emergency)
anytime a child safety seat is installed in a seating
locking mode.
position that has a belt with this feature. Children 12
years old and under should always be properly re-
strained in a vehicle with a rear seat.
WARNING!
How To Engage The Automatic Locking Mode • The belt and retractor assembly must be replaced if
the seat belt assembly Automatic Locking Retractor
1. Buckle the combination lap and shoulder belt. (ALR) feature or any other seat belt function is not
2. Grasp the shoulder portion and pull downward until working properly when checked according to the
the entire belt is extracted. procedures in the Service Manual.
• Failure to replace the belt and retractor assembly
could increase the risk of injury in collisions.
Energy Management Feature NOTE: These devices are not a substitute for proper seat
belt placement by the occupant. The seat belt still must be
This vehicle has a safety belt system with an Energy
worn snugly and positioned properly.
Management feature in the front seating positions to help 2
further reduce the risk of injury in the event of a head-on The pretensioners are triggered by the Occupant Re-
collision. straint Controller (ORC). Like the air bags, the preten-
sioners are single use items. A deployed pretensioner or
This safety belt system has a retractor assembly that is
a deployed air bag must be replaced immediately.
designed to release webbing in a controlled manner. This
feature is designed to help reduce the belt force acting on Enhanced Seat Belt Use Reminder System
the occupant’s chest. (BeltAlert®)
Seat Belt Pretensioners BeltAlert® is a feature intended to remind the driver and
The seat belts for both front seating positions are front passenger (if equipped with front passenger
equipped with pretensioning devices that are designed to BeltAlert®) to fasten their seat belts. The feature is active
remove slack from the seat belt in the event of a collision. whenever the ignition is on. If the driver or front seat
These devices may improve the performance of the seat passenger is unbelted, the Seat Belt Reminder Light will
belt by assuring that the belt is tight about the occupant turn on and remain on until both front seat belts are
early in a collision. Pretensioners work for all size occu- fastened.
pants, including those in child restraints.
The BeltAlert® warning sequence begins after the vehicle the rear seat (if equipped) in pet harnesses or pet carriers
speed is over 5 mph (8 km/h), by blinking the Seat Belt that are secured by seat belts, and cargo is properly
Reminder Light and sounding an intermittent chime. stowed.
Once the sequence starts, it will continue for the entire BeltAlert® can be enabled or disabled by your autho-
duration or until the respective seatbelts are fastened. rized dealer. Chrysler Group LLC does not recommend
After the sequence completes, the Seat Belt Reminder deactivating BeltAlert®.
Light remains illuminated until the respective seat belts
are fastened. The driver should instruct all other occu- NOTE: Although BeltAlert® has been deactivated, the
pants to fasten their seat belts. If a front seat belt is Seat Belt Reminder Light will continue to illuminate
unbuckled while traveling at speeds greater than 5 mph while the driver’s or front passenger (if equipped with
(8 km/h), BeltAlert® will provide both audio and visual BeltAlert®) seat belt remains unfastened.
notification. Seat Belts And Pregnant Women
The front passenger seat BeltAlert® is not active when We recommend that pregnant women use the seat belts
the front passenger seat is unoccupied. BeltAlert® may throughout their pregnancy. Keeping the mother safe is
be triggered when an animal or heavy object is on the the best way to keep the baby safe.
front passenger seat or when the seat is folded flat (if
equipped). It is recommended that pets be restrained in Pregnant women should wear the lap part of the belt
across the thighs and as snug across the hips as possible.
Keep the belt low so that it does not come across the
abdomen. That way the strong bones of the hips will take
the force if there is a collision. low and snug and in the recommended seating posi-
tions. Remove and store the extender when not 2
Seat Belt Extender needed.
If a seat belt is too short even when fully extended and
when the adjustable upper shoulder belt anchorage (if Supplemental Restraint System (SRS) — Air Bags
equipped) is in its lowest position, your authorized This vehicle has Advanced Front Air Bags for both the
dealer can provide you with a seat belt extender. This driver and front passenger as a supplement to the seat
extender should be used only if the existing belt is not belt restraint systems. The driver’s Advanced Front Air
long enough. When it is not required, remove the ex- Bag is mounted in the center of the steering wheel. The
tender and store it. passenger’s Advanced Front Air Bag is mounted in the
instrument panel, above the glove compartment. The
WARNING! words SRS AIRBAG are embossed on the air bag covers.
In addition, the vehicle is equipped with a Supplemental
Using a seat belt extender when not needed can Driver Side Knee Air Bag mounted in the instrument
increase the risk of injury in a collision. Only use panel below the steering column.
when the seat belt is not long enough when it is worn
(Continued)
NOTE: The Driver and Front Passenger Advanced Front
Air Bags are certified to the new Federal regulations for
Advanced Air Bags.
The Advanced Front Air Bags have a multistage inflator
design. This allows the air bag to have different rates of
inflation based on several factors, including the severity
and type of collision.
This vehicle may be equipped with driver and/or front
passenger seat track position sensors that may adjust the
inflation rate of the Advanced Front Air Bags based upon
seat position.
Advanced Front Air Bag And Knee Bolster Locations
This vehicle may be equipped with a driver and/or front
1 — Driver And Passenger Ad- 3 — Supplemental Driver Side passenger seat belt buckle switch that detects whether
vanced Front Air Bags Knee Air Bag/Knee Bolster the driver or front passenger seat belt is fastened. The
2 — Knee Bolster
seat belt buckle switch may adjust the inflation rate of the
Advanced Front Air Bags.
This vehicle is equipped with Supplemental Side Air Bag
Inflatable Curtains (SABIC) to protect the driver, front,
and rear passengers sitting next to a window. The SABIC • Air Bag Warning Light
air bags are located above the side windows and their
• Steering Wheel and Column
covers are labeled: SRS AIRBAG. 2
• Instrument Panel
This vehicle is equipped with Supplemental Seat-
Mounted Side Air Bags (SAB) to provide enhanced • Supplemental Driver Side Knee Air Bag
protection for an occupant during a side impact. The
• Knee Impact Bolsters
SABs are located in the outboard side of the front seats.
• Driver Advanced Front Air Bag
NOTE:
• Passenger Advanced Front Air Bag
• Air Bag covers may not be obvious in the interior trim,
but they will open during air bag deployment. • Supplemental Seat-Mounted Side Air Bags (SAB)
• After any collision, the vehicle should be taken to an • Supplemental Side Air Bag Inflatable Curtains (SABIC)
authorized dealer immediately.
• Front and Side Impact Sensors
Air Bag System Components
• Front Seat Belt Pretensioners, Seat Belt Buckle Switch,
Your vehicle may be equipped with the following air bag and Seat Track Position Sensors
system components:
• Occupant Restraint Controller (ORC)
Advanced Front Air Bag Features
The Advanced Front Air Bag system has multistage collision severe enough to cause the air bag to
driver and front passenger air bags. This system provides inflate.
output appropriate to the severity and type of collision as • Do not put anything on or around the air bag
determined by the Occupant Restraint Controller (ORC), covers or attempt to open them manually. You may
which may receive information from the front impact damage the air bags and you could be injured
sensors. because the air bags may no longer be functional.
The first stage inflator is triggered immediately during an The protective covers for the air bag cushions are
impact that requires air bag deployment. This low output designed to open only when the air bags are
is used in less severe collisions. A higher energy output is inflating.
used for more severe collisions. • Do not drill, cut or tamper with the knee bolster in
any way.
WARNING! • Do not mount any accessories to the knee bolster
such as alarm lights, stereos, citizen band radios,
• No objects should be placed over or near the air etc.
bag on the instrument panel, because any such
objects could cause harm if the vehicle is in a
(Continued)
Supplemental Seat-Mounted Side Air Bags (SAB) When the air bag deploys, it opens the seam between the
Supplemental Seat-Mounted Side Air Bags (SAB) may front and side of the seat’s trim cover. Each air bag
provide enhanced protection to help protect an occupant deploys independently; a left side impact deploys the left 2
air bag only and a right-side impact deploys the right air
during a side impact. The SAB is marked with an air bag
label sewn into the outboard side of the front seats. bag only.
Supplemental Side Air Bag Inflatable Curtain
(SABIC)
SABIC air bags may offer side-impact protection to front
and rear seat outboard occupants in addition to that
provided by the body structure. Each air bag features
inflated chambers placed adjacent to the head of each
outboard occupant that reduce the potential for side-
impact head injuries. The curtains deploy downward,
covering both windows on the impact side.
Supplemental Seat-Mounted Side Air Bag Label

• Being too close to the SAB and SABIC air bags during
deployment could cause you to be severely injured or
killed.
The system includes side impact sensors that are cali-
brated to deploy the SAB and SABIC air bags during
impacts that require air bag occupant protection.
WARNING!
• Your vehicle is equipped with left and right
Supplemental Side Air Bag Inflatable Curtain
(SABIC), do not stack luggage or other cargo up
high enough to block the location of the SABIC.
Supplemental Side Air Bag Inflatable Curtains (SABIC)
The area where the SABIC is located should remain
NOTE: free from any obstructions.
• Air Bag covers may not be obvious in the interior trim, • Do not use accessory seat covers or place objects
but they will open during air bag deployment. between you and the side air bags; the performance
could be adversely affected and/or objects could be
pushed into you, causing serious injury.
(Continued)
Always sit upright as possible with your back against the
seat back, use the seat belts properly, and use the
• Your vehicle is equipped with SABIC air bags, do appropriate sized child restraint, infant restraint or
not have any accessory items installed which will 2
booster seat recommended for the size and weight of the
alter the roof, including adding a sunroof to your child.
vehicle. Do not add roof racks that require perma-
nent attachments (bolts or screws) for installation Supplemental Driver Side Knee Air Bag
on the vehicle roof. Do not drill into the roof of the The Supplemental Driver Side Knee Air Bag provides
vehicle for any reason. enhanced protection and works together with the Driver
• Do not allow occupants to extend any part of their Advanced Front Air Bag during a frontal impact.
body outside of the window.
Knee Impact Bolsters
SAB and SABIC air bags are a supplement to the seat belt The Knee Impact Bolsters help protect the knees of the
restraint system. Occupants, including children who are driver and front passenger, and position the front occu-
up against or very close to SAB or SABIC air bags can be pants for the best interaction with the Advanced Front
seriously injured or killed. Occupants, especially chil- Air Bags.
dren, should not lean on or sleep against the door, side
windows, or area where the SAB or SABIC air bags Along with seat belts and pretensioners, Advanced Front
inflate, even if they are in an infant or child restraint. Air Bags work with the knee impact bolsters to provide
improved protection for the driver and front passenger.
Air Bag Deployment Sensors And Controls and Supplemental Driver Side Knee Air Bag are not
expected to reduce the risk of injury in rear, side, or
Occupant Restraint Controller (ORC)
rollover collisions.
The ORC is part of a Federally regulated safety system
The Advanced Front Air Bags and Supplemental Driver
required for this vehicle.
Side Knee Air Bag will not deploy in all frontal collisions,
The ORC determines if deployment of the front and/or including some that may produce substantial vehicle
side air bags in a frontal or side collision is required. damage — for example, some pole collisions, truck
Based on the impact sensor’s signals, a central electronic underrides, and angle offset collisions. On the other
ORC deploys the Advanced Front Air Bags, SABIC air hand, depending on the type and location of impact,
bags, SAB, Supplemental Driver Side Knee Air Bag, and Advanced Front Air Bags and Supplemental Driver Side
front seat belt pretensioners, as required, depending on Knee Air Bag may deploy in crashes with little vehicle
several factors, including the severity and type of impact. front-end damage but that produce a severe initial decel-
eration.
Advanced Front Air Bags and Supplemental Driver Side
Knee Air Bag are designed to provide additional protec- The side air bags will not deploy in all side collisions.
tion by supplementing the seat belts in certain frontal Side air bag deployment will depend on the severity and
collisions depending on several factors, including the type of collision.
severity and type of collision. Advanced Front Air Bags
Because air bag sensors measure vehicle deceleration The ORC contains a backup power supply system that
over time, vehicle speed and damage by themselves are may deploy the air bags even if the battery loses power or
not good indicators of whether or not an air bag should it becomes disconnected prior to deployment. 2
have deployed.
Also, the ORC turns on the Air Bag Warning
Seat belts are necessary for your protection in all colli- Light in the instrument panel for approxi-
sions, and also are needed to help keep you in position, mately four to eight seconds for a self-check
away from an inflating air bag. when the ignition is first turned on. After the
self-check, the Air Bag Warning Light will turn off. If the
The ORC monitors the readiness of the electronic parts of
ORC detects a malfunction in any part of the system, it
the air bag system whenever the ignition is in the
turns on the Air Bag Warning Light, either momentarily
ON/RUN position. If the key is in the OFF position, or in
or continuously. A single chime will sound if the light
the ACC position, the air bag system is not on and the air
comes on again after initial startup.
bags will not inflate.
It also includes diagnostics that will illuminate the instru-
ment cluster Air Bag Warning Light if a malfunction is
noted that could affect the air bag system. The diagnos-
tics also record the nature of the malfunction.
are possible, based on several factors, including the
WARNING!
collision type and severity. The steering wheel hub trim
Ignoring the Air Bag Warning Light in your instru- cover and the upper right side of the instrument panel
ment panel could mean you won’t have the air bags separate and fold out of the way as the air bags inflate to
to protect you in a collision. If the light does not come their full size. The air bags fully inflate in about 50 to 70
on as a bulb check when the ignition is first turned milliseconds. This is about half of the time it takes to
on, stays on after you start the vehicle, or if it comes blink your eyes. The air bags then quickly deflate while
on as you drive, have an authorized dealer service the helping to restrain the driver and front passenger.
air bag system immediately.
The Advanced Front Air Bag gas is vented through the
Driver And Passenger Advanced Front Air Bag vent holes in the sides of the air bag. In this way, the air
Inflator Units bags do not interfere with your control of the vehicle.
The Driver and Passenger Advanced Front Air Bag Supplemental Driver Side Knee Air Bag Inflator
Inflator Units are located in the center of the steering Unit
wheel and on the right side of the instrument panel. The Supplemental Driver Side Knee Air Bag unit is
When the ORC detects a collision requiring the Ad- located in the instrument panel trim beneath the steering
vanced Front Air Bags, it signals the inflator units. A large column. When the ORC detects a collision requiring the
quantity of non-toxic gas is generated to inflate the Advanced Front Air Bags, it signals the inflator units. A
Advanced Front Air Bags. Different air bag inflation rates large quantity of non-toxic gas is generated to inflate the
Supplemental Driver Side Knee Air Bag. The trim cover at a very high speed and with such a high force that it
separates and folds out of the way allowing the air bag to could injure you if you are not seated properly, or if items
inflate to the full size. The air bag fully inflates in about are positioned in the area where the side air bag inflates.
2
15 to 20 milliseconds. This especially applies to children.
Supplemental Seat-Mounted Side Air Bag (SAB) Supplemental Side Air Bag Inflatable Curtain
Inflator Units (SABIC) Inflator Units
The Supplemental Seat-Mounted Side Air Bags (SAB) are During collisions where the impact is confined to a
designed to activate only in certain side collisions. particular area of the side of the vehicle, the ORC may
deploy the SABIC air bags, depending on the severity
The ORC determines if a side collision requires the side
and type of collision. In these events, the ORC will
air bags to inflate, based on the severity and type of
deploy the SABIC only on the impact side of the vehicle.
collision.
A quantity of non-toxic gas is generated to inflate the side
Based on the severity and type of collision, the side air
curtain air bag. The inflating side curtain air bag pushes
bag inflator on the crash side of the vehicle may be
the outside edge of the headliner out of the way and
triggered, releasing a large quantity of non-toxic gas. The
covers the window. The air bag inflates in about 30
inflating SAB exits through the seat seam into the space
milliseconds (about one-quarter of the time that it takes
between the occupant and the door. The SAB fully
to blink your eyes) with enough force to injure you if you
inflates in about 10 milliseconds. The side air bag moves
are not belted and seated properly, or if items are
positioned in the area where the side curtain air bag event the ORC will determine whether to have the
inflates. This especially applies to children. The side Enhanced Accident Response System perform the follow-
curtain air bag is only about 3-1/2 in (9 cm) thick when ing functions:
it is inflated.
• Cut off fuel to the engine.
Because air bag sensors estimate deceleration over time,
• Flash hazard lights as long as the battery has power or
vehicle speed and damage are not good indicators of
until the ignition is cycled off.
whether or not an air bag should have deployed.
• Turn on the interior lights, which remain on as long as
Front And Side Impact Sensors
the battery has power or until the ignition key is
In front and side impacts, impact sensors can aid the removed.
ORC in determining appropriate response to impact
• Unlock the doors automatically.
events.
In order to reset the Enhanced Accident Response System
Enhanced Accident Response System
functions after an event, the ignition switch must be
In the event of an impact causing air bag deployment, if changed from IGN ON to IGN OFF.
the communication network remains intact, and the
power remains intact, depending on the nature of the If A Deployment Occurs
The Advanced Front Air Bags are designed to deflate
immediately after deployment.
NOTE: Front and/or side air bags will not deploy in all bag inflation. These airborne particles may irritate the
collisions. This does not mean something is wrong with skin, eyes, nose, or throat. If you have skin or eye
the air bag system. irritation, rinse the area with cool water. For nose or 2
throat irritation, move to fresh air. If the irritation
If you do have a collision which deploys the air bags, any
continues, see your doctor. If these particles settle on
or all of the following may occur:
your clothing, follow the garment manufacturer’s in-
• The nylon air bag material may sometimes cause structions for cleaning.
abrasions and/or skin reddening to the driver and
Do not drive your vehicle after the air bags have de-
front passenger as the air bags deploy and unfold. The
ployed. If you are involved in another collision, the air
abrasions are similar to friction rope burns or those
bags will not be in place to protect you.
you might get sliding along a carpet or gymnasium
floor. They are not caused by contact with chemicals.
They are not permanent and normally heal quickly.
WARNING!
However, if you haven’t healed significantly within a Deployed air bags and seat belt pretensioners cannot
few days, or if you have any blistering, see your doctor protect you in another collision. Have the air bags,
immediately. seat belt pretensioners, and the front seat belt retrac-
• As the air bags deflate, you may see some smoke-like tor assemblies replaced by an authorized dealer im-
particles. The particles are a normal by-product of the mediately. Also, have the Occupant Restraint Con-
process that generates the non-toxic gas used for air troller (ORC) system serviced as well.
Maintaining Your Air Bag System
WARNING! not function properly if modifications are made.
Take your vehicle to an authorized dealer for any
• Modifications to any part of the air bag system air bag system service. If your seat, including your
could cause it to fail when you need it. You could trim cover and cushion, needs to be serviced in any
be injured if the air bag system is not there to way (including removal or loosening/tightening of
protect you. Do not modify the components or seat attachment bolts), take the vehicle to your
wiring, including adding any kind of badges or authorized dealer. Only manufacturer approved
stickers to the steering wheel hub trim cover or the seat accessories may be used. If it is necessary to
upper right side of the instrument panel. Do not modify the air bag system for persons with dis-
modify the front bumper, vehicle body structure, or abilities, contact your authorized dealer.
add aftermarket side steps or running boards.
• It is dangerous to try to repair any part of the air Air Bag Warning Light
bag system yourself. Be sure to tell anyone who
works on your vehicle that it has an air bag system. You will want to have the air bags ready to
• Do not attempt to modify any part of your air bag inflate for your protection in a collision. The
system. The air bag may inflate accidentally or may Air Bag Warning Light monitors the internal
circuits and interconnecting wiring associated
(Continued)
with air bag system electrical components. While the air Event Data Recorder (EDR)
bag system is designed to be maintenance free. If any of This vehicle is equipped with an event data recorder
the following occurs, have an authorized dealer service (EDR). The main purpose of an EDR is to record, in 2
the air bag system immediately. certain crash or near crash-like situations, such as an air
• The Air Bag Warning Light does not come on during bag deployment or hitting a road obstacle, data that will
the four to eight seconds when the ignition is first assist in understanding how a vehicle’s systems per-
cycled to the ON/RUN. formed. The EDR is designed to record data related to
vehicle dynamics and safety systems for a short period of
• The Air Bag Warning Light remains on after the four to time, typically 30 seconds or less. The EDR in this vehicle
eight-second interval. is designed to record such data as:
• The Air Bag Warning Light comes on intermittently or • How various systems in your vehicle were operating;
remains on while driving.
• Whether or not the driver and passenger safety belts
NOTE: If the speedometer, tachometer, or any engine were buckled/fastened;
related gauges are not working, the Occupant Restraint
Controller (ORC) may also be disabled. The air bags may • How far (if at all) the driver was depressing the
not be ready to inflate for your protection. Promptly accelerator and/or brake pedal; and,
check the fuse block for blown fuses. Refer to “Fuses” in
“Maintaining Your Vehicle” for the proper air bag fuses. • How fast the vehicle was traveling.
See your authorized dealer if the fuse is good.
These data can help provide a better understanding of Child Restraints
the circumstances in which crashes and injuries occur. Everyone in your vehicle needs to be buckled up at all
NOTE: EDR data are recorded by your vehicle only if a times, including babies and children. Every state in the
non-trivial crash situation occurs; no data are recorded by United States, and every Canadian province, requires
the EDR under normal driving conditions and no per- that small children ride in proper restraint systems. This
sonal data (e.g., name, gender, age, and crash location) is the law, and you can be prosecuted for ignoring it.
are recorded. However, other parties, such as law en- Children 12 years or younger should ride properly
forcement, could combine the EDR data with the type of buckled up in a rear seat, if available. According to crash
personally identifying data routinely acquired during a statistics, children are safer when properly restrained in
crash investigation. the rear seats rather than in the front.
To read data recorded by an EDR, special equipment is There are different sizes and types of restraints for
required, and access to the vehicle or the EDR is needed. children from newborn size to the child almost large
In addition to the vehicle manufacturer, other parties, enough for an adult safety belt. Always check the child
such as law enforcement, that have the special equip- seat Owner’s Manual to make sure you have the correct
ment, can read the information if they have access to the seat for your child. Carefully read and follow all the
vehicle or the EDR. instructions and warnings in the child restraint Owner’s
Manual and on all the labels attached to the car seat.
Before buying any restraint system, make sure that it has
WARNING!
a label certifying that it meets all applicable Safety
Standards. You should also make sure that you can install In a collision, an unrestrained child can become a 2
it in the vehicle where you will use it. projectile inside the vehicle. The force required to
hold even an infant on your lap could become so
NOTE:
great that you could not hold the child, no matter
• For additional information, refer to how strong you are. The child and others could be
www.seatcheck.org or call 1–866–SEATCHECK. Cana- badly injured. Any child riding in your vehicle
dian residents should refer to Transport Canada’s should be in a proper restraint for the child’s size.
website for additional information:
• http://www.tc.gc.ca/eng/roadsafety/safedrivers-
childsafety-index-53.htm
Summary Of Recommendations For Restraining Children In Vehicles
Child Size, Height, Weight Or Age Recommended Type Of Child Restraint

Infants and Children who are two years old or Either an Infant Carrier or a Convertible
Toddlers younger and who have not reached the Child Restraint, facing rearward in the rear
height or weight limits of their child re- seat of the vehicle
straint
Small Children Children who are at least two years old or Forward-Facing Child Restraint with a
who have out-grown the height or weight five-point Harness, facing forward in the
limit of their rear-facing child restraint rear seat of the vehicle
Larger Children Children who have out-grown their Belt Positioning Booster Seat and the ve-
forward-facing child restraint, but are too hicle seat belt, seated in the rear seat of the
small to properly fit the vehicle’s seat belt vehicle
Children Too Large Children 12 years old or younger, who Vehicle Seat Belt, seated in the rear seat of
for Child Restraints have out-grown the height or weight limit the vehicle
of their booster seat
Infants And Child Restraints reach the highest weight or height allowed by their
convertible child seat.
Safety experts recommend that children ride rearward-
facing in the vehicle until they are two years old or until 2
they reach either the height or weight limit of their rear WARNING!
facing child safety seat. Two types of child restraints can • Never place a rear facing infant seat in front of an
be used rearward-facing: infant carriers and convertible air bag. A deploying Passenger Advanced Front Air
child seats. Bag can cause death or serious injury to a child 12
The infant carrier is only used rearward-facing in the years or younger, including a child in a rearward
vehicle. It is recommended for children from birth until facing infant seat.
they reach the weight or height limit of the infant carrier. • Only use a rearward-facing child restraint in a
Convertible child seats can be used either rearward- vehicle with a rear seat.
facing or forward-facing in the vehicle. Convertible child
Older Children And Child Restraints
seats often have a higher weight limit in the rearward-
facing direction than infant carriers do, so they can be Children who are two years old or who have outgrown
used rearward-facing by children who have outgrown their rear-facing convertible child seat can ride forward-
their infant carrier but are still less than at least two years facing in the vehicle. Forward-facing child seats and
old. Children should remain rearward-facing until they convertible child seats used in the forward-facing direc-
tion are for children who are over two years old or who
have outgrown the rear-facing weight or height limit of
their rear-facing convertible child seat. Children should
remain in a forward-facing child seat with a harness for collision. The child could be badly injured or
as long as possible, up to the highest weight or height killed. Follow the child restraint manufacturer’s
allowed by the child seat. directions exactly when installing an infant or
child restraint.
All children whose weight or height is above the • After a child restraint is installed in the vehicle, do
forward-facing limit for the child seat should use a not move the vehicle seat forward or rearward
belt-positioning booster seat until the vehicle’s seat belts because it can loosen the child restraint attach-
fit properly. If the child cannot sit with knees bent over ments. Remove the child restraint before adjusting
the vehicle’s seat cushion while the child’s back is against the vehicle seat position. When the vehicle seat has
the seatback, they should use a belt-positioning booster been adjusted, reinstall the child restraint.
seat. The child and belt-positioning booster seat are held • When your child restraint is not in use, secure it in
in the vehicle by the seat belt. the vehicle with the seat belt or LATCH anchor-
ages, or remove it from the vehicle. Do not leave it
WARNING! loose in the vehicle. In a sudden stop or accident, it
• Improper installation can lead to failure of an could strike the occupants or seatbacks and cause
infant or child restraint. It could come loose in a serious personal injury.
(Continued)
Children Too Large For Booster Seats 5. Can the child stay seated like this for the whole trip?
Children who are large enough to wear the shoulder belt If the answer to any of these questions was “no,” then the
comfortably, and whose legs are long enough to bend child still needs to use a booster seat in this vehicle. If the 2
over the front of the seat when their back is against the child is using the lap/shoulder belt, check belt fit peri-
seatback, should use the seat belt in a rear seat. Use this odically and make sure the seat belt buckle is latched. A
simple 5-step test to decide whether the child can use the child’s squirming or slouching can move the belt out of
vehicle’s seat belt alone: position. If the shoulder belt contacts the face or neck,
1. Can the child sit all the way back against the back of move the child closer to the center of the vehicle, or use
the vehicle seat? a booster seat to position the seat belt on the child
correctly.
2. Do the child’s knees bend comfortably over the front
of the vehicle seat – while they are still sitting all the WARNING!
way back?
Never allow a child to put the shoulder belt under an
3. Does the shoulder belt cross the child’s shoulder arm or behind their back. In a crash, the shoulder belt
between their neck and arm? will not protect a child properly, which may result in
4. Is the lap part of the belt as low as possible, touching serious injury or death. A child must always wear
the child’s thighs and not their stomach? both the lap and shoulder portions of the seat belt
correctly.
Recommendations For Attaching Child Restraints
Use any attachment method shown with an “X” Below

Combined
Weight of the LATCH –
Restraint Type LATCH –
Child + Child Lower Anchors Seat Belt + Top
Lower Anchors Seat Belt Only
Restraint + Top Tether Tether Anchor
Only
Anchor
Rear-Facing Up to 65 lbs X X
Child Restraint (29.5 kg)
Rear-Facing More than X
Child Restraint 65 lbs (29.5 kg)
Forward-Facing Up to 65 lbs X X
Child Restraint (29.5 kg)
Forward-Facing More than X
Child Restraint 65 lbs (29.5 kg)
Lower Anchors And Tethers For Children (LATCH) Your vehicle is equipped with the child restraint anchor-
Restraint System age system called LATCH, which stands for Lower
Anchors and Tethers for CHildren. The LATCH system 2
has three vehicle anchor points for installing LATCH-
equipped child seats. There are two lower anchorages
located at the back of the seat cushion where it meets the
seatback and one top tether anchorage located behind the
seating position. These anchorages are used to install
LATCH-equipped child seats without using the vehicle’s
seat belts. Some seating positions may have a top tether
anchorage but no lower anchorages. In these seating
positions, the seat belt must be used with the top tether
anchorage to install the child restraint. Please see the
following table for more information.
LATCH Positions For Installing Child Restraints In
This Vehicle
Lower Anchorage Symbol 2 anchorages per seating

position
Top Tether Anchorage Symbol
What is the weight limit (child’s weight + 65 lbs (29.5 kg) Use the LATCH anchorage system until
weight of the child restraint) for using the the combined weight of the child and the
LATCH anchorage system to attach the child child restraint is 65 lbs (29.5 kg). Use the 2
restraint? seat belt and tether anchor instead of the
LATCH system once the combined weight
is more than 65 lbs (29.5 kg).
Can the LATCH anchorages and the seat No Do not use the seat belt when you use the
belt be used together to attach a rear- LATCH anchorage system to attach a rear-
facing or forward-facing child restraint? facing or forward-facing child restraint.
Can a child seat be installed in the center N/A
position using the inner LATCH lower an-
chorages?
Can two child restraints be attached using No Never “share” a LATCH anchorage with
a common lower LATCH anchorage? two or more child restraints. If the center
position does not have dedicated LATCH
lower anchorages, use the seat belt to in-
stall a child seat in the center position next
to a child seat using the LATCH anchor-
ages in an outboard position.
Can the rear-facing child restraint touch Yes The child seat may touch the back of the
the back of the front passenger seat? front passenger seat if the child restraint
manufacturer also allows contact. See your
child restraint owner’s manual for more
information.
Can the head restraints be removed? Yes Center position only may be removed.
Locating The LATCH Anchorages
The lower anchorages are round bars that are 2

found at the rear of the seat cushion where it
meets the seatback, below the anchorage sym-
bols on the seatback. They are just visible when
you lean into the rear seat to install the child restraint.
You will easily feel them if you run your finger along the
gap between the seatback and seat cushion.
LATCH Anchorages
Locating The LATCH Anchorages
There are tether strap anchorages behind each

rear seating position located in the panel be-
tween the rear seatback and the rear window.
They are found under a plastic cover with the
tether anchorage symbol on it.
Tether Strap Anchorages

LATCH-compatible child restraint systems will be
equipped with a rigid bar or a flexible strap on each side.
Each will have a hook or connector to attach to the lower
anchorage and a way to tighten the connection to the
anchorage. Forward-facing child restraints and some
rear-facing infant restraints will also be equipped with a
tether strap. The tether strap will have a hook at the end Always follow the directions of the child restraint
to attach to the top tether anchorage and a way to tighten manufacturer when installing your child restraint. Not
the strap after it is attached to the anchorage. all child restraint systems will be installed as described 2
here.
Center Seat LATCH
If a child restraint installed in the center position blocks To Install A LATCH-compatible Child Restraint
the seat belt webbing or buckle for the outboard position, 1. If the selected seating position has a Switchable Auto-
do not use that outboard position. If a child seat in the matic Locking Retractor (ALR) seat belt, stow the seat
center position blocks the outboard LATCH anchors or belt following the instructions below. See the section
seat belt, do not install a child seat in that outboard “Installing Child Restraints Using the Vehicle Seat
position. Belt” to check what type of seat belt each seating
position has.
WARNING!
2. Loosen the adjusters on the lower straps and on the
Never use the same lower anchorage to attach more tether strap of the child seat so that you can more
than one child restraint. Please refer to “Installing easily attach the hooks or connectors to the vehicle
The LATCH Child Restraint System” for typical anchorages.
installation instructions.
3. Place the child seat between the lower anchorages for
that seating position. For some second row seats, you
may need to recline the seat and/or raise the head 7. Test that the child restraint is installed tightly by
restraint to get a better fit. If the rear seat can be moved pulling back and forth on the child seat at the belt
forward and rearward in the vehicle, you may wish to path. It should not move more than 1 inch (25.4 mm)
move it to its rear-most position to make room for the in any direction.
child seat. You may also move the front seat forward
How To Stow An Unused ALR Seatbelt
to allow more room for the child seat.
When using the LATCH attaching system to install a child
4. Attach the lower hooks or connectors of the child restraint, stow all ALR seat belts that are not being used by
restraint to the lower anchorages in the selected seat- other occupants or being used to secure child restraints. An
ing position. unused belt could injure a child if they play with it and
5. If the child restraint has a tether strap, connect it to the accidentally lock the seatbelt retractor. Before installing a
top tether anchorage. See the section “Installing Child child restraint using the LATCH system, buckle the seat
Restraints Using the Top Tether Anchorage” for direc- belt behind the child restraint and out of the child’s reach.
tions to attach a tether anchor. If the buckled seat belt interferes with the child restraint
installation, instead of buckling it behind the child re-
6. Tighten all of the straps as you push the child restraint straint, route the seat belt through the child restraint belt
rearward and downward into the seat. Remove slack path and then buckle it. Do not lock the seatbelt. Remind
in the straps according to the child restraint manufac- all children in the vehicle that the seat belts are not toys and
turer’s instructions. that they should not play with them.
Installing Child Restraints Using The Vehicle Seat
WARNING!
Belt
• Improper installation of a child restraint to the The seat belts in the passenger seating positions are 2
LATCH anchorages can lead to failure of an infant equipped with a Switchable Automatic Locking Retractor
or child restraint. The child could be badly injured (ALR) that is designed to keep the lap portion of the seat
or killed. Follow the manufacturer’s directions ex- belt tight around the child restraint so that it is not
actly when installing an infant or child restraint. necessary to use a locking clip. The ALR retractor can be
• Child restraint anchorages are designed to with- “switched” into a locked mode by pulling all of the
stand only those loads imposed by correctly-fitted webbing out of the retractor and then letting the webbing
child restraints. Under no circumstances are they to retract back into the retractor. If it is locked, the ALR will
be used for adult seat belts, harnesses, or for make a clicking noise while the webbing is pulled back
attaching other items or equipment to the vehicle. into the retractor. For additional information on ALR,
refer to the “Automatic Locking Mode” description un-
der “Occupant Restraints.”
Lap/Shoulder Belt Systems For Installing Child
Restraints In This Vehicle
What is the weight limit (child’s Weight limit of the Child Restraint Always use the tether anchor when
weight + weight of the child re- using the seat belt to install a for-
straint) for using the Tether Anchor ward facing child restraint, up to 2
with the seat belt to attach a forward the recommended weight limit of
facing child restraint? the child restraint.
Can the rear-facing child restraint Yes Contact between the front passen-
touch the back of the front passenger seat and the child restraint is
ger seat? allowed, if the child restraint
manufacturer also allows contact.
Can the head restraints be re- Yes Center position only may be re-
moved? moved.
Can the buckle stalk be twisted to Yes In positions with cinching latch
tighten the seat belt against the belt plates (CINCH), the buckle stalk
path of the child restraint? may be twisted up to 3 full turns.
Do not twist the buckle stalk in a
seating position with an ALR re-
tractor.
Installing A Child Restraint With A Switchable 4. Pull on the webbing to make the lap portion tight
Automatic Locking Retractor (ALR) against the child seat.
1. Place the child seat in the center of the seating 5. To lock the seat belt, pull down on the shoulder part of
position. For some second row seats, you may need to the seat belt until you have pulled all the seat belt
recline the seat and/or raise the head restraint to get a webbing out of the retractor. Then, allow the webbing
better fit. If the rear seat can be moved forward and to retract back into the retractor. As the webbing
rearward in the vehicle, you may wish to move it to its retracts, you will hear a clicking sound. This means the
rear-most position to make room for the child seat. seat belt is now in the Automatic Locking mode.
You may also move the front seat forward to allow
6. Try to pull the webbing out of the retractor. If it is
more room for the child seat.
locked, you should not be able to pull out any web-
2. Pull enough of the seat belt webbing from the retractor bing. If the retractor is not locked, repeat step 5.
to pass it through the seat belt path of the child
7. Finally, pull up on any excess webbing to tighten the
restraint. Do not twist the belt webbing in the seat belt
lap portion around the child restraint while you push
path.
the child restraint rearward and downward into the
3. Slide the latch plate into the buckle until you hear a vehicle seat.
“click”.
8. If the child restraint has a top tether strap and the
seating position has a top tether anchorage, connect
the tether strap to the anchorage and tighten the tether tether anchorage. If there is no top tether
strap. See the section “Installing Child Restraints anchorage for that seating position, move
Using the Top Tether Anchorage” for directions to the child restraint to another position in the
2
attach a tether anchor. vehicle if one is available.
9. Test that the child restraint is installed tightly by 2. Rotate or lift the cover to access the anchor directly
pulling back and forth on the child seat at the seat belt behind the seat where you are placing the child
path. It should not move more than 1 inch (25.4 mm) restraint.
in any direction.
3. Route the tether strap to provide the most direct path
Any seat belt system will loosen with time, so check the for the strap between the anchor and the child seat. If
seat belt occasionally, and pull it tight if necessary. your vehicle is equipped with adjustable rear head
restraints, raise the head restraint, and where possible,
Installing Child Restraints Using The Top Tether
route the tether strap under the head restraint and
Anchorage
between the two posts. If not possible, lower the head
restraint and pass the tether strap around the outboard
1. Look behind the seating position where you side of the head restraint.
plan to install the child restraint to find the
tether anchorage. You may need to move the
seat forward to provide better access to the
Adjustable Headrest Release Push Button Adjustable Headrest Downward Position

4. Attach the tether strap hook of the child restraint to
the top tether anchorage as shown in the diagram.
5. Remove slack in the tether strap according to the child 2
restraint manufacturer’s instructions.
WARNING!
• An incorrectly anchored tether strap could lead to
increased head motion and possible injury to the
child. Use only the anchorage position directly
behind the child seat to secure a child restraint top
tether strap.
Tether Strap Mounting • If your vehicle is equipped with a split rear seat,
1 — Cover A — Tether Strap Hook make sure the tether strap does not slip into the
3 — Attaching Strap B — Tether Anchor opening between the seatbacks as you remove
slack in the strap.
Center Tether Attachment Pets should be restrained in the rear seat in pet harnesses
or pet carriers that are secured by seat belts.
1. Lower the adjustable center head restraint to the full
down position. ENGINE BREAK-IN RECOMMENDATIONS
2. Route the tether strap over the seatback and head A long break-in period is not required for the engine and
restraint. drivetrain (transmission and axle) in your vehicle.
3. Attach the tether strap hook of the child restraint to Drive moderately during the first 300 miles (500 km).
the center tether anchorage located in the panel be- After the initial 60 miles (100 km), speeds up to 50 or
tween the rear seatback and the rear window. 55 mph (80 or 90 km/h) are desirable.
4. Remove slack in the tether strap according to the child While cruising, brief full-throttle acceleration within the
restraint manufacturer’s instructions. limits of local traffic laws contributes to a good break-in.
Transporting Pets Wide-open throttle acceleration in low gear can be detri-
mental and should be avoided.
Air Bags deploying in the front seat could harm your pet.
An unrestrained pet will be thrown about and possibly The engine oil installed in the engine at the factory is a
injured, or injure a passenger during panic braking or in high-quality energy conserving type lubricant. Oil changes
a collision. should be consistent with anticipated climate conditions
under which vehicle operations will occur. For the recom-
WARNING!
mended viscosity and quality grades, refer to “Mainte-
nance Procedures” in “Maintaining Your Vehicle”. • Do not leave children or animals inside parked 2
vehicles in hot weather. Interior heat build-up may
CAUTION! cause serious injury or death.
• It is extremely dangerous to ride in a cargo area,
Never use Non-Detergent Oil or Straight Mineral Oil
inside or outside of a vehicle. In a collision, people
in the engine or damage may result.
riding in these areas are more likely to be seriously
NOTE: A new engine may consume some oil during its injured or killed.
first few thousand miles (kilometers) of operation. This • Do not allow people to ride in any area of your
should be considered a normal part of the break-in and vehicle that is not equipped with seats and seat
not interpreted as an indication of difficulty. belts.
• Be sure everyone in your vehicle is in a seat and
SAFETY TIPS using a seat belt properly.
Transporting Passengers
NEVER TRANSPORT PASSENGERS IN THE CARGO
AREA.
Exhaust Gas
WARNING! • If it is necessary to sit in a parked vehicle with the
engine running, adjust your heating or cooling
Exhaust gases can injure or kill. They contain carbon controls to force outside air into the vehicle. Set the
monoxide (CO), which is colorless and odorless. blower at high speed.
Breathing it can make you unconscious and can
eventually poison you. To avoid breathing (CO), The best protection against carbon monoxide entry into
follow these safety tips: the vehicle body is a properly maintained engine exhaust
• Do not run the engine in a closed garage or in system.
confined areas any longer than needed to move Whenever a change is noticed in the sound of the exhaust
your vehicle in or out of the area. system, when exhaust fumes can be detected inside the
• If you are required to drive with the trunk/liftgate/ vehicle, or when the underside or rear of the vehicle is
rear doors open, make sure that all windows are damaged, have a competent mechanic inspect the com-
closed and the climate control BLOWER switch is plete exhaust system and adjacent body areas for broken,
set at high speed. DO NOT use the recirculation damaged, deteriorated, or mispositioned parts. Open
mode. seams or loose connections could permit exhaust fumes
to seep into the passenger compartment. In addition,
(Continued) inspect the exhaust system each time the vehicle is raised
for lubrication or oil change. Replace as required.
Safety Checks You Should Make Inside The not lit during starting, see your authorized dealer. If the
Vehicle light stays on, flickers, or comes on while driving, have
the system checked by an authorized dealer.
Seat Belts 2
Inspect the seat belt system periodically, checking for Defroster
cuts, frays, and loose parts. Damaged parts must be Check operation by selecting the defrost mode and place
replaced immediately. Do not disassemble or modify the the blower control on high speed. You should be able to
system. feel the air directed against the windshield. See your
authorized dealer for service if your defroster is inoper-
Front seat belt assemblies must be replaced after a
able.
collision. Rear seat belt assemblies must be replaced after
a collision if they have been damaged (i.e., bent retractor, Floor Mat Safety Information
torn webbing, etc.). If there is any question regarding seat Always use floor mats designed to fit the footwell of your
belt or retractor condition, replace the seat belt. vehicle. Use only floor mats that leave the pedal area
Air Bag Warning Light unobstructed and that are firmly secured so that they
cannot slip out of position and interfere with the pedals
or impair safe operation of your vehicle in other ways.
The light should come on and remain on for
four to eight seconds as a bulb check when the
ignition switch is first turned ON. If the light is
WARNING! WARNING! (Continued)

Pedals that cannot move freely can cause loss of • Check mounting of mats on a regular basis. Always
vehicle control and increase the risk of serious per- properly reinstall and secure floor mats that have
sonal injury. been removed for cleaning.
• Always make sure that floor mats are properly • Always make sure that objects cannot fall into the
attached to the floor mat fasteners. driver footwell while the vehicle is moving. Ob-
• Never place or install floor mats or other floor jects can become trapped under the brake pedal
coverings in the vehicle that cannot be properly and accelerator pedal causing a loss of vehicle
secured to prevent them from moving and interfer- control.
ing with the pedals or the ability to control the • If required, mounting posts must be properly in-
vehicle. stalled, if not equipped from the factory.
• Never put floor mats or other floor coverings on top Failure to properly follow floor mat installation or
of already installed floor mats. Additional floor mounting can cause interference with the brake
mats and other coverings will reduce the size of the pedal and accelerator pedal operation causing loss of
pedal area and interfere with the pedals. control of the vehicle.
(Continued)
Periodic Safety Checks You Should Make Outside Door Latches
The Vehicle Check for positive closing, latching, and locking.
Tires 2
Fluid Leaks
Examine tires for excessive tread wear and uneven wear
Check area under vehicle after overnight parking for fuel,
patterns. Check for stones, nails, glass, or other objects
engine coolant, oil, or other fluid leaks. Also, if gasoline
lodged in the tread or sidewall. Inspect the tread for cuts
fumes are detected or if fuel, power steering fluid (if
and cracks. Inspect sidewalls for cuts, cracks and bulges.
equipped), or brake fluid leaks are suspected, the cause
Check the wheel nuts for tightness. Check the tires
should be located and corrected immediately.
(including spare) for proper cold inflation pressure.
Lights
Have someone observe the operation of brake lights and
exterior lights while you work the controls. Check turn
signal and high beam indicator lights on the instrument
panel.
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
CONTENTS 3
䡵 MIRRORS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .110 ▫ Power Mirrors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .113
▫ Inside Day/Night Mirror . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .110 ▫ Heated Mirrors — If Equipped . . . . . . . . . . . .114
▫ Automatic Dimming Mirror — If Equipped . . .110 ▫ Illuminated Vanity Mirrors — If Equipped . . .114
▫ Outside Mirrors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .111 ▫ “Slide-On-Rod” And Extender Features Of Sun
Visor . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .115
▫ Outside Mirrors Folding Feature — If
Equipped . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .112 䡵 BLIND SPOT MONITORING (BSM) — IF
EQUIPPED. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .116
▫ Driver’s Outside Automatic Dimming Mirror — If
Equipped . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .112 ▫ Rear Cross Path. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .122
▫ Outside Mirrors Approach Light — If ▫ Modes Of Operation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .124
Equipped . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .112
▫ General Information. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .125
▫ Tilt Mirrors In Reverse — If Equipped . . . . . . .113
104 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
䡵 Uconnect® PHONE (4.3) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .125 ▫ Uconnect® Phone Features . . . . . . . . . . . . . .169
▫ Uconnect® 4.3 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .125 ▫ Advanced Phone Connectivity . . . . . . . . . . . .174
▫ Operation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .128 ▫ Things You Should Know About Your Uconnect®
Phone . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .175
▫ Phone Call Features . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .135
▫ General Information . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .187
▫ Uconnect® Phone Features . . . . . . . . . . . . . .139
䡵 VOICE COMMAND . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .187
▫ Advanced Phone Connectivity . . . . . . . . . . . .144
▫ Uconnect® 8.4/8.4 Nav . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .187
▫ Things You Should Know About Your Uconnect®
Phone . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .145 ▫ Uconnect® Voice Commands . . . . . . . . . . . . .190
▫ General Information . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .149 䡵 SEATS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .201
䡵 Uconnect® PHONE (8.4/8.4N) . . . . . . . . . . . . .150 ▫ Power Seats — If Equipped . . . . . . . . . . . . . .201
▫ Uconnect® 8.4/8.4 Nav . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .150 ▫ Power Lumbar — If Equipped . . . . . . . . . . . .203
▫ Operation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .153 ▫ Heated Seats — If Equipped . . . . . . . . . . . . .204
▫ Phone Call Features . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .164 ▫ Ventilated Seats — If Equipped . . . . . . . . . . . .208
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 105
▫ Manual Seats — If Equipped . . . . . . . . . . . . .209 ▫ Headlights On With Wipers (Available With
Automatic Headlights Only) . . . . . . . . . . . . .222
▫ Head Restraints . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .211
▫ Automatic High Beam Headlamp Control — If
▫ Folding Rear Seat . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .213
Equipped . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .223
3
䡵 DRIVER MEMORY SEAT — IF EQUIPPED . . . .215
▫ Headlight Time Delay . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .224
▫ Programming The Memory Feature . . . . . . . . .216
▫ Daytime Running Lights (DRL) — If
▫ Linking And Unlinking The Remote Keyless Entry Equipped . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .224
Transmitter To Memory . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .217
▫ Lights-On Reminder . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .225
▫ Memory Position Recall . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .218
▫ Fog Lights — If Equipped . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .225
▫ Easy Entry/Exit Seat (Available With Memory
▫ Multifunction Lever . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .226
Seat Only) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .219
▫ Turn Signals . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .226
䡵 TO OPEN AND CLOSE THE HOOD . . . . . . . . .220
▫ Lane Change Assist . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .227
䡵 LIGHTS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .221
▫ High/Low Beam Switch . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .227
▫ Headlight Switch . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .221
▫ Flash-To-Pass . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .227
▫ Automatic Headlights — If Equipped . . . . . . .222
▫ Front Map/Reading Lights — If Equipped . . .228 䡵 POWER TILT/TELESCOPING STEERING
COLUMN — IF EQUIPPED . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .237
▫ Courtesy Lights . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .229
䡵 HEATED STEERING WHEEL — IF
▫ Ambient Light — If Equipped . . . . . . . . . . . .229
EQUIPPED . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .238
▫ Interior Lights . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .230
䡵 ADJUSTABLE PEDALS — IF EQUIPPED . . . . . .240
䡵 WINDSHIELD WIPERS AND WASHERS . . . . . .232
䡵 ELECTRONIC SPEED CONTROL — IF
▫ Intermittent Wiper System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .232 EQUIPPED . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .242
▫ Wiper Operation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .232 ▫ To Activate . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .243
▫ Windshield Washers . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .233 ▫ To Set A Desired Speed . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .244
▫ Mist Feature . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .234 ▫ To Deactivate . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .244
▫ Headlights On With Wipers (Available With ▫ To Resume Speed . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .244
Automatic Headlights Only) . . . . . . . . . . . . .234
▫ To Vary The Speed Setting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .244
▫ Rain Sensing Wipers — If Equipped . . . . . . . .234
▫ To Accelerate For Passing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .246
䡵 TILT/TELESCOPING STEERING COLUMN . . .236
䡵 ADAPTIVE CRUISE CONTROL (ACC) — IF ▫ Display Warnings And Maintenance . . . . . . . .262
EQUIPPED . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .246
▫ Precautions While Driving With ACC . . . . . . .264
▫ Adaptive Cruise Control (ACC) Operation . . . .248
▫ General Information . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .269
▫ Activating Adaptive Cruise Control (ACC). . . .249 3
▫ Normal (Fixed Speed) Cruise Control Mode . . .269
▫ To Activate . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .250
▫ Forward Collision Warning — If Equipped . . .272
▫ To Set A Desired ACC Speed . . . . . . . . . . . . .251
䡵 PARKSENSE® REAR PARK ASSIST — IF
▫ To Cancel . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .253 EQUIPPED . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .275
▫ To Turn Off . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .253 ▫ ParkSense® Sensors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .275
▫ To Resume Speed . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .254 ▫ ParkSense® Warning Display . . . . . . . . . . . . .275
▫ To Vary The Speed Setting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .254 ▫ ParkSense® Display . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .276
▫ Setting The Following Distance In ACC . . . . . .256 ▫ Enabling And Disabling ParkSense® . . . . . . . .279
▫ Overtake Aid . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .261 ▫ Rear Park Assist Audible Alerts . . . . . . . . . . .279
▫ Adaptive Cruise Control (ACC) Menu . . . . . . .261 ▫ Service The ParkSense® Rear Park Assist
System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .280
▫ Cleaning The ParkSense® System . . . . . . . . . .281 ▫ Canadian/Gate Operator Programming . . . . . .293
▫ ParkSense® System Usage Precautions. . . . . . .281 ▫ Using HomeLink® . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .295
䡵 PARKVIEW® REAR BACK UP CAMERA — IF ▫ Security . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .295
EQUIPPED . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .283
▫ Troubleshooting Tips . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .295
▫ Turning ParkView® On Or Off — With
▫ General Information. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .296
Touchscreen Radio . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .284
䡵 POWER SUNROOF — IF EQUIPPED . . . . . . . .297
䡵 OVERHEAD CONSOLE . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .285
▫ Opening Sunroof — Express . . . . . . . . . . . . . .298
▫ Front Map/Reading Lights — If Equipped . . .286
▫ Opening Sunroof — Manual Mode . . . . . . . . .298
▫ Courtesy Lights . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .287
▫ Closing Sunroof — Express. . . . . . . . . . . . . . .298
▫ Sunglasses Bin Door . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .287
▫ Closing Sunroof — Manual Mode . . . . . . . . . .299
䡵 GARAGE DOOR OPENER — IF EQUIPPED . . .288
▫ Pinch Protect Feature . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .299
▫ Before You Begin Programming HomeLink® . .289
▫ Venting Sunroof — Express . . . . . . . . . . . . . .299
▫ Programming A Rolling Code . . . . . . . . . . . . .290
▫ Sunshade Operation. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .299
▫ Programming A Non-Rolling Code . . . . . . . . .292
▫ Wind Buffeting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .300 ▫ Console Features . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .309
▫ Sunroof Maintenance . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .300 ▫ Door Storage . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .310
▫ Ignition Off Operation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .300 ▫ Cargo Area — Vehicles Equipped With 60/40
Split-Folding Rear Seat . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .310 3
䡵 ELECTRICAL POWER OUTLETS . . . . . . . . . . .301
䡵 REAR WINDOW FEATURES . . . . . . . . . . . . . .312
䡵 CUPHOLDERS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .305
▫ Rear Window Defroster . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .312
▫ Front Seat Cupholders . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .305
䡵 LOAD LEVELING SYSTEM — IF EQUIPPED . .313
▫ Rear Seat Cupholders . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .306
䡵 STORAGE . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .308
▫ Glove Compartment . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .308
MIRRORS
Inside Day/Night Mirror
A single ball joint mirror is provided in the vehicle. It is
a twist on mirror that has a fixed position at the wind-
shield. The mirror installs on the windshield button with
a counterclockwise rotation and requires no tools for
mounting. The mirror head can be adjusted up, down,
left, and right for various drivers. The mirror should be
adjusted to center on the view through the rear window.
Headlight glare from vehicles behind you can be reduced
by moving the small control under the mirror to the night
Adjusting Rearview Mirror
position (toward the rear of the vehicle). The mirror
should be adjusted while the small control under the Automatic Dimming Mirror — If Equipped
mirror is set in the day position (toward the windshield). This mirror automatically adjusts for headlight glare
from vehicles behind you. This feature will be defaulted
on, and only be disabled when the vehicle is moving in
reverse.
Outside Mirrors
To receive maximum benefit, adjust the outside mirror(s)
to center on the adjacent lane of traffic and a slight
overlap of the view obtained from the inside mirror.
3
NOTE: The passenger side convex outside mirror will
give a much wider view to the rear, and especially of the
lane next to your vehicle.
WARNING!
Vehicles and other objects seen in the passenger side
Automatic Dimming Mirror convex mirror will look smaller and farther away
than they really are. Relying too much on your
CAUTION! passenger side convex mirror could cause you to
collide with another vehicle or other object. Use your
To avoid damage to the mirror during cleaning, never
inside mirror when judging the size or distance of a
spray any cleaning solution directly onto the mirror.
vehicle seen in the passenger side convex mirror.
Apply the solution onto a clean cloth and wipe the
mirror clean.
Outside Mirrors Folding Feature — If Equipped Outside Mirrors Approach Light — If Equipped
Some models have outside mirrors that are hinged. The Driver and passenger outside mirrors equipped with
hinge allows the mirror to pivot forward and rearward to approach lighting contain one LED, which is located in
resist damage. The hinge has three detent positions: full the upper outboard mirror glass corner. The approach
forward, full rearward and normal. light supplies illuminated entry lighting, which turns on
in both mirrors when you use the Remote Keyless Entry
Driver’s Outside Automatic Dimming Mirror — If
(RKE) transmitter or open any door. This LED shines
Equipped
outward to illuminate the front and rear door handles. It
The driver’s outside mirror will automatically adjust for also shines downward to illuminate the area in front of
glare from vehicles behind you. This feature is controlled the doors.
by the inside automatic dimming mirror and will auto-
matically adjust for headlight glare when the inside
mirror adjusts.
Tilt Mirrors In Reverse — If Equipped Power Mirrors
Tilt Mirrors in Reverse provides automatic outside mirror The power mirror controls are located on the driver’s
positioning which will aid the driver’s view of the door trim panel.
ground rearward of the front doors. The outside mirrors
will move slightly downward from the present position 3
when the vehicle is shifted into REVERSE. The outside
mirrors will then return to the original position when the
vehicle is shifted out of the REVERSE position. Each
stored memory setting will have an associated Tilt Mir-
rors in Reverse position.
NOTE: The Tilt Mirrors in Reverse feature is not turned
on when delivered from the factory. The Tilt Mirrors in
Reverse feature can be turned on and off using the
Uconnect® System. Refer to “Uconnect® Settings” in
Power Mirror Control
formation.
The power mirror controls consist of mirror select but- Heated Mirrors — If Equipped
tons and a four-way mirror control switch. To adjust a
mirror, press either the L (left) or R (right) button to select These mirrors are heated to melt frost or ice. This
the mirror that you want to adjust. feature can be activated whenever you turn on the
NOTE: A light in the select button will illuminate indi- rear window defroster (if equipped). Refer to “Rear
cating the mirror is activated and can be adjusted. Window Features” in “Understanding The Features Of
Your Vehicle” for further information.
Using the mirror control switch, press on any of the four
arrows for the direction that you want the mirror to Illuminated Vanity Mirrors — If Equipped
move. An illuminated vanity mirror is located on the sun visor.
Power mirror preselected positions can be controlled by To use the mirror, rotate the sun visor downward and
the optional Memory Seat Feature. Refer to “Driver swing the mirror cover upward. The light turns on
Memory Seat” in “Understanding The Features Of Your automatically. Closing the mirror cover turns off the light.
Vehicle” for further information.
use the extender feature of the sun visor, grab the
extender which is located at the rear of the visor and pull
rearward.
Illuminated Vanity Mirror

“Slide-On-Rod” And Extender Features Of Sun
Visor
Slide-On-Rod Feature
To use the “Slide-On-Rod” feature of the sun visor, rotate
the sun visor downward and swing the sun visor so it is
parallel to the side window, grab the sun visor and pull
rearwards until the sun visor is in the desired position. To
BLIND SPOT MONITORING (BSM) — IF
EQUIPPED
The Blind Spot Monitoring (BSM) system uses two radar-
based sensors, located inside the rear bumper fascia, to
detect highway licensable vehicles (automobiles, trucks,
motorcycles, etc.) that enter the blind spot zones from the
rear/front/side of the vehicle.
Rear Detection Zones

When the vehicle is started, the BSM warning light will
momentarily illuminate in both outside rear view mirrors
to let the driver know that the system is operational.
Automatic Transmission Vehicles
The BSM system sensors operate when the vehicle is in
any forward gear or REVERSE and enters stand-by mode
when the vehicle is in PARK.
3
Manual Transmission Vehicles
The BSM system sensors operate when the vehicle is in
any gear and enters stand-by mode when the Park Brake
is engaged, the vehicle is not in REVERSE, and the
vehicle is stationary.
BSM Warning Light

The BSM detection zone covers approximately one lane
on both sides of the vehicle (12 ft or 3.8 m). The zone
starts at the outside rear view mirror and extends ap-
proximately 23 ft (7 m) to the rear of the vehicle. The BSM
system monitors the detection zones on both sides of the
vehicle when the vehicle speed reaches approximately The area on the rear fascia where the radar sensors are
6 mph (10 km/h) or higher and will alert the driver of located must remain free of snow, ice, and dirt/road
vehicles in these areas. contamination so that the BSM system can function
properly. Do not block the area of the rear fascia where
NOTE:
the radar sensors are located with foreign objects (bum-
• The BSM system does NOT alert the driver about per stickers, bicycle racks, etc.).
rapidly approaching vehicles that are outside the de-
The BSM system notifies the driver of objects in the
tection zones.
detection zones by illuminating the BSM warning light
• The BSM system detection zone DOES NOT change if located in the outside mirrors in addition to sounding an
your vehicle is towing a trailer. Therefore, visually audible (chime) alert and reducing the radio volume.
verify the adjacent lane is clear for both your vehicle Refer to “Modes Of Operation” for further information.
and trailer before making a lane change. If the trailer or
The BSM system monitors the detection zone from three
other object (i.e., bicycle, sports equipment) extends
different entry points (side, rear, front) while driving to
beyond the side of your vehicle, this may result in the
see if an alert is necessary. The BSM system will issue an
BSM warning light remaining illuminated the entire
alert during these types of zone entries.
time the vehicle is in a forward gear.
Entering From The Side Entering From The Rear
Vehicles that move into your adjacent lanes from either Vehicles that come up from behind your vehicle on either
side of the vehicle. side and enter the rear detection zone with a relative
speed of less than 30 mph (48 km/h).
3
Side Monitoring
Rear Monitoring
Overtaking Traffic
If you pass another vehicle slowly (with a relative speed
of less than 15 mph (24 km/h) and the vehicle remains in
the blind spot for approximately 1.5 seconds, the warning
light will be illuminated. If the difference in speed
between the two vehicles is greater than 15 mph
(24 km/h), the warning light will not illuminate.
Overtaking/Approaching
The BSM system is designed not to issue an alert on The BSM system will not alert you of objects that are
stationary objects such as guardrails, posts, walls, foliage, traveling in the opposite direction of the vehicle in
berms, etc. However, occasionally the system may alert adjacent lanes.
on such objects. This is normal operation and your
vehicle does not require service. 3
Stationary Objects
Overtaking/Passing
system is not designed to detect pedestrians, bicy-
clists, or animals. Even if your vehicle is equipped
with the BSM system, always check your vehicle’s
mirrors, glance over your shoulder, and use your turn
signal before changing lanes. Failure to do so can
result in serious injury or death.
Rear Cross Path

The Rear Cross Path (RCP) feature is intended to aid the
drivers when backing out of parking spaces where their
Opposing Traffic vision of oncoming vehicles may be blocked. Proceed
slowly and cautiously out of the parking space until the
WARNING!
rear end of the vehicle is exposed. The RCP system will
The Blind Spot Monitoring system is only an aid to then have a clear view of the cross traffic and if an
help detect objects in the blind spot zones. The BSM oncoming vehicle is detected, alert the driver.
(Continued)
NOTE: In a parking lot situation, oncoming vehicles can
be obscured by vehicles parked on either side. If the
sensors are blocked by other structures or vehicles, the
system will not be able to alert the driver.
When RCP is on and the vehicle is in REVERSE, the 3
driver is alerted using both the visual and audible
alarms, including reducing the radio volume.
WARNING!
RCP is not a Back Up Aid system. It is intended to be
used to help a driver detect an oncoming vehicle in a
RCP Detection Zones parking lot situation. Drivers must be careful when
RCP monitors the rear detection zones on both sides of backing up, even when using RCP. Always check
the vehicle, for objects that are moving toward the side of carefully behind your vehicle, look behind you, and
the vehicle with a minimum speed of approximately be sure to check for pedestrians, animals, other
3 mph (5 km/h), to objects moving a maximum of vehicles, obstructions, and blind spots before back-
approximately 20 mph (32 km/h), such as in parking lot ing up. Failure to do so can result in serious injury or
situations. death.
Modes Of Operation turn signal is then activated, and it corresponds to an
alert present on that side of the vehicle, an audible chime
Three selectable modes of operation are available in the
will also be sounded. Whenever a turn signal and de-
Uconnect® System. Refer to “Uconnect® Settings/
tected object are present on the same side at the same
Customer Programmable Features” in “Understanding
time, both the visual and audio alerts will be issued. In
addition to the audible alert the radio (if on) volume will
Blind Spot Alert Lights Only be reduced.
When operating in Blind Spot Alert mode, the BSM NOTE:
system will provide a visual alert in the appropriate side
• Whenever an audible alert is requested by the BSM
view mirror based on a detected object. However, when
system, the radio volume is reduced.
the system is operating in Rear Cross Path mode, the
system will respond with both visual and audible alerts • If the hazard flashers are on, the system will request
when a detected object is present. Whenever an audible the appropriate visual alert only.
alert is requested, the radio volume is reduced.
When the system is in RCP, the system shall respond with
Blind Spot Alert Lights/Chime both visual and audible alerts when a detected object is
present. Whenever an audible alert is requested, the radio
When operating in Blind Spot Alert Lights/Chime mode,
volume is reduced. Turn/hazard signal status is ignored;
the BSM system will provide a visual alert in the appro-
the RCP state always requests the chime.
priate side view mirror based on a detected object. If the
Blind Spot Alert Off Operation is subject to the following two conditions:
When the BSM system is turned off there will be no 1. The device may not cause harmful interference.
visual or audible alerts from either the BSM or RCP
2. The device must accept any interference received,
systems.
including interference that may cause undesired op- 3
NOTE: The BSM system will store the current operating eration of the device.
mode when the vehicle is shut off. Each time the vehicle
Changes or modifications to any of these systems by
is started the previously stored mode will be recalled and
other than an authorized service facility could void
used.
authorization to use this equipment.
General Information
Uconnect® PHONE (4.3)
This vehicle has systems that operate on radio frequency
that comply with Part 15 of the Federal Communications Uconnect® 4.3
Commission (FCC) rules and with Industry Canada Uconnect® Phone is a voice-activated, hands-free, in-
Standards RSS- GEN/210/220/310. vehicle communications system. Uconnect® Phone al-
lows you to dial a phone number with your mobile
phone.
Uconnect® Phone supports the following features: Screen Activated Features:
Voice Activated Features: • Dialing via Keypad using the touchscreen,
• Hands Free dialing via Voice (“Call John Smith Mo- • Viewing and Calling contacts from Phonebooks dis-
bile” or, “Dial 248-555-1212”) played on the touchscreen,
• Redialing last dialed numbers (“Redial”) • Setting Favorite Contact Phone numbers so they are
easily accessible on the Main Phone screen,
• Calling Back the last incoming call number (“Call
Back”) • Viewing and Calling contacts from Recent Call logs,
• View Call logs on screen (“Show incoming calls,” • Listen to Music on your Bluetooth® Device via the
“Show Outgoing calls,” “Show missed Calls,” “Show touchscreen,
Recent Calls”)
• Pairing up to 10 phones/audio devices for easy access
• Searching Contacts phone number (“Search for John to connect to them quickly.
Smith Mobile”)
Your mobile phone’s audio is transmitted through your
vehicle’s audio system; the system will automatically
mute your radio when using the Uconnect® Phone.
For Uconnect® customer support:
WARNING!
• U.S. residents - visit www.UconnectPhone.com or call
1-877-855-8400. Any voice commanded system should be used only
in safe driving conditions following all applicable
• Canadian Residents - visit www.UconnectPhone.com laws, including laws regarding phone use. Your at- 3
or call, 1-800-465-2001 (English) or 1-800-387-9983 tention should be focused on safely operating the
(French). vehicle. Failure to do so may result in a collision
If your mobile phone only supports the Headset Profile causing serious injury or death.
you may not be able to use any Uconnect® Phone The Uconnect® Phone is driven through your
features. Refer to your mobile service provider or the Bluetooth® “Hands-Free Profile” mobile phone.
phone manufacturer for details. Uconnect® features Bluetooth® technology - the global
Uconnect® Phone allows you to transfer calls between standard that enables different electronic devices to con-
the system and your mobile phone as you enter or exit nect to each other without wires or a docking station, so
your vehicle and enables you to mute the system’s Uconnect® Phone works no matter where you stow your
microphone for private conversation. mobile phone (be it your purse, pocket, or briefcase), as
long as your phone is turned on and has been paired to
the vehicle’s Uconnect® Phone. The Uconnect® Phone
allows up to ten mobile phones or audio devices to be
linked to the system. Only one linked (or paired) mobile The Uconnect® Phone is fully integrated with the vehi-
phone and one audio device can be used with the system cle’s audio system. The volume of the Uconnect® Phone
at a time. The system is available in English, Spanish, or can be adjusted either from the radio volume control
French languages. knob or from the steering wheel radio control (right
switch), if so equipped.
Uconnect® Phone Button
Operation
The Uconnect® Phone Button is used to
enter the phone mode and make calls, show Voice commands can be used to operate the Uconnect®
recent, incoming, outgoing calls, view Phone and to navigate through the Uconnect® Phone
phonebook etc., When you press the button menu structure. Voice commands are required after most
you will hear a BEEP. The beep is your signal to give Uconnect® Phone prompts. There are two general meth-
a command. ods for how Voice Command works:
Uconnect® Voice Command Button 1. Say compound commands like “Call John Smith mo-
bile.”
The Uconnect® Voice Command Button is
only used for “barge in” and when you are 2. Say the individual commands and allow the system to
already in a call and you want to send Tones guide you to complete the task.
or make another call. You will be prompted for a specific command and then
guided through the available options.
• Prior to giving a voice command, one must wait for the works best when you talk in a normal conversational
beep, which follows the “Listen” prompt or another tone, as if speaking to someone sitting a few feet/
prompt. meters away from you.
• For certain operations, compound commands can be Natural Speech
3
used. For example, instead of saying “Call” and then Your Uconnect® Phone Voice system uses a Natural
“John Smith” and then “mobile,” the following com- Language Voice Recognition (VR) engine.
pound command can be said: “Call John Smith mo-
bile.” Natural speech allows the user to speak commands in
phrases or complete sentences. The system filters out
• For each feature explanation in this section, only the certain non-word utterances and sounds such as “ah”
compound command form of the voice command is and “eh.” The system handles fill-in words such as “I
given. You can also break the commands into parts and would like to.”
say each part of the command when you are asked for
it. For example, you can use the compound command The system handles multiple inputs in the same phrase
form voice command “Search for John Smith,” or you or sentence such as “make a phone call” and “to Kelly
can break the compound command form into two Smith.” For multiple inputs in the same phrase or sen-
voice commands: “Search Contact” and when asked tence, the system identifies the topic or context and
“John Smith.” Please remember, the Uconnect® Phone provides the associated follow-up prompt such as “Who
do you want to call?” in the case where a phone call was command or say “help.” All Uconnect® Phone ses-
requested but the specific name was not recognized. sions begin with a push of the button on the radio
control head.
The system utilizes continuous dialog; when the system
requires more information from the user it will ask a Cancel Command
question to which the user can respond without pressing At any prompt, after the beep, you can say “Cancel” and
the “Voice Command” button on your steering
you will be returned to the main menu.
wheel.
You can also push the or button on your steering
Voice Command Tree wheel when the system is listening for a command
Refer to “Voice Tree” in this section. and be returned to the main or previous menu.
Help Command Pair (Link) Uconnect® Phone To A Mobile Phone
If you need assistance at any prompt, or if you want to To begin using your Uconnect® Phone, you must pair
know your options at any prompt, say “Help” following your compatible Bluetooth® enabled mobile phone.
the beep.
To complete the pairing process, you will need to refer-
To activate the Uconnect® Phone from idle, simply push ence your mobile phone Owner’s Manual. The
the button on your steering wheel and say a Uconnect® website may also provide detailed instruc-
tions for pairing.
NOTE: 2. At the Paired Phones screen press the “Add Device”
soft-key and a pop-up with instructions will appear.
• You must have Bluetooth® enabled on your phone to
complete this procedure. 3. Search for available devices on your Bluetooth® en-
abled mobile phone. When prompted on the phone,
• The vehicle must be in PARK. 3
select the “Uconnect®” device and enter the PIN.
1. You can do either of the following:
4. When the pairing process has successfully completed,
a. Press the SETTINGS hard-key, page down to the the system will prompt you to choose whether or not
“Phone/Bluetooth®” soft-key, press it and you will this is your favorite phone. Selecting Yes will make
see the Paired Phones screen. If there are no paired this phone the highest priority. This phone will take
phones you will see <Empty> as the first device precedence over other paired phones within range.
name.
Pair A Bluetooth® Streaming Audio Device
b. Press the MORE hard-key, then press the “Phone”
1. Press the PLAYER hard-key to begin.
soft-key and you will go to the Uconnect® Phone
main screen. Press the “Settings” soft-key. If there 2. Touch the “Source” soft-key.
are no phones currently paired a pop-up will
3. Change the Source to Bluetooth®.
appear. If you select Yes you will go the Paired
Phones screen, if you select No you will return to 4. Touch the “Add Device” soft-key.
the Uconnect® Phone main menu.
5. Search for available devices on your Bluetooth® en- Connecting To A Particular Mobile Phone Or
abled Audio Device. When prompted on the device, Audio Device
select the “Uconnect®” device and enter the PIN. Uconnect® Phone will automatically connect to the high-
6. Uconnect® Phone will display an in process screen est priority paired phone and/or Audio Device within
while the system is connecting. range. If you need to choose a particular Phone or Audio
Device follow these steps:
7. When the pairing process has successfully completed,
the system will prompt you to choose whether or not 1. Press the SETTINGS hard-key.
this is your favorite device. Selecting Yes will make 2. Touch the “Phone/Bluetooth®” soft-key.
this device the highest priority. This device will take
precedence over other paired devices within range. 3. Touch to select the particular Phone or the “Phone/
Audio” soft-key and then an Audio Device.
NOTE: If No is selected, device priority is determined by
the order in which it was paired. The latest device paired 4. At the Options pop-up screen touch the “Connect
will have the higher priority. Device” soft-key.
You can also use the following VR command to bring up 5. Touch the “X” to exit out of the Settings screen.
a list of paired audio devices.
• “Show Paired Audio Devices.”
Disconnecting A Phone Or Audio Device Making A Phone Or Audio Device A Favorite
1. Press the SETTINGS hard-key. 1. Press the SETTINGS hard-key.
2. Touch the “Phone/Bluetooth®” soft-key. 2. Touch the “Phone/Bluetooth®” soft-key.
3
3. Select the Phone or Audio Device. 3. Select a different Phone or Audio Device then the
currently connected device.
4. At the Options pop-up screen touch the “Disconnect
Device” soft-key. 4. At the Options pop-up screen touch the “Make Favor-
ite” soft-key; you will see the chosen device move to
5. Touch the “X” to exit out of the Settings screen.
the top of the list.
Deleting A Phone Or Audio Device
1. Press the SETTINGS hard-key.
Phonebook Download (Automatic Phonebook
2. Touch the “Phone/Bluetooth®” soft-key. Transfer From Mobile Phone) — If Equipped
3. Select the Phone or Audio Device. If equipped and specifically supported by your phone,
Uconnect® Phone automatically downloads names (text
4. At the Options pop-up screen touch the “Delete De- names) and number entries from the mobile phone’s
vice” soft-key. phonebook. Specific Bluetooth® Phones with Phone
Book Access Profile may support this feature. See downloaded names can be used. Until then, if avail-
Uconnect® website, UconnectPhone.com, for supported able, the previously downloaded phonebook is avail-
phones. able for use.
• To call a name from a downloaded mobile phone book, • Only the phonebook of the currently connected mobile
follow the procedure in the “VOICE RECOGNITION phone is accessible.
QUICK TIPS” section.
• This downloaded phonebook cannot be edited or
• Automatic download and update of a phone book, if deleted on the Uconnect® Phone. These can only be
supported, begins as soon as the Bluetooth® wireless edited on the mobile phone. The changes are trans-
phone connection is made to the Uconnect® Phone, for ferred and updated to Uconnect® Phone on the next
example, after you start the vehicle. phone connection.
• A maximum of 1000 entries per phone will be down- Emergency And Towing Assistance
loaded and updated every time a phone is connected The 911/Help numbers can only be altered. These can not
to the Uconnect® Phone. be deleted or the names can not be changed.
• Depending on the maximum number of entries down- To change the 911/Help number follow these steps.
loaded, there may be a short delay before the latest
1. Touch the “Phonebook” soft-key from the Phone main
screen.
2. Touch the “911/Help” soft-key. Touch the appropriate • Redial
listing to alter, Emergency for example.
• Dial by touching in the number
3. Once Emergency is touched, the “Edit” soft-key ap-
• Voice Commands (Dial by Saying a Number, Call by
pears. Touch the “Edit” soft-key and you will be given
Saying a Phonebook Name, Redial, or Call Back) 3
the choice to Edit Number or Reset to Default.
• Mobile Phonebook
4. Follow the on-screen prompts to complete the task.
• Recent Call Log
Phone Call Features
NOTE: All of the above operations except Redial can be
The following features can be accessed through the
done with one call or less active.
Uconnect® Phone if the feature(s) are available on your
mobile service plan. For example, if your mobile service Dial By Saying A Number
plan provides three-way calling, this feature can be
1. Press the button to begin.
accessed through the Uconnect® Phone. Check with your
mobile service provider for the features that you have. 2. After the “Listening” prompt and the following beep,
say “Dial 248-555-1212.”
Ways To Initiate A Phone Call
Listed below are all the ways you can initiate a phone call 3. The Uconnect® Phone will dial 248-555-1212.
with Uconnect® Phone.
Call By Saying A Phonebook Name • Mute/unmute
1. Push the “Phone” button on your steering wheel • Transfer the call to/from the phone
to begin.
• Swap two active calls
2. After the “Listening” prompt and the following beep,
• Join two active calls together
say “Call John Doe Mobile.”
Touch-Tone Number Entry
3. The Uconnect® Phone will dial the number associated
with John Doe, or if there are multiple numbers it will 1. Touch the “Phone” soft-key.
ask which number you want to call for John Doe.
2. Touch the “Dial” soft-key.
Call Controls
3. The Touch-Tone screen will be displayed.
The touchscreen allows you to control the following call
features: 4. Use the numbered soft-keys to enter the number and
touch “Call.”
• Answer
To send a touch tone using Voice Recognition (VR), press
• End the button while in a call and say “1234#” or you
can say “Send Voicemail Password” if Voicemail pass-
• Ignore
word is stored in your mobile phonebook.
• Hold/unhold
Recent Calls Answer Or Reject An Incoming Call — No Call
You may browse up to 34 of the most recent of each of the Currently In Progress
following call types: When you receive a call on your mobile phone, the
Uconnect® Phone will interrupt the vehicle audio sys-
• Incoming Calls 3
tem, if on, and will display a pop-up showing Answer or
• Outgoing Calls Ignore. Press the Answer soft-key or the button on the
steering wheel to accept the call.
• Missed Calls
Answer Or Reject An Incoming Call — Call
• All Calls
Currently In Progress
These can be accessed by touching the recent calls If a call is currently in progress and you have another
soft-key on the Phone main screen. incoming call, you will hear the same network tones for
You can also press the button and say “Show my call waiting that you normally hear when using your
incoming calls” from any screen and the Incoming mobile phone. Uconnect® Phone will then interrupt the
calls will be displayed. vehicle audio system, if on, and will display a pop-up
showing Answer, Ignore or Transfer. Press the button
NOTE: Incoming can also be replaced with “Outgoing”, to place the current call on hold and answer the
“Recent” or “Missed.”
incoming call.
NOTE: The Uconnect® Phone compatible phones in the Toggling Between Calls
market today do not support rejecting an incoming call If two calls are in progress (one active and one on hold),
when another call is in progress. Therefore, the user can press the button until you hear a single beep,
only answer an incoming call or ignore it. indicating that the active and hold status of the two
Making A Second Call While Current Call Is In calls have switched. Only one call can be placed on
Progress hold at a time. Also you can press the “Swap” soft-key
on the Phone main screen.
To make a second call while you are currently on a call,
press the button and say “Dial” or “Call” followed Join Calls
by the phone number or phonebook entry you wish to When two calls are in progress (one active and one on
call. The first call will be on hold while the second call hold), press the “Join Calls” button on the Phone main
is in progress. Or you can place a call on hold by screen to combine all calls into a Conference Call.
touching the “Hold” soft-key on the Phone main
screen, then dial a number from the dialpad, recent Call Termination
calls or from the phonebooks. To go back to the first To end a call in progress, momentarily press the “End”
call, refer to “Toggling Between Calls” in this section. soft-key or the button. Only the active call(s) will be
To combine two calls, refer to “Join Calls” in this terminated and if there is a call on hold, it will become
section. the new active call. If the active call is terminated by
the far end, a call on hold may not become active cessation of the call on the Uconnect® Phone and
automatically. This is cell phone-dependent. transfer of the call to the mobile phone.
Redial Uconnect® Phone Features
1. Touch the “Redial” soft-key, or press the button Emergency Assistance 3
and after the “Listening” prompt and the following If you are in an emergency and the mobile phone is
beep, say “Redial.” reachable:
2. The Uconnect® Phone will call the last number that
• Pick up the phone and manually dial the emergency
was dialed from your mobile phone.
number for your area.
Call Continuation
If the phone is not reachable and the Uconnect® Phone is
Call continuation is the progression of a phone call on the operational, you may reach the emergency number as
Uconnect® Phone after the vehicle ignition key has been follows:
switched to OFF.
• Press the button to begin,
• After the ignition key is switched to OFF, a call can
continue on the Uconnect® Phone either until the call
ends, or until the vehicle battery condition dictates
• After the “Listening” prompt and the following beep,
WARNING!
say “Emergency” and the Uconnect® Phone will in-
struct the paired mobile phone to call the emergency Your phone must be turned on and connected to the
number. This feature is supported in the U.S., Canada, Uconnect® Phone to allow use of this vehicle feature
and Mexico. in emergency situations, when the mobile phone has
NOTE: network coverage and stays connected to the
Uconnect® Phone.
• The emergency number dialed is based on the country
where the vehicle is purchased (911 for the U.S. and Roadside Assistance/Towing Assistance
Canada and 060 for Mexico). The number dialed may If you need roadside/towing assistance:
not be applicable with the available mobile service and
area. • Press the button to begin,
• The Uconnect® Phone does slightly lower your • After the “Listening” prompt and the following beep,
chances of successfully making a phone call as to that say “Roadside Assistance” or say “Towing Assis-
for the mobile phone directly. tance.”
NOTE: The roadside/towing assistance number dialed is or automated customer service line. Some services re-
based on the country where the vehicle is purchased quire immediate response selection. In some instances,
(1-800-528-2069 for the U.S., 1-800-363-4869 for Canada, that may be too quick for use of the Uconnect® Phone.
55-14-3454 for Mexico City and 1-800-712-3040 for out-
When calling a number with your Uconnect® Phone that
side Mexico City in Mexico). Please refer to the Chrysler 3
normally requires you to enter in a touch-tone sequence
Group LLC 24-Hour “Roadside Assistance” coverage
on your mobile phone keypad, you can utilize the
details in the Warranty Information Booklet and on the
touchscreen or press the button and say the word
24-Hour Roadside Assistance Card.
“Send” then the sequence you wish to enter. For
Voice Mail Calling example, if required to enter your PIN followed with
To learn how to access your voice mail, refer to “Working a pound, (3 7 4 6 #), you can press the
button and
say, “Send 3 7 4 6 #.” Saying “Send” followed by a
with Automated Systems”.
number, or sequence of numbers, is also to be used for
Working With Automated Systems navigating through an automated customer service
This method is used in instances where one generally has center menu structure, and to leave a number on a
to press numbers on the mobile phone keypad while pager.
navigating through an automated telephone system. You can also send stored mobile phonebook entries as
You can use your Uconnect® Phone to access a voice mail tones for fast and easy access to voice mail and pager
system or an automated service, such as a paging service
entries. For example, if you previously created a Phone- • Pauses, wait or other characters that are supported by
book entry and/or Last Name as “Voice Password,” then some phones are not supported over Bluetooth®.
if you press the button and say “Send Voicemail These additional symbols will be ignored when dialing
Password,” the Uconnect® Phone will then send the a numbered sequence.
corresponding phone number associated with the
Barge In — Overriding Prompts
phonebook entry, as tones over the phone.
The button can be used when you wish to skip part
NOTE: of a prompt and issue your voice command immedi-
• The first number encountered for that contact will be ately. For example, if a prompt is asking “There are
sent. All other numbers entered for that contact will be two numbers with the name John. Say the full name”
ignored. you could push the button and say, “John Smith” to
select that option without having to listen to the rest of
• You may not hear all of the tones due to mobile phone the voice prompt.
network configurations. This is normal.
• Some paging and voice mail systems have system time
out settings that are too short and may not allow the
use of this feature.
Voice Response Length Dialing Using The Mobile Phone Keypad
It is possible for you to choose between Brief and
Detailed Voice Response Length. WARNING!
1. Press the MORE hard-key, then touch the “Settings” Driving while distracted can result in loss of vehicle
3
soft-key. control, accident and injury. Chrysler Group LLC
strongly recommends that you use extreme caution
2. Touch the “Display” soft-key, then scroll down to when using any device or feature that may take your
Voice Response Length. focus off the road or your hands off the steering
3. Select either “Brief” or “Detailed” by touching the box wheel. Your primary responsibility is the safe opera-
next to the selection. A check-mark will appear to tion of your vehicle. We recommend against the use
indicate your selection. of any handheld device while driving, encourage the
use of voice-operated systems when possible and
Phone And Network Status Indicators that you become aware of applicable laws that may
Uconnect® Phone will provide notification to inform you affect the use of electronic devices while driving.
of your phone and network status when you are attempt-
You can dial a phone number with your mobile phone
ing to make a phone call using Uconnect® Phone. The
keypad and still use the Uconnect® Phone (while dialing
status is given for network signal strength and phone
via the mobile phone keypad, the user must exercise
battery strength.
caution and take precautionary safety measures). By
dialing a number with your connected Bluetooth® mo- Advanced Phone Connectivity
bile phone, the audio will be played through your
Transfer Call To And From Mobile Phone
vehicle’s audio system. The Uconnect® Phone will work
the same as if you dial the number using voice a The Uconnect® Phone allows ongoing calls to be trans-
command. ferred from your mobile phone to the Uconnect® Phone
without terminating the call. To transfer an ongoing call
NOTE: Certain brands of mobile phones do not send the from your connected mobile phone to the Uconnect®
dial ring to the Uconnect® Phone to play it on the vehicle Phone or vice versa, press the “Transfer” button on the
audio system, so you will not hear it. Under this situa- Phone main screen.
tion, after successfully dialing a number the user may feel
that the call did not go through even though the call is in Connect Or Disconnect Link Between the
progress. Once your call is answered, you will hear the Uconnect® Phone And Mobile Phone
audio. If you would like to connect or disconnect the Bluetooth®
Mute/Un-Mute (Mute OFF) connection between a Uconnect® Phone paired mobile
phone and the Uconnect® Phone, follow the instructions
When you mute the Uconnect® Phone, you will still be
described in your mobile phone User’s Manual.
able to hear the conversation coming from the other
party, but the other party will not be able to hear you. To
mute the Uconnect® Phone simply touch the “Mute”
button on the Phone main screen.
Things You Should Know About Your Uconnect® • Low road noise
Phone
• Smooth road surface
Voice Command
• Fully closed windows
• For best performance, adjust the rearview mirror to 3
• Dry weather condition
provide at least ½ inch (1 cm) gap between the
overhead console (if equipped) and the mirror. NOTE:
• Always wait for the beep before speaking. • Even though the system is designed for users speaking
in North American English, French, and Spanish ac-
• Speak normally without pausing, just as you would
cents, the system may not always work for some.
speak to a person sitting a few feet/meters away from
you. • When navigating through an automated system such
as voice mail, or when sending a page, at the end of
• Make sure that no one other than you is speaking
speaking the digit string, make sure to say “Send.”
during a Voice Command period.
• Storing names in the phonebook when the vehicle is
Performance is maximized under:
not in motion is recommended.
• Low-to-medium blower setting
• It is not recommended to store similar sounding names
• Low-to-medium vehicle speed in the Uconnect® Phonebook.
• Phonebook (Downloaded and Uconnect® Phone Lo- Far End Audio Performance
cal) name recognition rate is optimized when the
• Audio quality is maximized under:
entries are not similar.
• Low-To-Medium Blower Setting
• Numbers must be spoken in single digits. “800” must
be spoken “eight-zero-zero” not “eight hundred.” • Low-To-Medium Vehicle Speed
• You can say “O” (letter “O”) for “0” (zero). • Low Road Noise
• Even though international dialing for most number • Smooth Road Surface
combinations is supported, some shortcut dialing
• Fully Closed Windows
number combinations may not be supported.
• Dry Weather Conditions
• In a convertible vehicle, system performance may be
compromised with the convertible top down. • Operation From The Driver’s Seat
• Performance, such as audio clarity, echo, and loudness
to a large degree rely on the phone and network, and
not the Uconnect® Phone
• Echo at the phone far end can sometimes be reduced Power-Up
by lowering the in-vehicle audio volume After switching the ignition key from OFF to either the
• In a convertible vehicle, system performance may be ON or ACC position, or after a language change, you
compromised with the convertible top down must wait at least 15 seconds prior to using the system.
3
Bluetooth® Communication Link
Mobile phones have been found to lose connection to the
Uconnect® Phone. When this happens, the connection
can generally be reestablished by switching the phone
off/on. Your mobile phone is recommended to remain in
Bluetooth® ON mode.
Voice Tree
NOTE: • You can replace “4” with any message number shown
on the screen.
• You can replace “John Smith” with any name in your
mobile or favorite phone book. You can also say “Send • If your phone does not support phonebook download
a message to John Smith” and the system will ask you or call log download over Bluetooth® than these
3
which phone number you want to send a message to commands will return a response that the contact does
for John Smith. not exist in the phonebook.
• You can replace “Mobile” with “Home,” “Work” or • Available Voice Commands are shown in bold face and
“Other.” underlined in the gray shaded boxes.
• You can replace “Incoming Calls” with “Outgoing General Information
Calls” or “Missed Calls.” This device complies with Part 15 of the FCC rules and
• Messaging commands only work if the Uconnect® RSS 210 of Industry Canada. Operation is subject to the
system is equipped with this feature and the mobile following conditions:
phone supports messaging over Bluetooth®. • Changes or modifications not expressly approved by
• You can replace “248 555 1212” with any phone the party responsible for compliance could void the
number supported by your Mobile phone. user’s authority to operate the equipment.
• This device must accept any interference received, • Hands Free text messaging (“Send a message to John
including interference that may cause undesired op- Smith’s Mobile”).
eration.
• Redialing last dialed numbers (“Redial”).
Uconnect® PHONE (8.4/8.4N) • Calling Back the last incoming call number (“Call
Uconnect® 8.4/8.4 Nav Back”).
Uconnect® Phone is a voice-activated, hands-free, in- • View Call logs on screen (“Show incoming calls”,
vehicle communications system. Uconnect® Phone al- “Show Outgoing calls”, “Show missed Calls”, “Show
lows you to dial a phone number with your mobile Recent Calls”).
phone. • Searching Contacts phone number (“Search for John
Uconnect® Phone supports the following features: Smith Mobile”).
Voice Activated Features: Screen Activated Features
• Hands Free dialing via Voice (“Call John Smith’s • Dialing via Keypad using the touchscreen.
Mobile” or, “Dial 248 555-1212”).
• Viewing and Calling contacts from Phonebooks dis-
• Hands Free text to speech listening of your incoming played on the touchscreen.
SMS messages.
• Setting Favorite Contact Phone numbers so they are For Uconnect® customer support:
easily accessible on the Main Phone screen.
• U.S. residents - visit www.UconnectPhone.com or call
• Viewing and Calling contacts from Recent Call logs. 1-877-855-8400.
• Reviewing your recent Incoming SMS. • Canadian Residents - visit www.UconnectPhone.com or 3
call, 1-800-465-2001 (English) or 1-800-387-9983 (French).
• Sending a text message via the touchscreen.
Uconnect® Phone allows you to transfer calls between
• Listen to Music on your Bluetooth® Device via the the system and your mobile phone as you enter or exit
touchscreen. your vehicle and enables you to mute the system’s
• Pairing up to 10 phones/audio devices for easy access microphone for private conversation.
to connect to them quickly.
WARNING!
NOTE: Your phone must be capable of SMS messaging
via Bluetooth® for messaging features to work properly. Any voice commanded system should be used only
Your mobile phone’s audio is transmitted through your in safe driving conditions following all applicable
vehicle’s audio system; the system will automatically laws, including laws regarding phone use. Your at-
mute your radio when using the Uconnect® Phone. tention should be focused on safely operating the
vehicle. Failure to do so may result in an accident
causing serious injury or death.
The Uconnect® Phone is driven through your phonebook etc., When you press the button you will
Bluetooth® “Hands-Free Profile” mobile phone. hear a BEEP. The beep is your signal to give a
Uconnect® features Bluetooth® technology - the global command.
standard that enables different electronic devices to con-
Uconnect® Voice Command Button
nect to each other without wires or a docking station, so
Uconnect® Phone works no matter where you stow your The Uconnect® Voice Command Button is
mobile phone (be it your purse, pocket, or briefcase), as only used for “barge in” and when you are
long as your phone is turned on and has been paired to already in a call and you want to send Tones
the vehicle’s Uconnect® Phone. The Uconnect® Phone or make another call.
allows up to ten mobile phones or audio devices to be The button is also used to access the Voice Com-
linked to the system. Only one linked (or paired) mobile mands for the Uconnect® Voice Command features if
phone and one audio device can be used with the system your vehicle is equipped. Please see the Uconnect®
at a time. The system is available in English, Spanish, or Voice Command section for direction on how to use
French languages. the button.
Uconnect® Phone Button The Uconnect® Phone is fully integrated with the ve-
The Uconnect® Phone Button is used to hicles audio system. The volume of the Uconnect® Phone
enter the phone mode and make calls, show can be adjusted either from the radio volume control
recent, incoming, outgoing calls, view knob or from the steering wheel radio control (right
switch), if so equipped.
Operation “John Smith” and then “mobile”, the following com-
pound command can be said: “Call John Smith mo-
Voice commands can be used to operate the Uconnect®
bile.”
Phone and to navigate through the Uconnect® Phone
menu structure. Voice commands are required after most • For each feature explanation in this section, only the
Uconnect® Phone prompts. There are two general meth- 3
compound command form of the voice command is
ods for how Voice Command works: given. You can also break the commands into parts and
say each part of the command when you are asked for
1. Say compound commands like “Call John Smith mo-
bile.” it. For example, you can use the compound command
form voice command “Search for John Smith,” or you
2. Say the individual commands and allow the system to can break the compound command form into two
guide you to complete the task. voice commands: “Search Contact” and when asked
You will be prompted for a specific command and then “John Smith.” Please remember, the Uconnect® Phone
guided through the available options. works best when you talk in a normal conversational
tone, as if speaking to someone sitting a few feet/
• Prior to giving a voice command, one must wait for the meters away from you.
beep, which follows the “Listen” prompt or another
prompt. Natural Speech
Your Uconnect® Phone Voice system uses a Natural
• For certain operations, compound commands can be
Language Voice Recognition (VR) engine.
used. For example, instead of saying “Call” and then
Natural speech allows the user to speak commands in Voice Command Tree
phrases or complete sentences. The system filters out Refer to “Voice Tree” in this section.
certain non-word utterances and sounds such as “ah”
and “eh.” The system handles fill-in words such as “I Help Command
would like to.” If you need assistance at any prompt, or if you want to
The system handles multiple inputs in the same phrase know your options at any prompt, say “Help” following
or sentence such as “make a phone call” and “to Kelly the beep.
Smith.” For multiple inputs in the same phrase or sen- To activate the Uconnect® Phone from idle, simply push
tence, the system identifies the topic or context and the button on your steering wheel and say a
provides the associated follow-up prompt such as “Who command or say “help.” All Uconnect® Phone ses-
do you want to call?” in the case where a phone call was sions begin with a push of the button on the radio
requested but the specific name was not recognized. control head.
The system utilizes continuous dialog; when the system Cancel Command
requires more information from the user it will ask a
question to which the user can respond without pressing At any prompt, after the beep, you can say “Cancel” and
the “Voice Command” button on your steering you will be returned to the main menu.
wheel.
You can also push the or button on your steering 1. Touch the “Phone” soft-key on the screen to begin.
wheel when the system is listening for a command
2. If there is no phone currently connected with the
and be returned to the main or previous menu.
system, a pop-up will appear.
Pair (Link) Uconnect® Phone To A Mobile Phone
3
To begin using your Uconnect® Phone, you must pair
your compatible Bluetooth® enabled mobile phone.
NOTE:
• You must have Bluetooth® enabled on your mobile
phone to complete this procedure.
• The vehicle must be in PARK.
To complete the pairing process, you will need to refer-
ence your mobile phone Owner’s Manual. The
Uconnect® website may also provide detailed instruc-
Mobile Phone Pairing
tions for pairing.
3. Select “Yes” to begin the pairing process. Then, search
for available devices on your Bluetooth® enabled
mobile phone. When prompted on the phone, enter
the name and PIN shown on the Uconnect® screen.
• If “No” is selected, touch the “Settings” soft-key
from the Uconnect® Phone main screen.
• Touch the “Add Device” soft-key.
• Search for available devices on your Bluetooth®
enabled mobile phone. When prompted on the
phone, enter the name and PIN shown on the
Uconnect® screen.
• See step 4 to complete the process. Mobile Phone Pairing Progress
4. Uconnect® Phone will display an in progress screen 5. When the pairing process has successfully completed,
while the system is connecting. the system will prompt you to choose whether or not
this is your favorite phone. Selecting “Yes” will make
this phone the highest priority. This phone will take
precedence over other paired phones within range.
Pair Additional Mobile Phones NOTE: For phones which are not made a favorite, the
phone priority is determined by the order in which it was
1. Touch the “Settings” soft-key from the Phone main
paired. The latest phone paired will have the higher
screen.
priority.
2. Touch the “Add Device” soft-key. You can also use the following VR commands to bring up 3
3. Search for available devices on your Bluetooth® en- the Paired Phone screen from any screen on the radio:
abled mobile phone. When prompted on the phone, • “Show Paired Phones”
enter the name and PIN shown on the Uconnect®
screen. • “Connect My Phone”
4. Uconnect® Phone will display an in process screen Pair A Bluetooth® Streaming Audio Device
while the system is connecting. 1. Touch the “Player” soft-key to begin.
5. When the pairing process has successfully completed, 2. Change the Source to Bluetooth®.
the system will prompt you to choose whether or not
this is your favorite phone. Selecting “Yes” will make 3. Touch the “Bluetooth®” soft-key to display the Paired
this phone the highest priority. This phone will take Audio Devices screen.
precedence over other paired phones within range. 4. Touch the “Add Device” soft-key.
NOTE: If there is no device currently connected with the You can also use the following VR command to bring up
system, a pop-up will appear. a list of paired audio devices:
5. Search for available devices on your Bluetooth® en- • “Show Paired Phones”
abled audio device. When prompted on the device,
• “Connect My Phone”
enter the PIN shown on the Uconnect® screen.
Connecting To A Particular Mobile Phone Or
6. Uconnect® Phone will display an in process screen
Audio Device After Pairing
while the system is connecting.
Uconnect® Phone will automatically connect to the high-
7. When the pairing process has successfully completed, est priority paired phone and/or Audio Device within
the system will prompt you to choose whether or not range. If you need to choose a particular phone or Audio
this is your favorite device. Selecting “Yes” will make Device follow these steps:
this device the highest priority. This device will take
precedence over other paired devices within range. 1. Press the “Settings” button on the touchscreen.
NOTE: For devices which are not made a favorite, the 2. Press the “Paired Phones” or “Paired Audio Sources”
device priority is determined by the order in which it was button on the touchscreen.
paired. The latest device paired will have the higher
priority.
3. Press to select the particular Phone or the particular Deleting A Phone Or Audio Device
Audio Device.
1. Press the “Settings” button on the touchscreen.
4. Press the “X” to exit out of the Settings screen.
2. Press the “Pair Phones” or “Paired Audio Devices”
Disconnecting A Phone Or Audio Device button on the touchscreen. 3
1. Press the “Settings” button on the touchscreen. 3. Press the settings icon button located to the right of the
device name for a different Phone or Audio Device
2. Press the “Paired Phones” or “Paires Audio Devices”
than the currently connected device.
button on the touchscreen.
4. The options pop-up will be displayed.
3. Press the settings icon button located to the right of the
device name. 5. Press the “Delete Device” button on the touchscreen.
4. The options pop-up will be displayed. 6. Press the “X” to exit out of the Settings screen.
5. Press the “Disconnect Device” button on the touch- Making A Phone Or Audio Device A Favorite
screen.
1. Press the “Settings” button on the touchscreen.
2. Press the “Paired Phones” or “Paired Audio Devices”
button on the touchscreen.
3. Press the settings icon button located to the right of the • To call a name from a downloaded mobile phone book,
device name. follow the procedure in the “VOICE RECOGNITION
QUICK TIPS” section.
4. The options pop-up will be displayed.
• Automatic download and update of a phone book, if
5. Press the “Make Favorite” button on the touchscreen;
supported, begins as soon as the Bluetooth® wireless
you will see the chosen device move to the top of the
phone connection is made to the Uconnect® Phone, for
list.
example, after you start the vehicle.
• A maximum of 1000 entries per phone will be down-
Phonebook Download (Automatic Phonebook loaded and updated every time a phone is connected
Transfer From Mobile Phone) — If Equipped to the Uconnect® Phone.
If equipped and specifically supported by your phone, • Depending on the maximum number of entries down-
Uconnect® Phone automatically downloads names (text loaded, there may be a short delay before the latest
names) and number entries from the mobile phone’s downloaded names can be used. Until then, if avail-
phonebook. Specific Bluetooth® Phones with Phone able, the previously downloaded phonebook is avail-
Book Access Profile may support this feature. See able for use.
Uconnect® website, UconnectPhone.com, for supported
• Only the phonebook of the currently connected mobile
phones.
phone is accessible.
• This downloaded phonebook cannot be edited or
deleted on the Uconnect® Phone. These can only be
edited on the mobile phone. The changes are trans-
ferred and updated to Uconnect® Phone on the next
phone connection. 3
Managing Your Favorite Phonebook
There are three ways you can add an entry to your
Favorite Phonebook.
1. During an active call of a number to make a favorite,
touch and hold a favorite button on the top of the
phone main screen.
Phonebook Favorites
2. After loading the mobile phonebook, select Phone- NOTE: If the Favorites list is full, you will be asked to
book from the Phone main screen, then select the remove an existing favorite.
appropriate number. Touch the + next to the selected
3. From the Phone main screen, select Phonebook. From
number to display the options pop-up. In the pop-up
the Phonebook screen, select the “Favorites” soft-key
select “Add to Favorites.”
and then select the “+” soft-key located to the right of
the phonebook record. Select an empty entry and
touch the “+” on that selected entry. When the Options To Remove A Favorite
pop-up appears, touch “Add from Mobile.” You will
1. To remove a Favorite, select phonebook from the
then be asked which contact and number to choose
Phone main screen.
from your mobile phonebook. When complete the
new favorite will be shown. 2. Next select Favorites on the left side of the screen and
then touch the + Options soft-key.
3. Touch the + next to the Favorite you would like to
remove.
Add From Mobile

Emergency And Towing Assistance
The Emergency and Towing Assistance Favorite numbers
can only be altered. These cannot be deleted and the
names cannot be changed.
3
To change the Emergency or Towing Assistance numbers
follow these steps.
1. Touch the “Phonebook” soft-key from the Phone main
screen.
2. Touch the “Favorites” soft-key. Scroll to the bottom of
the list to locate the Emergency and Towing Assistance
Remove From Favorites Favorites.
4. The Options pop-up will display, touch “Remove from
3. Touch the + Options soft-key.
Favs.”
4. Touch the + next to appropriate Favorite that is to be
altered.
Phone Call Features
The following features can be accessed through the
Uconnect® Phone if the feature(s) are available and
supported by Bluetooth® on your mobile service plan.
For example, if your mobile service plan provides three-
way calling, this feature can be accessed through the
Uconnect® Phone. Check with your mobile service pro-
vider for the features that you have.
Ways To Initiate A Phone Call
Listed below are all the ways you can initiate a phone call
with Uconnect® Phone.
Emergency And Breakdown Assistance
5. The Options pop-up will appear and you can choose • Redial
between Editing the number or resetting the number • Dial by pressing in the number
to default.
• Voice Commands (Dial by Saying a Name, Call by
Saying a Phonebook Name, Redial or Call Back)
• Favorites
• Mobile Phonebook 3. The Uconnect® Phone will dial the number associated
with John Doe, or if there are multiple numbers it will
• Recent Call Log
ask which number you want to call for John Doe.
• SMS Message Viewer
Call Controls
3
Dial By Saying A Number The touchscreen allows you to control the following call
1. Push the “Phone” button on your steering wheel features:
to begin.
• Answer
• End
say “Dial 151-1234-5555.”
• Ignore
3. The Uconnect® Phone will dial the number
151-1234-5555. • Hold/unhold
Call By Saying A Phonebook Name • Mute/unmute
1. Push the “Phone” button on your steering wheel • Transfer the call to/from the phone
to begin.
• Swap two active calls
• Join two active calls together
say “Call John Doe Mobile.”
Touch-Tone Number Entry Recent Calls
1. Press the “Phone” button on the touchscreen. You may browse up to 34 of the most recent of each of the
following call types:
2. Press the “Dial” button on the touchscreen.
3. The Touch-Tone screen will be displayed.
4. Use the numbered buttons on the touchscreens to
enter the number and press “Call.”
To send a touch-tone using Voice Recognition (VR), push
the “VR” button on your steering wheel while in a
call and say “Send 1234#” or you can say “Send
Voicemail Password” if Voicemail password is stored
in your mobile phonebook.
Recent Calls
• Incoming Calls
• Outgoing Calls
• Missed Calls Answer Or Ignore An Incoming Call — No Call
Currently In Progress
• All Calls
When you receive a call on your mobile phone, the
These can be accessed by touching the “recent calls” Uconnect® Phone will interrupt the vehicle audio sys-
soft-key on the Phone main screen. tem. Push the “Phone” button on the steering wheel 3
You can also press the button and say “Show my to accept the call. You can also press the “answer”
incoming calls” from any screen and the Incoming button on the touchscreen or press the caller ID box.
calls will be displayed. Answer Or Ignore An Incoming Call — Call
You can also press the button and say “Show my Currently In Progress
recent calls” from any screen and the All calls screen If a call is currently in progress and you have another
will be displayed. incoming call, you will hear the same network tones for
NOTE: Incoming can also be replaced with “Outgoing,” call waiting that you normally hear when using your
“Recent” or “Missed.” mobile phone. Push the “Phone” button on the
steering wheel, or press the “answer” button on the
touchscreen or caller ID box to place the current call on
hold and answer the incoming call.
NOTE: The Uconnect® Phone compatible phones in the Toggling Between Calls
market today do not support rejecting an incoming call If two calls are in progress (one active and one on hold),
when another call is in progress. Therefore, the user can press the “Swap” button on the Phone main screen. Only
only answer an incoming call or ignore it. one call can be placed on hold at a time.
Making A Second Call While Current Call Is In
You can also press the “Phone” button to toggle
Progress between the active and held phone call.
You can place a call on hold by pressing the “Hold”
Join Calls
button on the Phone main screen, then dial a number
from the dialpad, recent calls, SMS Inbox or from the When two calls are in progress (one active and one on
phonebooks. To go back to the first call, refer to “Toggling hold), press the “Join Calls” button on the Phone main
Between Calls” in this section. To combine two calls, refer screen to combine all calls into a Conference Call.
to “Join Calls” in this section. Call Termination
Place/Retrieve A Call From Hold To end a call in progress, momentarily press the “Phone”
During an active call, press the “Hold” button on the button or the “end” button on the touchscreen.
Phone main screen. Only the active call(s) will be terminated and if there is
a call on hold, it will become the new active call.
Redial Uconnect® Phone Features
Press the “Redial” button on the touchscreen, or press the Emergency Assistance
“Phone” button and after the “Listening” prompt
If you are in an emergency and the mobile phone is
and the following beep, say “Redial.”
reachable: 3
The Uconnect® Phone will call the last number that was
• Pick up the phone and manually dial the emergency
dialed from your mobile phone.
number for your area.
Call Continuation
If the phone is not reachable and the Uconnect® Phone is
Call continuation is the progression of a phone call on the operational, you may reach the emergency number as
Uconnect® Phone after the vehicle ignition key has been follows:
switched to OFF.
1. Press the button to begin.
NOTE: The call will remain within the vehicle audio
system until the phone becomes out of range for the
say “Dial Emergency” and the Uconnect® Phone will
Bluetooth® connection. It is recommended to press the
instruct the paired mobile phone to call the emergency
“transfer” button on the touchscreen when leaving the
number. This feature is supported in the U.S., Canada,
vehicle.
and Mexico.
NOTE:
WARNING!
• The Emergency call may also be initiated by using the
touchscreen. Your phone must be turned on and connected to the
Uconnect® Phone to allow use of this vehicle feature
• The emergency number dialed is based on the country in emergency situations, when the mobile phone has
where the vehicle is purchased (911 for the U.S. and network coverage and stays connected to the
Canada and 060 for Mexico). The number dialed may Uconnect® Phone.
not be applicable with the available mobile service and
area. Roadside Assistance/Towing Assistance
• The Uconnect® Phone does slightly lower your If you need roadside/towing assistance:
chances of successfully making a phone call as to that 1. Push the button to begin.
for the mobile phone directly.
say “Roadside Assistance” or say “Towing Assis-
tance.”
NOTE: The roadside/towing assistance number dialed is or automated customer service line. Some services re-
based on the country where the vehicle is purchased quire immediate response selection. In some instances,
(1-800-521-2779 for the U.S./Canada, 55-14-3454 for that may be too quick for use of the Uconnect® Phone.
Mexico City and 1-800-712-3040 for outside Mexico City
When calling a number with your Uconnect® Phone that
in Mexico). Please refer to the Chrysler Group LLC 3
normally requires you to enter in a touch-tone sequence
24-Hour “Roadside Assistance” coverage details in the
on your mobile phone keypad, you can utilize the
Warranty Information Booklet and on the 24-Hour Road-
touchscreen or push the button and say the word
side Assistance Card.
“Send” then the sequence you wish to enter. For
Voice Mail Calling example, if required to enter your PIN followed with
To learn how to access your voice mail, refer to “Working a pound, (3 7 4 6 #), you can push the
button and
say, “Send 3 7 4 6 #.” Saying “Send” followed by a
with Automated Systems”.
number, or sequence of numbers, is also to be used for
Working With Automated Systems navigating through an automated customer service
This method is used in instances where one generally has center menu structure, and to leave a number on a
to press numbers on the mobile phone keypad while pager.
navigating through an automated telephone system. You can also send stored mobile phonebook entries as
You can use your Uconnect® Phone to access a voice mail tones for fast and easy access to voice mail and pager
system or an automated service, such as a paging service
entries. For example, if you previously created a Phone- • Pauses, wait or other characters that are supported by
book entry with First and/or Last Name as “Voicemail some phones are not supported over Bluetooth®.
Password”, then if you push the button and say These additional symbols will be ignored in the dialing
“Send Voicemail Password” the Uconnect® Phone will a numbered sequence.
then send the corresponding phone number associ-
Barge In — Overriding Prompts
ated with the phonebook entry, as tones over the
phone. The button can be used when you wish to skip part
of a prompt and issue your voice command immedi-
NOTE:
ately. For example, if a prompt is asking “There are
• The first number encountered for that contact will be two numbers with the name John. Say the full name”
sent. All other numbers entered for that contact will be you could push the button and say, “John Smith” to
ignored. select that option without having to listen to the rest of
the voice prompt.
• You may not hear all of the tones due to mobile phone
network configurations. This is normal. Voice Response Length
• Some paging and voice mail systems have system time It is possible for you to choose between Brief and
out settings that are too short and may not allow the Detailed Voice Response Length.
use of this feature.
1. Press the “More” button on the touchscreen (where Dialing Using The Mobile Phone Keypad
available), then press the “Settings” button on the
touchscreen. WARNING!
2. Press the “Display” button on the touchscreen, then Driving while distracted can result in loss of vehicle
3
scroll down to Voice Response Length. control, accident and injury. Chrysler Group LLC
3. Select either “Brief” or “Detailed” by pressing the box strongly recommends that you use extreme caution
next to the selection. A check-mark will appear to when using any device or feature that may take your
indicate your selection. focus off the road or your hands off the steering
wheel. Your primary responsibility is the safe opera-
Phone And Network Status Indicators tion of your vehicle. We recommend against the use
Uconnect® Phone will provide notification to inform you of any handheld device while driving, encourage the
of your phone and network status when you are attempt- use of voice-operated systems when possible and
ing to make a phone call using Uconnect® Phone. The that you become aware of applicable laws that may
status is given for network signal strength and phone affect the use of electronic devices while driving.
battery strength.
You can dial a phone number with your mobile phone
keypad and still use the Uconnect® Phone (while dialing
via the mobile phone keypad, the user must exercise
caution and take precautionary safety measures). By
dialing a number with your connected Bluetooth® mo- Advanced Phone Connectivity
bile phone, the audio will be played through your
Transfer Call To And From Mobile Phone
vehicle’s audio system. The Uconnect® Phone will work
the same as if you dial the number using voice a The Uconnect® Phone allows ongoing calls to be trans-
command. ferred from your mobile phone to the Uconnect® Phone
without terminating the call. To transfer an ongoing call
NOTE: Certain brands of mobile phones do not send the from your connected mobile phone to the Uconnect®
dial ring to the Uconnect® Phone to play it on the vehicle Phone or vice versa, press the “Transfer” button on the
audio system, so you will not hear it. Under this situa- Phone main screen.
tion, after successfully dialing a number the user may feel
that the call did not go through even though the call is in Connect Or Disconnect Link Between The
progress. Once your call is answered, you will hear the Uconnect® Phone And Mobile Phone
audio. If you would like to connect or disconnect the Bluetooth®
Mute/Un-Mute (Mute ON/OFF) connection between a Uconnect® Phone paired mobile
phone and the Uconnect® Phone, follow the instructions
When you mute the Uconnect® Phone, you will still be
described in your mobile phone User’s Manual.
able to hear the conversation coming from the other
party, but the other party will not be able to hear you. To
mute the Uconnect® Phone simply press the “Mute”
button on the Phone main screen.
Things You Should Know About Your Uconnect® • Low Road Noise
Phone
• Smooth Road Surface
Voice Command
• Fully Closed Windows
• For best performance, adjust the rearview mirror to 3
• Dry Weather Condition
provide at least ½ inch (1 cm) gap between the
overhead console (if equipped) and the mirror. Even though the system is designed for many languages
and accents, the system may not always work for some.
• Always wait for the beep before speaking.
When navigating through an automated system such as
• Speak normally, without pausing, just as you would voice mail, or when sending a page, before speaking the
speak to a person sitting a few feet/meters away from digit string, make sure to say “Send.”
you.
NOTE: It is recommended that you do not store names in
• Ensure that no one other than you is speaking during your favorites phonebook while the vehicle is in motion.
a voice command period.
Phonebook (Mobile and Favorites) name recognition rate
Performance is maximized under: is optimized when the entries are not similar. You can say
• Low-To-Medium Blower Setting “O” (letter “O”) for “0” (zero).
• Low-To-Medium Vehicle Speed

Even though international dialing for most number com- Performance such as audio clarity, echo, and loudness to
binations is supported, some shortcut dialing number a large degree rely on the phone and network, and not
combinations may not be supported. the Uconnect® Phone.
Far End Audio Performance Echo at the far end can sometimes be reduced by
Audio quality is maximized under: lowering the in-vehicle audio volume.
• Low-To-Medium Blower Setting In a convertible vehicle, system performance may be

compromised with the convertible top down.
• Low-To-Medium Vehicle Speed
Voice Text Reply
• Low Road Noise
Uconnect® Phone can read or send new messages on
• Smooth Road Surface your phone.
• Fully Closed Windows Your phone must support SMS over Bluetooth® to use
this feature. If the Uconnect® Phone determines your
• Dry Weather Conditions
phone is not compatible with SMS messaging over
• Operation From The Driver’s Seat Bluetooth® the “Messaging” button will be grayed out
and the feature will not be available for use.
Read Messages:
If you receive a new text message while your phone is
connected to Uconnect® Phone, an announcement will
be made to notify you that you have a new text message.
3
Voice Text List

NOTE: Uconnect® Phone SMS is only available when the
vehicle is not moving.
Voice Text Reply

Once a message is received and viewed or listened to, 3. Touch one of the 18 preset messages and the person
you will have the following options: you wish to send the message to.
• Send a Reply
• Forward
• Call
Send Messages Using Soft-Keys:
You can send messages using Uconnect® Phone. To send
a new message:
1. Touch the “Phone” soft-key.
2. Touch the “messaging” soft-key then “New Message.”
Preset Message List
4. If multiple numbers are available for the contact select 3. After the system prompts you for what message you
which number you would like to have the message want to send, say the message you wish to send or say
sent. “List.” There are 18 preset messages.
5. Press “Send” or “Cancel.” While the list of defined messages are being read, you can
interrupt the system by pressing the 3
button and
Send Messages Using Voice Commands:
saying the message you want to send.
1. Press the button.
After the system confirms that you want to send your
2. After the “Listening” prompt and the following beep, message to John Smith, your message will be sent.
say “Send message to John Smith mobile.”
4. I can’t talk right now.
5. Call me.
6. I’ll call you later.
7. I’m on my way.
8. Thanks.
9. I’ll be late.
10. I will be <number> minutes late.
11. See you in <number> minutes.
Preset Message List 12. Stuck in traffic.
List of Preset Messages:
13. Start without me.
1. Yes.
14. Where are you?
2. No.
15. Are you there yet?
3. Okay.
16. I need directions.
17. I’m lost. Power-Up
18. See you later. After switching the ignition key from OFF to either the
ON or ACC position, or after a language change, you
Bluetooth® Communication Link
must wait at least 15 seconds prior to using the system.
Mobile phones have been found to lose connection to the 3
Uconnect® Phone. When this happens, the connection
can generally be re-established by switching the mobile
phone OFF/ON. Your mobile phone is recommended to
remain in Bluetooth® ON mode.
Voice Tree
NOTE: 6. Send dial tones for automated systems is available
while a call is active. This is an example that uses a
1. You can replace “John Smith” with any name in your Phonebook Record named “Voicemail Password.”
mobile or favorite phone book. You can also say “Send
a message to John Smith” and the system will ask you 7. Storing Dial tones in contact names is possible but
only the first number encountered in a contact name 3
which phone number you want to send a message to
will be sent. For example if there is a number stored in
for John Smith.
the Home and Work numbers for the contact “Voice-
2. You can replace “Mobile” with “Home,” “Work” or mail password” only the Home number will be sent.
“Other.” 8. If your phone does not support phonebook download
3. You can replace “Incoming Calls” with “Outgoing or call log download over Bluetooth® then these
Calls” or “Missed Calls.” commands will return a response that the contact does
not exist in the phonebook.
4. You can replace “248 555 1212” with any phone
9. Emergency and Towing assistance are contacts that
number supported by your Mobile phone. have been pre-loaded in the phonebook. Commands
5. These commands can be used during a phone call after such as “Call Emergency” and “Call Towing Assis-
pushing the Uconnect® Voice Command button on tance” will call the corresponding number stored with
the steering wheel. Please note the call will be muted those contacts.
while the VR session is active. NOTE: Available Voice Commands are shown in bold
face and underlined in the gray shaded boxes.
NOTE: 5. You can replace “248 555 1212” with any phone
number supported by your Mobile phone.
1. You can replace “John Smith” with any name in your
mobile or favorite phone book. You can also say “Send 6. You can replace “4” with any message number shown
a message to John Smith” and the system will ask you on the screen.
3
which phone number you want to send a message to
7. If your phone does not support phonebook download
for John Smith.
or call log download over Bluetooth® then these
2. You can replace “Mobile” with “Home,” “Work” or commands will return a response that the contact does
“Other.” not exist in the phonebook.
3. You can replace “Incoming Calls” with “Outgoing
Calls” or “Missed Calls.”
4. Messaging commands only work if the Uconnect®
system is equipped with this feature and the mobile
phone supports messaging over Bluetooth®.
NOTE: Available Voice Commands are shown in bold VOICE COMMAND
face and underlined in the gray shaded boxes.
Uconnect® 8.4/8.4 Nav
General Information
This device complies with Part 15 of the FCC rules and The Uconnect® Voice Command system allows 3
RSS 210 of Industry Canada. Operation is subject to the you to control your AM, FM radio, satellite
following conditions: radio, disc player, SD Card, USB/iPod® and
SiriusXM Travel Link.
• Changes or modifications not expressly approved by
the party responsible for compliance could void the NOTE: Take care to speak into the Voice Command
user’s authority to operate the equipment. system as calmly and normally as possible. The ability of
the Voice Command system to recognize user voice
commands may be negatively affected by rapid speaking
• This device must accept any interference received, or a raised voice level.
including interference that may cause undesired op-
eration.
If no command is spoken the system will say one of two
WARNING!
responses:
Any voice commanded system should be used only • I didn’t understand
in safe driving conditions following all applicable
laws, including laws regarding phone use. Your at- • I didn’t get that, etc.
tention should be focused on safely operating the If a command is not spoken a second time, the system
vehicle. Failure to do so may result in a collision will respond with an error and give some direction as
causing serious injury or death. what can be said based on the context you are in. After
When you press the Uconnect® Voice Command but- three consecutive failures of a spoken command the VR
ton, you will hear a beep. The beep is your signal to give session will end.
a command. Pressing the Uconnect® Voice Command button
while the system is speaking is known as “barging in.”
The system will be interrupted, and after the beep, you
can say a command. This will become helpful once you
start to learn the options.
NOTE: At any time, you can say the words “Cancel” or
“Help.”
These commands are universal and can be used from any Natural Speech
menu. All other commands can be used depending upon Natural speech allows the user to speak commands in
the active application. phrases or complete sentences. The system filters out
When using this system, you should speak clearly and at certain non-word utterances and sounds such as “ah”
a normal speaking volume. and “eh.” The system handles fill-in words such as “I 3
would like to.”
The system will best recognize your speech if the win-
dows are closed, and the heater/air conditioning fan is The system handles multiple inputs in the same phrase
set to low. or sentence such as “make a phone call” and “to Kelly
At any point, if the system does not recognize one of your Smith.” For multiple inputs in the same phrase or sen-
commands, you will be prompted to repeat it. tence, the system identifies the topic or context and
provides the associated follow-up prompt such as “Who
To hear available commands, press the Uconnect® Voice do you want to call?” in the case where a phone call was
Command button and say “Help.” You will hear requested but the specific name was not recognized.
available commands for the screen displayed.
The system utilizes continuous dialog; when the system Changing The Volume
requires more information from the user it will ask a
1. Start a dialogue by pushing the Voice Command
question to which the user can respond without pressing
button.
the Uconnect® Voice Command button.
2. Say a command (e.g., “Help”).
Uconnect® Voice Commands
The Uconnect® Voice Command system understands 3. Use the ON/OFF VOLUME rotary knob to adjust the
two types of commands. Universal commands are avail- volume to a comfortable level while the Voice Com-
able at all times. Local commands are available if the mand system is speaking. Please note the volume
supported radio mode is active. setting for Voice Command is different than the audio
system.
Start a dialogue by pressing the Uconnect® Voice Com-
mand button.
Starting Voice Recognition (VR) Session In Source
Radio/Player Modes To switch to the audio source, say “Change source to
In this mode, you can say the following commands: Disc” for example. This command can be given in any
mode or screen:
NOTE: The commands can be said on any screen when 3
a call is not active after pushing the Uconnect® Voice • “Track” (#) (to change the track)
Command button.
Voice Tree
NOTE:
1. You can replace “950 AM” with any other AM or FM
frequency, such as “98.7 FM.”
2. You can replace “80’s on 8” with any other satellite 3
station name received by the radio.
3. You can replace “8” with any other satellite channel
number received by the radio.
4. You can replace “rock” with any of the satellite music
types.
NOTE: Available Voice Commands are shown in bold
face and shaded grey.
NOTE:
1. You can replace the album, artist, song, genre, playlist,
podcast and audio book names with any correspond-
ing names on the current device that is playing.
3
2. You can replace “8” with any track on the CD that is
currently playing. Command is only available when
CD is playing.
3. Playlist, Podcast and audio book commands are only
available when the iPod® is connected and playing.
4. VR commands, Albums, Artists, and Genre names are
based on the music metadata contained on the
loaded/connected device.
NOTE:
1. You can replace “NFL” with any league shown on the
sports league screen. For example you can say “Show
MLB headlines” or “Show PGA headlines.”
3
2. You can replace “Headlines” with any menu items
shown on a league screen. For example you can say
“Show NFL Schedule and results” or “Show NCAA
Basketball AP top 25” or “Show Major League Baseball
Teams.”
3. You can also say “Show Current Weather” or “Show
extended weather” or “Show five day forecast” or
“Show ski info” to get other forecasts.
NOTE:
1. Only available with Navigation equipped vehicles.
2. You can replace “Player” with “Radio,” “Navigation,”
“Phone,” “Climate,” “More” or “Settings.” 3
3. Navigation commands only work if equipped with
Navigation.
NOTE:
WARNING!
1. You can also say “Find City,” “Find Favorite,” “Find
Play by Category,” “Find Play by Name,” “Find Re- • It is dangerous to ride in a cargo area, inside or
cently Found,” “Where to?” or “Go Home.” outside of a vehicle. In a collision, people riding in
these areas are more likely to be seriously injured 3
2. You can say “Find Nearest” then “Restaurant,” “Fuel,” or killed.
“Transit,” “Lodging,” “Shopping,” “Bank,” “Enter- • Do not allow people to ride in any area of your
tainment,” “Recreation,” “Attractions,” “Commu- vehicle that is not equipped with seats and seat
nity,” “Auto Services,” “Hospitals,” “Parking,” “Air- belts. In a collision, people riding in these areas are
port,” “Police Stations,” “Fire Stations,” or “Auto more likely to be seriously injured or killed.
Dealers.” • Be sure everyone in your vehicle is in a seat and
NOTE: Available Voice Commands are shown in bold using a seat belt properly.
face and shaded grey. Power Seats — If Equipped
SEATS On models equipped with power seats, the switch is
Seats are a part of the Occupant Restraint System of the located on the outboard side of the seat near the floor.
vehicle. Use this switch to move the driver’s seat up or down,
forward or rearward or to recline the seatback.
NOTE: The passenger’s seat will move up or down, Adjusting The Seat Forward Or Rearward
forward or rearward. The seat can be adjusted both forward and rearward.
Push the seat switch forward or rearward, the seat will
move in the direction of the switch. Release the switch
when the desired position has been reached.
Adjusting The Seat Up Or Down
The height of the seats can be adjusted up or down. Pull
upward or push downward on the seat switch, the seat
will move in the direction of the switch. Release the
switch when the desired position is reached.
Tilting The Seat Up Or Down
The angle of the seat cushion can be adjusted in four
directions. Pull upward or push downward on the front
Power Seat Switches or rear of the seat switch, the front or rear of the seat
1 — Seat Control cushion will move in the direction of the switch. Release
2 — Seatback Control the switch when the desired position has been reached.
Reclining The Seatback
The angle of the seatback can be adjusted forward or chest. In a collision you could slide under the seat
rearward. Push the seatback switch forward or rearward, belt, which could result in serious injury or death.
the seat will move in the direction of the switch. Release
the switch when the desired position is reached. 3
CAUTION!
WARNING! Do not place any article under a power seat or
• Adjusting a seat while driving may be dangerous. impede its ability to move as it may cause damage to
Moving a seat while driving could result in loss of the seat controls. Seat travel may become limited if
control which could cause a collision and serious movement is stopped by an obstruction in the seat’s
injury or death. path.
• Seats should be adjusted before fastening the seat Power Lumbar — If Equipped
belts and while the vehicle is parked. Serious
injury or death could result from a poorly adjusted Vehicles equipped with power driver or passenger seats
seat belt. may also be equipped with power lumbar. The power
• Do not ride with the seatback reclined so that the lumbar switch is located on the outboard side of the
shoulder belt is no longer resting against your power seat. Push the switch forward or rearward to
(Continued)
increase or decrease the lumbar support. Push the switch Heated Seats — If Equipped
upward or downward to raise or lower the lumbar On some models, the front and rear seats may be
support. equipped with heaters in both the seat cushions and
seatbacks.
The front driver and passenger heated seats are operated
using the Uconnect® System.
WARNING!
• Persons who are unable to feel pain to the skin
because of advanced age, chronic illness, diabetes,
spinal cord injury, medication, alcohol use, exhaus-
tion or other physical condition must exercise care
when using the seat heater. It may cause burns
even at low temperatures, especially if used for
Power Lumbar Switch
long periods of time.
• Do not place anything on the seat or seatback that
insulates against heat, such as a blanket or cushion.
(Continued)
Front Heated Seat Operations — Vehicles
Equipped With Uconnect® 8.4 and 8.4N:
This may cause the seat heater to overheat. Sitting
in a seat that has been overheated could cause Press the “Controls” soft-key located on the Uconnect®
serious burns due to the increased surface tempera- display.
3
ture of the seat.
Front Heated Seat Operation — Vehicles Equipped

With Uconnect® 4.3:
Press the CLIMATE hard-key (located next to the
Uconnect® screen) to enter the climate control screen.
Press the “Driver” or “Pass” seat soft-key (lo-
cated on the Uconnect® screen) once to select
HI-level heating. Press the soft-key a second
time to select LO-level heating. Press the soft-
key a third time to shut the heating elements OFF.
Controls Soft-Key
Press the “Driver” or “Passenger” seat soft-key NOTE: Once a heat setting is selected, heat will be felt
once to select HI-level heating. Press the soft- within two to five minutes.
key a second time to select LO-level heating. When the HI-level setting is selected, the heater will
Press the soft-key a third time to shut the
provide a boosted heat level during the first four minutes
heating elements OFF. of operation. Then, the heat output will drop to the
normal HI-level. If the HI-level setting is selected, the
system will automatically switch to LO-level after ap-
proximately 60 minutes of continuous operation. At that
time, the display will change from HI to LO, indicating
the change. The LO-level setting will turn OFF automati-
cally after approximately 45 minutes.
Vehicle Equipped With Remote Start
On models that are equipped with remote start, the
driver’s heated seat can be programmed to come on
during a remote start through the Uconnect® system.
Refer to “Uconnect® Settings” in “Understanding Your
Heated Seats Soft-Keys
Instrument Panel” for further information.
Rear Heated Seats NOTE:
On some models, the two outboard seats are equipped • Once a heat setting is selected, heat will be felt within
with heated seats. The heated seat switches for these two to five minutes.
seats are located on the rear of the center console. There
• The engine must be running for the heated seats to 3
are two heated seat switches that allow the rear passen-
operate.
gers to operate the seats independently.
When the HI-level setting is selected, the heater will
You can choose from HI, LO or OFF heat settings. Amber
provide a boosted heat level during the first four minutes
indicator lights in each switch indicate the level of heat in
of operation. Then, the heat output will drop to the
use. Two indicator lights will illuminate for HI, one for
normal HI-level. If the HI-level setting is selected, the
LO and none for OFF.
system will automatically switch to LO-level after ap-
Press the switch once to select HI-level heating. proximately 60 minutes of continuous operation. At that
Press the switch a second time to select LO- time, the number of illuminated LEDs changes from two
level heating. Press the switch a third time to to one, indicating the change. The LO-level setting will
shut the heating elements OFF. turn OFF automatically after approximately 45 minutes.
Ventilated Seats — If Equipped
On some models, both the driver and passenger seats are
ventilated. Located in the seat cushion and seatback are
small fans that draw air from the seat surface through
fine perforations in the seat cover to help keep the driver
and front passenger cooler in higher ambient tempera-
tures.
The ventilated seats can be operated using the
Uconnect® System.
Front Ventilated Seat Operation — Uconnect®
8.4/8.4 Nav:
Controls Soft-Key
Press the “Controls” soft-key located on the bottom of the Press the “Driver” or “Passenger” seat soft-key once to
Uconnect® display. select HI-level ventilation. Press the soft-key a second
time to select LO-level ventilation. Press the soft-key a
third time to shut off the seat ventilation.
Vehicles Equipped With Remote Start
On models that are equipped with remote start, the
driver’s ventilated seat can be programmed to come on
during a remote start through the Uconnect® system.
Refer to “Uconnect® Settings” in “Understanding Your 3
Manual Seats — If Equipped
Forward Or Rearward Adjustment
The adjusting bar is at the front of the seat, near the floor.
Pull the bar upward to move the seat forward or rear-
Ventilated Seats Soft-Keys ward. Release the bar once the seat is in the position
NOTE: The engine must be running for the ventilated desired. Using body pressure, move forward and rear-
seats to operate. ward on the seat to be sure that the seat adjusters have
latched.
WARNING!
Adjusting a seat while the vehicle is moving is
dangerous. The sudden movement of the seat could
cause you to lose control. The seat belt might not be
properly adjusted and you could be injured. Adjust
the seat only while the vehicle is parked.
Recline
To adjust the seatback, lift the lever located on the
outboard side of the seat, lean back to the desired
Manual Seat Adjusting Bar position and release the lever. To return the seatback, lift
the lever, lean forward and release the lever.
Head Restraints
Head restraints are designed to reduce the risk of injury
by restricting head movement in the event of a rear
impact. Head restraints should be adjusted so that the top
of the head restraint is located above the top of your ear. 3
WARNING!
The head restraints for all occupants must be prop-
erly adjusted prior to operating the vehicle or occu-
pying a seat. Head restraints should never be ad-
justed while the vehicle is in motion. Driving a
Manual Recline Lever vehicle with the head restraints improperly adjusted
WARNING! or removed could cause serious injury or death in the
event of a collision.
Do not ride with the seatback reclined so that the
shoulder belt is no longer resting against your chest. Active Head Restraints — Front Seats
In a collision you could slide under the seat belt, The front driver and passenger seats are equipped with
which could result in serious injury or death. Active Head Restraints (AHR). In the event of a rear
impact the AHRs will automatically extend forward
minimizing the gap between the back of the occupants
head and the AHR.
The AHRs will automatically return to their normal
position following a rear impact. If the AHRs do not
return to their normal position see your authorized
dealer immediately.
To raise the head restraint, pull upward on the head
restraint. To lower the head restraint, press the push
button, located at the base of the head restraint, and push
downward on the head restraint.
Push Button
NOTE: The head restraints should only be removed by
qualified technicians, for service purposes only. If either
of the head restraints require removal, see your autho-
rized dealer.
WARNING!
Do not place items over the top of the Active Head
Restraint, such as coats, seat covers or portable DVD
players. These items may interfere with the operation 3
of the Active Head Restraint in the event of a
collision and could result in serious injury or death.
Rear Head Restraints

The center head restraint has two adjustable positions, up
or down. When the center seat is being occupied the head
restraint should be in the raised position. When there are
Adjustment Button
no occupants in the center seat the head restraint can be
lowered for maximum visibility for the driver. NOTE: The outboard head restraints are not adjustable.
To raise the head restraint, pull upward on the head Folding Rear Seat
restraint. To lower the head restraint, press the adjust- The rear seatbacks can be folded forward to provide an
ment button, located at the base of the head restraint, and additional storage area. To fold the rear seatback, pull on
push downward on the head restraint. the loops located on the upper seatback.
NOTE: These loops can be tucked away when not in use.
Folded Rear Seatback

When the seatback is folded to the upright position, make
Rear Seatback Loop sure it is latched by strongly pulling on the top of the
After releasing the seatback, it can be folded forward. seatback above the seat strap.
DRIVER MEMORY SEAT — IF EQUIPPED
WARNING!
This feature allows the driver to store up to two different
• Be certain that the seatback is securely locked into memory profiles for easy recall through a memory
position. If the seatback is not securely locked into switch. Each memory profile contains desired position
position, the seat will not provide the proper sta- settings for the driver seat, side mirrors, adjustable 3
bility for child seats and/or passengers. An improp- pedals (if equipped), and power tilt and telescopic steer-
erly latched seat could cause serious injury. ing column (if equipped) and a set of desired radio
• The cargo area in the rear of the vehicle (with the station presets. Your Remote Keyless Entry (RKE) trans-
rear seatbacks in the locked-up or folded down mitter can also be programmed to recall the same posi-
position) should not be used as a play area by tions when the UNLOCK button is pressed.
children when the vehicle is in motion. They could
be seriously injured in a collision. Children should NOTE: If your vehicle is equipped with two RKE trans-
be seated and using the proper restraint system. mitters. One RKE transmitter can be linked to memory
position 1 and the other transmitter can be linked to
memory position 2.
The memory seat switch is located on the driver’s door Programming The Memory Feature
trim panel. The switch consists of three buttons: The (S)
NOTE: Saving a new memory profile will erase an
button, which is used to activate the memory save
existing profile from memory.
function and the (1) and (2) buttons which are used to
recall either of two pre-programmed memory profiles. To create a new memory profile, perform the following:
1. Place the ignition into the RUN position.
2. Adjust all memory profile settings to desired prefer-
ences (i.e., seat, side mirror, adjustable pedals [if
equipped], power tilt and telescopic steering column
[if equipped], and radio station presets).
3. Press and release the SET (S) button on the memory
switch.
4. Within five seconds, press and release the MEMORY
button 1 or 2. The Electronic Vehicle Information
Center (EVIC) (if equipped) will display which
Memory Seat Switches memory position has been set.
NOTE: NOTE: Before programming your RKE transmitters you
must select the “Memory To FOB” feature through the
• Memory profiles can be set without the vehicle in
Uconnect® system screen. Refer to “Uconnect® Settings”
PARK, but the vehicle must be in PARK to recall a
in “Understanding Your Instrument Panel” for further
memory profile.
information. 3
• The Recall Memory with Remote Key Unlock feature To program your RKE transmitters, perform the follow-
can be turned on and off using the Uconnect® System, ing:
refer to “Uconnect® Settings” in “Understanding Your
Instrument Panel” for further information. 1. Remove the Key Fob from the ignition (or change the
ignition to OFF, for vehicles equipped with Keyless
Linking And Unlinking The Remote Keyless Entry Enter-N-Go™).
Transmitter To Memory
2. Select desired memory profile (1) or (2). The system
Your RKE transmitters can be programmed to recall one
will recall any stored settings for this profile. Wait for
of two pre-programmed memory profiles by pressing the
the system to complete the memory recall before
UNLOCK button on the RKE transmitter.
continuing to Step 3.
3. Once the profile has been recalled, press and release
the SET (S) button on the memory switch, then press
and release button (1) or (2) accordingly. “Memory
Profile Set” (1 or 2) will display in the instrument NOTE: If the vehicle is equipped with Passive Entry, the
cluster on vehicles equipped with the EVIC. memory settings will be recalled with a Passive Entry
Unlock into the driver’s door using the Key Fob linked to
4. Press and release the LOCK button on the RKE
position 1.
transmitter within 10 seconds.
To recall the memory setting for driver 2, press MEMORY
NOTE: Your RKE transmitters can be unlinked to your button number 2 on the driver’s door or the UNLOCK
memory settings by following steps 1-4 above and press- button on the RKE transmitter linked to memory
ing the UNLOCK button (instead of LOCK) on the RKE position 2.
transmitter in Step 4.
NOTE: If the vehicle is equipped with Passive Entry, the
Memory Position Recall memory settings will be recalled with a Passive Entry
NOTE: The vehicle must be in PARK to recall memory Unlock into the driver’s door using the Key Fob linked to
positions. If a recall is attempted when the vehicle is not position 2.
in PARK, a message will display in the EVIC (if A recall can be cancelled by pressing any of the
equipped). MEMORY buttons (S, 1, or 2) on the driver’s door during
To recall the memory settings for driver 1, press a recall. When a recall is cancelled, the driver’s seat,
MEMORY button number 1 on the driver’s door or the adjustable pedals (if equipped), and power tilt and
UNLOCK button on the RKE transmitter linked to
memory position 1.
telescopic steering column (if equipped) stop moving. A forward of the rear stop. The seat will return to its
delay of one second will occur before another recall can previously set position when you place the ignition
be selected. into the ACC or RUN position.
Easy Entry/Exit Seat (Available With Memory Seat • When you remove the Key Fob from the ignition (or
change the ignition to OFF, for vehicles equipped with 3
Only)
Keyless Enter-N-Go™), the driver’s seat will move to a
This feature provides automatic driver seat positioning to
enhance driver mobility when entering and exiting the position 0.3 in (7.7 mm) forward of the rear stop if the
driver’s seat position is between 0.9 in and 2.7 in (22.7
vehicle.
mm and 67.7 mm) forward of the rear stop. The seat
The distance the driver’s seat moves depends on where will return to its previously set position when you
you have the driver’s seat positioned when you cycle the place the ignition in the ACC or RUN position.
vehicles ignition to the OFF position.
• The Easy Entry/Easy Exit feature is disabled when the
• When you remove the Key Fob from the ignition (or driver’s seat position is less than 0.9 in (22.7 mm)
change the ignition to OFF, for vehicles equipped with forward of the rear stop. At this position, there is no
Keyless Enter-N-Go™), the driver’s seat will move benefit to the driver by moving the seat for Easy Exit
about 2.4 in (60 mm) rearward if the driver’s seat or Easy Entry.
position is greater than or equal to 2.7 in (67.7 mm)
Each stored memory setting will have an associated Easy
Entry and Easy Exit position.
NOTE: The Easy Entry/Exit feature is not enabled when
the vehicle is delivered from the factory. The Easy
Entry/Exit feature is enabled (or later disabled) through
the programmable features in the Uconnect® system.
Refer to “Uconnect® Settings” in “Understanding Your
TO OPEN AND CLOSE THE HOOD

Two latches must be released to open the hood.
1. Pull the hood release lever located under the left side Hood Release Lever
of the instrument panel. 2. Move to the outside of the vehicle and push the safety
catch to the left. The safety catch is located under the
center front edge of the hood.
LIGHTS
CAUTION!
Headlight Switch
To prevent possible damage, do not slam the hood to
close it. Lower the hood until it is open 8 in (20 cm)
approximately and then drop it. This should secure The headlight switch is located on the left side of 3
both latches. Never drive your vehicle unless the the instrument panel. This switch controls the
hood is fully closed, with both latches engaged. operation of the headlights, parking lights, instru-
ment panel lights, instrument panel light dimming, inte-
rior lights and fog lights.
WARNING!
Be sure the hood is fully latched before driving your
vehicle. If the hood is not fully latched, it could open
when the vehicle is in motion and block your vision.
Failure to follow this warning could result in serious
injury or death.
Automatic Headlights — If Equipped
This system automatically turns the headlights on or off
according to ambient light levels. To turn the system on,
rotate the headlight switch counterclockwise to the
AUTO position. When the system is on, the headlight
time delay feature is also on. This means the headlights
will stay on for up to 90 seconds after you place the
ignition into the OFF position. To turn the automatic
system off, move the headlight switch out of the AUTO
position.
NOTE: The engine must be running before the headlights
Headlight Switch will come on in the automatic mode.
Rotate the headlight switch clockwise to the first detent
Headlights On With Wipers (Available With
for parking light and instrument panel light operation.
Automatic Headlights Only)
Rotate the headlight switch to the second detent for
headlight, parking light and instrument panel light op- When this feature is active, the headlights will turn on
eration. approximately 10 seconds after the wipers are turned on
if the headlight switch is placed in the AUTO position. In
addition, the headlights will turn off when the wipers are NOTE:
turned off if they were turned on by this feature.
• Automatic High Beam Headlamp Control can be
NOTE: The Headlights On with Wipers feature can be turned on or off using the Uconnect® System, refer to
turned on or off using the Uconnect® System. Refer to “Uconnect® Settings” in “Understanding Your Instru-
3
“Uconnect® Settings/Customer Programmable Fea- ment Panel” for further information.
tures” in “Understanding Your Instrument Panel” for
• Broken, muddy, or obstructed headlights and taillights
of vehicles in the field of view will cause headlights to
Automatic High Beam Headlamp Control — If remain on longer (closer to the vehicle). Also, dirt, film,
Equipped and other obstructions on the windshield or camera
lens will cause the system to function improperly.
The Automatic High Beam Headlamp Control system
provides increased forward lighting at night by automat- If the windshield or Automatic High Beam Headlamp
ing high beam control through the use of a digital camera Control mirror is replaced, the mirror must be re-aimed
mounted on the inside rearview mirror. This camera to ensure proper performance. See your local authorized
detects vehicle specific light and automatically switches dealer.
from high beams to low beams until the approaching
vehicle is out of view.
Headlight Time Delay NOTE: The Headlight Time Delay is programmable us-
ing the Uconnect® System, refer to “Uconnect® Settings”
This feature provides the safety of headlight illumination
in “Understanding Your Instrument Panel” for further
for up to 90 seconds when leaving your vehicle in an
information.
unlit area.
To activate the delay feature, turn OFF the ignition switch Daytime Running Lights (DRL) — If Equipped
while the headlights are still on. Then, turn off the The Daytime Running Lights will turn On the first time
headlights within 45 seconds. The delay interval begins the vehicle is shifted out of PARK, and remain On unless
when the headlight switch is turned off. the Parking Brake is applied. Upon returning to the
PARK position, the DRLs will turn Off. DRLs will turn
NOTE: The lights must be turned off within 45 seconds
Off when the ignition is switched OFF.
of turning the ignition OFF to activate this feature.
If you turn the headlights, park lights or ignition switch NOTE: If allowed by law in the country in which the
ON again, the system will cancel the delay. vehicle was purchased the Daytime Running Lights can
be turned on and off using the Uconnect® System, refer
If you turn the headlights off before the ignition, they will to “Uconnect® Settings” in “Understanding Your Instru-
turn off in the normal manner. ment Panel” for further information.
Lights-On Reminder
If the headlights or parking lights are on after the ignition
is turned OFF, a chime will sound to alert the driver
when the driver’s door is opened.
3
Fog Lights — If Equipped
The front fog light switch is built into the headlight
switch.
Fog Light Switch

To activate the front fog lights, turn on the parking
lights or the low beam headlights and press the
headlight switch. To turn off the front fog lights, either
press the headlight switch a second time or turn off the
headlight switch.
An indicator light in the instrument cluster illuminates
when the fog lights are turned on.
NOTE: The fog lights will operate with the low beam
headlights or parking lights on. However, selecting the
high beam headlights will turn off the fog lights.
Multifunction Lever
The multifunction lever controls the operation of the turn
signals, headlight beam selection and passing lights. The
multifunction lever is located on the left side of the
steering column.
Multifunction Lever
Turn Signals
Move the multifunction lever up or down and the arrows
on each side of the instrument cluster flash to show
proper operation of the front and rear turn signal lights.
NOTE: High/Low Beam Switch
• If either light remains on and does not flash, or there is Push the multifunction lever away from you to switch
a very fast flash rate, check for a defective outside light the headlights to high beam. Pull the multifunction lever
bulb. If an indicator fails to light when the lever is toward you to switch the headlights back to low beam.
3
moved, it would suggest that the indicator bulb is Flash-To-Pass
defective.
You can signal another vehicle with your headlights by
• A “Turn Signal On” message will appear in the EVIC lightly pulling the multifunction lever toward you. This
(if equipped) and a continuous chime will sound if the will turn on the high beam headlights until the lever is
vehicle is driven more than 1 mi (1.6 km) with either released.
turn signal on.
NOTE: If the multifunction lever is held in the flash-to
Lane Change Assist pass position for more than 15 seconds, the high beams
Tap the lever up or down once, without moving beyond will shut off.
the detent, and the turn signal (right or left) will flash
three times then automatically turn off.
Front Map/Reading Lights — If Equipped second time. The lights will also turn on when the
UNLOCK button on the Remote Keyless Entry (RKE) is
The front map/reading lights are mounted in the over-
pressed.
head console.
Front Map/Reading Light Switches

Front Map/Reading Lights
Each light can be turned on by pressing a switch on either
side of the console. These buttons are backlit for night
time visibility. To turn the lights off, press the switch a
Courtesy Lights Ambient Light — If Equipped
The courtesy lights can be turned on by pressing the top The overhead console is equipped with an ambient light
corner of the lens. To turn the lights off, press the lens a feature. This light casts illumination for improved visibil-
second time. ity of the floor and center console area.
3
Courtesy Lights Ambient Light

Interior Lights Dimmer Controls
The interior lights come on when a door is opened. The dimmer control is part of the headlight switch and is
located on the left side of the instrument panel.
To protect the battery, the interior lights will turn off
automatically 10 minutes after the ignition is moved to
the LOCK position. This will occur if the interior lights
were switched on manually or are on because a door is
open. This includes the glove box light, but not the trunk
light. To restore interior light operation, either turn the
ignition to the ON/RUN position or cycle the light
switch.
Dimmer Controls
With the parking lights or headlights on, rotating the left Dome Light Position
dimmer control upward will increase the brightness of Rotate the left dimmer control completely upward to the
the instrument panel lights and lighted cupholders (if second detent to turn on the interior lights. The interior
equipped). lights will remain on when the dimmer control is in this
position. 3
Interior Light Defeat (OFF)

Rotate the left dimmer control to the extreme bottom OFF
position. The interior lights will remain off when the
doors are open.
Parade Mode (Daytime Brightness Feature)
Rotate the instrument panel dimmer control upward to
the first detent. This feature brightens all text displays
such as the odometer, EVIC (if equipped), and radio
when the position lights or headlights are on.
Instrument Panel Dimmer
WINDSHIELD WIPERS AND WASHERS Intermittent Wiper System
The multifunction lever operates the windshield wipers Use the intermittent wiper when weather conditions
and washer when the ignition is placed in the ON/RUN make a single wiping cycle with a variable pause be-
or ACC position. The multifunction lever is located on tween cycles desirable. Rotate the end of the multifunc-
the left side of the steering column. tion lever to the first detent position, and then turn the
end of the lever to select the desired delay interval. There
are four delay settings, which allow you to regulate the
wipe interval from a minimum of one cycle every second
to a maximum of approximately 36 seconds between
cycles. The delay intervals will double in duration when
the vehicle speed is 10 mph (16 km/h) or less.
Wiper Operation
Rotate the end of the multifunction lever to the first
detent, past the intermittent settings for low-speed wiper
operation, or to the second detent past the intermittent
settings for high-speed wiper operation.
Windshield Wiper/Washer Control
Windshield Washers
CAUTION!
To use the washer, push the multifunction lever inward
• Turn the windshield wipers off when driving (toward the steering column) and hold it for as long as
through an automatic car wash. Damage to the washer spray is desired.
windshield wipers may result if the wiper control 3
is left in any position other than off. If you activate the washer while the windshield wiper
• In cold weather, always turn off the wiper switch control is in the delay range, the wipers will operate for
and allow the wipers to return to the “Park” posi- two wipe cycles after releasing the lever and then resume
tion before turning off the engine. If the wiper the intermittent interval previously selected.
switch is left on and the wipers freeze to the If you activate the washer while the windshield wiper is
windshield, damage to the wiper motor may occur turned off, the wipers will operate for three wipe cycles
when the vehicle is restarted. and then turn off.
• Always remove any buildup of snow that prevents
the windshield wiper blades from returning to the WARNING!
off position. If the windshield wiper control is
turned off and the blades cannot return to the off Sudden loss of visibility through the windshield
position, damage to the wiper motor may occur. could lead to a collision. You might not see other
vehicles or other obstacles. To avoid sudden icing of
(Continued)
Headlights On With Wipers (Available With
Automatic Headlights Only)
the windshield during freezing weather, warm the
windshield with the defroster before and during When this feature is active, the headlights will turn on
windshield washer use. approximately 10 seconds after the wipers are turned on
if the headlight switch is placed in the AUTO position. In
Mist Feature addition, the headlights will turn off when the wipers are
turned off if they were turned on by this feature.
Rotate the end of the lever downward to the Mist
position to activate a single wipe cycle to clear off road NOTE: The Headlights On with Wipers feature can be
mist or spray from a passing vehicle. The wipers will turned on or off using the Uconnect® System. Refer to
continue to operate until you release the multifunction “Uconnect® Settings/Customer Programmable Fea-
lever. tures” in “Understanding Your Instrument Panel” for
NOTE: The mist feature does not activate the washer
pump; therefore, no washer fluid will be sprayed on the Rain Sensing Wipers — If Equipped
windshield. The wash function must be used in order to This feature senses moisture on the windshield and
spray the windshield with washer fluid. automatically activates the wipers for the driver. The
feature is especially useful for road splash or overspray
from the windshield washers of the vehicle ahead. Rotate • Use of Rain-X® or products containing wax or silicone
the end of the multifunction lever to one of four settings may reduce Rain Sensing performance.
to activate this feature. The Rain Sensing system has protection features for the
The sensitivity of the system can be adjusted with the wiper blades and arms, and will not operate under the
multifunction lever. Wiper delay position 1 is the least following conditions: 3
sensitive, and wiper delay position 4 is the most sensi-
• Low Ambient Temperature — When the ignition is
tive. Setting 3 should be used for normal rain conditions.
first turned ON, the Rain Sensing system will not
Settings 1 and 2 can be used if the driver desires less
operate until the wiper switch is moved, vehicle speed
wiper sensitivity. Setting 4 can be used if the driver
is greater than 0 mph (0 km/h), or the outside tem-
desires more sensitivity. Place the wiper switch in the
perature is greater than 32°F (0°C).
OFF position when not using the system.
• Transmission in NEUTRAL Position — When the
NOTE:
ignition is ON, and the transmission is in the NEU-
• The Rain Sensing feature will not operate when the TRAL position, the Rain Sensing system will not
wiper switch is in the low or high-speed position. operate until the wiper switch is moved, vehicle speed
is greater than 5 mph (8 km/h), or the shift lever is
• The Rain Sensing feature may not function properly
moved out of the NEUTRAL position.
when ice, or dried salt water is present on the wind-
shield.
NOTE: Rain Sensing can be turned on and off using the
Uconnect® System, refer to “Uconnect® Settings” in
formation.
TILT/TELESCOPING STEERING COLUMN

This feature allows you to tilt the steering column
upward or downward. It also allows you to lengthen or
shorten the steering column. The tilt/telescoping lever is
located below the steering wheel at the end of the
steering column.
Tilt/Telescoping Control Handle

To unlock the steering column, pull the lever downward.
To tilt the steering column, move the steering wheel
upward or downward as desired. To lengthen or shorten
the steering column, pull the steering wheel outward or
push it inward as desired. To lock the steering column in
position, push the lever upward until fully engaged.
WARNING!
Do not adjust the steering column while driving.
Adjusting the steering column while driving or driv-
ing with the steering column unlocked, could cause 3
the driver to lose control of the vehicle. Failure to
follow this warning may result in serious injury or
death.
POWER TILT/TELESCOPING STEERING COLUMN

— IF EQUIPPED
This feature allows you to tilt the steering column Power Tilt/Telescoping Switch
upward or downward. It also allows you to lengthen or
To tilt the steering column, move the lever up or down as
shorten the steering column. The power tilt/telescoping
desired. To lengthen or shorten the steering column, pull
steering column lever is located below the multifunction
the lever toward you or push the lever away from you as
lever on the steering column.
desired.
NOTE: For vehicles equipped with Driver Memory Seat, HEATED STEERING WHEEL — IF EQUIPPED
you can use your Remote Keyless Entry (RKE) transmit- The steering wheel contains a heating element that helps
ter or the memory switch on the driver’s door trim panel warm your hands in cold weather. The heated steering
to return the tilt/telescopic steering column to pre- wheel has only one temperature setting. Once the heated
programmed positions. Refer to “Driver Memory Seat” steering wheel has been turned on it will operate for up
in this section. to 80 minutes before automatically shutting off. The
heated steering wheel can shut off early or may not turn
WARNING! on when the steering wheel is already warm.
Do not adjust the steering column while driving. The heated steering wheel can be turned on and off using
Adjusting the steering column while driving or driv- the Uconnect® System.
ing with the steering column unlocked, could cause
the driver to lose control of the vehicle. Failure to Touch the “Controls” soft-key then touch the “Heated
follow this warning may result in serious injury or Wheel” soft-key to turn on the heated steering wheel.
death. Press the “Heated Wheel” soft-key a second time to turn
the heated steering wheel off.
Controls Soft-Key Heated Steering Wheel Soft-Key

NOTE: The engine must be running for the heated
steering wheel to operate.
Vehicles Equipped With Remote Start
On models that are equipped with remote start, the • Do not place anything on the steering wheel that
heated steering wheel can be programmed to come on insulates against heat, such as a blanket or steering
during a remote start through the Uconnect® system. wheel covers of any type and material. This may
Refer to “Uconnect® Settings” in “Understanding Your cause the steering wheel heater to overheat.
ADJUSTABLE PEDALS — IF EQUIPPED
WARNING!
The adjustable pedals system is designed to allow a
• Persons who are unable to feel pain to the skin greater range of driver comfort for steering wheel tilt and
because of advanced age, chronic illness, diabetes, seat position. This feature allows the brake, accelerator,
spinal cord injury, medication, alcohol use, exhaus- and clutch pedals (if equipped) to move toward or away
tion, or other physical conditions must exercise from the driver to provide improved position with the
care when using the steering wheel heater. It may steering wheel.
cause burns even at low temperatures, especially if
The switch is located on the front side of the driver’s seat
used for long periods.
cushion side shield.
(Continued)
Press the switch rearward to move the pedals rearward
(toward the driver).
• The pedals can be adjusted with the ignition OFF.
• The pedals cannot be adjusted when the vehicle is in 3
REVERSE or when the Electronic Speed Control Sys-
tem is on. The following messages will be displayed on
vehicles equipped with the Electronic Vehicle Informa-
tion System (EVIC) if the pedals are attempted to be
adjusted when the system is locked out (“Adjustable
Pedal Disabled — Cruise Control Engaged” or “Ad-
justable Pedal Disabled — Vehicle In Reverse”).
Adjustable Pedals Switch
NOTE:
Press the switch forward to move the pedals forward
(toward the front of the vehicle). • Always adjust the pedals to a position that allows full
pedal travel.
• Further small adjustments may be necessary to find
the best possible seat/pedal position.
• For vehicles equipped with Driver Memory Seat, you
WARNING!
can use your Remote Keyless Entry (RKE) transmitter
or the memory switch on the driver’s door trim panel Do not adjust the pedals while the vehicle is moving.
to return the adjustable pedals to pre-programmed You could lose control and have an accident. Always
positions. Refer to “Driver Memory Seat” in “Under- adjust the pedals while the vehicle is parked.
standing The Features Of Your Vehicle” for further
information. ELECTRONIC SPEED CONTROL — IF EQUIPPED
When engaged, the Electronic Speed Control takes over
CAUTION!
accelerator operations at speeds greater than 25 mph
Do not place any article under the adjustable pedals (40 km/h).
or impede its ability to move as it may cause damage The Electronic Speed Control buttons are located on the
to the pedal controls. Pedal travel may become lim- right side of the steering wheel.
ited if movement is stopped by an obstruction in the
adjustable pedal’s path.
NOTE: In order to ensure proper operation, the Elec-
tronic Speed Control system has been designed to shut
down if multiple Speed Control functions are operated at
the same time. If this occurs, the Electronic Speed Control
system can be reactivated by pushing the Electronic 3
Speed Control ON/OFF button and resetting the desired
vehicle set speed.
To Activate
Push the ON/OFF button. The Cruise Indicator light in
the Electronic Vehicle Information Center (EVIC) will
illuminate. To turn the system off, push the ON/OFF
Electronic Speed Control Buttons button a second time. The Cruise Indicator light will turn
1 — ON/OFF 3 — SET - off. The system should be turned off when not in use.
2 — RES + 4 — CANCEL
To Deactivate
WARNING!
A soft tap on the brake pedal, pushing the CANCEL
Leaving the Electronic Speed Control system on button, or normal brake pressure while slowing the
when not in use is dangerous. You could accidentally vehicle will deactivate the Electronic Speed Control with-
set the system or cause it to go faster than you want. out erasing the set speed memory.
You could lose control and have an accident. Always
leave the system OFF when you are not using it. Pressing the ON/OFF button or turning the ignition
switch OFF erases the set speed memory.
To Set A Desired Speed
To Resume Speed
Turn the Electronic Speed Control ON. When the vehicle
To resume a previously set speed, push the RES (+)
has reached the desired speed, press the SET (-) button
button and release. Resume can be used at any speed
and release. Release the accelerator and the vehicle will
above 20 mph (32 km/h).
operate at the selected speed.
To Vary The Speed Setting
NOTE: The vehicle should be traveling at a steady speed
and on level ground before pressing the SET button. To Increase Speed
When the Electronic Speed Control is set, you can in-
crease speed by pushing the RES (+) button.
The speed increment shown is dependant on the speed of To Decrease Speed
U.S. (mph) or Metric (km/h) units: When the Electronic Speed Control is set, you can de-
U.S. Speed (mph) crease speed by pushing the SET (-) button.
• Pressing the RES (+) button once will result in a 1 mph The speed decrement shown is dependant on the speed 3
increase in set speed. Each subsequent tap of the of U.S. (mph) or Metric (km/h) units:
button results in an increase of 1 mph. U.S. Speed (mph)
• If the button is continually pressed, the set speed will • Pressing the SET (-) button once will result in a 1 mph
continue to increase until the button is released, then decrease in set speed. Each subsequent tap of the
the new set speed will be established. button results in a decrease of 1 mph.
Metric Speed (km/h) • If the button is continually pressed, the set speed will
• Pressing the RES (+) button once will result in a continue to decrease until the button is released, then
2 km/h increase in set speed. Each subsequent tap of the new set speed will be established.
the button results in an increase of 2 km/h. Metric Speed (km/h)
• If the button is continually pressed, the set speed will • Pressing the SET (-) button once will result in a 2 km/h
continue to increase until the button is released, then decrease in set speed. Each subsequent tap of the
the new set speed will be established. button results in a decrease of 2 km/h.
• If the button is continually pressed, the set speed will
WARNING!
continue to decrease until the button is released, then
the new set speed will be established. Electronic Speed Control can be dangerous where the
To Accelerate For Passing system cannot maintain a constant speed. Your ve-
hicle could go too fast for the conditions, and you
Press the accelerator as you would normally. When the could lose control and have an accident. Do not use
pedal is released, the vehicle will return to the set speed. Electronic Speed Control in heavy traffic or on roads
Using Electronic Speed Control On Hills that are winding, icy, snow-covered or slippery.
The transmission may downshift on hills to maintain the ADAPTIVE CRUISE CONTROL (ACC) — IF
vehicle set speed. EQUIPPED
NOTE: The Electronic Speed Control system maintains Adaptive Cruise Control (ACC) increases the driving
speed up and down hills. A slight speed change on convenience provided by cruise control while traveling
moderate hills is normal. on highways and major roadways. However, it is not a
On steep hills, a greater speed loss or gain may occur so safety system and not designed to prevent collisions.
it may be preferable to drive without Electronic Speed ACC will allow you to keep cruise control engaged in
Control. light to moderate traffic conditions without the constant
need to reset your cruise control. ACC utilizes a radar
sensor designed to detect a vehicle directly ahead of you.
conditions, vehicle speed, distance to the vehicle
NOTE: ahead; and, most importantly, brake operation to
• If the sensor does not detect a vehicle ahead of you, ensure safe operation of the vehicle under all road 3
ACC will maintain a fixed set speed. conditions. Your complete attention is always re-
quired while driving to maintain safe control of
• If the ACC sensor detects a vehicle ahead, ACC will your vehicle. Failure to follow these warnings can
apply limited braking or acceleration (not to exceed result in a collision and death or serious personal
the original set speed) automatically to maintain a injury.
preset following distance, while matching the speed of • The ACC system:
the vehicle ahead. • Does not react to pedestrians, oncoming vehicles,
and stationary objects (e.g., a stopped vehicle in a
WARNING! traffic jam or a disabled vehicle).
• Adaptive Cruise Control (ACC) is a convenience • Cannot take street, traffic, and weather condi-
system. It is not a substitute for active driving tions into account, and may be limited upon
involvement. It is always the driver’s responsibil- adverse sight distance conditions.
ity to be attentive of road, traffic, and weather
(Continued)
(Continued)
The Cruise Control system has two control modes:
• Does not always fully recognize complex driving • Adaptive Cruise Control mode for maintaining an
conditions, which can result in wrong or missing appropriate distance between vehicles.
distance warnings. • Normal (fixed speed) cruise control mode is for cruis-
• Can only apply a maximum of 40% of the vehi- ing at a constant preset speed. For additional informa-
cle’s braking capability, and will not bring the tion, refer to “Normal (Fixed Speed) Cruise Control
vehicle to a complete stop. Mode” in this section.
You should switch off the ACC system:
• When driving in fog, heavy rain, heavy snow, sleet, NOTE: The system will not react to preceding vehicles.
heavy traffic, and complex driving situations (i.e., Always be aware of the mode selected.
in highway construction zones). You can change the mode by using the Cruise Control
• When entering a turn lane or highway off ramp; buttons. The two control modes function differently.
when driving on roads that are winding, icy, snow- Always confirm which mode is selected.
covered, slippery, or have steep uphill or downhill
slopes. Adaptive Cruise Control (ACC) Operation
• When towing a trailer up or down steep slopes. The speed control buttons (located on the right side of the
• When circumstances do not allow safe driving at a steering wheel) operates the ACC system.
constant speed.
NOTE: Any chassis/suspension modifications to the
vehicle will effect the performance of the Adaptive Cruise
Control.
Activating Adaptive Cruise Control (ACC)
3
You can only activate ACC if the vehicle speed is above
20 mph (32 km/h).
When the system is turned on and in the READY state,
the Electronic Vehicle Information Center (EVIC) dis-
plays “Adaptive Cruise Ready.”
When the system is OFF, the EVIC displays “Adaptive
Adaptive Cruise Control Buttons Cruise Control Off.”
1 — DISTANCE SETTING 4 — CANCEL

2 — RES + 5 — ON/OFF
3 — SET - 6 — MODE
NOTE: You cannot enable ACC under the following To Activate
conditions: Push and release the ON/OFF button. The ACC menu in
• When you apply the brakes. the EVIC displays “Adaptive Cruise Control Ready.”
• When the parking brake is set.
• When the automatic transmission is in PARK, RE-
VERSE or NEUTRAL.
• When pushing the RES + button without a previously
set speed in memory.
Adaptive Cruise Control (ACC) Ready

To turn the system OFF, push and release the ON/OFF
WARNING!
button again. At this time, the system will turn off and
the EVIC will display “Adaptive Cruise Control Off.” Leaving the Adaptive Cruise Control (ACC) system
on when not in use is dangerous. You could acciden-
tally set the system or cause it to go faster than you 3
want. You could lose control and have a collision.
Always leave the system off when you are not using
it.
To Set A Desired ACC Speed

When the vehicle reaches the speed desired, push the
SET - button and release. The EVIC will display the set
speed.
Adaptive Cruise Control (ACC) OFF

• The system will not be controlling the distance be-
tween your vehicle and the vehicle ahead. The vehicle
speed will only be determined by the position of the
accelerator pedal.
ACC Set
Remove your foot from the accelerator pedal. If you do
not, the vehicle may continue to accelerate beyond the set
speed. If this occurs:
Driver Override
• The message “DRIVER OVERRIDE” will display in
the EVIC.
To Cancel
The system will disable ACC without erasing the
memory if:
• You softly tap the brake pedal. 3
• You depress the brake pedal.
• You press the CANCEL switch.
• The vehicle speed goes below 15 mph (25 km/h).
• An Anti-Lock Brake System (ABS) event occurs.
• The transmission is shifted into NEUTRAL.
Adaptive Cruise Control (ACC) Cancelled
• The Electronic Stability Control/Traction Control Sys- To Turn Off
tem (ESC/TCS) activates.
The system will turn off and erase the set speed in
NOTE: If ACC is resumed or set with the ESC/TCS off, memory if:
ESC will automatically be re-engaged.
• You push and release the ON/OFF button.
• You turn OFF the ignition.
To Resume Speed To Vary The Speed Setting
Press the RES + button and release. Then remove your To Increase Speed
foot from the accelerator pedal. The EVIC will display the
While ACC is set, you can increase the set speed by
last set speed. pressing the RES + button.
NOTE: You can resume ACC from a minimum of The speed increment shown is dependant on the speed of
20 mph (32 km/h). U.S. (mph) or Metric (km/h) units:
WARNING! U.S. Speed (mph)
The Resume function should only be used if traffic • RES + button once will result in a 1 mph increase in set
and road conditions permit. Resuming a set speed speed. Each subsequent tap of the button results in an
that is too high or too low for prevailing traffic and increase of 1 mph.
road conditions could cause the vehicle to accelerate • If the button is continually pressed, the set speed will
or decelerate too sharply for safe operation. Failure to continue to increase in 5 mph increments until the
follow these warnings can result in a collision and button is released. The increase in set speed is reflected
death or serious personal injury. in the EVIC display.
Metric Speed (km/h) The speed decrement shown is dependant on the speed
of U.S. (mph) or Metric (km/h) units:
• RES + button once will result in a 2 km/h increase in
set speed. Each subsequent tap of the button results in U.S. Speed (mph)
an increase of 2 km/h.
• Pressing the SET - button once will result in a 1 mph 3
• If the button is continually pressed, the set speed will decrease in set speed. Each subsequent tap of the
continue to increase in 10 km/h increments until the button results in a decrease of 1 mph.
button is released. The increase in set speed is reflected
• If the button is continually pressed, the set speed will
in the EVIC display.
continue to decrease in 5 mph increments until the
To Decrease Speed button is released. The decrease in set speed is re-
While ACC is set, the set speed can be decreased by flected in the EVIC display.
pressing the SET - button. Metric Speed (km/h)
• Pressing the SET - button once will result in a 2 km/h
decrease in set speed. Each subsequent tap of the
button results in a decrease of 2 km/h.
• If the button is continually pressed, the set speed will • The ACC system maintains set speed when driving up
continue to decrease in 10 km/h increments until the hill and down hill. However, a slight speed change on
button is released. The decrease in set speed is re- moderate hills is normal. In addition, downshifting
flected in the EVIC display. may occur while climbing uphill or descending down-
hill. This is normal operation and necessary to main-
NOTE:
tain set speed.
• When you use the SET - button to decelerate, if the
Setting The Following Distance In ACC
engine’s braking power does not slow the vehicle
sufficiently to reach the set speed, the brake system The specified following distance for ACC can be set by
will automatically slow the vehicle. varying the distance setting between 3 (long), 2 (me-
dium), and 1 (short). Using this distance setting and the
• The ACC system can only apply a maximum of 25% of vehicle speed, ACC calculates and sets the distance to the
the vehicle’s braking capability and will not bring the vehicle ahead. This distance setting displays in the EVIC.
vehicle to a complete stop.
Distance Set 3 (long) Distance Set 2 (medium)

same lane, the EVIC displays the “Sensed Vehicle Indi-
cator” icon, and the system adjusts vehicle speed auto-
matically to maintain the distance setting, regardless of
the set speed.
The vehicle will then maintain the set distance until:
• The vehicle ahead accelerates to a speed above the set
speed.
• The vehicle ahead moves out of your lane or view of
the sensor.
• The vehicle ahead slows to a speed below 15 mph
Distance Set 1 (short) (25 km/h) and the system automatically disengages
To change the distance setting, press the Distance button itself.
and release. Each time the button is pressed, the distance
• The distance setting is changed.
setting adjusts between 3 (long), 2 (medium), and 1
(short). • The system disengages. (Refer to the information on
ACC Activation).
If there is no vehicle ahead, the vehicle will maintain the
set speed. If a slower moving vehicle is detected in the
The maximum braking applied by ACC is limited; how-
ever, the driver can always apply the brakes manually, if
necessary.
NOTE: The brake lights will illuminate whenever the
3
ACC system applies the brakes.
A Proximity Warning will alert the driver if ACC predicts
that its maximum braking level is not sufficient to
maintain the set distance. If this occurs, a visual alert
“BRAKE” will flash in the EVIC and a chime will sound
while ACC continues to apply its maximum braking
capacity. When this occurs, you should immediately
apply the brakes as needed to maintain a safe distance Brake Alert 3
from the vehicle ahead.
Brake Alert 2 Brake Alert 1

Overtake Aid Adaptive Cruise Control (ACC) Menu
When driving with ACC engaged and following a target The EVIC displays the current ACC system settings. The
vehicle, the system will provide an additional accelera- EVIC is located in the upper part of the instrument
tion to assist in passing vehicles in front. This additional cluster between the speedometer and the tachometer. The
acceleration is triggered when the driver utilizes the left information it displays depends on ACC system status. 3
turn signal. In locations with left hand drive traffic, Press and release the UP or DOWN button until “ACC”
Overtake Aid is active only when passing on the left
or “Cruise” is highlighted in the EVIC. Status of the ACC
hand side of the Target vehicles. or Cruise is also displayed in the menu line.
When a vehicle goes from a location with left hand drive
Press and release the SELECT (right arrow) button to
traffic to a location with right hand drive traffic, the ACC display the following information:
system will automatically detect traffic direction. In this
condition, Overtake Aid is active only when passing on Adaptive Cruise Control Off
the right side of the Target vehicle. This additional • When ACC is deactivated, the display will read
acceleration is triggered when the driver utilizes the right “Adaptive Cruise Control Off.”
turn signal. In this condition the ACC system will no
longer provide Overtake Aid on the left side until it
determines that the vehicle has moved back to a location
with left hand drive traffic.
Adaptive Cruise Control Ready • System Off
• When ACC is activated but the vehicle speed setting • ACC Proximity Warning
has not been selected, the display will read “Adaptive
• ACC Unavailable Warning
Cruise Control Ready.”
• The EVIC will return to the last display selected after
ACC SET
five seconds of no ACC display activity.
• When ACC is set, the set speed will display.
Display Warnings And Maintenance
• The set speed will continue to display in place of the
“Clean Radar Sensor In Front Of Vehicle” Warning
odometer reading when changing the EVIC display
while ACC is set. The ACC “Clean Radar Sensor In Front Of Vehicle”
warning will display when conditions temporarily limit
The ACC screen will display once again if any ACC
system performance. This most often occurs at times of
activity occurs, which may include any of the following:
poor visibility, such as in snow or heavy rain. The ACC
• Set Speed Change system may also become temporarily blinded due to
obstructions, such as mud, dirt or ice. In these cases, the
• Distance Setting Change
EVIC will display “Clean Radar Sensor In Front Of
• System Cancel Vehicle” and the system will deactivate.
• Driver Override
The “Clean Radar Sensor In Front Of Vehicle” message To keep the ACC System operating properly, it is impor-
can sometimes be displayed while driving in highly tant to note the following maintenance items:
reflective areas (i.e. tunnels with reflective tiles, or ice and
• Always keep the sensor clean. Carefully wipe the
snow). The ACC system will recover after the vehicle has
sensor lens with a soft cloth. Be cautious not to damage
left these areas. Under rare conditions, when the radar is 3
the sensor lens.
not tracking any vehicles or objects in its path this
warning may temporarily occur. • Do not remove any screws from the sensor. Doing so
could cause an ACC system malfunction or failure and
NOTE: If the ACC “Clean Radar Sensor In Front Of
require a sensor realignment.
Vehicle” warning is active Normal (Fixed Speed) Cruise
Control is still available. For additional information refer • If the sensor is damaged due to a collision, see your
to “Normal (Fixed Speed) Cruise Control Mode” in this authorized dealer for service.
section.
• Do not attach or install any accessories near the sensor,
If weather conditions are not a factor, the driver should including transparent material or aftermarket grilles.
examine the sensor. It may require cleaning or removal of Doing so could cause an ACC system failure or
an obstruction. The sensor is located in the center of the malfunction.
vehicle behind the lower grille.
When the condition that deactivated the system is no
longer present, the system will return to the “Adaptive
Cruise Control Off” state and will resume function by
simply reactivating it.
NOTE: Installing a vehicle front-end protector or an
aftermarket grille or modifying the grille is not recom-
mended. Doing so may block the sensor and inhibit ACC
operation.
ACC Unavailable Warning
If the system turns off, and the EVIC displays “Adaptive
Cruise Control (ACC) Unavailable”, there may be a
Adaptive Cruise Control (ACC) Unavailable Warning
temporary malfunction that limits ACC functionality.
Precautions While Driving With ACC
Although the vehicle is still drivable under normal
conditions, ACC will be temporarily unavailable. If this In certain driving situations, ACC may have detection
occurs, try activating ACC again later, following a key issues. In these cases, ACC may brake late or unexpect-
cycle. If the problem persists, see your authorized dealer. edly. The driver needs to stay alert and may need to
intervene.
Adding A Trailer Hitch
The weight of a trailer/hitch may affect the performance
of ACC. If there is a noticeable change in performance
following the installation of a trailer/hitch, or if the ACC
performance does not return to normal after removing 3
the trailer/hitch see your authorized dealer.
Offset Driving
ACC may not detect a vehicle in the same lane that is
offset from your direct line of travel, or a vehicle merging
in from a side lane. There may not be sufficient distance
to the vehicle ahead. The offset vehicle may move in and
Offset Driving Condition Example
out of the line of travel, which can cause your vehicle to
brake or accelerate unexpectedly. Turns And Bends
In turns or bends, ACC may detect a vehicle ahead too
late or too early. This may cause your vehicle to brake late
or unexpectedly. Give extra attention in curves and be
ready to apply the brakes if necessary. Be sure to select an
appropriate speed while driving in curves.
Using ACC On Hills
When driving on hills, ACC may not detect a vehicle in
your lane. Depending on the speed, vehicle load, traffic
conditions, and the steepness of the hills, ACC perfor-
mance may be limited.
Turn Or Bend Example

ACC may occasionally provide braking and/or a driver
alert that you consider unnecessary. This may be the
system’s response to signs, guardrails, and other station-
ary objects in a curve. This may also occur at the base of
steep hills. This is normal operation and your vehicle ACC Hill Example
does not require service.
Lane Changing
ACC may not detect a vehicle until it is completely in the
lane in which you are traveling. In the illustration shown,
ACC has not yet detected the vehicle changing lanes and
it may not detect the vehicle until it’s too late for the ACC 3
system to take action. ACC may not detect a vehicle until
it is completely in the lane. There may not be sufficient
distance to the lane-changing vehicle. Always be atten-
tive and ready to apply the brakes if necessary.
Lane Changing Example

Narrow Vehicles Stationary Objects And Vehicles
Some narrow vehicles traveling near the outer edges of ACC does not react to stationary objects and stationary
the lane or edging into the lane are not detected until they vehicles. For example, ACC will not react in situations
have moved fully into the lane. There may not be where the vehicle you are following exits your lane and
sufficient distance to the vehicle ahead. the vehicle ahead is stopped in your lane. Always be
attentive and ready to apply the brakes if necessary.
Narrow Vehicle Example

Stationary Object And Stationary Vehicle Example
General Information to the change of state from Adaptive Cruise Control to
normal Cruise Control. “Cruise Ready” will be displayed
FCC Requirements For Vehicular Radar Systems if the system was in ACC READY or ACC SET position.
Classification Specifications: “Cruise Off” will be displayed if the system was in the
47 C.F.R. Part 15 ACC OFF position. To switch back to Adaptive Cruise 3
Control mode, press the MODE button a second time.
47 C.F.R Part 15.515
Normal (Fixed Speed) Cruise Control Mode WARNING!
In addition to Adaptive Cruise Control mode, a normal In the normal Cruise Control mode, the system will
(fixed speed) Cruise Control mode is available for cruis- not react to vehicles ahead. In addition, the proximity
ing at fixed speeds. The normal Cruise Control mode is warning does not activate and no alarm will sound
designed to maintain a set cruising speed without requir- even if you are too close to the vehicle ahead since
ing the driver to operate the accelerator. Cruise Control neither the presence of the vehicle ahead nor the
can only be operated if the vehicle speed is above 20 mph vehicle-to vehicle distance is detected. Be sure to
(32 km/h). maintain a safe distance between your vehicle and
To change modes, press the MODE button when the the vehicle ahead. Always be aware which mode is
system is in either the OFF, READY, or SET position. selected.
While pressing the mode button, a chime alerts the driver
To Set A Desired Speed • If the button is continually pressed, the set speed will
continue to increase until the button is released, then
When the vehicle reaches the speed desired, press the
the new set speed will be established.
SET - button and release. The EVIC will display the set
speed. Metric Speed (km/h)
NOTE: You must observe the display when setting or • Pressing the RES + button once will result in a 2 km/h
changing speed, not the speedometer. increase in set speed. Each subsequent tap of the
button results in an increase of 2 km/h.
To Vary The Speed Setting
To Increase Speed • If the button is continually pressed, the set speed will
continue to increase until the button is released, then
When the Normal (Fixed Speed) Cruise Control is set, the new set speed will be established.
you can increase speed by pushing the RES + button.
To Decrease Speed
The speed increment shown is dependant on the speed of
U.S. (mph) or Metric (km/h) units: When the Normal (Fixed Speed) Cruise Control is set,
you can decrease speed by pushing the SET - button.
U.S. Speed (mph)
• Pressing the RES + button once will result in a 1 mph
increase in set speed. Each subsequent tap of the
button results in an increase of 1 mph.
The speed decrement shown is dependant on the speed To Cancel
of U.S. (mph) or Metric (km/h) units: The system will disable normal Cruise Control without
U.S. Speed (mph) erasing the memory if:
• Pressing the SET - button once will result in a 1 mph • You softly tap or depress the brake pedal. 3
decrease in set speed. Each subsequent tap of the • You press the CANCEL button.
button results in a decrease of 1 mph.
• The Electronic Stability Control/Traction Control Sys-
• If the button is continually pressed, the set speed will tem (ESC/TCS) activates.
continue to decrease until the button is released, then
the new set speed will be established. To Resume
Metric Speed (km/h) Press the RES + button and then remove your foot from
the accelerator pedal. The EVIC will display the last set
• Pressing the SET - button once will result in a 2 km/h speed.
decrease in set speed. Each subsequent tap of the
button results in a decrease of 2 km/h. To Turn Off
• If the button is continually pressed, the set speed will The system will turn off and erase the set speed in
continue to decrease until the button is released, then memory if:
the new set speed will be established. • You push and release the ON/OFF button.
• You turn off the ignition. system determines a collision with the vehicle in front of
you is no longer probable, the warning message will be
• You switch off ESC.
deactivated.
If the Cruise Control system is turned off and reactivated,
NOTE: The minimum speed for FCW activation is
the system will return to the last driver setting (ACC or
10 mph (16 km/h).
Normal Cruise Control).
Forward Collision Warning — If Equipped WARNING!
The Forward Collision Warning (FCW) system provides Forward Collision Warning (FCW) is not intended to
the driver with audible and visual warnings (within the avoid a collision on its own, nor can FCW detect
EVIC) when it detects a potential frontal collision. The every type of potential collision. The driver has the
warnings are intended to provide the driver with enough responsibility to avoid a collision by controlling the
time to react and avoid the potential collision. vehicle via braking and steering. Failure to follow
FCW monitors the information from the forward looking this warning could lead to serious injury or death.
sensor as well as the Electronic Brake Controller (EBC),
wheel speed sensors, i.e., to calculate a probable rear-end
collision. When the system determines that a rear-end
collision is probable a warning message (both audible
and visual) will be displayed on the EVIC. When the
Changing FCW Status Changing the FCW status to “Off” prevents the system
from warning you of a possible collision with the vehicle
The FCW feature can be set to far, set to near or turned off
in front of you.
using the Uconnect® System, refer to “Uconnect® Set-
tings” in “Understanding Your Instrument Panel” for NOTE:
further information. The FCW Status Off, Near or Far will 3
• In the “Off” setting FCW OFF will be displayed on the
be displayed in the Uconnect® display.
Uconnect® display.
The default status of FCW is the “Far” setting, this allows
• The system will retain the last setting selected by the
the system to warn you of a possible collision with the
driver after ignition shut down.
vehicle in front of you when you are farther away. This
gives you the most reaction time. • FCW will not react to irrelevant objects such as over-
head objects, ground reflections, objects not in the path
Changing the FCW status to the “Near” setting, allows
of the car, stationary objects that are far away, oncom-
the system to warn you of a possible collision with the
ing traffic, or leading vehicles with the same or higher
vehicle in front of you when you are much closer. This
rate of speed.
setting provides less reaction time than the “Far” setting,
which allows for a more dynamic driving experience. • If the FCW becomes disabled then a warning will
display on the EVIC screen.
FCW Unavailable Warning
If the system turns off, and the EVIC displays “ACC/
FCW Unavailable, Service Required”, there may be a
temporary malfunction that limits FCW functionality.
Although the vehicle is still drivable under normal
conditions, FCW will be temporarily unavailable. If this
occurs, try activating FCW again later, following a key
cycle. If the problem persists, see your authorized dealer.
ACC/FCW Unavailable, Service Required Warning

PARKSENSE® REAR PARK ASSIST — IF ParkSense® Sensors
EQUIPPED The four ParkSense® sensors, located in the rear fascia/
The ParkSense® Rear Park Assist system provides visual bumper, monitor the area behind the vehicle that is
and audible indications of the distance between the rear within the sensors’ field of view. The sensors can detect
fascia and a detected obstacle when backing up, e.g. obstacles from approximately 12 in (30 cm) up to 59 in 3
during a parking maneuver. Refer to “ParkSense® Sys- (150 cm) from the rear fascia/bumper in the horizontal
tem Usage Precautions” for limitations of this system and direction, depending on the location, type and orienta-
recommendations. tion of the obstacle.
ParkSense® will retain the last system state (enabled or ParkSense® Warning Display
disabled) from the last ignition cycle when the ignition is The ParkSense® Warning screen will only be displayed if
changed to the ON/RUN position. Sound and Display is selected from the Uconnect®
ParkSense® can be active only when the shift lever is in System. Refer to “Uconnect® Settings” in “Understand-
REVERSE. If ParkSense® is enabled at this shift lever ing Your Instrument Panel” for further information.
position, the system will remain active until the vehicle
speed is increased to approximately 7 mph (11 km/h) or
above. The system will become active again if the vehicle
speed is decreased to speeds less than approximately
6 mph (9 km/h).
The ParkSense® Warning screen is located within the
Electronic Vehicle Information Center (EVIC). It provides
visual warnings to indicate the distance between the rear
fascia/bumper and the detected obstacle. Refer to “Elec-
tronic Vehicle Information Center (EVIC)/Settings” in
formation.
ParkSense® Display
When the vehicle is in REVERSE, the warning display
will turn ON indicating the system status.
Park Assist Ready

Park Assist System Off Slow Tone

The system will indicate a detected obstacle by showing
three solid arcs and will produce a one-half second tone.
As the vehicle moves closer to the obstacle, the EVIC
display will show fewer arcs and the sound tone will
change from slow, to fast, to continuous.
Fast Tone Continuous Tone

The vehicle is close to the obstacle when the warning
display shows one flashing arc and sounds a continuous
tone. The following chart shows the warning alert opera-
tion when the system is detecting an obstacle:
WARNING ALERTS
Rear Distance Greater than 79-39 in 39-25 in 25-12 in Less than
(in/cm) 79 in (200 cm) (200-100 cm) (100-65 cm) (65-30 cm) 12 in (30 cm)
Audible Alert None Single 1/2- Slow Fast Continuous 3
Chime Second Tone
Arcs None 3 Solid 3 Slow 2 Slow 1 Slow
(Continuous) Flashing Flashing Flashing
Enabling And Disabling ParkSense® in “Understanding Your Instrument Panel” for further
information. When the shift lever is moved to REVERSE
ParkSense® can be enabled and disabled using the
Uconnect® System. The available choices are: Off, Sound and the system is disabled, the EVIC will display the
“PARK ASSIST SYSTEM OFF” message for as long as the
Only, or Sound and Display. Refer to “Uconnect® Set-
tings” in “Understanding Your Instrument Panel” for vehicle is in REVERSE.
further information. Rear Park Assist Audible Alerts
When the ParkSense® soft-key is pressed to disable the ParkSense® will turn off the Rear Park Assist audible
system, the EVIC will display the “PARK ASSIST SYS- alert (chime) after approximately 3 seconds when an
TEM OFF” message for approximately five seconds. obstacle has been detected, the vehicle is stationary, and
Refer to “Electronic Vehicle Information Center (EVIC)” brake pedal is applied.
Adjustable Chime Volume Settings “Electronic Vehicle Information Center (EVIC)” in “Un-
derstanding Your Instrument Panel” for further informa-
Chime volume settings can be selected from the
tion. When the shift lever is moved to REVERSE and the
Uconnect® System.
system has detected a faulted condition, the EVIC will
The chime volume settings include LOW, MEDIUM, and display the “CLEAN PARK ASSIST”, ⬙SERVICE PARK
HIGH. The factory default volume setting is MEDIUM. ASSIST⬙ or the “SERVICE PARK ASSIST SYSTEM” mes-
ParkSense® will retain its last known configuration state sage for as long as the vehicle is in REVERSE. Under this
through ignition cycles. condition, ParkSense® will not operate.
Service The ParkSense® Rear Park Assist If “CLEAN PARK ASSIST” appears in the Electronic
System Vehicle Information Center (EVIC) make sure the rear
fascia/bumper is clean and clear of snow, ice, mud, dirt
During vehicle start up, when the ParkSense® Rear Park or other obstruction and then cycle the ignition. If the
Assist System has detected a faulted condition, the message continues to appear see an authorized dealer.
instrument cluster will actuate a single chime, once per
ignition cycle, and it will display the “CLEAN PARK If “SERVICE PARK ASSIST” or “SERVICE PARK ASSIST
ASSIST”, “SERVICE PARK ASSIST” or “SERVICE PARK SYSTEM” appears in the EVIC, see an authorized dealer.
ASSIST SYSTEM” message for five seconds. Refer to
Cleaning The ParkSense® System ParkSense® off, it remains off until you turn it on
again, even if you cycle the ignition key.
Clean the ParkSense® sensors with water, car wash soap
and a soft cloth. Do not use rough or hard cloths. Do not • When you move the shift lever to the REVERSE
scratch or poke the sensors. Otherwise, you could dam- position and ParkSense® is turned off, the EVIC will
age the sensors. display “PARK ASSIST SYSTEM OFF” message for as 3
long as the vehicle is in REVERSE.
ParkSense® System Usage Precautions
• ParkSense®, when on, will MUTE the radio when it is
NOTE:
sounding a tone.
• Ensure that the rear bumper is free of snow, ice, mud,
dirt and debris to keep the ParkSense® system oper- • Clean the ParkSense® sensors regularly, taking care
not to scratch or damage them. The sensors must not
ating properly.
be covered with ice, snow, slush, mud, dirt or debris.
• Jackhammers, large trucks, and other vibrations could Failure to do so can result in the system not working
affect the performance of ParkSense®. properly. The ParkSense® system might not detect an
obstacle behind the fascia/bumper, or it could provide
• When you turn ParkSense® off in DRIVE, the instru-
a false indication that an obstacle is behind the fascia/
ment cluster will display ⬙PARK ASSIST SYSTEM
bumper.
OFF⬙ for five seconds. Furthermore, once you turn
• Ensure the ParkSense® system is OFF if objects such as
CAUTION! (Continued)
bicycle carriers, trailer hitches, etc., are placed within
30 cm from the rear fascia/ bumper. Failure to do so when an obstacle is detected. It is recommended
can result in the system misinterpreting a close object that the driver looks over his/her shoulder when
as a sensor problem, causing the “SERVICE PARK using ParkSense®.
ASSIST SYSTEM” message to be displayed in the
EVIC. WARNING!
CAUTION! Drivers must be careful when backing up even when

using the Rear Park Assist system. Always check
• ParkSense® is only a parking aid and it is unable to carefully behind your vehicle, and be sure to check
recognize every obstacle, including small obstacles. for pedestrians, animals, other vehicles, obstructions,
Parking curbs might be temporarily detected or not or blind spots before backing up. You are responsible
detected at all. Obstacles located above or below for the safety of your surroundings and must con-
the sensors will not be detected when they are in tinue to pay attention while backing up. Failure to do
close proximity. so can result in serious injury or death.
• The vehicle must be driven slowly when using
ParkSense® in order to be able to stop in time
(Continued)
PARKVIEW® REAR BACK UP CAMERA — IF When the vehicle is shifted out of REVERSE, the rear
EQUIPPED camera mode is exited and the navigation or audio screen
appears again.
Your vehicle may be equipped with the ParkView® Rear
Back Up Camera that allows you to see an on-screen When displayed, static grid lines will illustrate the width
image of the rear surroundings of your vehicle whenever 3
of the vehicle and will show separate zones that will help
the shift lever is put into REVERSE. The image will be indicate the distance to the rear of the vehicle. The
displayed on the touchscreen display along with a cau- following table shows the approximate distances for each
tion note to “check entire surroundings” across the top of zone:
the screen. After five seconds this note will disappear.
The ParkView® camera is located on the rear of the
vehicle above the rear License plate.
Zone Distance to the rear of the vehicle
Red 0 - 1 ft (0 - 30 cm)
Yellow 1 ft - 3 ft (30 cm - 1 m)
Green 3 ft or greater (1 m or greater)
WARNING! CAUTION! (Continued)

Drivers must be careful when backing up even when • To avoid vehicle damage, the vehicle must be
using the ParkView® Rear Back Up Camera. Always driven slowly when using ParkView® to be able to
check carefully behind your vehicle, and be sure to stop in time when an obstacle is seen. It is recom-
check for pedestrians, animals, other vehicles, ob- mended that the driver look frequently over his/her
structions, or blind spots before backing up. You are shoulder when using ParkView®.
responsible for the safety of your surroundings and
NOTE: If snow, ice, mud, or any foreign substance
must continue to pay attention while backing up.
builds up on the camera lens, clean the lens, rinse with
Failure to do so can result in serious injury or death.
water, and dry with a soft cloth. Do not cover the lens.
Turning ParkView® On Or Off — With
CAUTION!
Touchscreen Radio
• To avoid vehicle damage, ParkView® should only
1. Turn the Radio on.
be used as a parking aid. The ParkView® camera is
unable to view every obstacle or object in your 2. Push the “More” soft-key.
drive path.
3. Push the “Settings” soft-key.
(Continued)
4. Push the “Safety & Driving Assistance” soft-key.
5. Push the check box soft-key next to “Parkview®
Backup Camera” to enable/disable.
OVERHEAD CONSOLE 3
The overhead console contains courtesy/reading lights
and storage for sunglasses. Universal Garage Door
Opener (HomeLink®) and power sunroof switches may
also be included, if equipped.
Overhead Console
Front Map/Reading Lights — If Equipped To turn the lights off, press the switch a second time. The
Lights are mounted in the overhead console. Each light lights also turn on when a door is opened. The lights will
can be turned on by pressing the switch on either side of also turn on when the UNLOCK button on the RKE is
pressed.
the console. These buttons are backlit for night time
visibility.
Front Map/Reading Light Switches

Front Map/Reading Lights
Courtesy Lights Sunglasses Bin Door
The courtesy lights can be turned on by pressing the top At the front of the console a compartment is provided for
corner of the lens. To turn the lights off, press the lens a the storage of a pair of sunglasses. The storage compart-
second time. ment access is a “push/push” design. Push the chrome
pad on the door to open. Push the chrome pad on the 3
door to close.
Courtesy Lights
Sunglasses Bin Door

GARAGE DOOR OPENER — IF EQUIPPED
HomeLink® replaces up to three hand-held transmitters
that operate devices such as garage door openers, motor-
ized gates, lighting or home security systems. The
HomeLink® unit is powered by your vehicles 12 Volt
battery.
The HomeLink® buttons, located on either the overhead
console, headliner or sunvisor, designate the three differ-
ent HomeLink® channels. The HomeLink® indicator is
located above the center button.
HomeLink® Buttons/Overhead Consoles

For more efficient programming and accurate transmis-
sion of the radio-frequency signal it is recommended that
a new battery be placed in the hand-held transmitter of
the device that is being programmed to the HomeLink®
system. 3
Erase all channels before you begin programming. To
erase the channels place the ignition in the ON/RUN
position and push and hold the two outside HomeLink®
buttons (I and III) for up 20 seconds, or until the red
indicator flashes.
NOTE:
HomeLink® Buttons/Sunvisor/Headliner
• Erasing all channels should only be performed when
NOTE: HomeLink® is disabled when the Vehicle Secu-
programming HomeLink® for the first time. Do not
rity Alarm is active.
erase channels when programming additional buttons.
Before You Begin Programming HomeLink®
• If you have any problems, or require assistance, please
Ensure your vehicle is parked outside of the garage call toll-free 1-800-355-3515 or, on the Internet at
before you begin programming. www.HomeLink.com for information or assistance.
Programming A Rolling Code
For programming garage door openers that were manu-
factured after 1995. These garage door openers can be
identified by the “LEARN” or “TRAIN” button located
where the hanging antenna is attached to the garage door
opener. It is NOT the button that is normally used to
open and close the door. The name and color of the
button may vary by manufacturer.
Training The Garage Door Opener

1 — Door Opener 2 — Training Button
1. Cycle the ignition to the ON/RUN position.

2. Place the hand-held transmitter 1 to 3 inches (3 to 8 Firmly push and release the “LEARN” or “TRAIN-
cm) away from the HomeLink® button you wish to ING” button. On some garage door openers/devices
program while keeping the HomeLink® indicator there may be a light that blinks when the garage door
light in view. opener/device is in the LEARN/TRAIN mode.
3
3. Simultaneously push and hold both the HomeLink® NOTE: You have 30 seconds in which to initiate the next
button you want to program and the hand-held trans- step after the LEARN button has been pushed.
mitter button.
6. Return to the vehicle and push the programmed
4. Continue to hold both buttons and observe the indi- HomeLink® button twice (holding the button for two
cator light. The HomeLink® indicator will flash slowly seconds each time). If the garage door opener/device
and then rapidly after HomeLink® has received the activates, programming is complete.
frequency signal from the hand-held transmitter. Re-
NOTE: If the garage door opener/device does not acti-
lease both buttons after the indicator light changes
vate, push the button a third time (for two seconds) to
from slow to rapid.
complete the training.
5. At the garage door opener motor (in the garage), To program the remaining two HomeLink® buttons,
locate the “LEARN” or “TRAINING” button. This can repeat each step for each remaining button. DO NOT
usually be found where the hanging antenna wire is erase the channels.
attached to the garage door opener/device motor.
Reprogramming A Single HomeLink® Button 2. Place the hand-held transmitter 1 to 3 inches (3 to 8
cm) away from the HomeLink® button you wish to
To reprogram a channel that has been previously trained,
program while keeping the HomeLink® indicator
follow these steps:
light in view.
3. Simultaneously push and hold both the Homelink®
2. Push and hold the desired HomeLink® button until button you want to program and the hand-held trans-
the indicator light begins to flash after 20 seconds. Do mitter button.
not release the button.
4. Continue to hold both buttons and observe the indi-
3. Without releasing the button proceed with “Program- cator light. The Homelink® indicator will flash slowly
ming A Rolling Code” step 2 and follow all remaining and then rapidly after HomeLink® has received the
steps. frequency signal from the hand-held transmitter. Re-
lease both buttons after the indicator light changes
Programming A Non-Rolling Code
from slow to rapid.
For programming Garage Door Openers manufactured
before 1995. 5. Push and hold the programmed HomeLink® button
and observe the indicator light.
1. Turn the ignition switch to the ON/RUN position. • If the indicator light stays on constantly, program-
ming is complete and the garage door/device should
activate when the HomeLink® button is pushed.
• To program the two remaining HomeLink® buttons, Canadian/Gate Operator Programming
repeat each step for each remaining button. DO NOT For programming transmitters in Canada/United States
erase the channels. that require the transmitter signals to “time-out” after
Reprogramming A Single HomeLink® Button several seconds of transmission.
3
To reprogram a channel that has been previously trained, Canadian radio frequency laws require transmitter sig-
follow these steps: nals to time-out (or quit) after several seconds of trans-
mission – which may not be long enough for HomeLink®
to pick up the signal during programming. Similar to this
2. Push and hold the desired HomeLink® button until Canadian law, some U.S. gate operators are designed to
the indicator light begins to flash after 20 seconds. Do time-out in the same manner.
not release the button. It may be helpful to unplug the device during the cycling
3. Without releasing the button proceed with “Program- process to prevent possible overheating of the garage
ming A Non-Rolling Code” step 2 and follow all door or gate motor.
remaining steps. 1. Cycle the ignition to the ON/RUN position.
2. Place the hand-held transmitter 1 to 3 inches (3 to 8 • If the indicator light stays on constantly, program-
cm) away from the HomeLink® button you wish to ming is complete and the garage door/device should
program while keeping the HomeLink® indicator activate when the HomeLink® button is pushed.
light in view. • To program the two remaining HomeLink® buttons,
3. Continue to push and hold the HomeLink® button, repeat each step for each remaining button. DO NOT
while you press and release (“cycle”) your hand-held erase the channels.
transmitter every two seconds until HomeLink® has If you unplugged the garage door opener/device for
successfully accepted the frequency signal. The indi- programming, plug it back in at this time.
cator light will flash slowly and then rapidly when
Reprogramming A Single HomeLink® Button
fully trained.
To reprogram a channel that has been previously trained,
4. Watch for the HomeLink® indicator to change flash
follow these steps:
rates. When it changes, it is programmed. It may take
up to 30 seconds or longer in rare cases. The garage 1. Cycle the ignition to the ON/RUN position.
door may open and close while you are programming.
2. Push and hold the desired HomeLink® button until
5. Push and hold the programmed HomeLink® button the indicator light begins to flash after 20 seconds. Do
and observe the indicator light. not release the button.
3. Without releasing the button proceed with The HomeLink® Universal Transceiver is disabled when
“Canadian/Gate Operator Programming” step 2 and the Vehicle Security Alarm is active.
follow all remaining steps.
Troubleshooting Tips
Using HomeLink® If you are having trouble programming HomeLink®, 3
To operate, push and release the programmed here are some of the most common solutions:
HomeLink® button. Activation will now occur for the • Replace the battery in the original hand-held transmit-
programmed device (i.e., garage door opener, gate opera- ter.
tor, security system, entry door lock, home/office light-
ing, etc.,). The hand-held transmitter of the device may • Press the LEARN button on the Garage Door Opener
also be used at any time. to complete the training for a Rolling Code.
Security • Did you unplug the device for programming and

remember to plug it back in?
It is advised to erase all channels before you sell or turn
in your vehicle. If you have any problems, or require assistance, please
call toll-free 1-800-355-3515 or, on the Internet at
To do this, press and hold the two outside buttons for 20 www.HomeLink.com for information or assistance.
seconds until the red indicator flashes. Note that all
channels will be erased. Individual channels cannot be
erased.

Vehicle exhaust contains carbon monoxide, a danger- use a garage door opener without these safety fea-
ous gas. Do not run your vehicle in the garage while tures. Call toll-free 1–800–355–3515 or, on the Internet
programming the transceiver. Exhaust gas can cause at www.HomeLink.com for safety information or
serious injury or death. assistance.
General Information
WARNING!
This device complies with FCC rules Part 15 and Industry
Your motorized door or gate will open and close Canada RSS-210. Operation is subject to the following
while you are programming the universal trans- two conditions:
ceiver. Do not program the transceiver if people, pets 1. This device may not cause harmful interference.
or other objects are in the path of the door or gate.
Only use this transceiver with a garage door opener 2. This device must accept any interference that may be
that has a “stop and reverse” feature as required by received including interference that may cause unde-
Federal safety standards. This includes most garage sired operation.
door opener models manufactured after 1982. Do not
(Continued)
NOTE:
• The transmitter has been tested and it complies with
FCC and IC rules. Changes or modifications not ex-
pressly approved by the party responsible for compli-
3
ance could void the user’s authority to operate the
device.
• The term IC before the certification/registration num-
ber only signifies that Industry Canada technical speci-
fications were met.
POWER SUNROOF — IF EQUIPPED

The power sunroof switch is located between the sun Power Sunroof Switch
visors on the overhead console. WARNING!
• Never leave children unattended in a vehicle, or
with access to an unlocked vehicle. Never leave the
Key Fob in or near the vehicle, or in a location
(Continued)
Opening Sunroof — Express
accessible to children. Do not leave the ignition of Press the switch rearward and release it within one-half
a vehicle equipped with Keyless Enter-N-Go™ in second. The sunroof and sunshade will open automati-
the ACC or ON/RUN mode. Occupants, particu- cally from any position. The sunroof and sunshade will
larly unattended children, can become entrapped open fully and stop automatically. This is called “Express
by the power sunroof while operating the power Open”. During Express Open operation, any movement
sunroof switch. Such entrapment may result in of the sunroof switch will stop the sunroof.
serious injury or death. Opening Sunroof — Manual Mode
• In a collision, there is a greater risk of being thrown
To open the sunroof, press and hold the switch rearward
from a vehicle with an open sunroof. You could
to full open. Any release of the switch will stop the
also be seriously injured or killed. Always fasten
movement. The sunroof and sunshade will remain in a
your seat belt properly and make sure all passen-
partially opened condition until the switch is pushed and
gers are also properly secured.
held rearward again.
• Do not allow small children to operate the sunroof.
Never allow your fingers, other body parts, or any Closing Sunroof — Express
object, to project through the sunroof opening.
Press the switch forward and release it within one-half
Injury may result.
second and the sunroof will close automatically from any
position. The sunroof will close fully and stop automati- NOTE: If three consecutive sunroof close attempts result
cally. This is called “Express Close”. During Express in Pinch Protect reversals, the fourth close attempt will be
Close operation, any movement of the switch will stop a Manual Close movement with Pinch Protect disabled.
the sunroof.
Venting Sunroof — Express
3
Closing Sunroof — Manual Mode Press and release the Vent button within one half second
To close the sunroof, press and hold the switch in the and the sunroof will open to the vent position. This is
forward position. Any release of the switch will stop the called “Express Vent”, and it will occur regardless of
movement and the sunroof will remain in a partially sunroof position. During Express Vent operation, any
closed condition until the switch is pushed and held movement of the switch will stop the sunroof.
forward again.
Sunshade Operation
Pinch Protect Feature The sunshade can be opened manually. However, the
This feature will detect an obstruction in the opening of sunshade will open automatically as the sunroof opens.
the sunroof during Express Close operation. If an ob-
NOTE: The sunshade cannot be closed if the sunroof is
struction in the path of the sunroof is detected, the
open.
sunroof will automatically retract. Remove the obstruc-
tion if this occurs. Next, press the switch forward and
release to Express Close.
Wind Buffeting Ignition Off Operation
Wind buffeting can be described as the perception of For vehicles not equipped with the Electronic Vehicle
pressure on the ears or a helicopter-type sound in the Information Center (EVIC), the power sunroof switch
ears. Your vehicle may exhibit wind buffeting with the will remain active for 45 seconds after the ignition switch
windows down, or the sunroof (if equipped) in certain is turned to the LOCK position. Opening either front
open or partially open positions. This is a normal occur- door will cancel this feature.
rence and can be minimized. If the buffeting occurs with
NOTE:
the rear windows open, then open the front and rear
windows together to minimize the buffeting. If the • For vehicles equipped with the EVIC, the power
buffeting occurs with the sunroof open, then adjust the sunroof switch will remain active for up to approxi-
sunroof opening to minimize the buffeting or open any mately ten minutes after the ignition switch is turned
window. to the LOCK position. Opening either front door will
cancel this feature.
Sunroof Maintenance
Use only a non-abrasive cleaner and a soft cloth to clean • The Ignition Off time is programmable using the
the glass panel. Uconnect® System. Refer to “Uconnect® Settings” in
“Understanding Your Instrument Panel” for further
information.
ELECTRICAL POWER OUTLETS
CAUTION!
There are three 12 Volt (13 Amps) electrical power outlets
on this vehicle. The power outlets are protected by a fuse. • Do not exceed the maximum power of 160 Watts (13
Amps) at 12 Volts. If the 160 Watts (13 Amps) power
Insert a cigar lighter or accessory plug into the power rating is exceeded, the fuse protecting the system 3
outlets for use to ensure proper operation. will need to be replaced.
NOTE: To ensure proper operation, a MOPAR® knob • Power outlets are designed for accessory plugs
and element must be used. only. Do not insert any other object in the power
outlets as this will damage the outlet and blow the
fuse. Improper use of the power outlet can cause
damage not covered by your New Vehicle Limited
Warranty.
The front 12 Volt power outlet has power available only

when the ignition is placed in the ACC or RUN position.
The center console outlet is powered directly from the
battery (power available at all times). Items plugged into
this outlet may discharge the battery and/or prevent the
engine from starting.
Front Power Outlet
WARNING!
Do not place ashes inside the cubby bin located on
the center console on vehicles not equipped with the Center Console Power Outlet
ash receiver tray. A fire leading to bodily injury could
result.
There is also a 12 Volt power outlet located on the back of
the center console for rear passengers. This power outlet
has power available only when the ignition is placed in
the ACC or RUN position.
3
Power Outlet Fuse Locations

1 — #12 Fuse 20 A Yellow Cigar Lighter Instrument Panel &
Power Outlet Console Rear
2 — #38 Fuse 20 A Yellow Power Outlet Inside Arm Rest
Rear Center Console Power Outlet

To avoid serious injury or death: discharge sufficiently to degrade battery life and/or
prevent the engine from starting.
• Only devices designed for use in this type of
• Accessories that draw higher power (i.e., coolers,
outlet should be inserted into any 12 Volt
vacuum cleaners, lights, etc.) will degrade the bat-
outlet.
tery even more quickly. Only use these intermit-
• Do not touch with wet hands.
tently and with greater caution.
• Close the lid when not in use and while driving the
vehicle. • After the use of high power draw accessories or
• If this outlet is mishandled, it may cause an electric long periods of the vehicle not being started (with
shock and failure. accessories still plugged in), the vehicle must be
driven a sufficient length of time to allow the
alternator to recharge the vehicle’s battery.
CAUTION! • Power outlets are designed for accessory plugs
• Many accessories that can be plugged in draw only. Do not hang any type of accessory or acces-
power from the vehicle’s battery even when not in sory bracket from the plug. Improper use of the
use (i.e., cellular phones, etc.). Eventually, if power outlet can cause damage.
plugged in long enough, the vehicle’s battery will
(Continued)
CUPHOLDERS
Front Seat Cupholders
The cupholders are located in the forward edge of the
center console. 3
Front Cupholders
Heated And Cooled Cupholders — If Equipped
Your vehicle may be equipped with heated and cooled
cupholders. The cupholders are designed to help keep
warm beverages warm and cold beverages cool.
Retractable Cover
WARNING!
When using the cupholder in the “Hot” position,
avoid contact with the heated portion of the cup-
holder in order to reduce the possibility of burns.
Persons who are unable to feel pain to the skin
because of advanced age, chronic illness, diabetes,
spinal cord injuries, medication, alcohol use, exhaus-
tion or other physical condition must exercise par-
ticular care in order to prevent serious burn injury.
Keep the cupholder free of debris or stray objects
when operated in the Heat position.
Heated And Cooled Cupholder Switches
Press the “Cold” symbol once to turn on the cupholder; Rear Seat Cupholders
press the symbol a second time to turn the cupholder off. The rear seat cupholders are located in the center armrest
Press the “Hot” symbol once to activate the cupholder; between the rear seats. The cupholders are positioned
press the symbol a second time to turn off the cupholder. forward in the armrest and side-by-side to provide
convenient access to beverage cans or bottles while Lighted Cupholders — If Equipped
maintaining a resting place for the rear occupant’s el- On some vehicles the rear cupholders are equipped with
bows. a light ring that illuminates the cupholders for the rear
passengers. The light ring is controlled by the Dimmer
Control. Refer to “Lights” in “Understanding The Fea- 3
tures Of Your Vehicle” for further information.
Rear Seat Cupholders
Light Ring In Rear Cupholder

STORAGE
Glove Compartment
The glove compartment is located on the passenger side
of the instrument panel.
Opened Glove Compartment
Glove Compartment
Console Features Inside the center console armrest, there is a removable
There is an open cubby bin located forward of the shift upper storage tray that can be slid forward/rearward on
lever. rails for access to the lower storage area. This tray has an
integrated coin holder, along with additional area for
Two separate storage compartments are also located small items like an ipod or phone. Below the upper tray, 3
underneath the center console armrest. the lower storage compartment is made for larger items,
like CDs and tissue boxes. In addition, the 12 Volt power
outlet, USB and Aux jack are located here.
WARNING!
Do not operate this vehicle with a console compart-
ment lid in the open position. Driving with the
console compartment lid open may result in injury in
a collision.
Center Console
Door Storage Cargo Area — Vehicles Equipped With 60/40
The door panels contain storage areas. Split-Folding Rear Seat
The 60/40 split-folding rear seat provides cargo-carrying
versatility. The seatbacks fold down easily by pulling
nylon tabs between the seatbacks and the bolsters. When
the seats are folded down, they provide a continuous,
nearly-flat extension of the load floor.
When the seatback is folded to the upright position, make
sure it is latched by strongly pulling on the top of the
seatback above the seat strap.
WARNING!
• Be certain that the seatback is securely locked into
Front Door Trim Storage position. If the seatback is not securely locked into
(Continued)
WARNING! (Continued) WARNING!

position, the seat will not provide the proper sta- The weight and position of cargo and passengers can
bility for child seats and/or passengers. An improp- change the vehicle center of gravity and vehicle
erly latched seat could cause serious injury. handling. To avoid loss of control resulting in per- 3
• The cargo area in the rear of the vehicle (with the sonal injury, follow these guidelines for loading your
rear seatbacks in the locked-up or folded down vehicle:
position) should not be used as a play area by • Always place cargo evenly on the cargo floor. Put
children when the vehicle is in motion. They could heavier objects as low and as far forward as pos-
be seriously injured in a collision. Children should sible.
be seated and using the proper restraint system. • Place as much cargo as possible in front of the rear
• To help protect against personal injury, passengers axle. Too much weight or improperly placed weight
should not be seated in the rear cargo area. The rear over or behind the rear axle can cause the rear of
cargo space is intended for load carrying purposes the vehicle to sway.
only, not for passengers, who should sit in seats • Do not pile luggage or cargo higher than the top of
and use seat belts. the seatback. This could impair visibility or be-
come a dangerous projectile in a sudden stop or
collision.
(Continued)
REAR WINDOW FEATURES
CAUTION!
Rear Window Defroster
Failure to follow these cautions can cause damage to
the heating elements:
The rear window defroster button is located on • Use care when washing the inside of the rear
the climate control. Press this button to turn on the window. Do not use abrasive window cleaners on
rear window defroster and the heated outside mirrors (if the interior surface of the window. Use a soft cloth
equipped). An indicator in the button will illuminate and a mild washing solution, wiping parallel to the
when the rear window defroster is on. The rear window heating elements. Labels can be peeled off after
defroster automatically turns off after approximately 10 soaking with warm water.
minutes. For an additional five minutes of operation, • Do not use scrapers, sharp instruments, or abrasive
press the button a second time. window cleaners on the interior surface of the
window.
• Keep all objects a safe distance from the window.
LOAD LEVELING SYSTEM — IF EQUIPPED
The automatic load leveling system will provide a level-
riding vehicle under most passenger and cargo loading
conditions.
3
A hydraulic pump contained within the shock absorbers
raises the rear of the vehicle to the correct height. It takes
approximately 1 mile (1.6 km) of driving for the leveling
to complete depending on road surface conditions.
If the leveled vehicle is not moved for approximately 15
hours, the leveling system will bleed itself down. The
vehicle must be driven to reset the system.
UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL
CONTENTS
䡵 INSTRUMENT PANEL FEATURES . . . . . . . . . .317 ▫ EVIC Red Telltale Lights . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .335
4
䡵 INSTRUMENT CLUSTER . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .318 ▫ Gear Shift Indicator (GSI) — If Equipped . . . .338
䡵 INSTRUMENT CLUSTER — PREMIUM . . . . . . .319 ▫ Oil Change Due . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .340
䡵 INSTRUMENT CLUSTER DESCRIPTIONS . . . . .320 ▫ Fuel Economy . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .340
䡵 ELECTRONIC VEHICLE INFORMATION CENTER ▫ Vehicle Speed . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .342
(EVIC) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .329
▫ Trip Info . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .343
▫ Electronic Vehicle Information Center (EVIC)
▫ Units . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .343
Displays . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .332
▫ Vehicle Info (Customer Information Features) . .343
▫ EVIC White Telltale Lights . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .333
▫ Messages # . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .344
▫ EVIC Amber Telltales . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .334
▫ Turn Menu OFF. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .345
316 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL
䡵 Uconnect® SETTINGS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .345 ▫ Radio Operation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .378
▫ Hard-Keys . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .345 ▫ CD Player . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .378
▫ Soft-Keys . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .345 䡵 CD/DVD DISC MAINTENANCE . . . . . . . . . . .379
▫ Customer Programmable Features — Uconnect® 䡵 RADIO OPERATION AND MOBILE PHONES . .379
4.3 Settings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .345
䡵 CLIMATE CONTROLS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .380
▫ Customer Programmable Features — Uconnect®
▫ General Overview . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .380
8.4 Settings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .359
▫ Hard-Keys . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .380
䡵 iPod®/USB/MP3 CONTROL . . . . . . . . . . . . . .375
▫ Soft-Keys . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .381
䡵 HARMAN KARDON® Logic7® HIGH
PERFORMANCE MULTICHANNEL SURROUND ▫ Climate Control Functions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .386
SOUND SYSTEM WITH DRIVER-SELECTABLE
▫ Automatic Temperature Control (ATC) . . . . . .388
SURROUND (DSS) — IF EQUIPPED . . . . . . . . .376
▫ Operating Tips . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .389
䡵 STEERING WHEEL AUDIO CONTROLS — IF
EQUIPPED . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .377
UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 317
INSTRUMENT PANEL FEATURES
1 — Air Outlet 7 — ESC Off Switch 13 — Engine Start/Stop Button

2 — Instrument Cluster 8 — Uconnect® System Hard Controls 14 — Trunk Release Button
3 — Hazard Switch 9 — SD Memory Card Slot 15 — Dimmer Controls
4 — Uconnect® System 10 — Power Outlet 16 — Hood Release
5 — Climate Control Hard Controls 11 — CD/DVD Slot 17 — Headlight Switch
6 — Glove Compartment 12 — Storage Compartment
INSTRUMENT CLUSTER
INSTRUMENT CLUSTER — PREMIUM
4
INSTRUMENT CLUSTER DESCRIPTIONS If the vehicle electronics sense that the vehicle is driven
1. Tachometer more than 1 mile (1.6 km) with either turn signal on, a
continuous chime will sound to alert you to turn the
This gauge measures engine revolutions-per-minute signals off. If either indicator flashes at a rapid rate, check
(RPM x 1000). for a defective outside light bulb.
2. AWD (All Wheel Drive) Indicator — If Equipped 5. Front Fog Light Indicator — If Equipped
The AWD indicator will illuminate when All Wheel Drive This indicator will illuminate when the front
(AWD) is activated. fog lights are on.
3. Park/Headlight ON Indicator — If Equipped
6. High Beam Indicator
This indicator will illuminate when the park
lights or headlights are turned on. This indicator shows that the high beam head-
lights are on. Push the multifunction lever for-
ward to switch the headlights to high beam, and pull
4. Turn Signal Indicators toward yourself (normal position) to return to low beam.
The arrow will flash with the exterior turn
signal when the turn signal lever is operated.
7. Odometer Display/Electronic Vehicle Information Electronic Vehicle Information Center (EVIC) Display
Center (EVIC) Display The Electronic Vehicle Information Center (EVIC) fea-
Odometer Display tures a driver-interactive display that is located in the
instrument cluster. For further information, refer to
The odometer display shows the total distance the ve-
“Electronic Vehicle Information Center (EVIC) found in
hicle has been driven.
Understanding Your Instrument Panel”. 4
U.S. Federal regulations require that upon transfer of
The Shift Lever Indicator is self-contained within the
vehicle ownership, the seller certify to the purchaser the
EVIC display. It displays the gear position of the auto-
correct mileage that the vehicle has been driven. If your
matic transmission.
odometer needs to be repaired or serviced, the repair
technician should leave the odometer reading the same
as it was before the repair or service. If s/he cannot do so,
then the odometer must be set at zero, and a sticker must
be placed in the door jamb stating what the mileage was
before the repair or service. It is a good idea for you to
make a record of the odometer reading before the repair/
service, so that you can be sure that it is properly reset, or
that the door jamb sticker is accurate if the odometer
must be reset at zero.
NOTE: vehicle placard or tire inflation pressure label, you should
• You must apply the brakes before shifting from determine the proper tire inflation pressure for those
PARK. tires.)
As an added safety feature, your vehicle has been
• The highest available transmission gear is displayed
equipped with a Tire Pressure Monitoring System
in the lower right corner of the Electronic Vehicle
(TPMS) that illuminates a low tire pressure telltale when
Information Center (EVIC) whenever the Electronic
one or more of your tires is significantly under-inflated.
Range Select (ERS) feature is active. Use the +/-
selector on the shift lever to activate ERS. Refer to Accordingly, when the low tire pressure telltale illumi-
“Automatic Transmission” in “Starting And Operat- nates, you should stop and check your tires as soon as
possible, and inflate them to the proper pressure. Driving
ing” for further information.
on a significantly under-inflated tire causes the tire to
8. Tire Pressure Monitoring Telltale Light — If Equipped overheat and can lead to tire failure. Under-inflation also
reduces fuel efficiency and tire tread life, and may affect
Each tire, including the spare (if provided), the vehicle’s handling and stopping ability.
should be checked monthly when cold and Please note that the TPMS is not a substitute for proper
inflated to the inflation pressure recommended tire maintenance, and it is the driver’s responsibility to
by the vehicle manufacturer on the vehicle maintain correct tire pressure, even if under-inflation has
placard or tire inflation pressure label. (If your vehicle not reached the level to trigger illumination of the TPMS
has tires of a different size than the size indicated on the low tire pressure telltale.
Your vehicle has also been equipped with a TPMS
CAUTION!
malfunction indicator to indicate when the system is not
operating properly. The TPMS malfunction indicator is The TPMS has been optimized for the original
combined with the low tire pressure telltale. When the equipment tires and wheels. TPMS pressures and
system detects a malfunction, the telltale will flash for warning have been established for the tire size
approximately one minute and then remain continuously equipped on your vehicle. Undesirable system opera-
illuminated. This sequence will continue upon subse- tion or sensor damage may result when using re- 4
quent vehicle start-ups as long as the malfunction exists. placement equipment that is not of the same size,
When the malfunction indicator is illuminated, the sys- type, and/or style. Aftermarket wheels can cause
tem may not be able to detect or signal low tire pressure sensor damage. Do not use tire sealant from a can or
as intended. TPMS malfunctions may occur for a variety balance beads if your vehicle is equipped with a
of reasons, including the installation of replacement or TPMS, as damage to the sensors may result.
alternate tires or wheels on the vehicle that prevent the
TPMS from functioning properly. Always check the 9. Malfunction Indicator Light (MIL)
TPMS malfunction telltale after replacing one or more The Malfunction Indicator Light (MIL) is part of
tires or wheels on your vehicle, to ensure that the an Onboard Diagnostic system, called OBD, that
replacement or alternate tires and wheels allow the TPMS monitors engine and automatic transmission con-
to continue to function properly. trol systems. The light will illuminate when the key is in
the ON/RUN position, before engine start. If the bulb
does not come on when turning the key from OFF to
WARNING!
ON/RUN, have the condition checked promptly.
Certain conditions, such as poor fuel quality, etc., may A malfunctioning catalytic converter, as referenced
illuminate the MIL after engine start. The vehicle should above, can reach higher temperatures than in normal
be serviced if the light stays on through several of your operating conditions. This can cause a fire if you
typical driving cycles. In most situations, the vehicle will drive slowly or park over flammable substances such
drive normally and will not require towing. as dry plants, wood, cardboard, etc. This could result
in death or serious injury to the driver, occupants or
CAUTION! others.
Prolonged driving with the Malfunction Indicator 10. Speedometer

Light (MIL) on could cause damage to the engine Indicates vehicle speed.
control system. It also could affect fuel economy and
driveability. If the MIL is flashing, severe catalytic 11. Fuel Door Reminder
converter damage and power loss will soon occur. The arrow in this symbol is a reminder that the
Immediate service is required. Fuel Filler Door is located on the left side of the
vehicle.
12. Fuel Gauge If the ABS light remains on or turns on while driving, it
indicates that the Anti-Lock portion of the brake system
The pointer shows the level of fuel in the fuel tank when
is not functioning and that service is required. However,
the ignition switch is in the ON/RUN position.
the conventional brake system will continue to operate
13. Air Bag Warning Light normally if the BRAKE warning light is not on.
This light will turn on for four to eight seconds If the ABS light is on, the brake system should be serviced 4
as a bulb check when the ignition switch is first as soon as possible to restore the benefits of Anti-Lock
turned to ON/RUN. If the light is either not on brakes. If the ABS light does not turn on when the
during starting, stays on, or turns on while ignition switch is turned to the ON/RUN position, have
driving, have the system inspected at an authorized the light inspected by an authorized dealer.
dealer as soon as possible. Refer to “Occupant Restraints”
15. Sport Mode — If Equipped
in “Things To Know Before Starting Your Vehicle” for
further information. This light will illuminate when the sport mode
is selected. This mode provides performance
14. Anti-Lock Brake (ABS) Light
based tuning. For further information, refer to
This light monitors the Anti-Lock Brake System ”Sport Mode” in “Starting And Operating”.
(ABS). The light will turn on when the ignition
switch is turned to the ON/RUN position and
may stay on for as long as four seconds.
16. Vehicle Security Light — If Equipped If the light remains on when the parking brake has been
disengaged, and the fluid level is at the full mark on the
This light will flash at a fast rate for approxi-
master cylinder reservoir, it indicates a possible brake
mately 15 seconds, when the vehicle security
hydraulic system malfunction or that a problem with the
alarm is arming, and then will flash slowly
Brake Booster has been detected by the Anti-Lock Brake
until the vehicle is disarmed.
System (ABS)/Electronic Stability Control (ESC) system.
17. Electronic Stability Control (ESC) OFF Indicator In this case, the light will remain on until the condition
Light — If Equipped has been corrected. If the problem is related to the brake
booster, the ABS pump will run when applying the brake
This light indicates the Electronic Stability Con-
and a brake pedal pulsation may be felt during each stop.
trol (ESC) is off.
The dual brake system provides a reserve braking capac-
ity in the event of a failure to a portion of the hydraulic
18. Brake Warning Light
system. A leak in either half of the dual brake system is
This light monitors various brake functions, indicated by the Brake Warning Light, which will turn on
including brake fluid level and parking brake when the brake fluid level in the master cylinder has
application. If the brake light turns on it may dropped below a specified level.
indicate that the parking brake is applied, that The light will remain on until the cause is corrected.
the brake fluid level is low, or that there is a problem with
the anti-lock brake system reservoir.
NOTE: The light may flash momentarily during sharp Operation of the Brake Warning Light can be checked by
cornering maneuvers, which change fluid level condi- turning the ignition switch from the OFF position to the
tions. The vehicle should have service performed, and ON/RUN position. The light should illuminate for ap-
the brake fluid level checked. proximately two seconds. The light should then turn off
If brake failure is indicated, immediate repair is neces- unless the parking brake is applied or a brake fault is
sary. detected. If the light does not illuminate, have the light
inspected by an authorized dealer. 4
WARNING! The light also will turn on when the parking brake is
applied with the ignition switch in the ON/RUN posi-
Driving a vehicle with the red brake light on is tion.
dangerous. Part of the brake system may have failed.
It will take longer to stop the vehicle. You could have NOTE: This light shows only that the parking brake is
a collision. Have the vehicle checked immediately. applied. It does not show the degree of brake application.
19. Electronic Stability Control (ESC) Activation/
Vehicles equipped with the Anti-Lock Brake System
Malfunction Indicator Light — If Equipped
(ABS), are also equipped with Electronic Brake Force
Distribution (EBD). In the event of an EBD failure, the The “ESC Activation/Malfunction Indicator
Brake Warning Light will turn on along with the ABS Light” in the instrument cluster will come on
Light. Immediate repair to the ABS system is required. when the ignition switch is turned to the
ON/RUN position. It should go out with the
engine running. If the “ESC Activation/Malfunction In- will stop when ESC becomes inactive following the
dicator Light” comes on continuously with the engine maneuver that caused the ESC activation.
running, a malfunction has been detected in the ESC 20. Seat Belt Reminder Light
system. If this light remains on after several ignition
cycles, and the vehicle has been driven several miles When the ignition switch is first turned to ON/
(kilometers) at speeds greater than 30 mph (48 km/h), see RUN, this light will turn on for four to eight
your authorized dealer as soon as possible to have the seconds as a bulb check. During the bulb check, if
problem diagnosed and corrected. the driver’s seat belt is unbuckled, a chime will sound.
After the bulb check or when driving, if the driver’s seat
NOTE: belt remains unbuckled, the Seat Belt Reminder Light
• The “ESC Off Indicator Light” and the “ESC will illuminate and the chime will sound. Refer to
Activation/Malfunction Indicator Light” come on “Occupant Restraints” in “Things To Know Before Start-
momentarily each time the ignition switch is turned ing Your Vehicle” for further information.
to ON/RUN.
21. Temperature Gauge
• Each time the ignition is turned to ON/RUN, the
The temperature gauge shows engine coolant
ESC system will be ON, even if it was turned off
temperature. Any reading within the normal
previously.
range indicates that the engine cooling system is operat-
• The ESC system will make buzzing or clicking ing satisfactorily.
sounds when it is active. This is normal; the sounds
The gauge pointer will likely indicate a higher tempera-
WARNING!
ture when driving in hot weather, up mountain grades,
or when towing a trailer. It should not be allowed to A hot engine cooling system is dangerous. You or
exceed the upper limits of the normal operating range. others could be badly burned by steam or boiling
coolant. You may want to call an authorized dealer
CAUTION! for service if your vehicle overheats. If you decide to
look under the hood yourself, see “Maintaining Your 4
Driving with a hot engine cooling system could
Vehicle”. Follow the warnings under the Cooling
damage your vehicle. If the temperature gauge reads
System Pressure Cap paragraph.
“H” pull over and stop the vehicle. Idle the vehicle
with the air conditioner turned off until the pointer
ELECTRONIC VEHICLE INFORMATION CENTER
drops back into the normal range. If the pointer
(EVIC)
remains on the “H” and you hear continuous chimes,
turn the engine off immediately and call an autho- The Electronic Vehicle Information Center (EVIC) fea-
rized dealer for service. tures a driver-interactive display that is located in the
instrument cluster.
The EVIC Menu items consists of the following:
• Radio Info
• Fuel Economy
• Vehicle Speed
• Trip Info
• Tire Pressure
• Vehicle Info (Stored Warning Messages)
• Cruise
Electronic Vehicle Information Center (EVIC) • Messages
• Turn Menu OFF
The system allows the driver to select information by UP Arrow Button
pressing the following buttons mounted on the steering
Press and release the UP arrow button to scroll
wheel:
upward through the main menu and Vehicle
Info and Trip Info sub-menus (Fuel Economy,
Vehicle Info, Tire PSI, Cruise, Messages, Trip
Info, Vehicle Speed, and Turn Menu OFF) and 4
sub-menus.
DOWN Arrow Button
Press and release the DOWN arrow button to
scroll downward through the main menu and
Vehicle Info and Trip Info sub-menus (Fuel
Economy, Vehicle Info, Tire PSI, Cruise, Mes-
sages, Trip Info, Vehicle Speed, and Turn Menu OFF) and
sub-menus.
EVIC Steering Wheel Buttons
RIGHT Arrow Button 3. The reconfigurable telltales section.
Press and release the RIGHT arrow button for The main display area will normally display the main
access to main menus, sub-menus or to select a menu or the screens of a selected feature of the main
personal setting in the setup menu. Press and menu. The main display area also displays ⬙pop up⬙
hold the RIGHT arrow button for two seconds messages that consist of approximately 60 possible warn-
to reset features. ing or information messages. These pop up messages fall
into several categories:
BACK Button
• Five Second Stored Message
Press the BACK button to scroll back to a
previous menu or sub-menu. When the appropriate conditions occur, this type of
message takes control of the main display area for five
seconds and then returns to the previous screen. Most of
Electronic Vehicle Information Center (EVIC) the messages of this type are then stored (as long as the
Displays condition that activated it remains active) and can be
The EVIC display consists of three sections: reviewed from the ⬙Messages⬙ main menu item. As long
1. The top line where compass direction and outside as there is a stored message, an ⬙i⬙ will be displayed in the
temperature are displayed. EVIC’s compass/outside temp line. Examples of this
message type are ⬙Right Front Turn Signal Lamp Out⬙
2. The main display area where the menus and pop up
and ⬙Low Tire Pressure⬙.
messages are displayed.
• Unstored Messages The Reconfigurable Telltales section is divided into the
white telltales area on the right, amber telltales in the
This message type is displayed indefinitely or until the
middle, and red telltales on the left.
condition that activated the message is cleared. Examples
of this message type are ⬙Turn Signal On⬙ (if a turn signal EVIC White Telltale Lights
is left on) and ⬙Lights On⬙ (if driver leaves the vehicle). This area will show reconfigurable white caution tell-
• Unstored Messages Until RUN tales. These telltales include: 4
These messages deal primarily with the Remote Start • Shift Lever Status
feature. This message type is displayed until the ignition The shift lever status “P,R,N,D,5,4,3,2,1” are displayed
is in the RUN state. Examples of this message type are indicating the shift lever position. Telltales “5,4,3,2,1”
⬙Remote Start Aborted - Door Ajar⬙ and ⬙Press Brake indicate the Electronic Range Select (ERS) feature has
Pedal and Push Button to Start⬙. been engaged and the gear selected is displayed. For
• Five Second Unstored Messages further information on ERS, refer to “Starting And Oper-
ating”
When the appropriate conditions occur, this type of
message takes control of the main display area for five
seconds and then returns to the previous screen. Ex-
amples of this message type are ⬙Memory System Un-
available - Not in Park⬙ and ⬙Automatic High Beams On⬙.
• Electronic Speed Control ON • Adaptive Cruise Control (ACC) SET
This light will turn on when the electronic This light will turn on when the ACC is SET.
speed control is ON. For further information, For further information, refer to “Adaptive
refer to “Electronic Speed Control” in “Under- Cruise Control (ACC)” in “Understanding The
standing The Features Of Your Vehicle.” Features Of Your Vehicle.”
• Electronic Speed Control SET EVIC Amber Telltales
This light will turn on when the electronic This area will show reconfigurable amber caution tell-
speed control is SET. For further information, tales. These telltales include:
refer to “Electronic Speed Control” in “Under- • Forward Collision Warning (FCW) OFF
standing The Features Of Your Vehicle.”
This telltale informs the driver that the For-
• Adaptive Cruise Control (ACC) ON ward Collision Warning feature is Off. The
This light will turn on when the ACC is ON. telltale is On when the front radar sensor is
For further information, refer to “Adaptive blocked and requires cleaning, the ACC/FCW
Cruise Control (ACC)” in “Understanding The sensors require service, or the ACC/FCW system is
Features Of Your Vehicle.” unavailable because of a system error. For further infor-
mation, refer to “Adaptive Cruise Control (ACC)” in
“Understanding The Features Of Your Vehicle.”
• Low Fuel Telltale • SERV AWD (Service All Wheel Drive) Indicator — If
Equipped
When the fuel level reaches approximately 3.0 gal
(11.0 L) this light will turn on, and remain on until This light will turn on when the All Wheel
fuel is added. Drive feature requires service. For further in-
formation, refer to “All Wheel Drive” in “Start-
• Windshield Washer Fluid Low Indicator
ing And Operating.” 4
This telltale will turn on to indicate the wind-
EVIC Red Telltale Lights
shield washer fluid is low.
This area will show reconfigurable red telltales. These
telltales include:
• Adaptive Cruise Control (ACC) Malfunction
• Door Ajar
This light will turn on when a ACC is not
operating and needs service. For further infor- This light will turn on to indicate that one or
mation, refer to “Adaptive Cruise Control more doors may be ajar.
(ACC)” in “Understanding The Features Of
Your Vehicle.”
• Trunk Ajar check. If the light stays on or comes on while driving,
turn off some of the vehicle’s non-essential electrical
This light will turn on to indicate that the trunk
devices or increase engine speed (if at idle). If the
may be ajar.
charging system light remains on, it means that the
vehicle is experiencing a problem with the charging
• Oil Pressure Warning Light system. Obtain SERVICE IMMEDIATELY. See an autho-
rized dealer.
This light indicates low engine oil pressure. If the
light turns on while driving, stop the vehicle and shut off • If jump starting is required, refer to “Jump Starting
the engine as soon as possible. A chime will sound for Procedures” in “What To Do In Emergencies”.
four minutes when this light turns on. • Electronic Throttle Control (ETC) Light
• Do not operate the vehicle until the cause is corrected. This light informs you of a problem with the
This light does not show how much oil is in the engine. Electronic Throttle Control (ETC) system. The
The engine oil level must be checked under the hood. light will come on when the ignition is first
• Charging System Light cycled ON and remain on briefly as a bulb
check. If the light does not come on during starting, have
This light shows the status of the electrical charg-
the system checked by an authorized dealer.
ing system. The light should come on when the
ignition is first cycled ON and remain on briefly as a bulb
• If a problem is detected, the light will come on while Further overheating will cause the temperature gauge to
the engine is running. Cycle the ignition key when the pass H, or 260°F, a continuous chime will occur until the
vehicle has completely stopped and the shift lever is engine is allowed to cool.
placed in the PARK position. The light should turn off.
If the light turns on while driving, safely pull over and
• If the light remains lit with the engine running, your stop the vehicle. If the A/C system is on, turn it off. Also,
vehicle will usually be drivable. However, see an shift the transmission into NEUTRAL and idle the ve- 4
authorized dealer for service as soon as possible. If the hicle. If the temperature reading does not return to
light is flashing when the engine is running, immedi- normal, turn the engine off immediately and call for
ate service is required. You may experience reduced service. Refer to “If Your Engine Overheats” in “What To
performance, an elevated/rough idle or engine stall Do In Emergencies” for more information.
and your vehicle may require towing.
• Transmission Temperature Warning Light
• Engine Temperature Warning Light
This light indicates that the transmission fluid
This light warns of an overheated engine condi- temperature is running hot. This may occur
tion. As temperatures rise and the gauge ap- with severe usage, such as trailer towing. If this
proaches H, or 260°F, this indicator will illuminate and a light turns on, safely pull over and stop the
single chime will sound after reaching a set threshold. vehicle. Then, shift the transmission into NEUTRAL and
run the engine at idle or faster until the light turns off.
Gear Shift Indicator (GSI) — If Equipped
CAUTION!
The Gear Shift Indicator (GSI) system is enabled on
Continuous driving with the Transmission Tempera- vehicles with a manual transmission, or when a vehicle
ture Warning Light illuminated will eventually cause with an automatic transmission is in manual shift mode.
severe transmission damage or transmission failure. The GSI provides the driver with a visual indication
within the EVIC when the recommended gear shift point
WARNING! has been reached. This indication notifies the driver that
changing gear will allow a reduction in fuel consump-
If you continue operating the vehicle when the tion.
Transmission Temperature Warning Light is illumi-
nated you could cause the fluid to boil over, come in When the shift up indicator (+) is shown on the display,
contact with hot engine or exhaust components and the GSI is advising the driver to engage a higher gear.
cause a fire.
GSI Shift Up (+) Indicator GSI Shift Down (-) Indicator

When the shift down indicator (-) is shown on the The GSI indicator in the EVIC remains illuminated until
display, the GSI is advising the driver to engage a lower the driver changes gear, or the driving conditions return
gear. to a situation where changing gear is not required to
improve fuel consumption.
Oil Change Due 2. Fully depress the accelerator pedal, slowly, three times
within 10 seconds.
Your vehicle is equipped with an engine oil change
indicator system. The “Oil Change Due” message will 3. Without pushing the brake pedal, push the ENGINE
flash in the EVIC display for approximately 10 seconds START/STOP button once to return the ignition to the
after a single chime has sounded to indicate the next OFF/LOCK position.
scheduled oil change interval. The engine oil change
NOTE: If the indicator message illuminates when you
indicator system is duty cycle based, which means the
start the vehicle, the oil change indicator system did not
engine oil change interval may fluctuate dependent upon
reset. If necessary, repeat this procedure.
your personal driving style.
Unless reset, this message will continue to display each Fuel Economy
time you cycle the ignition to the ON/RUN position. To Press and release the UP or DOWN button until “Fuel
turn off the message temporarily, push and release the Economy” displays highlighted in the EVIC and press
MENU button. To reset the oil change indicator system the SELECT button. Press and release the UP/DOWN
(after performing the scheduled maintenance), perform buttons until one of the following Fuel Economy func-
the following procedure: tions displays in the EVIC:
1. Without pushing the brake pedal, push the ENGINE • Average Fuel Economy/Fuel Saver Mode
START/STOP button and cycle the ignition to the
• Distance To Empty (DTE)
ON/RUN position (do not start the engine.)
• Miles Per Gallon (MPG) or L/100km Average Fuel Economy/ECO Fuel Saver Mode — If
Equipped
Press the UP/DOWN buttons to cycle through all the
Trip Computer functions. Shows the average fuel economy since the last reset.
When the fuel economy is reset, the display will read
The Trip Functions mode displays the following informa-
“RESET” or show dashes for two seconds. Then, the
tion:
history information will be erased, and the averaging will 4
continue from the last fuel average reading before the
reset.
There is an ECO icon between the Compass and Outside
Temperature info at the top of the EVIC display. This icon
will appear whenever the Multi-Displacement System
(MDS) (if equipped) allows the engine to operate on four
cylinders, or if you are driving in a fuel efficient manner.
This feature allows you to monitor when you are driving
in a fuel efficient manner, and it can be used to modify
driving habits in order to increase fuel economy.
Fuel Economy
Distance To Empty (DTE) Miles Per Gallon (MPG)/Liters Per 100 km
Shows the estimated distance that can be traveled with (L/100km)
the fuel remaining in the tank. This estimated distance is The Miles Per Gallon (MPG)/Liters Per 100 km (L/
determined by a weighted average of the instantaneous 100km) feature displays instantaneous fuel economy in a
and average fuel economy, according to the current fuel bar graph below the DTE, this function cannot be reset.
tank level. DTE cannot be reset through the RIGHT arrow Press the BACK button to return to the main menu.
button.
Vehicle Speed
NOTE: Significant changes in driving style or vehicle Press and release the UP or DOWN button until “Vehicle
loading will greatly affect the actual drivable distance of Speed” displays highlighted in the EVIC and press the
the vehicle, regardless of the DTE displayed value. RIGHT arrow button. Press the RIGHT arrow button to
When the DTE value is less than 30 miles (48 km) display the current speed in mph or km/h. Pressing the
estimated driving distance, the DTE display will change RIGHT arrow button a second time will toggle the unit of
to a “LOW FUEL” message. This display will continue measure between mph or km/h.
until the vehicle runs out of fuel. Adding a significant NOTE: Changing the unit of measure in the Vehicle
amount of fuel to the vehicle will turn off the “LOW Speed menu will not change the unit of measure in the
FUEL” message and a new DTE value will display. EVIC.
Trip Info reset all resettable functions, press and hold the RIGHT
arrow button for two seconds. The current display will
Trip A
reset along with other functions.
Shows the total distance traveled for Trip A since the last
reset. Units
Press and release the UP or DOWN button until “Units”
Trip B 4
displays highlighted in the EVIC and press the RIGHT
Shows the total distance traveled for Trip B since the last arrow button. The EVIC, odometer, and navigation sys-
reset. tem (if equipped) can be changed between English and
Elapsed Time Metric units of measure. To make your selection, scroll up
or down until the preferred setting is highlighted, then
Shows the total elapsed time of travel since the last reset press and release the RIGHT arrow button until a check-
when the ignition is in the ACC position. Elapsed time mark appears next to the setting, showing that the setting
will increment when the ignition is in the ON/RUN has been selected.
position.
Vehicle Info (Customer Information Features)
To Reset The Display
Press and release the UP or DOWN button until “Vehicle
Reset will only occur while a resettable function is being Info” displays in the EVIC and press the RIGHT arrow
displayed. Press and release the RIGHT arrow button button. Press the UP and DOWN button to scroll through
once to clear the resettable function being displayed. To
the available information displays, then press RIGHT • Trans Temperature
arrow to display any one of the following choices.
Displays the actual transmission temperature.
• Coolant Temp
• Engine Hours
Displays the actual coolant temperature.
Displays the number of hours of engine operation.
• AWD Status — If Equipped
• Tire Pressure
Displays a vehicle ICON with four wheels highlighted
and ⬙AWD⬙ if All Wheel Drive is active. Displays a Shows the actual tire pressure for each tire (EXCLUDING
vehicle ICON with two wheels highlighted and ⬙RWD⬙ if THE SPARE TIRE).
All Wheel Drive is inactive. Messages #
• Oil Temperature Select from Main Menu using the UP or DOWN buttons.
This feature shows the number of stored warning mes-
Displays the actual oil temperature.
sages (in the # place holder). Pressing the RIGHT arrow
• Oil Pressure button will allow you to see what the stored messages
Displays the actual oil pressure. are. Pressing the BACK button takes you back to the
Main Menu.
Turn Menu OFF (i.e., 30, 60, 90), press the center of the control knob one or
more times to select or change a setting (i.e., ON, OFF).
Select from Main Menu using the DOWN button. Push-
ing the SELECT button blanks the menu display. Pushing Soft-Keys
any one of the four steering wheel buttons brings the
Soft-Keys are accessible on the Uconnect® touchscreen.
menu back.
Customer Programmable Features — Uconnect® 4
Uconnect® SETTINGS 4.3 Settings
The Uconnect® system uses a combination of soft and In this mode the Uconnect® system allows you to access
hard keys located on the center of the instrument panel programmable features that may be equipped such as
that allows you to access and change the customer Display, Clock, Safety/Assistance, Lights, Doors &
programmable features. Locks, Heated Seats, Engine Off Operation, Compass
Hard-Keys Settings, Audio, Phone/Bluetooth® and SIRIUS Setup
through hard-keys and soft-keys.
Hard-Keys are located on the left and right side of the
Uconnect® 4.3 screen. In addition, there is a Scroll/Enter NOTE: Only one touchscreen area may be selected at a
control knob located on the right side of the Climate time.
Controls in the center of the instrument panel. Turn the Press the ⬙Settings⬙ hard-key to access the Settings screen,
control knob to scroll through menus and change settings use the Page Up/Down soft-keys to scroll through the
following settings. Touch the desired setting soft-key to
change the setting using the description shown on the
following pages for each setting.
Uconnect® 4.3 Soft-Keys

Display
• Brightness
1 — Uconnect® 4.3 Settings Hard-Key
Touch the “Brightness” soft-key to change this display.
When in this display, you may select display brightness
with the headlights on and the headlights off. Adjust the
brightness with the + and – setting soft-keys or by
selecting any point on the scale between the “+” and “–” • Units
soft-keys. Then touch the arrow back soft-key.
Touch the “Units” soft-key to change this display. When
• Mode in this display, you may switch the EVIC, odometer, and
navigation system (if equipped) between US and Metric
Touch the “Mode” soft-key to change this display. When
units of measure. Touch “US” or “Metric” then touch the
in this display, you may select one of the auto display
arrow back soft-key. As you continue, the information 4
settings. To change Mode status press and release the
will display in the selected units of measure.
“Day,” “Night” or “Auto” soft-key, then touch the arrow
back soft-key. • Voice Response
• Language Touch the “Voice Response” soft-key to change the Voice
Response Length settings. To change the Voice Response
Touch the “Language” soft-key to change this display.
Length, press and release the “Brief” or “Long” soft-key.
When in this display, you may select one of three
Then touch the arrow back soft-key.
languages for all display nomenclature, including the trip
functions and the navigation system (if equipped). Touch • Touchscreen Beep
the English, French (Français) or Spanish (Español) soft-
Touch the “Touchscreen Beep” soft-key to turn on or shut
key to select the language preferred. Then touch the
off the sound heard when a touchscreen button (soft-key)
arrow back soft-key. As you continue, the information
will display in the selected language.
is pressed. To change the Touchscreen Beep setting press soft-keys, select AM or PM, select 12 hr or 24 hr. Then
and release the “ON” or “OFF” soft-key, then touch the touch the arrow back soft-key when all selections are
arrow back soft-key. complete.
• Fuel Saver Display • Sync Time — If Equipped
Touch the “Fuel Saver Display” soft-key to turn the ECO Touch the Sync Time soft-key to change this display.
message (located in the instrument cluster display) on or When in this display, you may have the radio set the time
off. To make your selection, touch the “Fuel Saver Dis- automatically. To change the Sync Time setting, press and
play” soft-key and select “ON” or “OFF.” Then touch the release the ON or OFF soft-key. Then touch the arrow
arrow back soft-key. back soft-key.
Clock Safety/Assistance
• Set Time • Front Collision Warning — If Equipped
Touch the Set Time soft-key to change this display. When Touch the “Front Collision Warning” soft-key to change
in this display, you may select the time display settings. this display. The Front Collision Warning (FCW) feature
To make your selection, touch the Set Time soft-key, can be can be set to Far, set to Near or turned Off. The
adjust the hours and minutes using the up and down default status of FCW is the Far setting. This means the
system will warn you of a possible collision with the
vehicle in front of you when you are farther away. This
gives you the most reaction time. To change the setting or “Sounds and Display” button. Then touch the arrow
for more dynamic driving, select the Near setting. This back soft-key. Refer to “ParkSense®” in “Understanding
warns you of a possible collision when you are much The Features Of Your Vehicle” for system function and
closer to the vehicle in front of you. This allows for a operating information.
more dynamic driving experience. To change the FCW • Front ParkSense® Chime Volume — If Equipped
status, press and release the “OFF,” “Near” or “Far”
button. Then touch the arrow back soft-key. The ParkSense® Chime Volume settings can be selected 4
from the EVIC or Uconnect® System — if equipped. The
For further information, refer to ”Adaptive Cruise Con- chime volume settings include LOW, MEDIUM, and
trol (ACC)” in “Understanding The Features Of Your HIGH. The factory default volume setting is MEDIUM.
Vehicle”. To make your selection, touch the “ParkSense® Chime
• ParkSense® — If Equipped Volume” soft-key, until a check-mark appears next to
setting, indicating that the setting had been selected.
The ParkSense® system will scan for objects behind the
Touch the arrow back soft-key to return to the previous
vehicle when the transmission shift lever is in REVERSE
menu. ParkSense® will retain its last known configura-
and the vehicle speed is less than 11 mph (18 km/h). It
tion state through ignition cycles.
will provide an alert (audible and/or visual) to indicate
the proximity to other objects. The system can be enabled • Tilt Mirrors In Reverse — If Equipped
with Sound Only, or Sound and Display. To change the Touch the “Tilt Mirrors In Reverse” soft-key to change
ParkSense® status, touch and release the “Sound Only” this display. When this feature is selected, the outside
rearview mirrors will tilt downward when the ignition is Blind Spot Monitor (BSM) system is deactivated. To
in the RUN position and the transmission shift lever is in change the Blind Spot Alert status, touch the “OFF,”
the REVERSE position. The mirrors will move back to “Lights” or “Lights & Chime” soft-key. Then touch the
their previous position when the transmission is shifted arrow back soft-key.
out of REVERSE. To make your selection, touch the “Tilt
NOTE: If your vehicle has experienced any damage in
Mirrors In Reverse” soft-key and select “ON” or “OFF.”
the area where the sensor is located, even if the fascia is
Then touch the arrow back soft-key.
not damaged, the sensor may have become misaligned.
• Blind Spot Alert — If Equipped Take your vehicle to an authorized dealer to verify sensor
alignment. Having a sensor that is misaligned will result
Touch the “Blind Spot Alert” soft-key to change this
in the BSM not operating to specification.
display. When this feature is selected, the Blind Spot Alert
feature can be set to Off, Lights or Lights and Chime. The • Rain Sensing Auto Wipers — If Equipped
Blind Spot Alert feature can be activated in Lights mode.
Touch the “Rain Sensing” soft-key to change this display.
When this mode is selected, the Blind Spot Monitor
When this feature is selected, the system will automati-
(BSM) system is activated and will only show a visual
cally activate the windshield wipers if it senses moisture
alert in the outside mirrors. When Lights & Chime mode
on the windshield. To make your selection, touch the
is activated, the Blind Spot Monitor (BSM) will show a
“Rain Sensing” soft-key and select “ON” or “OFF.” Then
visual alert in the outside mirrors as well as an audible
touch the arrow back soft-key.
alert when the turn signal is on. When Off is selected, the
• Hill Start Assist — If Equipped • Headlights With Wipers
Touch the “Hill Start Assist” soft-key to change this Touch the “Headlights With Wipers” soft-key to change
display. When this feature is selected, the Hill Start Assist this display. When this feature is selected, and the
(HSA) system is active. Refer to “Electronic Brake Control headlight switch is in the AUTO position, the headlights
System” in “Starting And Operating” for system function will turn on approximately 10 seconds after the wipers
and operating information. To make your selection, touch are turned on. The headlights will also turn off when the 4
the “Hill Start Assist” soft-key and select “ON” or “OFF.” wipers are turned off if they were turned on by this
Then touch the arrow back soft-key. feature. To make your selection, touch the “Headlights
With Wipers” soft-key and select “ON” or “OFF.” Then
Lights
touch the back arrow soft-key.
• Illuminated Approach
• Auto High Beams “SmartBeams™”
Touch the “Illuminated Approach” soft-key to change
Touch the “Auto High Beams” soft-key to change this
this display. When this feature is selected, the headlights
will activate and remain on for 0, 30, 60, or 90 seconds display. When this feature is selected, the high beam
when the doors are unlocked with the Remote Keyless headlights will deactivate automatically under certain
Entry (RKE) transmitter. To change the Illuminated Ap- conditions. To make your selection, touch the “Auto High
proach status, touch the “0,” “30,” “60” or “90” soft-key. Beams” soft-key and select “ON” or “OFF.” Then touch
Then touch the back arrow soft-key.
the back arrow soft-key. Refer to “Lights/SmartBeam™ • Flash Lights With Lock
— If Equipped” in “Understanding The Features Of Your
Touch the “Flash Headlights With Lock” soft-key to
Vehicle” for further information.
change this display. When this feature is selected, the
• Daytime Running Lights — If Available signal lights will flash when the doors are locked with the
Remote Keyless Entry (RKE) transmitter. This feature
Touch the “Daytime Running Lights” soft-key to change
may be selected with or without the sound horn on lock
this display. When this feature is selected, the headlights
will turn on whenever the engine is running. To make feature selected. To make your selection, touch the “Flash
Headlights With Lock” soft-key and select “ON” or
your selection, touch the “Daytime Running Lights”
“OFF.” Then touch the back arrow soft-key.
soft-key and select “ON” or “OFF.” Then touch the back
arrow soft-key. Doors & Locks
• Steering Directed Lights — If Equipped After pressing the Doors & Locks soft-key the following
settings will be available.
Touch the “Steering Directed Lights” soft-key to change
this display. When this feature is selected, the headlights • Auto Lock
turn relative to a change in direction of the steering When this feature is selected, all doors will lock auto-
wheel. To make your selection, touch the “Steering matically when the vehicle reaches a speed of 15 mph
Directed Lights” soft-key and select “ON” or ‘OFF.” Then (24 km/h). To make your selection, touch the “Auto
touch the back arrow soft-key. Unlock On Exit” soft-key, until a check-mark appears
next to setting, showing that setting has been selected. unlocked with the Remote Keyless Entry (RKE) transmit-
Touch the arrow back soft-key to return to the previous ter. To make your selection, touch the “Flash Lights With
menu. Lock” soft-key and select “ON” or “OFF”. Then touch the
arrow back soft-key.
• Auto Unlock On Exit
• Sound Horn With Remote Start
Touch the “Auto Unlock On Exit” soft-key to change this
display. When this feature is selected, all doors will Touch the “Sound Horn With Remote Start” soft-key to 4
unlock when the vehicle is stopped and the transmission change this display. When this feature is selected, the
is in the PARK or NEUTRAL position and the driver’s horn will sound when the remote start is activated. To
door is opened. To make your selection, touch the “Auto make your selection, touch the “Sound Horn With Re-
Unlock On Exit” soft-key and select “ON” or “OFF.” mote Start” soft-key and select “ON” or “OFF.” Then
Then touch the arrow back soft-key. touch the arrow back soft-key.
• Flash Lights With Lock • Sound Horn With Lock
Touch the “Flash Lights With Lock” soft-key to change Touch the “Sounds Horn With Lock” soft-key to change
this display. When this feature is selected, the front and this display. When this feature is selected, the horn will
rear turn signals will flash when the doors are locked or chirp when the doors are locked or unlocked with the
Remote Keyless Entry (RKE) transmitter. To make your
selection, touch the “Sound Horn With Lock” soft-key NOTE: If the vehicle is equipped with Keyless Enter-N-
and select “ON” or “OFF.” Then touch the arrow back Go™ (Passive Entry) and the EVIC is programmed to
soft-key. Unlock All Doors On 1st Press, all doors will unlock no
matter which Passive Entry equipped door handle is
• Remote Door Unlock Order
grasped. If Unlock Driver Door Only On 1st Press is
Touch the “Remote Door Unlock Order” soft-key to programmed, only the driver’s door will unlock when
change this display. When Unlock Driver Door Only On the driver’s door is grasped. With Passive Entry, if
1st Press is selected, only the driver’s door will unlock on Unlock Driver Door Only On 1st Press is programmed,
the first press of the Remote Keyless Entry (RKE) trans- touching the handle more than once will only result in
mitter UNLOCK button. When Unlock Driver Door Only the driver’s door opening. If Unlock Driver Door Only
On 1st Press is selected, you must press the RKE trans- On 1st Press is selected, once the driver door is opened,
mitter UNLOCK button twice to unlock the passenger’s the interior door lock/unlock switch can be used to
doors. When Unlock All Doors On 1st Press is selected, unlock all the doors (or use the RKE transmitter).
all of the doors will unlock on the first press of the RKE
• Memory Linked To FOB
transmitter UNLOCK button.
Touch the “Memory Linked to FOB” soft-key to change
this display. This feature provides automatic driver seat
positioning to enhance driver mobility when entering
and exiting the vehicle, driver 1 and driver 2 last mode,
settings and presets. To make your selection, touch the Heated Seats
“Memory Linked to FOB” soft-key and select “ON” or • Auto Heated Seats — If Equipped
“OFF.” Then touch the arrow back soft-key.
Touch the “Auto Heated Seats” soft-key to change this
NOTE: The seat will return to the memorized seat display. When the temperatures are below 40° F (4.4° C)
location (if Recall Memory with Remote Key Unlock is set the Driver’s heated seat will turn on. To make your
to ON) when the RKE transmitter is used to unlock the selection, touch the “Auto Heated Seats” soft-key and 4
door. Refer to “Driver Memory Seat” in “Understanding select “ON” or “OFF.” Then touch the back arrow soft-
The Features Of Your Vehicle” for further information. key.
• Passive Entry (Keyless Enter-N-Go™) Engine Off Options
Touch the “Passive Entry” soft-key to change this display. • Easy Exit Seats — If Equipped
This feature allows you to lock and unlock the vehicle’s
door(s) without having to press the RKE transmitter lock Touch the “Easy Exit Seats” soft-key to change this
or unlock buttons. To make your selection, touch the display. This feature provides automatic driver seat po-
“Passive Entry” soft-key and select “ON” or “OFF.” Then sitioning to enhance driver mobility when entering and
touch the arrow back soft-key. Refer to “Keyless Enter- exiting the vehicle. To make your selection, touch the
N-Go™” in “Things To Know Before Starting Your Ve- “Easy Exit Seats” soft-key, and select “ON” or “OFF.”
hicle.”
Then touch the arrow back soft-key. Refer to “Driver change the Engine Off Power Delay status, touch the “0
Memory Seat” in “Understanding The Features Of Your seconds,” “45 seconds,” “5 minutes” or “10 minutes”
Vehicle” for further information. soft-key. Then touch the arrow back soft-key.
• Headlight Off Delay Compass Settings
Touch the “Headlight Off Delay” soft-key to change this • Variance
display. When this feature is selected, the driver can Touch the Variance soft-key to change this display. Com-
choose to have the headlights remain on for 0, 30, 60, or pass Variance is the difference between Magnetic North
90 seconds when exiting the vehicle. To change the and Geographic North. To compensate for the differ-
Headlight Off Delay status, touch the “0,” “30,” “60” or ences, the variance should be set for the zone where the
“90” soft-key. Then touch the arrow back soft-key. vehicle is driven, per the zone map. Once properly set,
• Engine Off Power Delay the compass will automatically compensate for the dif-
ferences, and provide the most accurate compass head-
Touch the “Engine Off Power Delay” soft-key to change
ing.
this display. When this feature is selected, the power
window switches, radio, Uconnect® phone system (if
equipped), DVD video system (if equipped), power
sunroof (if equipped), and power outlets will remain
active for up to 10 minutes after the ignition is cycled to
OFF. Opening either front door will cancel this feature. To
NOTE: Keep magnetic materials away from the top of the • Calibration
instrument panel, such as iPod’s, Mobile Phones, Lap-
Touch the “Calibration” soft-key to change this setting.
tops and Radar Detectors. This is where the compass
This compass is self-calibrating, which eliminates the
module is located, and it can cause interference with the
need to manually reset the compass. When the vehicle is
compass sensor, and it may give false readings.
new, the compass may appear erratic and the EVIC will
display CAL until the compass is calibrated. You may 4
also calibrate the compass by touching the “ON” soft-key
and completing one or more 360-degree turns (in an area
free from large metal or metallic objects) until the CAL
indicator displayed in the EVIC turns off. The compass
will now function normally.
NOTE: A good calibration requires a level surface and an
environment free from large metallic objects such as
buildings, bridges, underground cables, railroad tracks,
etc.
Compass Variance Map

Audio • Speed Adjusted Volume
• Equalizer Touch the “Speed Adjusted Volume” soft-key to change
Touch the “Equalizer” soft-key to change this display. this display. This feature increases or decreases volume
When in this display, you may adjust the Bass, Mid and relative to vehicle speed. To change the Speed Adjusted
Volume, press the “OFF,” “1,” “2” or “3” soft-key. Then
Treble settings. Adjust the settings with the “+” and “–”
setting soft-keys or by selecting any point on the scaletouch the back arrow soft-key.
between the “+” and “–” soft-keys. Then touch the back • Surround Sound — If Equipped
arrow soft-key.
Touch the “Surround Sound” soft-key to change this
NOTE: Bass/Mid/Treble allow you to simply slide your display. This feature provides simulated surround sound
finger up or down to change the setting as well as press mode. To make your selection, press the “Surround
directly on the desired setting. Sound” soft-key and select “ON” or “OFF.” Then touch
• Balance/Fade the back arrow soft-key.
Touch the “Balance/Fade” soft-key to change this dis- Phone/Bluetooth®

play. When in this display, you may adjust the Balance • Paired Devices
and Fade settings.
This feature shows which phones are paired to the
Phone/Bluetooth® system. For further information, refer
to the Uconnect® Supplement.
SIRIUS Setup Write down the SIRIUS ID numbers for your receiver. To
• Channel Skip reactivate your service, either call the number listed on
the screen or visit the provider online.
SIRIUS can be programmed to designate a group of
channels that are the most desirable to listen to or to NOTE: SIRIUS Travel Link is a separate subscription.
exclude undesirable channels while scanning. To make
your selection, touch the “Channel Skip” soft-key, select Customer Programmable Features — Uconnect® 4
the channels you would like to skip. Then touch the back 8.4 Settings
arrow soft-key.
Press the “More” soft-key, then press the “Settings”
• Subscription Info soft-key to display the menu setting screen. In this mode
New vehicle purchasers or lessees will receive a free the Uconnect® system allows you to access program-
limited time subscription to SIRIUS Satellite Radio with mable features that may be equipped such as Display,
your radio. Following the expiration of the free services, Clock, Safety & Driving Assistance, Lights, Doors &
it will be necessary to access the information on the Locks, Auto-On Comfort & Remote Start, Engine Off
Subscription Information screen to re-subscribe. Options, Compass Settings, Audio, Phone/Bluetooth®
and SIRIUS Setup.
Touch the Subscription Info soft-key to access the Sub-
scription Information screen. NOTE: Only one touchscreen area may be selected at a
time.
When making a selection, press the soft-key to enter the • Display Mode
desired mode. Once in the desired mode press and
When in this display you may select one of the auto
release the preferred setting until a check-mark appears
display settings. To change Mode status, touch and
next to the setting, showing that setting has been se-
release the “Day,” “Night” or “Auto” soft-key. Then
lected.
touch the back arrow soft-key.
Once the setting is complete press the “Back Arrow”
• Display Brightness With Headlights ON
soft-key to return to the previous menu or press the “X”
soft-key to close out of the settings screen. Pressing the When in this display, you may select the brightness with
“Up” or “Down” arrow soft-keys on the right side of the the headlights on. Adjust the brightness with the “+” and
screen will allow you to toggle up or down through the “–” setting soft-keys or by selecting any point on the scale
available settings. between the “+” and “–” soft-keys. Then touch the back
arrow soft-key.
Display
• Display Brightness With Headlights OFF
After pressing the Display soft-key the following settings
will be available. When in this display, you may select the brightness with
the headlights off. Adjust the brightness with the “+” and
“–” setting soft-keys or by selecting any point on the scale
between the “+” and “–” soft-keys. Then touch the back
arrow soft-key.
• Set Language • Voice Response Length
When in this display, you may select one of three When in this display, you may change the Voice Re-
languages for all display nomenclature, including the trip sponse Length settings. To change the Voice Response
functions and the navigation system (if equipped). Touch Length, touch the “Brief” or “Detailed” soft-key until a
the “Set Language” soft-key and then touch the desired check-mark appears next to the setting, showing that
language soft-key until a check-mark appears next to the setting has been selected. Touch the back arrow soft-key 4
language, showing that setting has been selected. Touch to return to the previous menu.
the back arrow soft-key to return to the previous menu.
• Touchscreen Beep
• Units
When in this display, you may turn on or shut off the
When in this display, you may select to have the EVIC, sound heard when a touchscreen button (soft-key) is
odometer, and navigation system (if equipped) changed pressed. Touch the “Touchscreen Beep” soft-key until a
between US and Metric units of measure. Touch “US” or check-mark appears next to the setting, showing that
“Metric” until a check-mark appears next to the setting, setting has been selected. Touch the back arrow soft-key
showing that setting has been selected. Touch the back to return to the previous menu.
arrow soft-key to return to the previous menu. • Navigation Turn-By-Turn In Cluster — If Equipped
When this feature is selected, the turn-by-turn directions
will appear in the display as the vehicle approaches a
designated turn within a programmed route. To make • Sync With GPS Time — If Equipped
your selection, touch the “Navigation Turn-By-Turn In
When in this display, you may automatically have the
Cluster” soft-key, until a check-mark appears next to the
radio set the time. To change the Sync with GPS Time
setting, showing that setting has been selected. Touch the
setting touch the “Sync with GPS Time” soft-key until a
back arrow soft-key to return to the previous menu.
check-mark appears next to the setting, indicating that
• Fuel Saver Display In Cluster — If Equipped the setting has been selected. Touch the back arrow
soft-key to return to the previous menu.
The “ECO” message is located in the instrument cluster
display, this message can be turned on or off. To make • Set Time Hours
your selection, touch the “Fuel Saver Display” soft-key,
When in this display, you may adjust the hours. The
until a check-mark appears next to the setting, showing
“Sync with GPS Time” soft-key must be unchecked. To
that setting has been selected. Touch the back arrow
make your selection touch the “+” or “–” soft-keys to
adjust the hours up or down. Touch the back arrow
Clock soft-key to return to the previous menu or touch the “X”
soft-key to close out of the settings screen.
After pressing the Clock soft-key the following settings
will be available. • Set Time Minutes
When in this display, you may adjust the minutes. The
“Sync with GPS Time” soft-key must be unchecked. To
make your selection touch the “+” or “–” soft-keys to Safety & Driving Assistance
adjust the minutes up or down. Touch the back arrow After pressing the Safety & Driving Assistance soft-key
soft-key to return to the previous menu or touch the “X” the following settings will be available.
soft-key to close out of the settings screen.
• Front Collision Sensitivity — If Equipped
• Time Format
The Front Collision Warning (FCW) feature can be set to
When in this display, you may select the time format Far, set to Near or turned Off. The default status of FCW 4
display setting. Touch the “Time Format” soft-key until a is the Far setting. This means the system will warn you of
check-mark appears next to the 12hrs or 24hrs setting, a possible collision with the vehicle in front of you when
indicating that the setting has been selected. Touch the you are farther away. This gives you the most reaction
back arrow soft-key to return to the previous menu. time. To change the setting for more dynamic driving,
• Show Time In Status Bar — If Equipped select the Near setting. This warns you of a possible
collision when you are much closer to the vehicle in front
When in this display, you may turn on or shut off the of you. This allows for a more dynamic driving experi-
digital clock in the status bar. To change the Show Time ence. To change the FCW status, touch and release the
Status setting touch the “Show Time in Status Bar” OFF, Near or Far button. Then touch the arrow back
soft-key until a check-mark appears next to setting, soft-key.
indicating that the setting has been selected. Touch the
For further information, refer to “Adaptive Cruise Con- chime volume settings include LOW, MEDIUM, and
trol (ACC)” in “Understanding The Features Of Your HIGH. The factory default volume setting is MEDIUM.
Vehicle”. To make your selection, touch the ParkSense® Chime
Volume soft-key, until a check-mark appears next to
• ParkSense® — If Equipped
setting, indicating that the setting had been selected.
The ParkSense® system will scan for objects behind the Touch the back arrow soft-key to return to the previous
vehicle when the transmission shift lever is in REVERSE menu. ParkSense® will retain its last known configura-
and the vehicle speed is less than 11 mph (18 km/h). It tion state through ignition cycles.
will provide an alert (audible and/or visual) to indicate
• Tilt Mirrors In Reverse — If Equipped
the proximity to other objects. The system can be enabled
with Sound Only, or Sound and Display. To change the When this feature is selected, the outside sideview mir-
ParkSense® status, touch and release the Sound Only or rors will tilt downward when the ignition is in the RUN
Sounds and Display button. Then touch the arrow back position and the transmission shift lever is in the RE-
soft-key. Refer to “ParkSense®” in “Understanding The VERSE position. The mirrors will move back to their
Features Of Your Vehicle” for system function and oper- previous position when the transmission is shifted out of
ating information. REVERSE. To make your selection, touch the Tilt Mirrors
In Reverse soft-key, until a check-mark appears next to
• ParkSense® Chime Volume
setting, showing that setting has been selected. Touch the
The ParkSense® Chime Volume settings can be selected back arrow soft-key to return to the previous menu.
from the EVIC or Uconnect® System — if equipped. The
• Blind Spot Alert — If Equipped NOTE: If your vehicle has experienced any damage in
the area where the sensor is located, even if the fascia is
When this feature is selected, the Blind Spot Alert feature
not damaged, the sensor may have become misaligned.
can be set to Off, Lights or Lights and Chime. The Blind
Take your vehicle to an authorized dealer to verify sensor
Spot Alert feature can be activated in “Lights” mode.
alignment. Having a sensor that is misaligned will result
When this mode is selected, the Blind Spot Monitor
in the BSM not operating to specification.
(BSM) system is activated and will only show a visual 4
alert in the outside mirrors. When “Lights & Chime” • ParkView® Backup Camera — If Equipped
mode is activated, the Blind Spot Monitor (BSM) will
Your vehicle may be equipped with the ParkView® Rear
show a visual alert in the outside mirrors as well as an Back Up Camera that allows you to see an on-screen
audible alert when the turn signal is on. When “Off” is image of the rear surroundings of your vehicle whenever
selected, the Blind Spot Monitor (BSM) system is deacti-
the shift lever is put into REVERSE. The image will be
vated. To change the Blind Spot Alert status, touch the displayed on the radio touchscreen display along with a
Off, Lights or Lights & Chime soft-key. Then touch the caution note to “check entire surroundings” across the
arrow back soft-key. top of the screen. After five seconds, this note will
disappear. The ParkView® camera is located on the rear
of the vehicle above the rear License plate. To make your
selection, touch the ParkView® Backup Camera soft-key,
until a check-mark appears next to setting, showing that next to setting, showing that setting has been selected.
setting has been selected. Touch the back arrow soft-key Touch the back arrow soft-key to return to the previous
to return to the previous menu. menu.
• Rain Sensing Auto Wipers — If Equipped Lights
When this feature is selected, the system will automati- After pressing the Lights soft-key the following settings
cally activate the windshield wipers if it senses moisture will be available.
on the windshield. To make your selection, touch the • Headlights Off Delay
Rain Sensing soft-key, until a check-mark appears next to
setting, showing that setting has been selected. Touch the When this feature is selected, it allows the adjustment of
back arrow soft-key to return to the previous menu. the amount of time the headlights remain on after the
engine is shut off. To change the Headlights Off Delay
• Hill Start Assist — If Equipped setting, press the “Headlights Off Delay” button on the
When this feature is selected, the Hill Start Assist (HSA) touchscreen, and choose either 0 sec, 30 sec, 60 sec or 90
system is active. Refer to “Electronic Brake Control seconds. A check-mark appears next to setting indicating
System” in “Starting And Operating” for system function that the setting has been selected. Press the back arrow
and operating information. To make your selection, touch button on the touchscreen to return to the previous
the Hill Start Assist soft-key, until a check-mark appears menu, or push the back button on the faceplate.
• Headlight Illumination On Approach • Auto Dim High Beams — If Equipped
When this feature is selected, the headlights will activate When this feature is selected, the high beam headlights
and remain on for 0, 30, 60, or 90 seconds when the doors will deactivate automatically under certain conditions. To
are unlocked with the Remote Keyless Entry (RKE) make your selection, touch the “Auto High Beams”
transmitter. To change the Illuminated Approach status, soft-key, until a check-mark appears next to setting,
touch the “+” or “–” soft-key to select your desired time showing that setting has been selected. Touch the back 4
interval. Touch the back arrow soft-key to return to the arrow soft-key to return to the previous menu. Refer to
previous menu. “Lights/SmartBeam™ — If Equipped” in “Understand-
ing The Features Of Your Vehicle” for further informa-
• Headlights With Wipers — If Equipped
tion.
When this feature is selected, and the headlight switch is
• Daytime Running Lights — If Available
in the AUTO position, the headlights will turn on ap-
proximately 10 seconds after the wipers are turned on. When this feature is selected, the headlights will turn on
The headlights will also turn off when the wipers are whenever the engine is running. To make your selection,
turned off if they were turned on by this feature. To make touch the “Daytime Running Lights” soft-key, until a
your selection, touch the “Headlights With Wipers” soft- check-mark appears next to setting, showing that setting
key, until a check-mark appears next to setting, showing has been selected. Touch the back arrow soft-key to
that setting has been selected. Touch the back arrow return to the previous menu.
• Steering Directed Lights — If Equipped Doors & Locks
When this feature is selected, the headlights turn relative After pressing the Doors & Locks soft-key the following
to a change in direction of the steering wheel. To make settings will be available.
your selection, touch the “Steering Directed Lights” • Auto Lock
soft-key, until a check-mark appears next to setting,
showing that setting has been selected. Touch the back When this feature is selected, all doors will lock auto-
arrow soft-key to return to the previous menu. matically when the vehicle reaches a speed of 15 mph
(24 km/h). To make your selection, touch the Auto
• Flash Lamps With Lock Unlock On Exit soft-key, until a check-mark appears next
When this feature is selected, the exterior lights will flash to setting, showing that setting has been selected. Touch
when the doors are locked with the Remote Keyless the back arrow soft-key to return to the previous menu.
Entry (RKE) transmitter. This feature may be selected • Auto Unlock On Exit
with or without the sound horn on lock feature selected.
To make your selection, touch the “Flash Lamps with When this feature is selected, all doors will unlock when
Lock” soft-key, until a check-mark appears next to set- the vehicle is stopped and the transmission is in the
ting, showing that setting has been selected. Touch the PARK or NEUTRAL position and the driver’s door is
back arrow soft-key to return to the previous menu. opened. To make your selection, touch the Auto Unlock
On Exit soft-key, until a check-mark appears next to
setting, showing that setting has been selected. Touch the • Sound Horn With Remote Start
When this feature is selected, the horn will sound when
• Flash Lamps With Lock the remote start is activated. To make your selection,
touch the Sound Horn With Remote Start soft-key, until a
When this feature is selected, the exterior lamps will flash
check-mark appears next to setting, showing that setting
when the doors are locked or unlocked with the Remote
has been selected. Touch the back arrow soft-key to 4
Keyless Entry (RKE) transmitter. To make your selection,
return to the previous menu.
touch the Flash Lamps With Lock soft-key, until a check-
mark appears next to setting, showing that setting has • 1st Press Of Key Fob Unlocks
been selected. Touch the back arrow soft-key to return to
When 1st Press Of Key Fob Unlocks is selected, only the
the previous menu.
driver’s door will unlock on the first press of the Remote
• Sound Horn With Lock Keyless Entry (RKE) transmitter UNLOCK button. When
1st Press Of Key Fob Unlocks is selected, you must press
When this feature is selected, the horn will sound when
the RKE transmitter UNLOCK button twice to unlock the
the remote start is activated. To make your selection,
passenger’s doors. When Unlock All Doors On 1st Press
touch the Sound Horn With Lock soft-key, until a check-
is selected, all of the doors will unlock on the first press
mark appears next to setting, showing that setting has
of the RKE transmitter UNLOCK button.
been selected. Touch the back arrow soft-key to return to
the previous menu.
NOTE: If the vehicle is programmed 1st Press Of Key Fob return to the previous menu. Refer to “Keyless Enter-N-
Unlocks, all doors will unlock no matter which Passive Go™” in “Things To Know Before Starting Your Vehicle.”
Entry equipped door handle is grasped. If 1st Press Of • Personal Settings Linked To FOB — If Equipped
Key Fob Unlocks is programmed, only the driver’s door
will unlock when the driver’s door is grasped. With This feature provides automatic driver seat positioning to
Passive Entry, if 1st Press Of Key Fob Unlocks is pro- enhance driver mobility when entering and exiting the
grammed touching the handle more than once will only vehicle. To make your selection, touch the Memory
result in the driver’s door opening. If driver door first is Linked To FOB soft-key, until a check-mark appears next
selected, once the driver door is opened, the interior door to setting, showing that setting has been selected. Touch
lock/unlock switch can be used to unlock all doors (or the back arrow soft-key to return to the previous menu.
use RKE transmitter). NOTE: The seat will return to the memorized seat
• Passive Entry location (if Recall Memory with Remote Key Unlock is set
to ON) when the Remote Keyless Entry (RKE) transmitter
This feature allows you to lock and unlock the vehicle’s
is used to unlock the door. Refer to “Driver Memory
door(s) without having to press the Remote Keyless
Seat” in “Understanding The Features Of Your Vehicle”
Entry (RKE) transmitter lock or unlock buttons. To make
for further information.
your selection, touch the Passive Entry soft-key, until a
has been selected. Touch the back arrow soft-key to
Auto-On Comfort & Remote Start Seats soft-key, until a check-mark appears next to setting,
showing that setting has been selected. Touch the back
After pressing the Auto-On Comfort & Remote Start
arrow soft-key to return to the previous menu.
soft-key the following settings will be available.
• Sound Horn With Remote Start Engine Off Options
When this feature is selected, the horn will sound when After pressing the Engine Off Options soft-key the fol-
lowing settings will be available. 4
the remote start is activated. To make your selection,
touch the Sound Horn With Remote Start soft-key, until a • Easy Exit Seat
This feature provides automatic driver seat positioning to
has been selected. Touch the back arrow soft-key to
enhance driver mobility when entering and exiting the
return to the previous menu.
vehicle. To make your selection, touch the Easy Exit Seats
• Auto-On Driver Heated/Ventilated Seat & Steering soft-key, until a check-mark appears next to setting,
Wheel With Vehicle Start — If Equipped showing that setting has been selected. Touch the back
arrow soft-key to return to the previous menu.
When this feature is selected the driver’s heated seat and
heated steering wheel will automatically turn on when • Engine Off Power Delay
temperatures are below 40° F (4.4° C). When tempera-
When this feature is selected, the power window
tures are above 80° F (26.7° C) the driver vented seat will
switches, radio, Uconnect® phone system (if equipped),
turn on. To make your selection, touch the Auto Heated
DVD video system (if equipped), power sunroof (if
equipped), and power outlets will remain active for up to • Variance
10 minutes after the ignition is cycled to OFF. Opening
Compass Variance is the difference between Magnetic
either front door will cancel this feature. To change the
North and Geographic North. To compensate for the
Engine Off Power Delay status touch the 0 seconds, 45
differences the variance should be set for the zone where
seconds, 5 minutes or 10 minutes soft-key. Then touch the
the vehicle is driven, per the zone map. Once properly
arrow back soft-key.
set, the compass will automatically compensate for the
• Headlight Off Delay differences, and provide the most accurate compass
heading.
When this feature is selected, the driver can choose to
have the headlights remain on for 0, 30, 60, or 90 seconds NOTE: Keep magnetic materials away from the top of the
when exiting the vehicle. To change the Headlight Off instrument panel, such as iPod’s, Mobile Phones, Laptop
Delay status touch the + or - soft-key to select your Computers and Radar Detectors. This is where the com-
desired time interval. Touch the back arrow soft-key to pass module is located, and it can cause interference with
return to the previous menu. the compass sensor, and it may give false readings.
Compass Settings
After pressing the Compass Settings soft-key the follow-
ing settings will be available.
pressing the “ON” soft-key and completing one or more
360-degree turns (in an area free from large metal or
metallic objects) until the CAL indicator displayed in the
EVIC turns off. The compass will now function normally.
Audio
After pressing the Audio soft-key the following settings 4
will be available.
• Balance/Fade
When in this display you may adjust the Balance and
Fade settings.
Compass Variance Map • Equalizer
• Perform Compass Calibration
When in this display you may adjust the Bass, Mid and
Touch the “Calibration” soft-key to change this setting. Treble settings. Adjust the settings with the + and –
This compass is self-calibrating, which eliminates the setting soft-keys or by selecting any point on the scale
need to manually reset the compass. When the vehicle is between the + and – soft-keys. Then touch the back arrow
new, the compass may appear erratic and it may need to soft-key.
be calibrated. You may also calibrate the compass by
NOTE: Bass/Mid/Treble allow you to simply slide your • Surround Sound — If Equipped
finger up or down to change the setting as well as touch
This feature provides simulated surround sound mode.
directly on the desired setting.
To make your selection, touch the Surround Sound
• Speed Adjusted Volume soft-key, select On or Off followed by pressing the back
arrow soft-key.
This feature increases or decreases volume relative to
vehicle speed. To change the Speed Adjusted Volume Phone/Bluetooth®
touch the Off, 1, 2 or 3 soft-key. Then touch the back
After pressing the “Phone/Bluetooth®” soft-key the fol-
arrow soft-key.
lowing settings will be available.
• Music Info Cleanup • Paired Devices
This feature helps organize music files for optimized This feature shows which phones are paired to the
music navigation. To make your selection, touch the Phone/Bluetooth® system. For further information, refer
Music Info Cleanup soft-key, select On or Off followed by to the Uconnect® Supplement.
pressing the back arrow soft-key.
SiriusXM Setup Touch the Subscription Info soft-key to access the Sub-
scription Information screen.
After pressing the “SIRIUS Setup” soft-key the following
settings will be available. Write down the SIRIUS ID numbers for your receiver. To
• Channel Skip reactivate your service, either call the number listed on
the screen or visit the provider online.
SiriusXM can be programmed to designate a group of
4
channels that are the most desirable to listen to or to NOTE: SiriusXM Travel Link is a separate subscription.
exclude undesirable channels while scanning. To make
your selection, touch the “Channel Skip” soft-key, select
iPod®/USB/MP3 CONTROL
the channels you would like to skip followed by pressing
the back arrow soft-key. This feature allows an iPod® or external USB device to be
plugged into the USB port.
• Subscription Information
iPod® control supports Mini, 4G, Photo, Nano, 5G iPod®
New vehicle purchasers or lessees will receive a free
and iPhone® devices. Some iPod® software versions
limited time subscription to SiriusXM Satellite Radio
may not fully support the iPod® control features. Please
with your radio. Following the expiration of the free
visit Apple’s website for software updates.
services, it will be necessary to access the information on
the Subscription Information screen in order to re- For further information, refer to the Uconnect® Supple-
subscribe. ment Manual.
HARMAN KARDON® Logic7® HIGH dynamic sound quality. The speakers are tuned for
PERFORMANCE MULTICHANNEL SURROUND maximum efficiency and perfectly matched to the ampli-
SOUND SYSTEM WITH DRIVER-SELECTABLE fier output stage ensuring state of the art multi-seat
SURROUND (DSS) — IF EQUIPPED surround sound processing.
Your vehicle is equipped with a Harman Kardon® audio Logic7® multichannel surround-sound technology deliv-
system with GreenEdge™ technology that offers superior ers an immersive, accurate sound-stage to every seating
sound quality, higher Sound Pressure Levels (SPL) and position This surround effect is available for audio from
reduced energy consumption. The new system utilizes any source - AM/FM/CD/ Satellite Radio or dashboard
proprietary amplifier and speaker technologies deliver- AUX input; and is activated through Uconnect® radio
ing substantial increases in component and system effi- touchscreen. Refer to “Customer Programmable Fea-
ciency levels. tures” under “Uconnect® SETTINGS” in “Understand-
ing Your Instrument Panel”.
The 12 Channel Class D GreenEdge™ high efficiency
amplifier is governed by a high voltage tracking power Selecting “Surround Sound” through the Uconnect®
supply and drives a 7.4-channel playback architecture. radio activates the Harman Kardon® Logic7® multichan-
The Harman Kardon® audio system offers the ability to nel surround-sound technology in your vehicle. Some
choose Logic 7® surround sound for any audio source. audio will sound better in DSS modes, others in Stereo
The GreenEdge™ high-efficiency speaker designs ensure mode.
the system has higher SPL and a dramatic increase in
When in “Surround Sound” mode, balance is set auto-
matically. Fader control is available in surround mode
but should be set to the center position for optimal
surround performance.
STEERING WHEEL AUDIO CONTROLS — IF

EQUIPPED 4
The remote sound system controls are located on the rear
surface of the steering wheel. Reach behind the wheel to
access the switches.
Remote Sound Controls (Back View Of Steering Wheel)

The right-hand control is a rocker-type switch with a
pushbutton in the center and controls the volume and
mode of the sound system. Pressing the top of the rocker
switch will increase the volume, and pressing the bottom
of the rocker switch will decrease the volume.
Pressing the center button will make the radio switch CD Player
between the various modes available (AM/FM/SAT/ Pushing the top of the switch once will go to the next
CD/AUX/VES, etc.). track on the CD. Pushing the bottom of the switch once
The left-hand control is a rocker-type switch with a will go to the beginning of the current track, or to the
pushbutton in the center. The function of the left-hand beginning of the previous track if it is within eight
control is different depending on which mode you are in. seconds after the current track begins to play.
The following describes the left-hand control operation in If you push the switch up or down twice, it plays the
each mode. second track; three times, it will play the third, etc.
Radio Operation The center button on the left side rocker switch has no
function for a single-disc CD player. However, when a
Pushing the top of the switch will “Seek” up for the next multiple-disc CD player is equipped on the vehicle, the
listenable station and pushing the bottom of the switch center button will select the next available CD in the
will “Seek” down for the next listenable station. player.
The button located in the center of the left-hand control
will tune to the next preset station that you have pro-
grammed in the radio preset button.
CD/DVD DISC MAINTENANCE NOTE: If you experience difficulty in playing a particular
To keep a CD/DVD in good condition, take the following disc, it may be damaged (e.g., scratched, reflective coat-
precautions: ing removed, a hair, moisture or dew on the disc)
oversized, or have protection encoding. Try a known
1. Handle the disc by its edge; avoid touching the good disc before considering disc player service.
surface.
RADIO OPERATION AND MOBILE PHONES 4
2. If the disc is stained, clean the surface with a soft cloth,
wiping from center to edge. Under certain conditions, the mobile phone being on in
your vehicle can cause erratic or noisy performance from
3. Do not apply paper or tape to the disc; avoid scratch- your radio. This condition may be lessened or eliminated
ing the disc. by relocating the mobile phone antenna. This condition is
4. Do not use solvents such as benzene, thinner, cleaners, not harmful to the radio. If your radio performance does
or anti-static sprays. not satisfactorily “clear” by the repositioning of the
antenna, it is recommended that the radio volume be
5. Store the disc in its case after playing. turned down or off during mobile phone operation when
6. Do not expose the disc to direct sunlight. not using Uconnect® (if equipped).
7. Do not store the disc where temperatures may become

too high.
CLIMATE CONTROLS
The air conditioning and heating system is designed to
make you comfortable in all types of weather. This
system can be operated through either the controls on the
instrument panel or through the Uconnect® system dis-
play.
When the Uconnect® system is in different modes (Ra-
dio, Player, Settings, More, etc.) the driver and passenger
temperature settings will be indicated at the top of the
display.
General Overview
Uconnect® 4.3 — Hard-Key
Hard-Keys
Hard-keys are located on the left and right side of the
Uconnect® 4.3 screen in the center of the instrument
panel. There are also hard-keys located below the
Uconnect® touchscreen.
Soft-Keys
Soft-keys are accessible on the Uconnect® system screen.
Manual Climate Controls — Hard-Keys (MTC System

Shown)
Uconnect® 4.3 Manual Temperature Controls —

Soft-Keys
this function again will cause the MAX A/C operation to
switch into manual mode and the MAX A/C indicator
will turn off.
2. A/C Button
Press and release to change the current setting, the
indicator illuminates when A/C is ON. Performing this
function again will cause the A/C operation to switch
into manual mode and the A/C indicator will turn off.
3. Recirculation Button
Press and release to change the current setting, the
Uconnect® 8.4 Automatic Temperature Controls — indicator illuminates when ON.
Soft-Keys
4. AUTO Operation Button
Button Descriptions (Applies To Both Hard-Keys And
Soft-Keys) Automatically controls the interior cabin temperature by
adjusting airflow distribution and amount. Performing
1. MAX A/C Button
this function will cause the ATC to switch between
Press and release to change the current setting, the manual mode and automatic modes. Refer to “Automatic
indicator illuminates when MAX A/C is ON. Performing Operation” for more information.
5. Front Defrost Button
CAUTION!
Press and release to change the current airflow setting to
Failure to follow these cautions can cause damage to
Defrost mode. The indicator illuminates when this fea-
the heating elements:
ture is ON. Performing this function will cause the ATC
to switch into manual mode. The blower speed may • Use care when washing the inside of the rear
window. Do not use abrasive window cleaners on
increase when Defrost mode is selected. If the front 4
the interior surface of the window. Use a soft cloth
defrost mode is turned off the climate system will return
and a mild washing solution, wiping parallel to the
the previous setting.
heating elements. Labels can be peeled off after
6. Rear Defrost Button soaking with warm water.
Press and release this button to turn on the rear window • Do not use scrapers, sharp instruments, or abrasive
defroster and the heated outside mirrors (if equipped). window cleaners on the interior surface of the
An indicator will illuminate when the rear window window.
defroster is on. The rear window defroster automatically • Keep all objects a safe distance from the window.
turns off after 10 minutes. 7. Passenger Temperature Control Up Button
Provides the passenger with independent temperature
control. Push the button for warmer temperature set-
tings.
NOTE: Pressing this button while in Sync mode will 10. Blower Control
automatically exit Sync.
Blower control is used to regulate the amount of air
8. Passenger Temperature Control Down Button forced through the climate system. There are seven
Provides the passenger with independent temperature blower speeds available. Adjusting the blower will cause
automatic mode to switch to manual operation. The
control. Push the button for cooler temperature settings.
speeds can be selected using either hard-keys or soft-keys
NOTE: Pressing this button while in Sync mode will as follows:
automatically exit Sync.
Hard-Key
9. SYNC The blower speed increases as you turn the control
Press the Sync soft-key to toggle the Sync feature On/Off. clockwise from the lowest blower setting. The blower
The Sync indicator is illuminated when this feature is speed decreases as you turn the knob counter-clockwise.
enabled. Sync is used to synchronize the passenger Soft-Key
temperature setting with the driver temperature setting.
Changing the passenger temperature setting while in Use the small blower icon to reduce the blower setting
Sync will automatically exit this feature. and the large blower icon to increase the blower setting.
Blower can also be selected by pressing the blower bar
area between the icons.
11. Modes NOTE: BI-LEVEL mode is designed under comfort con-
ditions to provide cooler air out of the panel outlets and
The airflow distribution mode can be adjusted so air
warmer air from the floor outlets.
comes from the instrument panel outlets, floor outlets,
demist outlets and defrost outlets. The Mode settings are • Floor Mode
as follows: Air comes from the floor outlets. A slight
amount of air is directed through the defrost
• Panel Mode 4
and side window demister outlets.
Air comes from the outlets in the instrument
panel. Each of these outlets can be individu- • Mix Mode
ally adjusted to direct the flow of air. The air Air comes from the floor, defrost and side
vanes of the center outlets and outboard outlets can window demist outlets. This mode works best
be moved up and down or side to side to regulate in cold or snowy conditions.
airflow direction. There is a shut off wheel located • Defrost Mode
below the air vanes to shut off or adjust the amount Air comes from the windshield and side win-
of airflow from these outlets. dow demist outlets. Use Defrost mode with
• Bi-Level Mode maximum temperature settings for best windshield
Air comes from the instrument panel outlets and side window defrosting and defogging. When
and floor outlets. A slight amount of air is the defrost mode is selected, the blower level may
directed through the defrost and side window increase.
demister outlets.
12. Climate Control OFF Button 15. Temperature Control (Uconnect® 4.3 Only)
Press and release this button to turn the Climate Control Press the temperature soft-key to regulate the tempera-
ON/OFF. ture of the air inside the passenger compartment. Moving
the temperature bar into the red area, indicates warmer
13. Driver Temperature Control Down Button
temperatures. Moving the temperature bar into the blue
Provides the driver with independent temperature con- area indicates cooler temperatures.
trol. Push the button for cooler temperature settings.
Climate Control Functions
NOTE: In Sync mode, this button will also automatically
A/C (Air Conditioning)
adjust the passenger temperature setting at the same
time. The Air Conditioning (A/C) button allows the operator
to manually activate or deactivate the air conditioning
14. Driver Temperature Control Up Button
system. When the air conditioning system is turned on,
Provides the driver with independent temperature con- cool dehumidified air will flow through the outlets into
trol. Push the button for warmer temperature settings. the cabin. For improved fuel economy, press the A/C
button to turn off the air conditioning and manually
NOTE: In Sync mode, this button will also automatically
adjust the blower and airflow mode settings. Also, make
adjust the passenger temperature setting at the same
sure to select only Panel, Bi-Level or Floor modes.
time.
NOTE: Press and release to toggle between MAX A/C and the
prior settings. The soft-key illuminates when MAX A/C
• For Manual Climate Controls, if the system is in Mix,
is ON.
Floor or Defrost Mode, the A/C can be turned off, but
the A/C system shall remain active to prevent fogging In MAX A/C, the blower level and mode position can be
of the windows. adjusted to desired user settings. Pressing other settings
will cause the MAX A/C operation to switch to the 4
• If fog or mist appears on the windshield or side glass,
selected setting and MAX A/C to exit.
select Defrost mode and increase blower speed.
Recirculation Control
• If your air conditioning performance seems lower than
expected, check the front of the A/C condenser (lo-
cated in front of the radiator), for an accumulation of When outside air contains smoke, odors, or
dirt or insects. Clean with a gentle water spray from high humidity, or if rapid cooling is desired,
the front of the radiator and through the condenser. you may wish to recirculate interior air by
pressing the Recirculation control button. The
MAX A/C recirculation indicator will illuminate when this button is
MAX A/C sets the control for maximum cooling perfor- selected. Push the button a second time to turn off the
mance. Recirculation mode and allow outside air into the vehicle.
NOTE: In cold weather, use of Recirculation mode may (7, 8, 13, 14). Once the desired temperature is dis-
lead to excessive window fogging. The recirculation played, the system will achieve and automatically
feature may be unavailable (soft button greyed out). The maintain that comfort level.
Recirculation mode is not allowed in Defrost mode to
3. When the system is set up for your comfort level, it is
improve window clearing operation. Recirculation will
not necessary to change the settings. You will experi-
be disabled automatically if this mode is selected. At-
ence the greatest efficiency by simply allowing the
tempting to use Recirculation while in this mode will
system to function automatically.
cause the LED in the control button to blink and then turn
off. NOTE:
Automatic Temperature Control (ATC) • It is not necessary to move the temperature settings for
cold or hot vehicles. The system automatically adjusts
Automatic Operation
the temperature, mode, and blower speed to provide
1. Press the AUTO hard-key or soft-key button (4) on the comfort as quickly as possible.
Automatic Temperature Control (ATC) Panel.
• The temperature can be displayed in U.S. or Metric
2. Next, adjust the temperature you would like the units by selecting the US/M customer-programmable
system to maintain by adjusting the driver and pas- feature. Refer to the “Uconnect® System Settings” in
senger temperature hard or soft control buttons this section of the manual.
To provide you with maximum comfort in the Automatic Operating Tips
mode, during cold start-ups the blower fan will remain
NOTE: Refer to the chart at the end of this section for
on low until the engine warms up. The blower will
suggested control settings for various weather condi-
increase in speed and transition into Auto mode.
tions.
Manual Operation Override
Summer Operation
The system allows for manual selection of blower speed, 4
The engine cooling system must be protected with a
air distribution mode, A/C status and recirculation con-
high-quality antifreeze coolant to provide proper corro-
trol.
sion protection and to protect against engine overheating.
The blower fan speed can be set to any fixed speed by A solution of 50% OAT (Organic Additive Technology)
adjusting the blower control. The fan will now operate at coolant that meets the requirements of Chrysler Material
a fixed speed until additional speeds are selected. This Standard MS-12106 and 50% water is recommended.
allows the front occupants to control the volume of air Refer to “Maintenance Procedures” in “Maintaining Your
circulated in the vehicle and cancel the Auto mode. Vehicle” for proper coolant selection.
The operator can also select the direction of the airflow Winter Operation
by selecting one of the available mode settings. A/C Use of the air Recirculation mode during Winter months
operation and Recirculation control can also be manually is not recommended because it may cause window
selected in Manual operation. fogging.
Vacation Storage NOTE:
Any time you store your vehicle or keep it out of service • Recirculate without A/C should not be used for long
(i.e., vacation) for two weeks or more, run the air periods, as fogging may occur.
conditioning system at idle for about five minutes in the
• Automatic Temperature Controls (ATC) will automati-
fresh air and high blower setting. This will ensure
cally adjust the climate control settings to reduce or
adequate system lubrication to minimize the possibility
eliminate window fogging on the front windshield.
of compressor damage when the system is started again.
When this occurs, recirculation will be unavailable.
Window Fogging
Outside Air Intake
Interior fogging on the windshield can be quickly re-
moved by turning the mode selector to Defrost. The Make sure the air intake, located directly in front of the
windshield, is free of obstructions such as leaves. Leaves
Defrost/Floor mode can be used to maintain a clear
windshield and provide sufficient heating. If side win- collected in the air intake may reduce airflow, and if they
enter the plenum, they could plug the water drains. In
dow fogging becomes objectionable, increase blower
speed to improve airflow and clearing of the side win- Winter months, make sure the air intake is clear of ice,
dows. Vehicle windows tend to fog on the inside in mild slush, and snow.
but rainy or humid weather.
A/C Air Filter
The climate control system filters outside air containing
dust, pollen and some odors. Strong odors cannot be
totally filtered out. Refer to “Maintenance Procedures” in
“Maintaining Your Vehicle” for filter replacement instruc-
tions. 4
Manual Control Setting Suggestions for Various Weather Conditions
STARTING AND OPERATING
CONTENTS
䡵 STARTING PROCEDURES . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .398 ▫ Key Ignition Park Interlock. . . . . . . . . . . . . . .405
▫ Automatic Transmission . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .398 ▫ Brake/Transmission Shift Interlock System . . .405
5
▫ Keyless Enter-N-Go™ . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .399 ▫ Eight-Speed Automatic Transmission — If
Equipped . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .405
▫ Normal Starting. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .399
▫ Five-Speed Automatic Transmission — If
▫ Extreme Cold Weather
Equipped . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .414
(Below –20°F Or −29°C) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .401
䡵 AUTOSTICK® — IF EQUIPPED . . . . . . . . . . . .421
▫ If Engine Fails To Start . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .401
▫ Operation Eight-Speed Transmission — If
▫ After Starting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .402
Equipped . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .421
䡵 ENGINE BLOCK HEATER — IF EQUIPPED . . .402
▫ Operation Five-Speed Transmission — If
䡵 AUTOMATIC TRANSMISSION . . . . . . . . . . . .403 Equipped . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .423
394 STARTING AND OPERATING
䡵 SPORT MODE (5.7L ONLY) — IF EQUIPPED . . .424 䡵 ELECTRONIC BRAKE CONTROL SYSTEM . . . .435
䡵 ALL-WHEEL DRIVE (AWD) — IF EQUIPPED . .425 ▫ Anti-Lock Brake System (ABS) . . . . . . . . . . . .435
䡵 DRIVING ON SLIPPERY SURFACES . . . . . . . . .426 ▫ Traction Control System (TCS) . . . . . . . . . . . .436
▫ Acceleration . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .426 ▫ Brake Assist System (BAS) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .436
▫ Traction . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .427 ▫ Electronic Stability Control (ESC) . . . . . . . . . .437
䡵 DRIVING THROUGH WATER . . . . . . . . . . . . .427 ▫ Hill Start Assist (HSA) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .440
▫ Flowing/Rising Water . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .427 ▫ Ready Alert Braking . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .442
▫ Shallow Standing Water . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .428 ▫ Rain Brake Support . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .443
䡵 POWER STEERING . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .429 ▫ ESC Activation/Malfunction Indicator Light And
ESC OFF Indicator Light . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .443
䡵 FUEL SAVER TECHNOLOGY 5.7L ENGINE ONLY
— IF EQUIPPED . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .430 ▫ Synchronizing ESC . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .444
䡵 PARKING BRAKE . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .431 䡵 TIRE SAFETY INFORMATION . . . . . . . . . . . . .444
䡵 ANTI-LOCK BRAKE SYSTEM . . . . . . . . . . . . .433 ▫ Tire Markings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .444
STARTING AND OPERATING 395
▫ Tire Identification Number (TIN). . . . . . . . . . .448 ▫ Life Of Tire . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .464
▫ Tire Terminology And Definitions . . . . . . . . . .450 ▫ Replacement Tires . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .465
▫ Tire Loading And Tire Pressure . . . . . . . . . . .451 䡵 TIRE CHAINS (TRACTION DEVICES) . . . . . . .466
䡵 TIRES — GENERAL INFORMATION . . . . . . . .455 䡵 TIRE ROTATION RECOMMENDATIONS . . . . .468
▫ Tire Pressure . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .455 䡵 TIRE PRESSURE MONITOR SYSTEM (TPMS) . .469
▫ Tire Inflation Pressures . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .456 ▫ Base System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .471 5
▫ Tire Pressures For High Speed Operation . . . .458 ▫ Premium System — If Equipped . . . . . . . . . . .474
▫ Radial Ply Tires . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .458 ▫ General Information . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .479
▫ Tire Types . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .459 䡵 FUEL REQUIREMENTS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .480
▫ Run Flat Tires — If Equipped . . . . . . . . . . . . .460 ▫ 3.6L Engine — If Equipped. . . . . . . . . . . . . . .480
▫ Spare Tires — If Equipped . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .461 ▫ 5.7L Engine — If Equipped. . . . . . . . . . . . . . .480
▫ Tire Spinning . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .463 ▫ Reformulated Gasoline . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .481
▫ Tread Wear Indicators . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .463 ▫ Gasoline/Oxygenate Blends . . . . . . . . . . . . . .481
▫ E-85 Usage In Non-Flex Fuel Vehicles . . . . . . .482 ▫ Replacement Parts . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .487
▫ MMT In Gasoline . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .482 ▫ Maintenance . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .488
▫ Materials Added To Fuel . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .483 䡵 ADDING FUEL . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .488
▫ Fuel System Cautions. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .483 ▫ Emergency Fuel Filler Door Release. . . . . . . . .491
▫ Carbon Monoxide Warnings . . . . . . . . . . . . .484 䡵 VEHICLE LOADING . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .492
䡵 FLEXIBLE FUEL (3.6L ENGINE ONLY) — IF ▫ Vehicle Certification Label . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .492
EQUIPPED . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .485
▫ Gross Vehicle Weight Rating (GVWR) . . . . . . .493
▫ E-85 General Information . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .485
▫ Gross Axle Weight Rating (GAWR) . . . . . . . . .493
▫ Ethanol Fuel (E-85) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .485
▫ Overloading . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .493
▫ Fuel Requirements . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .486
▫ Loading . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .494
▫ Selection Of Engine Oil For Flexible Fuel Vehicles
䡵 TRAILER TOWING . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .494
(E-85) And Gasoline Vehicles . . . . . . . . . . . . .486
▫ Common Towing Definitions . . . . . . . . . . . . .495
▫ Starting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .487
▫ Trailer Hitch Classification . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .498
▫ Cruising Range . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .487
▫ Trailer Towing Weights (Maximum Trailer Weight ▫ Towing Tips . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .506
Ratings) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .499
䡵 RECREATIONAL TOWING (BEHIND
▫ Trailer And Tongue Weight . . . . . . . . . . . . . .500 MOTORHOME, ETC.) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .508
▫ Towing Requirements . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .501 ▫ Two-Wheel Drive And All-Wheel Drive . . . . . .508
5
STARTING PROCEDURES
Before starting your vehicle, adjust your seat, adjust the • Do not leave the Key Fob in or near the vehicle (or
inside and outside mirrors, fasten your seat belt, and if in a location accessible to children), and do not
present, instruct all other occupants to buckle their seat leave the ignition of a vehicle equipped with
belts. Keyless Enter-N-Go™ in the ACC or ON/RUN
WARNING! controls, or move the vehicle.
Automatic Transmission
Fob from the ignition and lock your vehicle.
• Never leave children alone in a vehicle, or with The shift lever must be in the NEUTRAL or PARK
access to an unlocked vehicle. Allowing children to position before you can start the engine. Apply the brakes
be in a vehicle unattended is dangerous for a before shifting into any driving gear.
number of reasons. A child or others could be
seriously or fatally injured. Children should be
warned not to touch the parking brake, brake pedal
or the shift lever.
(Continued)
Keyless Enter-N-Go™
CAUTION!
Damage to the transmission may occur if the follow- This feature allows the driver to oper-
ing precautions are not observed: ate the ignition switch with the push
• Do not shift from REVERSE, PARK, or NEUTRAL of a button, as long as the Remote
into any forward gear when the engine is above Start/Keyless Enter-N-Go™ Key Fob
idle speed. is in the passenger compartment.
• Shift into PARK only after the vehicle has come to 5
a complete stop.
• Shift into or out of REVERSE only after the vehicle Normal Starting
has come to a complete stop and the engine is at
Using The ENGINE START/STOP Button
idle speed.
• Before shifting into any gear, make sure your foot 1. The transmission must be in PARK or NEUTRAL.
is firmly on the brake pedal.
2. Press and hold the brake pedal while pressing the
ENGINE START/STOP button once.
3. The system takes over and attempts to start the
vehicle. If the vehicle fails to start, the starter will
disengage automatically after 10 seconds.
4. If you wish to stop the cranking of the engine prior to will shut off. The ignition switch position will remain
the engine starting, press the button again. in the ACC position until the shift lever/gear selector
is in PARK and the button is pressed twice to the OFF
NOTE: Normal starting of either a cold or a warm engine
position. If the shift lever/gear selector is not in PARK
is obtained without pumping or pressing the accelerator
and the ENGINE START/STOP button is pressed
pedal.
once, the EVIC (if equipped) will display a “Vehicle
To Turn Off The Engine Using ENGINE Not In Park” message and the engine will remain
START/STOP Button running. Never leave a vehicle out of the PARK
position, or it could roll.
1. Place the shift lever/gear selector in PARK, then press
and release the ENGINE START/STOP button. NOTE: If the ignition switch is left in the ACC or RUN
(engine not running) position and the transmission is in
2. The ignition switch will return to the OFF position.
PARK, the system will automatically time out after 30
3. If the shift lever/gear selector is not in PARK, the minutes of inactivity and the ignition will switch to the
ENGINE START/STOP button must be held for two OFF position.
seconds or three short presses in a row with the
vehicle speed above 5 mph (8 km/h) before the engine
ENGINE START/STOP Button Functions — With Extreme Cold Weather (Below –20°F Or −29°C)
Driver’s Foot OFF The Brake Pedal (In PARK Or To ensure reliable starting at these temperatures, use of
NEUTRAL Position) an externally powered electric engine block heater (avail-
The ENGINE START/STOP button operates similar to an able from your authorized dealer) is recommended.
ignition switch. It has three positions, OFF, ACC, RUN.
If Engine Fails To Start
To change the ignition switch positions without starting
the vehicle and use the accessories follow these steps: WARNING!
5
1. Starting with the ignition in the OFF position: • Never pour fuel or other flammable liquid into the
2. Press the ENGINE START/STOP button once to throttle body air inlet opening in an attempt to start
change the ignition to the ACC position. the vehicle. This could result in flash fire causing
serious personal injury.
3. Press the ENGINE START/STOP button a second time • Do not attempt to push or tow your vehicle to get it
to change the ignition to the RUN position. started. Vehicles equipped with an automatic trans-
4. Press the ENGINE START/STOP button a third time mission cannot be started this way. Unburned fuel
to return the ignition to the OFF position. could enter the catalytic converter and once the
engine has started, ignite and damage the converter
and vehicle.
(Continued)
3. Press and release the ENGINE START/STOP button
once.
• If the vehicle has a discharged battery, booster
cables may be used to obtain a start from a booster The starter motor will engage automatically, run for 10
battery or the battery in another vehicle. This type seconds, and then disengage. Once this occurs, release
of start can be dangerous if done improperly. Refer the accelerator pedal and the brake pedal, wait 10 to 15
to “Jump Starting” in “What To Do In Emergen- seconds, then repeat the “Normal Starting” procedure.
cies” for further information. After Starting
Clearing A Flooded Engine (Using ENGINE The idle speed is controlled automatically and it will
START/STOP Button) decrease as the engine warms up.
If the engine fails to start after you have followed the ENGINE BLOCK HEATER — IF EQUIPPED
“Normal Starting” or “Extreme Cold Weather⬙ proce-
dures, it may be flooded. To clear any excess fuel: The engine block heater warms the engine, and permits
quicker starts in cold weather. Connect the cord to a
1. Press and hold the brake pedal. standard 110-115 Volt AC electrical outlet with a
2. Press the accelerator pedal all the way to the floor and grounded, three-wire extension cord.
hold it. The engine block heater must be plugged in at least one
hour to have an adequate warming effect on the engine.
The engine block heater cord is routed under the hood on
the driver side of the vehicle. It has a removable cap that
is located on the driver side of the Integrated Power parking brake, shift the transmission into PARK,
Module. turn the engine OFF, and remove the Key Fob.
When the ignition is in the OFF position, the
WARNING! transmission is locked in PARK, securing the ve-
hicle against unwanted movement.
Remember to disconnect the engine block heater • It is dangerous to shift out of PARK or NEUTRAL
cord before driving. Damage to the 110-115 Volt if the engine speed is higher than idle speed. If 5
electrical cord could cause electrocution. your foot is not firmly pressing the brake pedal, the
vehicle could accelerate quickly forward or in re-
AUTOMATIC TRANSMISSION verse. You could lose control of the vehicle and hit
someone or something. Only shift into gear when
WARNING! the engine is idling normally and your foot is
firmly pressing the brake pedal.
• Unintended movement of a vehicle could injure • When leaving the vehicle, always remove the Key
those in or near the vehicle. As with all vehicles, Fob and lock your vehicle.
you should never exit a vehicle while the engine is
running. Before exiting a vehicle, always apply the (Continued)
(Continued)
WARNING! (Continued) CAUTION!

• Never leave children alone in a vehicle, or with Damage to the transmission may occur if the follow-
access to an unlocked vehicle. Allowing children to ing precautions are not observed:
be in a vehicle unattended is dangerous for a • Shift into PARK only after the vehicle has come to
number of reasons. A child or others could be a complete stop.
seriously or fatally injured. • Shift into or out of REVERSE only after the vehicle
• Children should be warned not to touch the park- has come to a complete stop and the engine is at
ing brake, brake pedal or the shift lever. idle speed.
• Do not leave the Key Fob in or near the vehicle (or • Do not shift between PARK, REVERSE, NEU-
in a location accessible to children), and do not TRAL, or DRIVE when the engine is above idle
leave the ignition of a vehicle equipped with speed.
Keyless Enter-N-Go™ in the ACC or ON/RUN • Before shifting into any gear, make sure your foot
mode. A child could operate power windows, other is firmly pressing the brake pedal.
NOTE: You must press and hold the brake pedal while
shifting out of PARK.
Key Ignition Park Interlock In 8-speed vehicles, the brake pedal must also be pressed
to shift from NEUTRAL into DRIVE or REVERSE when
This vehicle is equipped with a Key Ignition Park Inter-
the vehicle is stopped or moving at low speeds.
lock which requires the transmission to be in PARK
before the engine can be turned off. This helps the driver Eight-Speed Automatic Transmission — If
avoid inadvertently leaving the vehicle without placing Equipped
the transmission in PARK. This system also locks the
Your vehicle is equipped with a fuel efficient eight-speed
transmission in PARK whenever the ignition switch is in
transmission. The electronic shift lever in this vehicle
the OFF position. 5
does not slide like a conventional shifter. Instead, the
Brake/Transmission Shift Interlock System shift lever is spring loaded and moves forward and
This vehicle is equipped with a Brake Transmission Shift rearward, always returning to the center position after
Interlock system (BTSI) that holds the shift lever in PARK each gear is selected.
unless the brakes are applied. To shift the transmission The transmission gear range (PRND) is displayed both
out of PARK, the ignition switch must be cycled to the on the shift lever and in the Electronic Vehicle Informa-
ON/RUN position (engine running, for vehicles with tion Center (EVIC).
8-speed transmission) and the brake pedal must be
To select a gear range, press the lock button on the shift
pressed.
lever and move the lever rearward or forward. You must
also press the brake pedal to shift the transmission out of
PARK, or to shift from NEUTRAL into DRIVE or RE- Standard Shifter
VERSE when the vehicle is stopped or moving at low The standard shift lever has PARK, REVERSE, NEU-
speeds (refer to “Brake/Transmission Shift Interlock Sys- TRAL, DRIVE, and LOW shift positions. Using the LOW
tem” in this section). To shift past multiple gear ranges at position manually downshifts the transmission to a
once (such as PARK to DRIVE), move the lever past the lower gear based on vehicle speed.
first (or second) detent. Select the DRIVE range for
normal driving.
The electronically-controlled transmission provides a
precise shift schedule. The transmission electronics are
self-calibrating; therefore, the first few shifts on a new
vehicle may be somewhat abrupt. This is a normal
condition, and precision shifts will develop within a few
hundred miles (kilometers).
Only shift from DRIVE to PARK or REVERSE when the
accelerator pedal is released and the vehicle is stopped.
Be sure to keep your foot on the brake pedal when
shifting between these gears.
Shift Lever
Optional Shifter With AutoStick® To shift back into PARK from DRIVE, bring the vehicle to
a complete stop, firmly press the brake pedal, press the
The optional shift lever (with AutoStick® shift paddles
lock button on the shift lever, then push and hold the
mounted on the steering wheel) provides PARK, RE-
shift lever fully forward until “P” is highlighted in the
VERSE, NEUTRAL, DRIVE, and SPORT shift positions.
EVIC.
Once in the DRIVE range, tapping the shift lever rear-
ward will toggle between SPORT mode and DRIVE Shifting From REVERSE To NEUTRAL
mode. You do not need to press the lock button when
Pull the shift lever rearward to the first detent and
toggling between DRIVE and SPORT modes. 5
release. “N” will be highlighted in the EVIC.
Manual shifts can be made using the AutoStick® shift
To shift back into REVERSE from NEUTRAL, firmly
control (refer to “AutoStick®” in this section). Pressing
press the brake pedal, press the lock button on the shift
the shift paddles (-/+) while in the DRIVE or SPORT
lever, then push the shift lever forward to the first detent
position will manually select the transmission gear, and
and release. “R” will be highlighted in the EVIC.
will display the current gear in the instrument cluster as
1, 2, 3, etc. Shifting From NEUTRAL To DRIVE
Shifting From PARK To DRIVE Firmly press the brake pedal, press the lock button on the
shift lever, then pull the shift lever rearward and release.
Firmly press the brake pedal, press the lock button on the
“D” will be highlighted in the EVIC.
shift lever, then pull and hold the shift lever fully
rearward until “D” is highlighted in the EVIC.
To shift back into NEUTRAL from DRIVE, push the shift To shift back into DRIVE from SPORT, pull the shift lever
lever forward to the first detent and release. “N” will be rearward until “D” is highlighted in the EVIC.
highlighted in the EVIC.
Vehicles Equipped With LOW Mode
Shifting From REVERSE To DRIVE
To shift from DRIVE to LOW, pull the shift lever rear-
Bring the vehicle to a complete stop, firmly press the ward until “L” is highlighted in the EVIC.
brake pedal, then pull the shift lever fully rearward and
To shift back into DRIVE from LOW, pull the shift lever
release when “D” is highlighted in the EVIC.
rearward until “D” is highlighted in the EVIC.
To shift back into REVERSE from DRIVE, bring the
Gear Ranges
vehicle to a complete stop, firmly press the brake pedal,
press the lock button on the shift lever, then push the shift DO NOT race the engine when shifting from PARK or
lever forward to the second detent and release when “R” NEUTRAL into another gear range.
is highlighted in the EVIC.
NOTE: After selecting any gear range, wait a moment to
Shifting From DRIVE To SPORT/LOW allow the selected gear to engage before accelerating.
This is especially important when the engine is cold.
Vehicles Equipped With SPORT Mode
To shift from DRIVE to SPORT, pull the shift lever
rearward until “S” is highlighted in the EVIC.
PARK (P)
WARNING!
This range supplements the parking brake by locking the
transmission. The engine can be started in this range. • Never use the PARK position as a substitute for the
Never attempt to use PARK while the vehicle is in parking brake. Always apply the parking brake
fully when parked to guard against vehicle move-
motion. Apply the parking brake when leaving the
ment and possible injury or damage.
vehicle in this range.
• Your vehicle could move and injure you and others
When parking on a level surface, you may shift the if it is not completely in PARK. Check by trying to
5
transmission into PARK first, and then apply the parking move the shift lever out of PARK with the brake
brake. pedal released. Make sure the transmission is in
PARK before leaving the vehicle.
When parking on a hill, apply the parking brake before
• It is dangerous to shift out of PARK or NEUTRAL
shifting the transmission to PARK, otherwise the load on if the engine speed is higher than idle speed. If
the transmission locking mechanism may make it diffi- your foot is not firmly pressing the brake pedal, the
cult to move the shift lever out of PARK. As an added vehicle could accelerate quickly forward or in re-
precaution, turn the front wheels toward the curb on a verse. You could lose control of the vehicle and hit
downhill grade and away from the curb on an uphill someone or something. Only shift into gear when
grade. the engine is idling normally and your foot is
(Continued)
WARNING! (Continued) WARNING! (Continued)

• Unintended movement of a vehicle could injure warned not to touch the parking brake, brake pedal
those in or near the vehicle. As with all vehicles, or the shift lever.
you should never exit a vehicle while the engine is • Do not leave the Key Fob in or near the vehicle (or
running. Before exiting a vehicle, always apply the in a location accessible to children), and do not
parking brake, shift the transmission into PARK, leave the ignition of a vehicle equipped with
turn the engine OFF, and remove the Key Fob. Keyless Enter-N-Go™ in the ACC or ON/RUN
When the ignition is in the OFF position, the mode. A child could operate power windows, other
transmission is locked in PARK, securing the ve- controls, or move the vehicle.
• When leaving the vehicle, always remove the Key CAUTION!
Fob and lock your vehicle.
• Never leave children alone in a vehicle, or with • Before moving the shift lever out of PARK, you
access to an unlocked vehicle. Allowing children to must turn the ignition switch from the LOCK/OFF
be in a vehicle unattended is dangerous for a position to the ON/RUN position, and also press
number of reasons. A child or others could be the brake pedal. Otherwise, damage to the shift
seriously or fatally injured. Children should be lever could result.
(Continued) (Continued)
REVERSE (R)
• DO NOT race the engine when shifting from This range is for moving the vehicle backward. Shift into
PARK or NEUTRAL into another gear range, as this REVERSE only after the vehicle has come to a complete
can damage the drivetrain. stop.
NEUTRAL (N)
The following indicators should be used to ensure that
you have engaged the transmission into the PARK posi- Use this range when the vehicle is standing for prolonged
tion: periods with the engine running. The engine may be 5
started in this range. Apply the parking brake and shift
• When shifting into PARK, firmly move the shift lever the transmission into PARK if you must leave the vehicle.
all the way forward and to the left until it stops and is
fully seated. WARNING!
• Look at the transmission gear position display and
Do not coast in NEUTRAL and never turn off the
verify that it indicates the PARK position.
ignition to coast down a hill. These are unsafe
• With brake pedal released, verify that the shift lever practices that limit your response to changing traffic
will not move out of PARK. or road conditions. You might lose control of the
vehicle and have a collision.
while towing heavy trailers), use the AutoStick® shift
CAUTION!
control (if equipped) or the LOW range (if equipped) to
Towing the vehicle, coasting, or driving for any other select a lower gear. Under these conditions, using a lower
reason with the transmission in NEUTRAL can cause gear will improve performance and extend transmission
severe transmission damage. Refer to “Recreational life by reducing excessive shifting and heat buildup.
Towing” in “Starting And Operating” and “Towing A During extremely cold temperatures (-22°F [-30°C] or
Disabled Vehicle” in “What To Do In Emergencies” below), transmission operation may be modified depend-
for further information. ing on engine and transmission temperature as well as
DRIVE (D) vehicle speed. Normal operation will resume once the
transmission temperature has risen to a suitable level.
This range should be used for most city and highway
driving. It provides the smoothest upshifts and down- SPORT (S) — If Equipped
shifts, and the best fuel economy. The transmission This mode alters the transmission’s automatic shift
automatically upshifts through all forward gears. The schedule for sportier driving. Upshift speeds are in-
DRIVE position provides optimum driving characteris- creased to make full use of available engine power. To
tics under all normal operating conditions. switch between DRIVE and SPORT modes, tap the shift
When frequent transmission shifting occurs (such as lever rearward. SPORT mode is only accessible from
when operating the vehicle under heavy loading condi- DRIVE.
tions, in hilly terrain, traveling into strong head winds, or
LOW (L) — If Equipped illuminated. A message in the instrument cluster will
inform the driver of the more serious conditions, and
Use this range for engine braking when descending very
indicate what actions may be necessary.
steep grades. In this range, the transmission will down-
shift for increased engine braking. To switch between In the event of a momentary problem, the transmission
DRIVE and LOW modes, tap the shift lever rearward. can be reset to regain all forward gears by performing the
LOW mode is only accessible from DRIVE. following steps.
Transmission Limp Home Mode NOTE: In cases where the instrument cluster message 5
Transmission function is monitored electronically for indicates the transmission may not re-engage after en-
abnormal conditions. If a condition is detected that could gine shutdown, perform this procedure only in a desired
result in transmission damage, Transmission Limp Home location (preferably, at your authorized dealer).
Mode is activated. In this mode, the transmission may 1. Stop the vehicle.
operate only in certain gears, or may not shift at all.
Vehicle performance may be severely degraded and the 2. Shift the transmission into PARK, if possible. If not,
engine may stall. In some situations, the transmission shift the transmission to NEUTRAL.
may not re-engage if the engine is turned off and 3. Press and hold the ignition switch until the engine
restarted. The Malfunction Indicator Light (MIL) may be turns OFF.
4. Wait approximately 30 seconds.
5. Restart the engine. out of PARK (refer to “Brake/Transmission Shift Inter-
lock System” in this section). To drive, move the shift
6. Shift into the desired gear range. If the problem is no
lever from PARK or NEUTRAL to the DRIVE position.
longer detected, the transmission will return to normal
operation. The electronically-controlled transmission provides a
precise shift schedule. The transmission electronics are
NOTE: Even if the transmission can be reset, we recom- self-calibrating; therefore, the first few shifts on a new
mend that you visit your authorized dealer at your vehicle may be somewhat abrupt. This is a normal
earliest possible convenience. Your authorized dealer has condition, and precision shifts will develop within a few
diagnostic equipment to determine if the problem could hundred miles (kilometers).
recur.
Only shift from DRIVE to PARK or REVERSE when the
If the transmission cannot be reset, authorized dealer accelerator pedal is released and the vehicle is stopped.
service is required. Be sure to keep your foot on the brake pedal when
Five-Speed Automatic Transmission — If shifting between these gears.
Equipped The transmission shift lever has only PARK, REVERSE,
The transmission gear position display (located in the NEUTRAL, and DRIVE shift positions. Manual shifts can
instrument cluster) indicates the transmission gear range. be made using the AutoStick® shift control (refer to
You must press the brake pedal to move the shift lever “AutoStick®” in this section). Moving the shift lever to
the left or right (-/+) while in the DRIVE position, or
tapping one of the steering wheel-mounted shift paddles Gear Ranges
(-/+) (if equipped), will manually select the transmission DO NOT race the engine when shifting from PARK or
gear, and will display the current gear in the instrument NEUTRAL into another gear range.
cluster as 1, 2, 3, etc.
NOTE:
• After selecting any gear range, wait a moment to allow
the selected gear to engage before accelerating. This is
especially important when the engine is cold. 5
• If there is a need to restart the engine, be sure to cycle
the ignition to the OFF position before restarting.
Transmission gear engagement may be delayed after
restarting the engine if the ignition is not cycled to the
OFF position first.
Shift Lever
PARK (P)
WARNING!
This range supplements the parking brake by locking the
transmission. The engine can be started in this range. • Never use the PARK position as a substitute for the
Never attempt to use PARK while the vehicle is in parking brake. Always apply the parking brake
fully when parked to guard against vehicle move-
motion. Apply the parking brake when leaving the
ment and possible injury or damage.
vehicle in this range.
• Your vehicle could move and injure you and others
When parking on a level surface, you may shift the if it is not completely in PARK. Check by trying to
transmission into PARK first, and then apply the parking move the shift lever out of PARK with the brake
brake. pedal released. Make sure the transmission is in
PARK before leaving the vehicle.
When parking on a hill, apply the parking brake before
• It is dangerous to shift out of PARK or NEUTRAL
shifting the transmission to PARK, otherwise the load on if the engine speed is higher than idle speed. If
the transmission locking mechanism may make it diffi- your foot is not firmly pressing the brake pedal, the
cult to move the shift lever out of PARK. As an added vehicle could accelerate quickly forward or in re-
precaution, turn the front wheels toward the curb on a verse. You could lose control of the vehicle and hit
downhill grade and away from the curb on an uphill someone or something. Only shift into gear when
grade. the engine is idling normally and your foot is
(Continued)

• Unintended movement of a vehicle could injure warned not to touch the parking brake, brake pedal
those in or near the vehicle. As with all vehicles, or the shift lever.
you should never exit a vehicle while the engine is • Do not leave the Key Fob in or near the vehicle (or
running. Before exiting a vehicle, always apply the in a location accessible to children), and do not
parking brake, shift the transmission into PARK, leave the ignition of a vehicle equipped with
turn the engine OFF, and remove the Key Fob. Keyless Enter-N-Go™ in the ACC or ON/RUN
When the ignition is in the OFF position, the mode. A child could operate power windows, other 5
transmission is locked in PARK, securing the ve- controls, or move the vehicle.
• When leaving the vehicle, always remove the Key CAUTION!
Fob and lock your vehicle.
• Never leave children alone in a vehicle, or with • Before moving the shift lever out of PARK, you
access to an unlocked vehicle. Allowing children to must turn the ignition switch from the LOCK/OFF
be in a vehicle unattended is dangerous for a position to the ON/RUN position, and also press
number of reasons. A child or others could be the brake pedal. Otherwise, damage to the shift
seriously or fatally injured. Children should be lever could result.
REVERSE (R)
• DO NOT race the engine when shifting from This range is for moving the vehicle backward. Shift into
PARK or NEUTRAL into another gear range, as this REVERSE only after the vehicle has come to a complete
can damage the drivetrain. stop.
NEUTRAL (N)
The following indicators should be used to ensure that
you have engaged the transmission into the PARK posi- Use this range when the vehicle is standing for prolonged
tion: periods with the engine running. The engine may be
started in this range. Apply the parking brake and shift
• When shifting into PARK, firmly move the shift lever the transmission into PARK if you must leave the vehicle.
all the way forward and to the left until it stops and is
fully seated. WARNING!
• Look at the transmission gear position display and
Do not coast in NEUTRAL and never turn off the
verify that it indicates the PARK position.
ignition to coast down a hill. These are unsafe
• With brake pedal released, verify that the shift lever practices that limit your response to changing traffic
will not move out of PARK. or road conditions. You might lose control of the
vehicle and have a collision.
When frequent transmission shifting occurs (such as
CAUTION!
when operating the vehicle under heavy loading condi-
Towing the vehicle, coasting, or driving for any other tions, in hilly terrain, traveling into strong head winds, or
reason with the transmission in NEUTRAL can cause while towing heavy trailers), use the AutoStick® shift
severe transmission damage. Refer to “Recreational control (refer to “AutoStick®” in this section for further
Towing” in “Starting And Operating” and “Towing A information) to select a lower gear. Under these condi-
Disabled Vehicle” in “What To Do In Emergencies” tions, using a lower gear will improve performance and
for further information. extend transmission life by reducing excessive shifting 5
and heat buildup.
DRIVE (D)
SPORT (S) — If Equipped
This range should be used for most city and highway
driving. It provides the smoothest upshifts and down- This mode alters the transmission’s automatic shift
shifts, and the best fuel economy. The transmission schedule for sportier driving. Upshift speeds are in-
automatically upshifts through underdrive first, second, creased to make full use of available engine power. To
and third gears, direct fourth gear and overdrive fifth toggle between DRIVE and SPORT modes, touch the
gear. The DRIVE position provides optimum driving SPORT button (on the Controls screen in the center touch
characteristics under all normal operating conditions. panel).
Transmission Limp Home Mode 2. Shift the transmission into PARK.
Transmission function is monitored electronically for 3. Turn the ignition switch to the OFF position.
abnormal conditions. If a condition is detected that could
4. Wait approximately 10 seconds.
result in transmission damage, Transmission Limp Home
Mode is activated. In this mode, the transmission remains 5. Restart the engine.
in the current gear until the vehicle is brought to a stop.
6. Shift into the desired gear range. If the problem is no
After the vehicle has stopped, the transmission will
longer detected, the transmission will return to normal
remain in second gear regardless of which forward gear
operation.
is selected. PARK, REVERSE, and NEUTRAL will con-
tinue to operate. The Malfunction Indicator Light (MIL) NOTE: Even if the transmission can be reset, we recom-
may be illuminated. Limp Home Mode allows the vehicle mend that you visit your authorized dealer at your
to be driven to an authorized dealer for service without earliest possible convenience. Your authorized dealer has
damaging the transmission. diagnostic equipment to determine if the problem could
recur.
In the event of a momentary problem, the transmission
can be reset to regain all forward gears by performing the If the transmission cannot be reset, authorized dealer
following steps: service is required.
1. Stop the vehicle.
Overdrive Operation This system can also provide you with more control
during passing, city driving, cold slippery conditions,
The automatic transmission includes an electronically
mountain driving, trailer towing, and many other situa-
controlled Overdrive (fifth gear). The transmission will
tions.
automatically shift into Overdrive if the following con-
ditions are present: Operation Eight-Speed Transmission — If
• The shift lever is in the DRIVE position. Equipped
• Vehicle speed is sufficiently high. When the transmission is in DRIVE or SPORT mode, it
5
will operate automatically, shifting between the eight
• The driver is not heavily pressing the accelerator. available gears. To engage AutoStick®, simply tap one of
AUTOSTICK® — IF EQUIPPED the steering wheel-mounted shift paddles (+/-) while in
DRIVE or SPORT mode. Tapping (-) to enter AutoStick®
AutoStick® is a driver-interactive transmission feature mode will downshift the transmission to the next lower
providing manual shift control, giving you more control gear, while using (+) to enter AutoStick® mode will
of the vehicle. AutoStick® allows you to maximize en- retain the current gear. When AutoStick® is active, the
gine braking, eliminate undesirable upshifts and down- current transmission gear is displayed in the instrument
shifts, and improve overall vehicle performance. cluster. In AutoStick® mode, the transmission will shift
up or down when (+/-) is manually selected by the
driver, unless an engine lugging or overspeed condition
would result. It will remain in the selected gear until • In either DRIVE or SPORT mode, the transmission will
another upshift or downshift is chosen, except as de- automatically downshift as the vehicle slows to a stop
scribed below. (to prevent engine lugging) and will display the cur-
rent gear. Tapping the (+) paddle (at a stop) will allow
• If AutoStick® is engaged while in DRIVE mode, the
starting in second gear. After a stop, the driver should
transmission will automatically shift up when maxi-
manually upshift (+) the transmission as the vehicle
mum engine speed is reached. If the accelerator is fully
accelerates.
depressed, the transmission will downshift when pos-
sible (based on current vehicle speed and gear). Lack • If a requested downshift would cause the engine to
of accelerator pedal activity will cause the transmis- over-speed, that shift will not occur.
sion to revert to automatic operation.
• The system will ignore attempts to upshift at too low
• If AutoStick® is engaged while in SPORT mode, of a vehicle speed.
manual gear selection will be maintained until either To disengage AutoStick® mode, press and hold the (+)
SPORT mode is exited or as described below. The shift paddle until “D” or “S” is once again indicated in
transmission will not upshift automatically at redline the instrument cluster. You can shift in or out of the
in this mode, nor will downshifts be obtained if the AutoStick® mode at any time without taking your foot
accelerator pedal is pressed to the floor. off the accelerator pedal.
displayed in the instrument cluster. In AutoStick® mode,
WARNING!
the transmission will shift up or down when (+/-) is
Do not downshift for additional engine braking on a manually selected by the driver (using the shift lever, or
slippery surface. The drive wheels could lose their the shift paddles [if equipped]), unless an engine lugging
grip and the vehicle could skid, causing a collision or or overspeed condition would result. It will remain in the
personal injury. selected gear until another upshift or downshift is cho-
sen, except as described below.
Operation Five-Speed Transmission — If
• If AutoStick® is engaged while in DRIVE mode, the 5
Equipped
transmission will automatically shift up when maxi-
When the shift lever is in the DRIVE position, the mum engine speed is reached. On some models, the
transmission will operate automatically, shifting between transmission will downshift (when possible, based on
the five available gears. To engage AutoStick®, simply vehicle speed and gear) if the accelerator is fully
tap the shift lever to the right or left (+/-) while in the depressed.
DRIVE position, or tap one of the steering wheel-
• If AutoStick® is engaged while in SPORT mode,
mounted shift paddles (+/-), if equipped. Tapping (-) to
manual gear selection will be maintained until either
enter AutoStick® mode will downshift the transmission
SPORT mode is exited or as described below. The
to the next lower gear, while using (+) to enter
transmission will not upshift automatically at redline
AutoStick® mode will retain the current gear. When
in this mode, nor will downshifts be obtained if the
AutoStick® is active, the current transmission gear is
accelerator pedal is pressed to the floor.
• The transmission will automatically downshift as the To disengage AutoStick® mode, hold the shift lever to the
vehicle slows (to prevent engine lugging) and will right or press and hold the (+) shift paddle (if equipped)
display the current gear. until “D” is once again indicated in the instrument
cluster. You can shift in or out of the AutoStick® mode at
• The transmission will automatically downshift to first
any time without taking your foot off the accelerator
gear when coming to a stop. After a stop, the driver
pedal.
should manually upshift (+) the transmission as the
vehicle is accelerated.
WARNING!
• You can start out, from a stop, in first or second gear.
Tapping (+) (at a stop) will allow starting in second Do not downshift for additional engine braking on a
gear. Starting out in second gear is helpful in snowy or slippery surface. The drive wheels could lose their
icy conditions. grip and the vehicle could skid, causing a collision or
personal injury.
• The system will ignore attempts to upshift at too low
of a vehicle speed.
SPORT MODE (5.7L ONLY) — IF EQUIPPED
• Avoid using speed control when AutoStick® is en-
This mode alters the transmission’s automatic shift
gaged.
schedule for sportier driving. Upshift speeds are in-
• Transmission shifting will be more noticeable when creased to make full use of available engine power. To
AutoStick® is engaged.
enter SPORT mode, touch the SPORT button (on the driving conditions. The system minimizes wheel slip by
Controls screen in the center touch panel). automatically redirecting torque to the front and rear
wheels as necessary.
To maximize fuel economy, your AWD vehicle automati-
cally defaults to rear-wheel drive (RWD) when road and
environmental conditions are such that wheel slip is
unlikely to occur. When specific road and environmental
conditions require increased levels of road traction, the 5
vehicle automatically shifts into AWD mode. Automatic
AWD operation could be activated by outside tempera-
ture, wheel slip, or other predetermined conditions (there
may be a slight delay for AWD engagement after a wheel
slip condition occurs). AWD can also be manually se-
lected by activating AutoStick® mode (+/-) or activating
SPORT Mode
the windshield wipers for an extended period of time.
ALL-WHEEL DRIVE (AWD) — IF EQUIPPED Drive mode, RWD or AWD, is displayed momentarily in
This vehicle is equipped with an active on-demand the Electronic Vehicle Information Center (EVIC) in the
All-Wheel Drive (AWD) system which makes available
optimum traction for a wide variety of road surface and
gauge area of the vehicle display when the transmission DRIVING ON SLIPPERY SURFACES
is first shifted into gear, and if the drive mode changes
Acceleration
during vehicle operation.
Rapid acceleration on snow covered, wet, or other slip-
NOTE: If the “SERVICE AWD SYSTEM” warning mes- pery surfaces may cause the driving wheels to pull
sage appears after engine start up, or during driving, it erratically to the right or left. This phenomenon occurs
means that the AWD system is not functioning properly when there is a difference in the surface traction under
and that service is required. Refer to “Electronic Vehicle the rear (driving) wheels.
Information Center (EVIC)” in “Understanding Your
WARNING!
CAUTION! Rapid acceleration on slippery surfaces is dangerous.
Unequal traction can cause sudden pulling of the rear
All wheels must have the same size and type tires.
wheels. You could lose control of the vehicle and
Unequal tire sizes must not be used. Unequal tire
possibly have a collision. Accelerate slowly and
size may cause failure of the front differential and/or
carefully whenever there is likely to be poor traction
the transfer case.
(ice, snow, wet mud, loose sand, etc.).
Traction Your vehicle may be equipped with a Limited Slip
When driving on wet or slushy roads, it is possible for a Differential (LSD) that reduces, but does not eliminate,
wedge of water to build up between the tire and road the amount of wheel slip across a given axle for im-
proved handling.
surface. This is known as hydroplaning and may cause
partial or complete loss of vehicle control and stopping DRIVING THROUGH WATER
ability. To reduce this possibility, the following precau-
tions should be observed: Driving through water more than a few inches/
centimeters deep will require extra caution to ensure 5
1. Slow down during rainstorms or when the roads are safety and prevent damage to your vehicle.
slushy.
Flowing/Rising Water
2. Slow down if the road has standing water or puddles.
3. Replace tires when tread wear indicators first become WARNING!
visible.
Do not drive on or across a road or path where water
4. Keep tires properly inflated. is flowing and/or rising (as in storm run-off). Flow-
ing water can wear away the road or path’s surface
5. Maintain sufficient distance between your vehicle and
and cause your vehicle to sink into deeper water.
the vehicle in front of you to avoid a collision in a
Furthermore, flowing and/or rising water can carry
sudden stop.
(Continued)

your vehicle away swiftly. Failure to follow this distances. Therefore, after driving through stand-
warning may result in injuries that are serious or ing water, drive slowly and lightly press on the
fatal to you, your passengers, and others around you. brake pedal several times to dry the brakes.
• Failure to follow these warnings may result in
Shallow Standing Water injuries that are serious or fatal to you, your pas-
Although your vehicle is capable of driving through sengers, and others around you.
shallow standing water, consider the following Cautions
and Warnings before doing so. CAUTION!
WARNING! • Always check the depth of the standing water

before driving through it. Never drive through
• Driving through standing water limits your vehi- standing water that is deeper than the bottom of
cle’s traction capabilities. Do not exceed 5 mph the tire rims mounted on the vehicle.
(8 km/h) when driving through standing water. • Determine the condition of the road or the path
• Driving through standing water limits your vehi- that is under water and if there are any obstacles in
cle’s braking capabilities, which increases stopping the way before driving through the standing water.
POWER STEERING
• Do not exceed 5 mph (8 km/h) when driving Your vehicle is equipped with an electro-hydraulic power
through standing water. This will minimize wave steering system that will give you good vehicle response
effects. and increased ease of maneuverability in tight spaces.
• Driving through standing water may cause damage The system will vary its assist to provide light efforts
to your vehicle’s drivetrain components. Always while parking and good feel while driving. If the electro-
inspect your vehicle’s fluids (i.e., engine oil, trans- hydraulic power steering system experiences a fault that
mission, axle, etc.) for signs of contamination (i.e., prevents it from providing power steering assist, then the 5
fluid that is milky or foamy in appearance) after system will provide mechanical steering capability.
driving through standing water. Do not continue to
operate the vehicle if any fluid appears contami- CAUTION!
nated, as this may result in further damage. Such Extreme steering maneuvers may cause the electri-
damage is not covered by the New Vehicle Limited cally driven pump to reduce or stop power steering
Warranty. assistance in order to prevent damage to the system.
• Getting water inside your vehicle’s engine can Normal operation will resume once the system is
cause it to lock up and stall out, and cause serious allowed to cool.
internal damage to the engine. Such damage is not
covered by the New Vehicle Limited Warranty.
If the “SERVICE POWER STEERING SYSTEM” NOTE:

message and a flashing icon are displayed on • Even if power steering assistance is no longer opera-
the EVIC screen, it indicates that the vehicle tional, it is still possible to steer the vehicle. Under
needs to be taken to the dealer for service. It is these conditions there will be a substantial increase in
likely the vehicle has lost power steering assistance. Refer steering effort, especially at very low vehicle speeds
to “Electronic Vehicle Information (EVIC)” in “Under- and during parking maneuvers.
standing Your Instrument Panel” for further information.
• If the condition persists, see your authorized dealer for
If the “POWER STEERING SYSTEM OVER TEMP - SEE service.
OWNER’S MANUAL” message and an icon are dis-
played on the EVIC screen, it indicates that extreme FUEL SAVER TECHNOLOGY 5.7L ENGINE ONLY
steering maneuvers may have occurred, which caused an — IF EQUIPPED
over temperature condition in the power steering system.
This feature offers improved fuel economy by shutting
You will lose power steering assistance momentarily
off four of the engine’s eight cylinders during light load
until the over temperature condition no longer exists.
and cruise conditions. The system is automatic with no
Once driving conditions are safe, then pull over and let
driver inputs or additional driving skills required.
vehicle idle for a few moments until the light turns off.
Refer to “Electronic Vehicle Information (EVIC)” in “Un-
derstanding Your Instrument Panel” for further informa-
tion.
NOTE: This system may take some time to return to full
functionality after a battery disconnect.
PARKING BRAKE
Before leaving the vehicle, make sure that the parking
brake is fully applied and place the shift lever in the
PARK position.
The foot operated parking brake is located below the 5
lower left corner of the instrument panel. To apply the
park brake, firmly push the park brake pedal fully. To
release the parking brake, press the park brake pedal a
second time and let your foot up as you feel the brake Parking Brake
disengage. When the parking brake is applied with the ignition
switch in the ON position, the “Brake Warning Light” in
the instrument cluster will illuminate.
NOTE:
WARNING!
• When the parking brake is applied and the transmis-
sion is placed in gear, the “Brake Warning Light” will • Never use the PARK position as a substitute for the
flash. If vehicle speed is detected, a chime will sound parking brake. Always apply the parking brake
to alert the driver. Fully release the parking brake fully when parked to guard against vehicle move-
before attempting to move the vehicle. ment and possible injury or damage.
• This light only shows that the parking brake is ap- Fob from the ignition and lock your vehicle.
plied. It does not show the degree of brake application. • Never leave children alone in a vehicle, or with
access to an unlocked vehicle. Allowing children to
When parking on a hill, it is important to turn the front be in a vehicle unattended is dangerous for a
wheels toward the curb on a downhill grade and away number of reasons. A child or others could be
from the curb on an uphill grade. Apply the parking seriously or fatally injured. Children should be
brake before placing the shift lever in PARK, otherwise warned not to touch the parking brake, brake pedal
the load on the transmission locking mechanism may or the shift lever.
make it difficult to move the shift lever out of PARK. The
(Continued)
parking brake should always be applied whenever the
driver is not in the vehicle.

• Do not leave the Key Fob in or near the vehicle (or If the “Brake Warning Light” remains on with the
in a location accessible to children), and do not parking brake released, a brake system malfunction
leave the ignition of a vehicle equipped with is indicated. Have the brake system serviced by an
Keyless Enter-N-Go™ in the ACC or ON/RUN authorized dealer immediately.
controls, or move the vehicle. ANTI-LOCK BRAKE SYSTEM
• Be sure the parking brake is fully disengaged 5
before driving; failure to do so can lead to brake The Anti-Lock Brake System (ABS) provides increased
failure and a collision. vehicle stability and brake performance under most
• Always fully apply the parking brake when leav- braking conditions. The system automatically “pumps”
ing your vehicle, or it may roll and cause damage or the brakes during severe braking conditions to prevent
injury. Also be certain to leave the transmission in wheel lock-up.
PARK. Failure to do so may allow the vehicle to roll The Electronic Brake Force Distribution (EBD) prevents
and cause damage or injury. the rear wheels from over-braking and provides greater
control of available braking forces applied to the rear
axle.
When the vehicle is driven over 7 mph (11 km/h), you • A slight drop or fall away of the brake pedal at the end
may also hear a slight clicking sound as well as some of the stop.
related motor noises. These noises are the system per-
These are all normal characteristics of ABS.
forming its self check cycle to ensure that the ABS is
working properly. This self check occurs each time the
vehicle is started and accelerated past 7 mph (11 km/h).
WARNING!
ABS is activated during braking under certain road or • The ABS contains sophisticated electronic equip-
stopping conditions. ABS-inducing conditions can in- ment that may be susceptible to interference
clude ice, snow, gravel, bumps, railroad tracks, loose caused by improperly installed or high output
debris, or panic stops. radio transmitting equipment. This interference
can cause possible loss of anti-lock braking capa-
You also may experience the following when the brake bility. Installation of such equipment should be
system goes into Anti-Lock: performed by qualified professionals.
• The ABS motor running (it may continue to run for a • Pumping of the Anti-Lock Brakes will diminish
short time after the stop). their effectiveness and may lead to a collision.
Pumping makes the stopping distance longer. Just
• The clicking sound of solenoid valves.
press firmly on your brake pedal when you need to
• Brake pedal pulsations. slow down or stop.
(Continued)
ELECTRONIC BRAKE CONTROL SYSTEM
• The ABS cannot prevent the natural laws of phys- Your vehicle is equipped with an advanced electronic
ics from acting on the vehicle, nor can it increase brake control system that include Anti-Lock Brake Sys-
braking or steering efficiency beyond that afforded tem (ABS), Traction Control System (TCS), Brake Assist
by the condition of the vehicle brakes and tires or System (BAS), and the Electronic Stability Control (ESC).
the traction afforded. All four of these systems work together to enhance
• The ABS cannot prevent collisions, including those vehicle stability and control in various driving condi-
resulting from excessive speed in turns, following tions. 5
another vehicle too closely, or hydroplaning. Also, your vehicle may be equipped with Hill Start Assist
• The capabilities of an ABS equipped vehicle must (HSA), Ready Alert Braking, and Rain Brake Support.
never be exploited in a reckless or dangerous
manner that could jeopardize the user’s safety or Anti-Lock Brake System (ABS)
the safety of others. This system aids the driver in maintaining vehicle control
under adverse braking conditions by controlling hydrau-
All vehicle wheels and tires must be the same size and lic brake pressure. This prevents wheel lock-up to help
type and tires must be properly inflated to produce avoid skidding on slippery surfaces during braking.
accurate signals for the computer. Refer to “Anti-Lock Brake System” in “Starting and
Operating” for further information.
A feature of the TCS system, Brake Lock Differential
WARNING!
(BLD), controls the wheel spin across a driven axle. If one
The ABS cannot prevent the natural laws of physics wheel on a driven axle is spinning faster than the other,
from acting on the vehicle, nor can it increase the the system will apply the brake of the spinning wheel.
traction afforded by prevailing road conditions. The This will allow more engine torque to be applied to the
ABS cannot prevent collisions, including those re- wheel that is not spinning. This feature remains active
sulting from excessive speed in turns, driving on even if TCS and ESC are in the “Partial Off” mode. Refer
very slippery surfaces, or hydroplaning. The capa- to “Electronic Stability Control (ESC)” in this section for
bilities of an ABS-equipped vehicle must never be more information.
exploited in a reckless or dangerous manner that Brake Assist System (BAS)
could jeopardize the user’s safety or the safety of
others. This system complements the ABS by optimizing the
vehicle braking capability during emergency brake ma-
Traction Control System (TCS) neuvers. This system detects an emergency braking situ-
This system monitors the amount of wheel spin of each ation by sensing the rate and amount of brake application
driven wheel. If wheel spin is detected, brake pressure is and then applies optimum pressure to the brakes. This
applied to the slipping wheel(s) and engine power is can help reduce braking distances.
reduced to provide enhanced acceleration and stability. Applying the brakes very quickly results in the best BAS
assistance. To receive the benefits of this system, you
must apply continuous brake pedal pressure during the Electronic Stability Control (ESC)
stopping sequence. Do not reduce brake pedal pressure This system enhances directional control and stability of
unless braking is no longer desired. Once the brake pedal the vehicle under various driving conditions. The ESC
is released, the BAS is deactivated. corrects for oversteering and understeering the vehicle
by applying the brake of the appropriate wheel. Engine
WARNING! power may also be reduced to assist in counteracting the
The BAS cannot prevent the natural laws of physics condition of oversteer or understeer and help the vehicle
from acting on the vehicle, nor can it increase the maintain the desired path. 5
traction afforded by prevailing road conditions. The The ESC uses sensors in the vehicle to determine the path
BAS cannot prevent collisions, including those re- that the driver intends to steer the vehicle and compares
sulting from excessive speed in turns, driving on it to the actual path of the vehicle. When the actual path
very slippery surfaces, or hydroplaning. The capa- does not match the intended path, the ESC applies the
bilities of a BAS-equipped vehicle must never be brake of the appropriate wheel to assist in counteracting
exploited in a reckless or dangerous manner that the condition of oversteer or understeer.
could jeopardize the user’s safety or the safety of
others. • Oversteer - when the vehicle is turning more than
appropriate for the steering wheel position.
• Understeer - when the vehicle is turning less than ESC Operating Modes
appropriate for the steering wheel position. The ESC system has two or three available operating
modes:
WARNING!
ESC On
The Electronic Stability Control (ESC) cannot pre-
vent the natural laws of physics from acting on the This is the normal operating mode for the ESC. When-
vehicle, nor can it increase the traction afforded by ever the vehicle is started, the ESC system will be in this
prevailing road conditions. ESC cannot prevent all mode. This mode should be used for most driving
accidents, including those resulting from excessive conditions. The ESC should only be turned OFF for
speed in turns, driving on very slippery surfaces, or specific reasons as noted in the following paragraphs.
hydroplaning. ESC also cannot prevent collisions Partial Off
resulting from loss of vehicle control due to inappro-
priate driver input for the conditions. Only a safe, The “Partial Off” mode is intended for times when a
attentive, and skillful driver can prevent accidents. more spirited driving experience is desired. It is also
The capabilities of an ESC equipped vehicle must intended for driving in deep snow, sand, or gravel. This
never be exploited in a reckless or dangerous manner mode disables the TCS portion of the ESC and raises the
which could jeopardize the user’s safety or the safety threshold for ESC activation, which allows for more
of others. wheel spin than what ESC normally allows.
The “ESC Off” switch is located on the switch bank in the NOTE:
center of the instrument panel. To enter the “Partial Off”
• To improve the vehicle’s traction when driving with
mode, momentarily press the “ESC Off” switch and the
snow chains, or when starting off in deep snow, sand,
⬙ESC off indicator light⬙ will illuminate. To turn the ESC
or gravel, it may be desirable to switch to the “Partial
on again, momentarily press the “ESC Off” switch and
Off” mode by momentarily pressing the “ESC Off”
the ⬙ESC off indicator light⬙ will turn off.
switch. Once the situation requiring “Partial Off”
mode is overcome, turn the ESC on again by momen-
WARNING! tarily pressing the “ESC Off” switch. This may be done 5
• When in “Partial Off” mode, the TCS functionality while the vehicle is in motion.
of ESC, (except for the limited slip feature de- • When in “Partial Off” mode, the TCS functionality of
scribed in the TCS section), has been disabled and ESC, (except for the limited slip feature described in
the “ESC Off Indicator Light” will be illuminated. the TCS section), has been disabled and the “ESC Off
When in “Partial Off” mode, the engine power Indicator Light” will be illuminated. All other stability
reduction feature of TCS is disabled, and the features of ESC function normally. When in “Partial
enhanced vehicle stability offered by the ESC sys- Off” mode, the engine power reduction feature of TCS
tem is reduced. is disabled, and the enhanced vehicle stability offered
• Trailer Sway control (TSC) is disabled when the by the ESC system is reduced.
ESC system is in the “Partial Off” mode.
Full Off — If Equipped
This mode is intended for off-highway or off-road use ESC system will not engage to assist in maintaining
only and should not be used on any public roadways. In stability. ⴖESC Offⴖ mode is intended for off-highway
this mode, all TCS and ESC stability features are turned or off-road use only.
OFF. To enter the “Full Off” mode, press and hold the
“ESC Off” switch for five seconds while the vehicle is Hill Start Assist (HSA)
stopped with the engine running. After five seconds, a
The HSA system is designed to assist the driver when
chime will sound, the “ESC Off Indicator Light” will
starting a vehicle from a stop on a hill. HSA will maintain
illuminate, and the ⬙ESC OFF⬙ message will display in the
the level of brake pressure the driver applied for a short
Electronic Vehicle Information Center (EVIC). To turn
period of time after the driver takes their foot off of the
ESC ON again, momentarily press the “ESC Off” switch.
brake pedal. If the driver does not apply the throttle
during this short period of time, the system will release
WARNING! brake pressure and the vehicle will roll down the hill. The
In the ESC “Full Off” mode, the engine torque system will release brake pressure in proportion to the
reduction and stability features are disabled. There- amount of throttle applied as the vehicle starts to move in
fore, the enhanced vehicle stability offered by ESC is the intended direction of travel.
unavailable. In an emergency evasive maneuver, the
(Continued)
HSA Activation Criteria
WARNING!
The following criteria must be met in order for HSA to
activate: There may be situations on minor hills with a loaded
vehicle, or while pulling a trailer, when the system
• Vehicle must be stopped. will not activate and slight rolling may occur. This
• Vehicle must be on a 6% (approximate) grade or could cause a collision with another vehicle or object.
greater hill. Always remember the driver is responsible for brak-
ing the vehicle. 5
• Gear selection matches vehicle uphill direction (i.e.,
vehicle facing uphill is in forward gear; vehicle back- Towing With HSA
ing uphill is in REVERSE gear). HSA will provide assistance when starting on a grade
HSA will work in REVERSE and all forward gears when when pulling a trailer.
the activation criteria have been met. The system will not
activate if the vehicle is placed in NEUTRAL or PARK. WARNING!
• If you use a trailer brake controller with your
trailer, your trailer brakes may be activated and
deactivated with the brake switch. If so, when the
(Continued)
HSA Off
brake pedal is released, there may not be enough If you wish to turn off the HSA system, it can be done in
brake pressure to hold the vehicle and trailer on a the Uconnect® settings. Refer to ⬙Uconnect® Settings⬙ in
hill and this could cause a collision with another ⬙Understanding Your Instrument Panel⬙ for further infor-
vehicle or object behind you. In order to avoid mation.
rolling down the hill while resuming acceleration, Ready Alert Braking
manually activate the trailer brake prior to releas-
Ready Alert Braking may reduce the time required to
ing the brake pedal. Always remember the driver is
reach full braking during emergency braking situations.
responsible for braking the vehicle.
It anticipates when an emergency braking situation may
• HSA is not a parking brake. If you stop the vehicle
occur by monitoring how fast the throttle is released by
on a hill without putting the transmission in PARK
the driver. When the throttle is released very quickly,
and using the parking brake, it will roll down the
Ready Alert Braking applies a small amount of brake
hill and could cause a collision with another ve-
pressure. This brake pressure will not be noticed by the
hicle or object. Always remember to use the park-
driver. The brake system uses this brake pressure to allow
ing brake while parking on a hill, and that the
a fast brake response if the driver applies the brakes.
driver is responsible for braking the vehicle.
Rain Brake Support malfunction has been detected in the ESC system. If this
light remains on after several ignition cycles, and the
Rain Brake Support may improve braking performance
vehicle has been driven several miles (kilometers) at
in wet conditions. It will periodically apply a small
speeds greater than 30 mph (48 km/h), see your autho-
amount of brake pressure to remove any water buildup
rized dealer as soon as possible to have the problem
on the front brake rotors. It only functions when the
diagnosed and corrected.
windshield wipers are in the LO or HI mode, it does not
function in the intermittent mode. When Rain Brake The “ESC Activation/Malfunction Indicator Light” (lo-
Support is active, there is no notification to the driver and cated in the instrument cluster) starts to flash as soon as 5
no driver interaction is required. the tires lose traction and the ESC system becomes active.
The “ESC Activation/Malfunction Indicator Light” also
ESC Activation/Malfunction Indicator Light And
flashes when TCS is active. If the “ESC Activation/
ESC OFF Indicator Light
Malfunction Indicator Light” begins to flash during ac-
celeration, ease up on the accelerator and apply as little
The “ESC Activation/Malfunction Indicator throttle as possible. Be sure to adapt your speed and
Light” in the instrument cluster will come on driving to the prevailing road conditions.
when the ignition switch is cycled to the ON
NOTE:
position. It should go out with the engine
running. If the “ESC Activation/Malfunction Indicator • Each time the ignition is cycled ON, the ESC system
Light” comes on continuously with the engine running, a will be ON even if it was cycled off previously.
• The ESC system will make buzzing or clicking sounds TIRE SAFETY INFORMATION
when it is active. This is normal; the sounds will stop Tire Markings
when ESC becomes inactive following the maneuver
that caused the ESC activation.
The “ESC OFF Indicator Light” indicates the

Electronic Stability Control (ESC) is partially
off or full off.
Synchronizing ESC
If the power supply is interrupted (battery

disconnected or discharged), the “ESC
Activation/Malfunction Indicator Light” may
illuminate with the engine running. If this 1 — U.S. DOT Safety Standards 4 — Maximum Load
should occur, turn the steering wheel completely to the Code (TIN)
2 — Size Designation 5 — Maximum Pressure
left and then to the right. The “ESC Activation/
3 — Service Description 6 — Treadwear, Traction and
Malfunction Indicator Light” should go out. However, if Temperature Grades
the light remains on, have the ESC and BAS checked at
your authorized dealer as soon as possible.
NOTE: • Temporary spare tires are designed for temporary
emergency use only. Temporary high pressure com-
• P (Passenger) - Metric tire sizing is based on U.S.
pact spare tires have the letter “T” or “S” molded into
design standards. P-Metric tires have the letter “P”
the sidewall preceding the size designation. Example:
molded into the sidewall preceding the size designa-
T145/80D18 103M.
tion. Example: P215/65R15 95H.
• High flotation tire sizing is based on U.S. design
• European-Metric tire sizing is based on European
standards and it begins with the tire diameter molded
design standards. Tires designed to this standard have 5
into the sidewall. Example: 31x10.5 R15 LT.
the tire size molded into the sidewall beginning with
the section width. The letter ⬙P⬙ is absent from this tire
size designation. Example: 215/65R15 96H.
• LT (Light Truck) - Metric tire sizing is based on U.S.
design standards. The size designation for LT-Metric
tires is the same as for P-Metric tires except for the
letters “LT” that are molded into the sidewall preced-
ing the size designation. Example: LT235/85R16.
Tire Sizing Chart
EXAMPLE:
Size Designation:
P = Passenger car tire size based on U.S. design standards
ⴖ....blank....ⴖ = Passenger car tire based on European design standards
LT = Light truck tire based on U.S. design standards
T or S = Temporary spare tire
31 = Overall diameter in inches (in)
215 = Section width in millimeters (mm)
65 = Aspect ratio in percent (%)
— Ratio of section height to section width of tire
10.5 = Section width in inches (in)
EXAMPLE:
R = Construction code
— ⬙R⬙ means radial construction
— ⬙D⬙ means diagonal or bias construction
15 = Rim diameter in inches (in)
Service Description:
95 = Load Index 5
— A numerical code associated with the maximum load a tire can carry
H = Speed Symbol
— A symbol indicating the range of speeds at which a tire can carry a load corresponding to
its load index under certain operating conditions
— The maximum speed corresponding to the speed symbol should only be achieved under
specified operating conditions (i.e., tire pressure, vehicle loading, road conditions, and
posted speed limits)
EXAMPLE:
Load Identification:
ⴖ....blank....ⴖ = Absence of any text on the sidewall of the tire indicates a Standard Load (SL) tire
Extra Load (XL) = Extra load (or reinforced) tire
Light Load (LL) = Light load tire
C, D, E, F, G = Load range associated with the maximum load a tire can carry at a specified pressure
Maximum Load— Maximum load indicates the maximum load this tire is designed to carry
Maximum Pressure— Maximum pressure indicates the maximum permissible cold tire inflation pressure for
this tire
Tire Identification Number (TIN) Look for the TIN on the outboard side of black sidewall
The TIN may be found on one or both sides of the tire, tires as mounted on the vehicle. If the TIN is not found on
however, the date code may only be on one side. Tires the outboard side, then you will find it on the inboard
side of the tire.
with white sidewalls will have the full TIN, including the
date code, located on the white sidewall side of the tire.
EXAMPLE:
DOT MA L9 ABCD 0301
DOT = Department of Transportation
— This symbol certifies that the tire is in compliance with the U.S. Department of Transportation tire
safety standards and is approved for highway use
MA = Code representing the tire manufacturing location (two digits)
L9 = Code representing the tire size (two digits) 5
ABCD = Code used by the tire manufacturer (one to four digits)
03 = Number representing the week in which the tire was manufactured (two digits)
— 03 means the 3rd week
01 = Number representing the year in which the tire was manufactured (two digits)
— 01 means the year 2001
— Prior to July 2000, tire manufacturers were only required to have one number to represent the
year in which the tire was manufactured. Example: 031 could represent the 3rd week of 1981 or 1991
Tire Terminology And Definitions
Term Definition
B-Pillar The vehicle B-Pillar is the structural member of the body located
behind the front door.
Cold Tire Inflation Pressure Cold tire inflation pressure is defined as the tire pressure after
the vehicle has not been driven for at least three hours, or driven
less than 1 mile (1.6 km) after sitting for a three hour period. In-
flation pressure is measured in units of PSI (pounds per square
inch) or kPa (kilopascals).
Maximum Inflation Pressure The maximum inflation pressure is the maximum permissible
cold tire inflation pressure for this tire. The maximum inflation
pressure is molded into the sidewall.
Recommended Cold Tire Inflation Vehicle manufacturer’s recommended cold tire inflation pressure
Pressure as shown on the tire placard.
Tire Placard A paper label permanently attached to the vehicle describing the
vehicle’s loading capacity, the original equipment tire sizes and
the recommended cold tire inflation pressures.
Tire Loading And Tire Pressure Tire And Loading Information Placard
Tire And Loading Information Placard Location
NOTE: The proper cold tire inflation pressure is listed on
the driver’s side B-Pillar or the rear edge of the driver’s
side door.
Tire And Loading Information Placard

This placard tells you important information about the:
1. Number of people that can be carried in the vehicle.
B-Pillar Location For Tire And Loading Information Placard 2. Total weight your vehicle can carry.
3. Tire size designed for your vehicle. To determine the maximum loading conditions of your
vehicle, locate the statement “The combined weight of
4. Cold tire inflation pressures for the front, rear, and
occupants and cargo should never exceed XXX lbs or
spare tires.
XXX kg” on the Tire and Loading Information placard.
Loading The combined weight of occupants, cargo/luggage and
trailer tongue weight (if applicable) should never exceed
The vehicle maximum load on the tire must not exceed
the weight referenced here.
the load carrying capacity of the tire on your vehicle. You
will not exceed the tire’s load carrying capacity if you Steps For Determining Correct Load Limit
adhere to the loading conditions, tire size, and cold tire
1. Locate the statement “The combined weight of occu-
inflation pressures specified on the Tire and Loading
pants and cargo should never exceed XXX lbs or
Information placard and in the “Vehicle Loading” section
XXX kg” on your vehicle’s placard.
of this manual.
2. Determine the combined weight of the driver and
NOTE: Under a maximum loaded vehicle condition,
passengers that will be riding in your vehicle.
gross axle weight ratings (GAWRs) for the front and rear
axles must not be exceeded. For further information on 3. Subtract the combined weight of the driver and pas-
GAWRs, vehicle loading, and trailer towing, refer to sengers from XXX lbs or XXX kg.
“Vehicle Loading” in this section.
4. The resulting figure equals the available amount of NOTE:
cargo and luggage load capacity. For example, if
• If your vehicle will be towing a trailer, load from your
“XXX” amount equals 1,400 lbs (635 kg) and there will
trailer will be transferred to your vehicle. The follow-
be five 150 lb (68 kg) passengers in your vehicle, the
ing table shows examples on how to calculate total
amount of available cargo and luggage load capacity
load, cargo/luggage, and towing capacities of your
is 650 lbs (295 kg) (since 5 x 150 lbs (68 kg) = 750 lbs
vehicle with varying seating configurations and num-
(340 kg), and 1400 lbs (635 kg) – 750 lbs (340 kg) =
ber and size of occupants. This table is for illustration
650 lbs [295 kg]). 5
purposes only and may not be accurate for the seating
5. Determine the combined weight of luggage and cargo and load carry capacity of your vehicle.
being loaded on the vehicle. That weight may not
• For the following example, the combined weight of
safely exceed the available cargo and luggage load
occupants and cargo should never exceed 865 lbs
capacity calculated in step 4.
(392 kg).
Safety
WARNING!
Overloading of your tires is dangerous. Overloading WARNING!
can cause tire failure, affect vehicle handling, and
• Improperly inflated tires are dangerous and can
increase your stopping distance. Use tires of the
cause collisions.
recommended load capacity for your vehicle. Never
• Under-inflation increases tire flexing and can re-
overload them.
sult in over-heating and tire failure.
• Over-inflation reduces a tire’s ability to cushion 5
TIRES — GENERAL INFORMATION
shock. Objects on the road and chuckholes can
Tire Pressure cause damage that result in tire failure.
Proper tire inflation pressure is essential to the safe and • Over-inflated or under-inflated tires can affect ve-
satisfactory operation of your vehicle. Three primary hicle handling and can fail suddenly, resulting in
areas are affected by improper tire pressure: loss of vehicle control.
• Unequal tire pressures can cause steering prob-
• Safety lems. You could lose control of your vehicle.
• Economy
(Continued)
• Ride Comfort And Vehicle Stability
stability of the vehicle and can produce a feeling of
sluggish response or over responsiveness in the steering.
• Unequal tire pressures from one side of the vehicle
to the other can cause the vehicle to drift to the NOTE:
right or left. • Unequal tire pressures from side to side may cause
• Always drive with each tire inflated to the recom- erratic and unpredictable steering response.
mended cold tire inflation pressure.
• Unequal tire pressure from side to side may cause the
Economy vehicle to drift left or right.
Improper inflation pressures can cause uneven wear Tire Inflation Pressures
patterns to develop across the tire tread. These abnormal
The proper cold tire inflation pressure is listed on the
wear patterns will reduce tread life resulting in a need for
driver’s side B-Pillar or rear edge of the driver’s side
earlier tire replacement. Under-inflation also increases
door.
tire rolling resistance resulting in higher fuel consump-
tion. At least once a month:
Ride Comfort And Vehicle Stability • Check and adjust tire pressure with a good quality
pocket-type pressure gauge. Do not make a visual
Proper tire inflation contributes to a comfortable ride.
Over-inflation produces a jarring and uncomfortable
ride. Both underinflation and over-inflation affect the
judgement when determining proper inflation. Tires Check tire pressures more often if subject to a wide range
may look properly inflated even when they are under- of outdoor temperatures, as tire pressures vary with
inflated. temperature changes.
• Inspect tires for signs of tire wear or visible damage. Tire pressures change by approximately 1 psi (7 kPa) per
12°F (7°C) of air temperature change. Keep this in mind
CAUTION! when checking tire pressure inside a garage, especially in
the winter.
After inspecting or adjusting the tire pressure, al- 5
ways reinstall the valve stem cap. This will prevent Example: If garage temperature = 68°F (20°C) and the
moisture and dirt from entering the valve stem, outside temperature = 32°F (0°C) then the cold tire
which could damage the valve stem. inflation pressure should be increased by 3 psi (21 kPa),
which equals 1 psi (7 kPa) for every 12°F (7°C) for this
Inflation pressures specified on the placard are always outside temperature condition.
“cold tire inflation pressure.” Cold tire inflation pressure Tire pressure may increase from 2 to 6 psi (13 to 40 kPa)
is defined as the tire pressure after the vehicle has not during operation. DO NOT reduce this normal pressure
been driven for at least three hours, or driven less than 1 build up or your tire pressure will be too low.
mile (1.6 km) after a three hour period. The cold tire
inflation pressure must not exceed the maximum infla-
tion pressure molded into the tire sidewall.
Tire Pressures For High Speed Operation Radial Ply Tires
The manufacturer advocates driving at safe speeds and
within posted speed limits. Where speed limits or condi- WARNING!
tions are such that the vehicle can be driven at high Combining radial ply tires with other types of tires
speeds, maintaining correct tire inflation pressure is very on your vehicle will cause your vehicle to handle
important. Increased tire pressure and reduced vehicle poorly. The instability could cause a collision. Al-
loading may be required for high-speed vehicle opera- ways use radial ply tires in sets of four. Never
tion. Refer to your authorized tire dealer or original combine them with other types of tires.
equipment vehicle dealer for recommended safe operat-
ing speeds, loading and cold tire inflation pressures. Tire Repair
If your tire becomes damaged, it may be repaired if it
WARNING! meets the following criteria:
High speed driving with your vehicle under maxi- • The tire has not been driven on when flat.
mum load is dangerous. The added strain on your
tires could cause them to fail. You could have a • The damage is only on the tread section of your tire
serious collision. Do not drive a vehicle loaded to the (sidewall damage is not repairable).
maximum capacity at continuous speeds above • The puncture is no greater than ¼⬙ (6 mm).
75 mph (120 km/h).
Consult an authorized tire dealer for tire repairs and Summer Or Three Season Tires — If Equipped
additional information. Summer tires provide traction in both wet and dry
Damaged Run Flat tires, or Run Flat tires that have conditions, and are not intended to be driven in snow or
experienced a loss of pressure should be replaced imme- on ice. If your vehicle is equipped with summer tires, be
diately with another Run Flat tire of identical size and aware these tires are not designed for winter or cold
service description (Load Index and Speed Code). driving conditions. For more information, contact a au-
thorized dealer. Summer tires do not contain the all
Tire Types
season designation or mountain/snowflake symbol on 5
All Season Tires — If Equipped the tire sidewall.
All Season tires provide traction for all seasons (spring, Use summer tires only in sets of four; failure to do so may
summer, fall and winter). Traction levels may vary be- adversely affect the safety and handling of your vehicle.
tween different all season tires. All season tires can be
Snow Tires
identified by the M+S, M&S, M/S or MS designation on
the tire sidewall. Use all season tires only in sets of four; Some areas of the country require the use of snow tires
failure to do so may adversely affect the safety and during the winter. Snow tires can be identified by a
handling of your vehicle. mountain/snowflake symbol on the tire sidewall.
If you need snow tires, select tires equivalent in size and Run Flat Tires — If Equipped
type to the original equipment tires. Use snow tires only Run Flat tires allow you the capability to drive 50 miles
in sets of four; failure to do so may adversely affect the (80 km) at 50 mph (80 km/h) after a rapid loss of inflation
safety and handling of your vehicle. pressure. This rapid loss of inflation is referred to as the
Snow tires generally have lower speed ratings than what Run Flat mode. A Run Flat mode occurs when the tire
was originally equipped with your vehicle and should inflation pressure is of/or below 14 psi (96 kPa). Once a
not be operated at sustained speeds over 75 mph Run Flat tire reaches the run flat mode it has limited
(120 km/h). For speeds above 75 mph (120 km/h) refer to driving capabilities and needs to be replaced immedi-
original equipment or an authorized tire dealer for ately. A Run Flat tire is not repairable.
recommended safe operating speeds, loading and cold It is not recommended driving a vehicle loaded at full
tire inflation pressures. capacity or to tow a trailer while a tire is in the run flat
While studded tires improve performance on ice, skid mode.
and traction capability on wet or dry surfaces may be See the tire pressure monitoring section for more infor-
poorer than that of non-studded tires. Some states pro- mation.
hibit studded tires; therefore, local laws should be
checked before using these tire types.
Spare Tires — If Equipped rotation for your vehicle. If your vehicle has this option,
refer to an authorized tire dealer for the recommended
NOTE: For vehicles equipped with TIREFIT instead of a
tire rotation pattern.
spare tire, please refer to “TIREFIT KIT” in “What To Do
In Emergencies” for further information. Compact Spare Tire — If Equipped
The compact spare is for temporary emergency use only.
CAUTION! You can identify if your vehicle is equipped with a
Because of the reduced ground clearance, do not take compact spare by looking at the spare tire description on
5
your vehicle through an automatic car wash with a the Tire and Loading Information Placard located on the
compact, full size or limited-use temporary spare driver’s side door opening or on the sidewall of the tire.
installed. Damage to the vehicle may result. Compact spare tire descriptions begin with the letter “T”
or “S” preceding the size designation. Example: T145/
Spare Tire Matching Original Equipped Tire And 80D18 103M.
Wheel — If Equipped
T, S = Temporary Spare Tire
Your vehicle may be equipped with a spare tire and
Since this tire has limited tread life, the original equip-
wheel equivalent in look and function to the original
ment tire should be repaired (or replaced) and reinstalled
equipment tire and wheel found on the front or rear axle
on your vehicle at the first opportunity.
of your vehicle. This spare tire may be used in the tire
Do not install a wheel cover or attempt to mount a front or rear axle of your vehicle, but it is not. This spare
conventional tire on the compact spare wheel, since the tire may have limited tread life. When the tread is worn
wheel is designed specifically for the compact spare tire. to the tread wear indicators, the temporary use full size
Do not install more than one compact spare tire and spare tire needs to be replaced. Since it is not the same as
wheel on the vehicle at any given time. your original equipment tire, replace (or repair) the
original equipment tire and reinstall on the vehicle at the
WARNING! first opportunity.
Compact spares are for temporary emergency use Limited-Use Spare — If Equipped
only. With these spares, do not drive more than The limited-use spare tire is for temporary emergency
50 mph (80 km/h). Temporary use spares have limited use only. This tire is identified by a label located on the
tread life. When the tread is worn to the tread wear limited-use spare wheel. This label contains the driving
indicators, the temporary use spare tire needs to be limitations for this spare. This tire may look like the
replaced. Be sure to follow the warnings, which original equipped tire on the front or rear axle of your
apply to your spare. Failure to do so could result in vehicle, but it is not. Installation of this limited-use spare
spare tire failure and loss of vehicle control. tire affects vehicle handling. Since it is not the same as
your original equipment tire, replace (or repair) the
Full Size Spare — If Equipped
original equipment tire and reinstall on the vehicle at the
The full size spare is for temporary emergency use only. first opportunity.
This tire may look like the originally equipped tire on the
Refer to “Freeing A Stuck Vehicle” in “What To Do In
WARNING!
Emergencies” for further information.
Limited-use spares are for emergency use only. In-
stallation of this limited-use spare tire affects vehicle WARNING!
handling. With this tire, do not drive more than the
Fast spinning tires can be dangerous. Forces gener-
speed listed on the limit-use spare wheel. Keep
ated by excessive wheel speeds may cause tire dam-
inflated to the cold tire inflation pressures listed on
age or failure. A tire could explode and injure some-
your Tire and Loading Information Placard located 5
one. Do not spin your vehicle’s wheels faster than
on the driver’s side B-Pillar or the rear edge of the
30 mph (48 km/h) for more than 30 seconds continu-
driver’s side door. Replace (or repair) the original
ously when you are stuck, and do not let anyone near
equipment tire at the first opportunity and reinstall it
a spinning wheel, no matter what the speed.
on your vehicle. Failure to do so could result in loss
of vehicle control. Tread Wear Indicators
Tire Spinning Tread wear indicators are in the original equipment tires
to help you in determining when your tires should be
When stuck in mud, sand, snow, or ice conditions, do not
replaced.
spin your vehicle’s wheels above 30 mph (48 km/h) or
for longer than 30 seconds continuously without stop-
ping.
tread wear indicators, the tire should be replaced. Refer
to “Replacement Tires” in this section for further infor-
mation.
Life Of Tire
The service life of a tire is dependent upon varying
factors including, but not limited to:
• Driving style
• Tire pressure
• Distance driven
1 — Worn Tire • Performance tires, tires with a speed rating of V or

2 — New Tire higher, and summer tires typically have a reduced
tread life. Rotation of these tires per the vehicle main-
These indicators are molded into the bottom of the tread tenance schedule is highly recommended.
grooves. They will appear as bands when the tread depth
becomes 1/16 in (2 mm). When the tread is worn to the
Information placard or the Vehicle Certification Label for
WARNING!
the size designation of your tire. The Load Index and
Tires and the spare tire should be replaced after six Speed Symbol for your tire will be found on the original
years, regardless of the remaining tread. Failure to equipment tire sidewall. See the Tire Sizing Chart ex-
follow this warning can result in sudden tire failure. ample found in the Tire Safety Information section of this
You could lose control and have a collision resulting manual for more information relating to the Load Index
in serious injury or death. and Speed Symbol of a tire.
Keep dismounted tires in a cool, dry place with as little It is recommended to replace the two front tires or two 5
exposure to light as possible. Protect tires from contact rear tires as a pair. Replacing just one tire can seriously
with oil, grease, and gasoline. affect your vehicle’s handling. If you ever replace a
wheel, make sure that the wheel’s specifications match
Replacement Tires those of the original wheels.
The tires on your new vehicle provide a balance of many It is recommended you contact your authorized tire
characteristics. They should be inspected regularly for dealer or original equipment dealer with any questions
wear and correct cold tire inflation pressure. The manu- you may have on tire specifications or capability. Failure
facturer strongly recommends that you use tires equiva- to use equivalent replacement tires may adversely affect
lent to the originals in size, quality and performance the safety, handling, and ride of your vehicle.
when replacement is needed. Refer to the paragraph on
“Tread Wear Indicators”. Refer to the Tire and Loading

• Do not use a tire, wheel size or rating other than • Failure to equip your vehicle with tires having
that specified for your vehicle. Some combinations adequate speed capability can result in sudden tire
of unapproved tires and wheels may change sus- failure and loss of vehicle control.
pension dimensions and performance characteris-
tics, resulting in changes to steering, handling, and CAUTION!
braking of your vehicle. This can cause unpredict-
able handling and stress to steering and suspen- Replacing original tires with tires of a different size
sion components. You could lose control and have may result in false speedometer and odometer read-
a collision resulting in serious injury or death. Use ings.
only the tire and wheel sizes with load ratings
approved for your vehicle. TIRE CHAINS (TRACTION DEVICES)
• Never use a tire with a smaller load index or Use of traction devices require sufficient tire-to-body
capacity, other than what was originally equipped clearance. Follow these recommendations to guard
on your vehicle. Using a tire with a smaller load against damage.
index could result in tire overloading and failure.
• Traction device must be of proper size for the tire, as
You could lose control and have a collision.
recommended by the traction device manufacturer.
(Continued)
• Install on Rear Tires Only.
CAUTION!
• Due to limited clearance, the Security Chain Company
To avoid damage to your vehicle or tires, observe the
(SCC) Super Z6 low profile traction device or equiva-
following precautions:
lent is recommended on P215/65R17, P225/60R18 or
P235/55R18 tires.. • Because of restricted traction device clearance be-
tween tires and other suspension components, it is
• For an All Wheel Drive vehicle, P235/55R19 tire with important that only traction devices in good condi-
the use of a traction device that meets the SAE type tion are used. Broken devices can cause serious 5
“Class S” specification is recommended. damage. Stop the vehicle immediately if noise
occurs that could indicate device breakage. Remove
WARNING! the damaged parts of the device before further use.
• Install device as tightly as possible and then re-
Using tires of different size and type (M+S, Snow)
tighten after driving about ½ mile (0.8 km).
between front and rear axles can cause unpredictable
• Do not exceed 30 mph (48 km/h).
handling. You could lose control and have a collision.
• Drive cautiously and avoid severe turns and large
bumps, especially with a loaded vehicle.
• Do not drive for a prolonged period on dry pave-
ment.
(Continued)
These effects can be reduced by timely rotation of tires.
The benefits of rotation are especially worthwhile with
• Observe the traction device manufacturer’s instruc- aggressive tread designs such as those on all season type
tions on the method of installation, operating tires. Rotation will increase tread life, help to maintain
speed, and conditions for use. Always use the mud, snow and wet traction levels, and contribute to a
suggested operating speed of the device manufac- smooth, quiet ride.
turer’s if it is less than 30 mph (48 km/h).
• Do not use traction devices on a compact spare tire. Refer to the “Maintenance Schedule” for the proper
maintenance intervals. The reasons for any rapid or
TIRE ROTATION RECOMMENDATIONS unusual wear should be corrected prior to rotation being
performed.
Tires on the front and rear axles of vehicles operate at
different loads and perform different steering, driving, The suggested rotation method is the “forward cross”
and braking functions. For these reasons, they wear at shown in the following diagram. This rotation pattern
unequal rates. does not apply to some directional tires that must not be
reversed.
The tire pressure will vary with temperature by about 1
psi (7 kPa) for every 12°F (6.5°C). This means that when
the outside temperature decreases, the tire pressure will
decrease. Tire pressure should always be set based on
cold inflation tire pressure. This is defined as the tire
pressure after the vehicle has not been driven for at least
three hours, or driven less than 1 mile (1.6 km) after a
three hour period. The cold tire inflation pressure must 5
not exceed the maximum inflation pressure molded into
the tire sidewall. Refer to “Tires – General Information”
in “Starting and Operating” for information on how to
properly inflate the vehicle’s tires. The tire pressure will
Tire Rotation also increase as the vehicle is driven - this is normal and
TIRE PRESSURE MONITOR SYSTEM (TPMS) there should be no adjustment for this increased pres-
The Tire Pressure Monitor System (TPMS) will warn the sure.
driver of a low tire pressure based on the vehicle recom- The TPMS will warn the driver of a low tire pressure if
mended cold placard pressure. the tire pressure falls below the low-pressure warning
limit for any reason, including low temperature effects
and natural pressure loss through the tire.
The TPMS will continue to warn the driver of low tire pressure is sufficiently low enough to turn ON the TPM
pressure as long as the condition exists, and will not turn Telltale Light. Driving the vehicle may cause the tire
off until the tire pressure is at or above the recommended pressure to rise to approximately 27 psi (186 kPa), but the
cold placard pressure. Once the low tire pressure warn- TPM Telltale Light will still be ON. In this situation, the
ing (Tire Pressure Monitoring [TPM] Telltale Light) illu- TPM Telltale Light will turn OFF only after the tires are
minates, you must increase the tire pressure to the inflated to the vehicle’s recommended cold placard pres-
recommended cold placard pressure in order for the TPM sure value.
Telltale Light to turn off. The system will automatically
update and the TPM Telltale Light will turn off once the CAUTION!
system receives the updated tire pressures. The vehicle
may need to be driven for up to 20 minutes above 15 mph • The TPMS has been optimized for the original
(24 km/h) in order for the TPMS to receive this informa- equipment tires and wheels. TPMS pressures and
tion. warning have been established for the tire size
equipped on your vehicle. Undesirable system op-
For example, your vehicle may have a recommended eration or sensor damage may result when using
cold (parked for more than three hours) placard pressure replacement equipment that is not of the same size,
of 30 psi (207 kPa). If the ambient temperature is 68°F type, and/or style. Aftermarket wheels can cause
(20°C) and the measured tire pressure is 27 psi (186 kPa), sensor damage. Using aftermarket tire sealants may
a temperature drop to 20°F (-7°C) will decrease the tire
pressure to approximately 23 psi (158 kPa). This tire (Continued)
• Driving on a significantly under-inflated tire causes
the tire to overheat and can lead to tire failure.
cause the Tire Pressure Monitoring System (TPMS) Under-inflation also reduces fuel efficiency and tire
sensor to become inoperable. After using an after- tread life, and may affect the vehicle’s handling and
market tire sealant it is recommended that you take stopping ability.
your vehicle to your local dealer to have your
sensor function checked. • The TPMS is not a substitute for proper tire mainte-
• After inspecting or adjusting the tire pressure, nance, and it is the driver’s responsibility to maintain
always reinstall the valve stem cap. This will correct tire pressure using an accurate tire pressure 5
prevent moisture and dirt from entering the valve gauge, even if under-inflation has not reached the level
stem, which could damage the TPM sensor. to trigger illumination of the TPM Telltale Light.
• Seasonal temperature changes will affect tire pressure,
NOTE:
and the TPMS will monitor the actual tire pressure in
• The TPMS is not intended to replace normal tire care the tire.
and maintenance or to provide warning of a tire failure
Base System
or condition.
The Tire Pressure Monitor System (TPMS) uses wireless
• The TPMS should not be used as a tire pressure gauge technology with wheel rim mounted electronic sensors to
while adjusting your tire pressure.
monitor tire pressure levels. Sensors mounted to each with a pressure below the low-pressure limit will not
wheel as part of the valve stem transmit tire pressure cause the TPM Telltale Light to illuminate or the chime to
readings to the receiver module. sound.
NOTE: It is particularly important for you to check the Tire Pressure Monitoring Low Pressure Warnings
tire pressure in all of the tires on your vehicle monthly
and to maintain the proper pressure. The TPM Telltale Light will illuminate in the
The TPMS consists of the following components: instrument cluster, a ⬙LOW TIRE⬙ message will be
displayed and a chime will sound when tire pressure is
• Receiver module
low in one or more of the four active road tires. An
• Four TPM sensors ⬙Inflate to XX⬙ message will also be displayed. Should
this occur, you should stop as soon as possible, check the
• TPM Telltale Light
inflation pressure of each tire on your vehicle, and inflate
The matching full size spare wheel and tire assembly (if each tire to the vehicle’s recommended cold placard
equipped) has a TPM sensor. The matching full size spare pressure value as shown in the ⬙Inflate to XX⬙ message.
can be used in place of any of the four road tires. The Once the system receives the updated tire pressures, the
TPMS will only monitor the pressure in the full size spare system will automatically update and the TPM Telltale
when it is used in place of a road tire. Otherwise, a spare Light and ⬙LOW TIRE⬙ message will turn off. The vehicle
may need to be driven for up to 20 minutes above 15 mph 3. Accumulation of snow or ice around the wheels or
(24 km/h) in order for the TPMS to receive this wheel housings.
information.
4. Using tire chains on the vehicle.
Service TPMS Warning
5. Using wheels/tires not equipped with TPM sensors.
If a system fault is detected, the TPM Telltale Light will
flash on and off for 75 seconds and then remain on solid. Vehicles With Full Size Spare
The system fault will also sound a chime. If the ignition 1. The matching full size spare wheel and tire assembly
5
switch is cycled, this sequence will repeat, providing the has a TPM sensor that can be monitored by the TPMS.
system fault still exists. The TPM Telltale Light will turn
2. If you install the full size spare in place of a road tire
off when the fault condition no longer exists. A system
that has a pressure below the low-pressure warning
fault can occur due to any of the following:
limit, upon the next ignition switch cycle, a chime will
1. Signal interference due to electronic devices or driving sound and the TPM Telltale Light and ⬙LOW TIRE⬙
next to facilities emitting the same radio frequencies as message will turn ON. The ⬙Inflate to XX⬙ message
the TPM sensors. will also be displayed.
2. Installing aftermarket window tinting that contains 3. Driving the vehicle for up to 20 minutes above 15 mph
materials that may block radio wave signals. (24 km/h) will turn off the TPM Telltale Light and
⬙LOW TIRE⬙ message as long as no tire pressure is 4. For each subsequent ignition switch cycle, a chime will
below the low-pressure warning limit in any of the sound and the TPM Telltale Light will flash on and off
four active road tires. for 75 seconds and then remain on solid.
Vehicles With Compact Spare 5. Once you repair or replace the original road tire, and
reinstall it on the vehicle in place of the compact spare,
1. The compact spare tire does not have a TPM sensor.
the TPMS will update automatically and the TPM
Therefore, the TPMS will not monitor the pressure in
Telltale Light will turn OFF, as long as no tire pressure
the compact spare tire.
is below the low-pressure warning limit in any of the
2. If you install the compact spare tire in place of a road four active road tires. The vehicle may need to be
tire that has a pressure below the low-pressure warn- driven for up to 20 minutes above 15 mph (24 km/h)
ing limit, upon the next ignition switch cycle, a chime in order for the TPMS to receive this information.
will sound and the TPM Telltale Light and ⬙LOW
Premium System — If Equipped
TIRE⬙ message will turn ON. The ⬙Inflate to XX⬙
message will also be displayed. The Tire Pressure Monitor System (TPMS) uses wireless
technology with wheel rim mounted electronic sensors to
3. After driving the vehicle for up to 20 minutes above monitor tire pressure levels. Sensors mounted to each
15 mph (24 km/h), the ⬙LOW TIRE⬙ message will turn wheel as part of the valve stem transmit tire pressure
off and the TPM Telltale Light will flash on and off for readings to the receiver module.
75 seconds and then remain on solid.
NOTE: It is particularly important for you to check the Tire Pressure Monitoring Low Pressure Warnings
tire pressure in all of the tires on your vehicle monthly
and to maintain the proper pressure. The TPM Telltale Light will illuminate in the
The TPMS consists of the following components: instrument cluster and a chime will sound when
tire pressure is low in one or more of the four active road
• Receiver module
tires. In addition, the EVIC will display a ⬙LOW TIRE⬙
• Four TPM sensors message and a graphic showing the pressure values of
each tire with the low tire pressure values flashing or 5
• Various TPMS messages, which display in the Elec-
changing color. An ⬙Inflate to XX⬙ message will also be
tronic Vehicle Information Center (EVIC)
displayed.
• TPM Telltale Light
The matching full size spare wheel and tire assembly (if
equipped) has a TPM sensor. The full size spare can be
used in place of any of the four road tires. The TPMS will
only monitor the pressure in the full size spare tire when
it is used in place of a road tire. Otherwise, a spare with
a pressure below the low-pressure limit will not cause the
TPM Telltale Light to illuminate or the chime to sound.
will automatically update, the graphic display in the
EVIC will stop flashing or change color back to the
original color, and the TPM Telltale Light will turn off.
The vehicle may need to be driven for up to 20 minutes
above 15 mph (24 km/h) in order for the TPMS to receive
this information.
Tire Pressure Monitor Display

Should this occur, you should stop as soon as possible
and inflate the tires with a low pressure condition (those
flashing or in a different color in the EVIC graphic) to the
vehicle’s recommended cold placard pressure inflation
value as shown in the ⬙Inflate to XX⬙ message. Once the
system receives the updated tire pressures, the system Low Tire Pressure Monitor Display
Service TPMS Warning 2. Installing aftermarket window tinting that contains
materials that may block radio wave signals.
If a system fault is detected, the TPM Telltale Light will
flash on and off for 75 seconds and then remain on solid. 3. Accumulation of snow or ice around the wheels or
The system fault will also sound a chime. In addition, the wheel housings.
EVIC will display a ⬙SERVICE TPM SYSTEM⬙ message
4. Using tire chains on the vehicle.
for a minimum of five seconds and then display dashes (-
-) in place of the pressure value to indicate which sensor 5. Using wheels/tires not equipped with TPM sensors.
is not being received. 5
The EVIC will also display a ⬙SERVICE TPM SYSTEM⬙
If the ignition switch is cycled, this sequence will repeat, message for a minimum of five seconds when a system
providing the system fault still exists. If the system fault fault related to an incorrect sensor location fault is
no longer exists, the TPM Telltale Light will no longer detected. In this case, the ⬙SERVICE TPM SYSTEM⬙
flash, and the ⬙SERVICE TPM SYSTEM⬙ message will no message is then followed with a graphic display with
longer display, and a pressure value will display in place pressure values still shown. This indicates that the pres-
of the dashes. A system fault can occur due to any of the sure values are still being received from the TPM sensors
following: but they may not be located in the correct vehicle
position. The system still needs to be serviced as long as
1. Signal interference due to electronic devices or driving
the ⬙SERVICE TPM SYSTEM⬙ message is displayed.
next to facilities emitting the same radio frequencies as
the TPM sensors.
Vehicles With Full Size Spare Vehicles With Compact Spare
1. The matching full size spare wheel and tire assembly 1. The compact spare tire does not have a TPM sensor.
has a TPM sensor that can be monitored by the TPMS. Therefore, the TPMS will not monitor the pressure in
the compact spare tire.
2. If you install the full size spare in place of a road tire
that has a pressure below the low-pressure warning 2. If you install the compact spare tire in place of a road
limit, upon the next ignition switch cycle, a chime will tire that has a pressure below the low-pressure warn-
sound and the TPM Telltale Light will turn ON. In ing limit, upon the next ignition switch cycle, the TPM
addition, the EVIC will display a low pressure mes- Telltale Light will remain ON and a chime will sound.
sage and a graphic showing the low tire pressure In addition, the graphic in the EVIC will still display a
value flashing or in a different color. An ⬙Inflate to XX⬙ flashing pressure value or a pressure value in a
message will also be displayed. different color. An ⬙Inflate to XX⬙ message will also be
displayed.
3. After driving the vehicle for up to 20 minutes above
15 mph (24 km/h) the TPM Telltale Light will turn 3. After driving the vehicle for up to 20 minutes above
OFF, and the pressure value displayed will be updated 15 mph (24 km/h), the TPM Telltale Light will flash on
and stop flashing or return to its original color as long and off for 75 seconds and then remain on solid. In
as no tire pressure is below the low-pressure warning addition, the EVIC will display a ⬙SERVICE TPM
limit in any of the four active road tires. SYSTEM⬙ message for a minimum of five seconds and
then display dashes (- -) in place of the pressure value.
4. For each subsequent ignition switch cycle, a chime will General Information
sound, the TPM Telltale Light will flash on and off for This device complies with Part 15 of the FCC rules and
75 seconds and then remain on solid, and the EVIC RSS 210 of Industry Canada. Operation is subject to the
will display a ⬙SERVICE TPM SYSTEM⬙ message for a following conditions:
minimum of five seconds and then display dashes (- -)
in place of the pressure value. • This device may not cause harmful interference.
5. Once you repair or replace the original road tire and • This device must accept any interference received,
reinstall it on the vehicle in place of the compact spare, including interference that may cause undesired op- 5
the TPMS will update automatically. In addition, the eration.
TPM Telltale Light will turn OFF and the graphic in The TPM sensors are regulated under one of the follow-
the EVIC will display a new pressure value instead of ing licenses:
dashes (- -), as long as no tire pressure is below the
low-pressure warning limit in any of the four active United States MRXC4W4MA4
road tires. The vehicle may need to be driven for up to Canada 2546A-C4W4MA4
20 minutes above 15 mph (24 km/h) in order for the
TPMS to receive this information.
FUEL REQUIREMENTS an octane range of 87 to 89. The manufacturer recom-
mends the use of 89 octane for optimum performance.
3.6L Engine — If Equipped
The use of premium gasoline is not recommended, as it
will not provide any benefit over regular gasoline in
This engine is designed to meet all emis- these engines.
sions regulations and provide excellent
Light spark knock at low engine speeds is not harmful to
fuel economy and performance when us-
your engine. However, continued heavy spark knock at
ing high-quality unleaded “regular” gaso-
high speeds can cause damage and immediate service is
line having an octane rating of 87. The use
required. Poor quality gasoline can cause problems such
of premium gasoline is not recommended, as it will not
as hard starting, stalling, and hesitations. If you experi-
provide any benefit over regular gasoline in these
ence these symptoms, try another brand of gasoline
engines.
before considering service for the vehicle.
5.7L Engine — If Equipped Over 40 auto manufacturers worldwide have issued and
endorsed consistent gasoline specifications (the World-
This engine is designed to meet all emis- wide Fuel Charter, WWFC) which define fuel properties
sions regulations and provide satisfactory necessary to deliver enhanced emissions, performance,
fuel economy and performance when us- and durability for your vehicle. The manufacturer recom-
ing high-quality unleaded gasoline having mends the use of gasolines that meet the WWFC speci-
fications if they are available.
Reformulated Gasoline
CAUTION!
Many areas of the country require the use of cleaner
burning gasoline referred to as “Reformulated Gasoline.” DO NOT use gasoline containing Methanol or gaso-
Reformulated gasoline contain oxygenates and are spe- line containing more than 10% Ethanol. Use of these
cifically blended to reduce vehicle emissions and im- blends may result in starting and drivability prob-
prove air quality. lems, damage critical fuel system components, cause
emissions to exceed the applicable standard, and/or
The manufacturer supports the use of reformulated gaso- cause the “Malfunction Indicator Light” to illumi- 5
line. Properly blended reformulated gasoline will pro- nate. Pump labels should clearly communicate if a
vide excellent performance and durability of engine and fuel contains greater than 10% Ethanol.
fuel system components.
Problems that result from using gasoline containing
Gasoline/Oxygenate Blends
Methanol or gasoline containing more than 10% Ethanol
Some fuel suppliers blend unleaded gasoline with oxy- are not the responsibility of the manufacturer and may
genates such as Ethanol. Fuels blended with oxygenates not be covered under New Vehicle Limited Warranty.
may be used in your vehicle.
E-85 Usage In Non-Flex Fuel Vehicles To fix a Non-FFV vehicle inadvertently fueled once with
Non-Flex Fuel Vehicles (FFV) are compatible with gaso- E-85 perform the following:
line containing 10% ethanol (E10). Gasoline with higher • Drain the fuel tank (see your authorized dealer).
ethanol content may void the New Vehicle Limited
Warranty. • Change the engine oil and oil filter.
If a Non-FFV vehicle is inadvertently fueled with E-85 • Disconnect and reconnect the battery to reset the
fuel, the engine will have some or all of these symptoms: engine controller memory.
• Operate in a lean mode. More extensive repairs will be required for prolonged
exposure to E-85 fuel.
• OBD II “Malfunction Indicator Light” on.
MMT In Gasoline
• Poor engine performance.
Methylcyclopentadienyl Manganese Tricarbonyl (MMT)
• Poor cold start and cold drivability. is a manganese-containing metallic additive that is
blended into some gasoline to increase octane. Gasoline
• Increased risk for fuel system component corrosion.
blended with MMT provides no performance advantage
beyond gasoline of the same octane number without
MMT. Gasoline blended with MMT reduces spark plug
life and reduces emissions system performance in some
vehicles. The manufacturer recommends that gasoline
without MMT be used in your vehicle. The MMT content Fuel System Cautions
of gasoline may not be indicated on the gasoline pump,
therefore, you should ask your gasoline retailer whether CAUTION!
the gasoline contains MMT. MMT is prohibited in Federal
and California reformulated gasoline. Follow these guidelines to maintain your vehicle’s
performance:
Materials Added To Fuel • The use of leaded gas is prohibited by Federal law.
All gasoline sold in the United States is required to Using leaded gasoline can impair engine perfor-
mance and damage the emissions control system. 5
contain effective detergent additives. Use of additional
detergents or other additives is not needed under normal • An out-of-tune engine or certain fuel or ignition
conditions and they would result in additional cost. malfunctions can cause the catalytic converter to
Therefore, you should not have to add anything to the overheat. If you notice a pungent burning odor or
fuel. some light smoke, your engine may be out of tune
or malfunctioning and may require immediate ser-
vice. Contact your authorized dealer for service
assistance.
(Continued)
Carbon Monoxide Warnings
• The use of fuel additives, which are now being WARNING!
sold as octane enhancers, is not recommended.
Most of these products contain high concentrations Carbon monoxide (CO) in exhaust gases is deadly.
of methanol. Fuel system damage or vehicle perfor- Follow the precautions below to prevent carbon
mance problems resulting from the use of such monoxide poisoning:
fuels or additives is not the responsibility of the • Do not inhale exhaust gases. They contain carbon
manufacturer. monoxide, a colorless and odorless gas, which can
kill. Never run the engine in a closed area, such as
NOTE: Intentional tampering with the emissions control a garage, and never sit in a parked vehicle with the
system can result in civil penalties being assessed against engine running for an extended period. If the
you. vehicle is stopped in an open area with the engine
running for more than a short period, adjust the
ventilation system to force fresh, outside air into
the vehicle.
• Guard against carbon monoxide with proper main-
tenance. Have the exhaust system inspected every
(Continued)

time the vehicle is raised. Have any abnormal Only vehicles with the E-85 fuel filler door label can
conditions repaired promptly. Until repaired, drive operate on E-85.
with all side windows fully open.
Ethanol Fuel (E-85)
FLEXIBLE FUEL (3.6L ENGINE ONLY) — IF
E-85 is a mixture of approximately 85% fuel ethanol and
EQUIPPED
15% unleaded gasoline. 5
E-85 General Information
The information in this section is for Flexible Fuel ve- WARNING!
hicles only. These vehicles can be identified by a unique Ethanol vapors are extremely flammable and could
fuel filler door label that states Ethanol (E-85) or Un- cause serious personal injury. Never have any smok-
leaded Gasoline Only. This section only covers those ing materials lit in or near the vehicle when remov-
subjects that are unique to these vehicles. Please refer to ing the fuel filler tube cap (gas cap) or filling the
the other sections of this manual for information on tank. Do not use E-85 as a cleaning agent and never
features that are common between Flexible Fuel and use it near an open flame.
gasoline-only powered vehicles.
Fuel Requirements NOTE:
If your vehicle is E-85 compatible, it will operate on • Use seasonally adjusted E-85 fuel (ASTM D5798). With
unleaded gasoline with an octane rating of 87, or E-85 non-seasonally adjusted E-85 fuel, you may experience
fuel, or any mixture of these two fuels. hard starting and rough idle following start up even if
For best results, a refueling pattern that avoids alternat- the above recommendations are followed, especially
ing between E-85 and unleaded gasoline is recom- when the ambient temperature is below 32°F (0°C).
mended. • Some additives used in regular gasoline are not fully
When you do switch fuel types it is recommended that: compatible with E-85 and may form deposits in your
engine. To eliminate driveability issues that may be
• You do not add less than 5 gallons (19 Liters) when caused by these deposits, a supplemental gasoline
refueling. additive, such as MOPAR® Injector Cleanup or
• You drive the vehicle immediately after refueling for at Techron may be used.
least 5 miles (8 km). Selection Of Engine Oil For Flexible Fuel Vehicles
Observing these precautions will avoid possible hard (E-85) And Gasoline Vehicles
starting and/or significant deterioration in driveability FFV vehicles operated on E-85 require specially formu-
during warm up. lated engine oils. These special requirements are included
in MOPAR® engine oils, and in equivalent oils meeting
Chrysler Specification MS-6395. The manufacturer only Cruising Range
recommends engine oils that are API Certified and meet Because E-85 fuel contains less energy per gallon/liter
the requirements of Material Standard MS-6395. MS-6395 than gasoline, you will experience an increase in fuel
contains additional requirements, developed during ex- consumption. You can expect your miles per gallon
tensive fleet testing, to provide additional protection to (mpg)/miles per liter and your driving range to decrease
Chrysler Group LLC engines. Use MOPAR® or an by about 30%, compared to gasoline operation.
equivalent oil meeting the specification MS-6395.
Replacement Parts
Starting 5
Many components in your Flexible Fuel Vehicle (FFV) are
The characteristics of E-85 fuel make it unsuitable for use
designed to be compatible with ethanol. Always be sure
when ambient temperatures fall below 0°F (-18°C). In the
that your vehicle is serviced with correct ethanol com-
range of 0°F (-18°C) to 32°F (0°C), you may experience an
patible parts.
increase in the time it takes for your engine to start, and
a deterioration in driveability (sags and/or hesitations)
CAUTION!
until the engine is fully warmed up.
NOTE: Use of the engine block heater (if equipped) is Replacing fuel system components with non-ethanol
beneficial for E-85 startability when the ambient tempera- compatible components can damage your vehicle.
ture is less than 32°F (0°C).
Maintenance
CAUTION!
Do not use ethanol mixture greater than 85% in your
vehicle. It will cause difficulty in cold starting and
may affect drivability.
ADDING FUEL
1. Press the fuel filler door release switch (located in the
driver’s door map pocket).
Fuel Filler Door Release Switch
2. Open the fuel filler door.
3. There is no fuel filler cap. A flapper door inside the
pipe seals the system.
4. Insert the fuel nozzle fully into the filler pipe – the
nozzle opens and holds the flapper door while refuel-
ing.
NOTE: Only the correct size nozzle opens the latches
allowing the flapper door to open. 5
5. Fill the vehicle with fuel – when the fuel nozzle
“clicks” or shuts off the fuel tank is full.
6. Remove the fuel nozzle and close the fuel door.
Fuel Filler Door
NOTE: A funnel is provided (located in the trunk in the
NOTE: In certain cold conditions, ice may prevent the
spare tire area) to open the flapper door to allow for
fuel door from opening. If this occurs, lightly push on the
emergency refueling with a gas can.
fuel door to break the ice buildup and re-release the fuel
door using the inside release button. Do not pry on the
door.
WARNING!
• Never have any smoking materials lit in or near the
vehicle when the fuel door is open or the tank is
being filled.
• Never add fuel when the engine is running. This is
in violation of most state and federal fire regula-
tions and may cause the “Malfunction Indicator
Light” to turn on.
• A fire may result if fuel is pumped into a portable
container that is inside of a vehicle. You could be
burned. Always place fuel containers on the
Fuel Funnel ground while filling.
CAUTION!
To avoid fuel spillage and overfilling, do not “top
off” the fuel tank after filling.
Emergency Fuel Filler Door Release
If you are unable to open the fuel filler door, use the fuel
filler door emergency release.
1. Open the trunk.
2. Remove the access cover (located on the left side inner
trim panel).
5
Access Cover
3. Pull the release cable. Do not exceed the specified Gross Vehicle Weight Rating
(GVWR) or the Gross Axle Weight Rating (GAWR).
Vehicle Certification Label
Your vehicle has a Vehicle Certification Label affixed to
the drivers side B-Pillar or the rear of the driver’s door.
The label contains the following information:
• Name of manufacturer
• Month and year of manufacture
• Gross Vehicle Weight Rating (GVWR)
• Gross Axle Weight Rating (GAWR) front
Release Cable • Gross Axle Weight Rating (GAWR) rear
VEHICLE LOADING
• Vehicle Identification Number (VIN)
The load carrying capacity of your vehicle is shown on
the “Vehicle Certification Label”. This information • Type of Vehicle
should be used for passenger and luggage loading as • Month Day and Hour of Manufacture (MDH)
indicated.
The bar code allows a computer scanner to read the VIN.
Gross Vehicle Weight Rating (GVWR) or rear GAWR. A dangerous driving condition can
The GVWR is the total allowable weight of your vehicle. result if either rating is exceeded. You could lose
This includes driver, passengers, and cargo. The total control of the vehicle and have a collision.
load must be limited so that you do not exceed the
GVWR. Overloading
The load carrying components (axle, springs, tires,
Gross Axle Weight Rating (GAWR) 5
wheels, etc.) of your vehicle will provide satisfactory
The GAWR is the maximum capacity of the front and rear service as long as you do not exceed the GVWR and the
axles. Distribute the load over the front and rear axles front and rear GAWR.
evenly. Make sure that you do not exceed either front or
The best way to figure out the total weight of your
rear GAWR.
vehicle is to weigh it when it is fully loaded and ready for
operation. Weigh it on a commercial scale to ensure that
WARNING!
it is not over the GVWR.
Because the front wheels steer the vehicle, it is Figure out the weight on the front and rear of the vehicle
important that you do not exceed the maximum front separately. It is important that you distribute the load
evenly over the front and rear axles.
(Continued)
Overloading can cause potential safety hazards and NOTE:
shorten useful service life. Heavier axles or suspension
• Refer to the “Vehicle Certification Label” affixed to the
components do not necessarily increase the vehicle’s
rear of the driver’s door for your vehicle’s GVWR and
GVWR.
GAWRs.
Loading
• Refer to the “Tire Placard” for your vehicle’s proper
To load your vehicle properly, first figure out its empty tire pressure.
weight, axle-by-axle and side-by-side. Store heavier items
down low and be sure you distribute their weight as TRAILER TOWING
evenly as possible. Stow all loose items securely before In this section you will find safety tips and information
driving. If weighing the loaded vehicle shows that you on limits to the type of towing you can reasonably do
have exceeded either GAWR, but the total load is within with your vehicle. Before towing a trailer, carefully
the specified GVWR, you must redistribute the weight. review this information to tow your load as efficiently
Improper weight distribution can have an adverse effect and safely as possible.
on the way your vehicle steers and handles and the way
the brakes operate. To maintain the New Vehicle Limited Warranty coverage,
follow the requirements and recommendations in this
manual concerning vehicles used for trailer towing.
Common Towing Definitions measure GTW is to put your fully loaded trailer on a
vehicle scale. The entire weight of the trailer must be
The following trailer towing related definitions will assist
supported by the scale.
you in understanding the following information:
Gross Vehicle Weight Rating (GVWR) Gross Combination Weight Rating (GCWR)
The GVWR is the total allowable weight of your vehicle. The GCWR is the total permissible weight of your vehicle
This includes driver, passengers, cargo and tongue and trailer when weighed in combination.
weight. The total load must be limited so that you do not Gross Axle Weight Rating (GAWR) 5
exceed the GVWR. Refer to “Vehicle Loading/Vehicle
The GAWR is the maximum capacity of the front and rear
Certification Label” in “Starting and Operating” for
axles. Distribute the load over the front and rear axles
evenly. Make sure that you do not exceed either front or
Gross Trailer Weight (GTW) rear GAWR. Refer to “Vehicle Loading/Vehicle Certifica-
The GTW is the weight of the trailer plus the weight of all tion Label” in “Starting and Operating” for further
cargo, consumables and equipment (permanent or tem- information.
porary) loaded in or on the trailer in its ⬙loaded and
ready for operation⬙ condition. The recommended way to
Trailer Sway Control
WARNING!
The trailer sway control is a telescoping link that can be
It is important that you do not exceed the maximum installed between the hitch receiver and the trailer tongue
front or rear GAWR. A dangerous driving condition that typically provides adjustable friction associated with
can result if either rating is exceeded. You could lose the telescoping motion to dampen any unwanted trailer
control of the vehicle and have a collision. swaying motions while traveling.
Tongue Weight (TW) Weight-Carrying Hitch
The tongue weight is the downward force exerted on the A weight-carrying hitch supports the trailer tongue
hitch ball by the trailer. In most cases it should not be less weight, just as if it were luggage located at a hitch ball or
than 10% of the trailer load. You must consider this as some other connecting point of the vehicle. These kinds
part of the load on your vehicle. of hitches are the most popular on the market today and
they are commonly used to tow small and medium sized
Frontal Area
trailers.
The frontal area is the maximum height multiplied by the
maximum width of the front of a trailer.
Weight-Distributing Hitch
WARNING!
A weight-distributing system works by applying lever-
age through spring (load) bars. They are typically used • An improperly adjusted Weight Distributing Hitch
for heavier loads to distribute trailer tongue weight to the system may reduce handling, stability, braking
tow vehicle’s front axle and the trailer axle(s). When used performance, and could result in a collision.
in accordance with the manufacturer’s directions, it pro- • Weight Distributing Systems may not be compat-
vides for a more level ride, offering more consistent ible with Surge Brake Couplers. Consult with your
steering and brake control thereby enhancing towing hitch and trailer manufacturer or a reputable Rec- 5
safety. The addition of a friction/hydraulic sway control reational Vehicle dealer for additional information.
also dampens sway caused by traffic and crosswinds and
contributes positively to tow vehicle and trailer stability.
Trailer sway control and a weight distributing (load
equalizing) hitch are recommended for heavier Tongue
Weights (TW) and may be required depending on vehicle
and trailer configuration/loading to comply with Gross
Axle Weight Rating (GAWR) requirements. Weight Dis-
tribution hitched are recommended for loads in excess of
5,000 lbs (2,268 kg).
Trailer Hitch Classification Trailer Hitch Classification Definitions
The following chart provides the industry standard for Class Max. Trailer Hitch
the maximum trailer weight a given trailer hitch class can Industry Standards
tow and should be used to assist you in selecting the Class I - Light Duty 2,000 lbs (907 kg)
correct trailer hitch for your intended towing condition.
Class II - Medium Duty 3,500 lbs (1 587 kg)
Class III - Heavy Duty 5,000 lbs (2 268 kg)
Class IV - Extra Heavy 10,000 lbs (4 540 kg)
Duty
Refer to the “Trailer Towing Weights (Maximum
Trailer Weight Ratings)” chart for the Maximum
Gross Trailer Weight (GTW) towable for your given
drivetrain.
All trailer hitches should be professionally installed
on your vehicle.
Trailer Towing Weights (Maximum Trailer Weight Ratings)
The following chart provides the maximum trailer weight ratings towable for your given drivetrain.
Max. GTW (Gross Max. Tongue Weight (See

Engine/Transmission Frontal Area
Trailer Weight) Note)
3.6L Automatic 22 sq ft (2.04 sq m) 1,000 lbs (454 kg) 100 lbs (45 kg)
5.7L Automatic 32 sq ft (2.97 sq m) 1,000 lbs (454 kg) 100 lbs (45 kg)
5
Refer to local laws for maximum trailer towing speeds.
NOTE: The trailer tongue weight must be considered as
part of the combined weight of occupants and cargo, and
it should never exceed the weight referenced on the “Tire
and Loading Information” placard. Refer to “Tire Safety
Information” in “Starting and Operating” for further
information.
Trailer And Tongue Weight
Always load a trailer with 60% to 65% of the weight in
the front of the trailer. This places 10% to 15% of the
Gross Trailer Weight (GTW) on the tow hitch of your
vehicle. Loads balanced over the wheels or heavier in the
rear can cause the trailer to sway severely side to side
which will cause loss of control of the vehicle and trailer.
Failure to load trailers heavier in front is the cause of
many trailer collisions.
Never exceed the maximum tongue weight stamped on
your bumper or trailer hitch.
Consider the following items when computing the
weight on the rear axle of the vehicle:
• The tongue weight of the trailer.
• The weight of any other type of cargo or equipment
WARNING!
put in or on your vehicle.
• The weight of the driver and all passengers. Improper towing can lead to an injury collision.
Follow these guidelines to make your trailer towing
NOTE: Remember that everything put into or on the as safe as possible:
trailer adds to the load on your vehicle. Also, additional • Make certain that the load is secured in the trailer
factory-installed options or dealer-installed options must and it will not shift during travel. When trailering
be considered as part of the total load on your vehicle. cargo that is not fully secured, dynamic load shifts 5
Refer to the “Tire and Loading Information” placard for can occur that may be difficult for the driver to
the maximum combined weight of occupants and cargo control. You could lose control of your vehicle and
for your vehicle. have a collision.
Towing Requirements • When hauling cargo or towing a trailer, do not
overload your vehicle or trailer. Overloading can
To promote proper break-in of your new vehicle drive- cause a loss of control, poor performance, or dam-
train components the following guidelines are recom- age to brakes, axle, engine, transmission, steering,
mended: suspension, chassis structure, or tires.
• Safety chains must always be used between your
vehicle and trailer. Always connect the chains to
(Continued)

the frame or hook retainers of the vehicle hitch. 3. GAWR
Cross the chains under the trailer tongue and allow
enough slack for turning corners. 4. Tongue weight rating for the trailer hitch uti-
• Vehicles with trailers should not be parked on a lized. (This requirement may limit the ability to
grade. When parking, apply the parking brake on always achieve the 10% to 15% range of tongue
the tow vehicle. Put the tow vehicle automatic weight as a percentage of total trailer weight.)
transmission in PARK. Always, block or ⴖchockⴖ
the trailer wheels. CAUTION!
• GCWR must not be exceeded.
• Total weight must be distributed between the tow • Do not tow a trailer at all during the first 500 miles
vehicle and the trailer such that the following four (805 km) the new vehicle is driven. The engine, axle
ratings are not exceeded: or other parts could be damaged.
• Then, during the first 500 miles (805 km) that a
1. Max loading as defined on the “Tire and Loading trailer is towed, do not drive over 50 mph (80 km/h)
Information” placard. and do not make starts at full throttle. This helps
2. GTW the engine and other parts of the vehicle wear in at
the heavier loads.
(Continued)
Towing Requirements — Tires on replacement tires and for the proper tire replace-
– Do not attempt to tow a trailer while using a compact ment procedures. Replacing tires with a higher load
spare tire. carrying capacity will not increase the vehicle’s GVWR
and GAWR limits.
– Proper tire inflation pressures are essential to the safe
and satisfactory operation of your vehicle. Refer to Towing Requirements — Trailer Brakes
“Tires – General Information” in “Starting and Oper- • Do not interconnect the hydraulic brake system or
ating” for information on tire pressures and for proper vacuum system of your vehicle with that of the trailer.
tire inflation procedures. 5
This could cause inadequate braking and possible
– Check the trailer tires for proper tire inflation pressures personal injury.
before trailer usage. • An electronically actuated trailer brake controller is
– Check for signs of tire wear or visible tire damage required when towing a trailer with electronically
before towing a trailer. Refer to “Tires – General actuated brakes. When towing a trailer equipped with
Information” in “Starting and Operating” for informa- a hydraulic surge actuated brake system, an electronic
tion on tread wear indicators and for the proper brake controller is not required.
inspection procedure. • Trailer brakes are recommended for trailers over
– When replacing tires, refer to “Tires – General Infor- 1,000 lbs (454 kg) and required for trailers in excess of
mation” in “Starting and Operating” for information 2,000 lbs (907 kg).

• Do not connect trailer brakes to your vehicle’s could lead to accelerated brake lining wear, higher
hydraulic brake lines. It can overload your brake brake pedal effort, and longer stopping distances.
system and cause it to fail. You might not have Towing Requirements — Trailer Lights And Wiring
brakes when you need them and could have a
collision. Whenever you pull a trailer, regardless of the trailer size,
• Towing any trailer will increase your stopping stoplights and turn signals on the trailer are required for
distance. When towing you should allow for addi- motoring safety.
tional space between your vehicle and the vehicle The Trailer Tow Package may include a four- and seven-
in front of you. Failure to do so could result in a pin wiring harness. Use a factory approved trailer har-
collision. ness and connector.
NOTE: Do not cut or splice wiring into the vehicles
CAUTION!
wiring harness.
If the trailer weighs more than 1,000 lbs (454 kg) The electrical connections are all complete to the vehicle
loaded, it should have its own brakes and they but you must mate the harness to a trailer connector.
should be of adequate capacity. Failure to do this Refer to the following illustrations.
(Continued)
Four-Pin Connector Seven-Pin Connector

1 — Female Pins 4 — Park 1 — Battery 5 — Ground
2 — Male Pin 5 — Left Stop/Turn 2 — Backup Lamps 6 — Left Stop/Turn
3 — Ground 6 — Right Stop/Turn 3 — Right Stop/Turn 7 — Running Lamps
4 — Electric Brakes
Towing Tips If you REGULARLY tow a trailer for more than 45
minutes of continuous operation, then change the trans-
Before setting out on a trip, practice turning, stopping,
mission fluid and filter as specified for “police, taxi, fleet,
and backing up the trailer in an area located away from
or frequent trailer towing⬙ (five-speed transmission
heavy traffic.
only). Refer to the “Maintenance Schedule” for the
Automatic Transmission proper maintenance intervals.
The DRIVE range can be selected when towing. The Electronic Speed Control — If Equipped
transmission controls include a drive strategy to avoid
frequent shifting when towing. However, if frequent • Do not use in hilly terrain or with heavy loads.
shifting does occur while in DRIVE, you can use the • When using the speed control, if you experience speed
AutoStick® shift control (if equipped) or the LOW range drops greater than 10 mph (16 km/h), disengage until
(if equipped) to select a lower gear. you can get back to cruising speed.
NOTE: Using a lower gear while operating the vehicle • Use speed control in flat terrain and with light loads to
under heavy loading conditions will improve perfor- maximize fuel efficiency.
mance and extend transmission life by reducing exces-
sive shifting and heat buildup. This action will also
provide better engine braking.
AutoStick® — If Equipped Cooling System
• When using the AutoStick® shift control, select the To reduce potential for engine and transmission over-
highest gear that allows for adequate performance and heating, take the following actions:
avoids frequent downshifts. For example, choose “4” if
City Driving
the desired speed can be maintained. Choose “3” or
“2” if needed to maintain the desired speed. When stopped for short periods of time, shift the trans-
mission into NEUTRAL and increase engine idle speed.
• To prevent excess heat generation, avoid continuous 5
driving at high RPM. Reduce vehicle speed as neces- Highway Driving
sary to avoid extended driving at high RPM. Return to
Reduce speed.
a higher gear or vehicle speed when grade and road
conditions allow. Air Conditioning
Turn off temporarily.
RECREATIONAL TOWING (BEHIND
CAUTION!
MOTORHOME, ETC.)
Two-Wheel Drive And All-Wheel Drive Towing this vehicle in violation of the above require-
ments can cause severe transmission and/or transfer
Recreational towing (with all four wheels on the ground, case damage. Damage from improper towing is not
or using a tow dolly) is NOT ALLOWED. The only covered under the New Vehicle Limited Warranty.
acceptable method for towing this vehicle (behind an-
other vehicle) is on a vehicle trailer with all four wheels
OFF the ground.
WHAT TO DO IN EMERGENCIES
CONTENTS
䡵 HAZARD WARNING FLASHERS . . . . . . . . . . .510 ▫ Preparations For Jump-Start . . . . . . . . . . . . . .523
䡵 IF YOUR ENGINE OVERHEATS . . . . . . . . . . . .510 ▫ Jump-Starting Procedure . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .524
䡵 WHEEL AND TIRE TORQUE SPECIFICATIONS . .511 䡵 FREEING A STUCK VEHICLE . . . . . . . . . . . . .526
▫ Torque Specifications . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .512 䡵 SHIFT LEVER OVERRIDE — 5 SPEED 6
TRANSMISSION . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .528
䡵 JACKING AND TIRE CHANGING . . . . . . . . . .513
䡵 MANUAL PARK RELEASE — 8 SPEED
▫ Jack Location/Spare Tire Stowage . . . . . . . . .514 TRANSMISSION . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .529
▫ Preparations For Jacking . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .516 䡵 TOWING A DISABLED VEHICLE . . . . . . . . . . .532
▫ Jacking And Changing A Tire . . . . . . . . . . . . .517 ▫ All Wheel Drive (AWD) Models . . . . . . . . . . .534
▫ Rear-Wheel Drive (RWD) Models . . . . . . . . . .534
▫ Road Tire Installation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .522
▫ Without The Key Fob . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .535
䡵 JUMP-STARTING PROCEDURES . . . . . . . . . . .522
510 WHAT TO DO IN EMERGENCIES
HAZARD WARNING FLASHERS NOTE: With extended use the Hazard Warning flashers
may wear down your battery.
The Hazard Warning flasher switch is located in the
switch bank near the top center of the instrument panel. IF YOUR ENGINE OVERHEATS
In any of the following situations, you can reduce the

Press the switch to turn on the Hazard Warning potential for overheating by taking the appropriate ac-
flasher. When the switch is activated, all direction.
tional turn signals will flash on and off to warn oncoming
• On the highways — slow down.
traffic of an emergency. Press the switch a second time to
turn off the Hazard Warning flashers. • In city traffic — while stopped, place the transmission
in NEUTRAL, but do not increase the engine idle
This is an emergency warning system and it should not
speed.
be used when the vehicle is in motion. Use it when your
vehicle is disabled and it is creating a safety hazard for NOTE: There are steps that you can take to slow down
other motorists. an impending overheat condition:
When you must leave the vehicle to seek assistance, the • If your air conditioner (A/C) is on, turn it off. The A/C
Hazard Warning flashers will continue to operate even system adds heat to the engine cooling system and
though the ignition is placed in the OFF position. turning the A/C off can help remove this heat.
WHAT TO DO IN EMERGENCIES 511
• You can also turn the temperature control to maximum
WARNING!
heat, the mode control to floor and the blower control
to high. This allows the heater core to act as a You or others can be badly burned by hot engine
supplement to the radiator and aids in removing heat coolant (antifreeze) or steam from your radiator. If
from the engine cooling system. you see or hear steam coming from under the hood,
do not open the hood until the radiator has had time
CAUTION! to cool. Never try to open a cooling system pressure
cap when the radiator or coolant bottle is hot.
Driving with a hot cooling system could damage
your vehicle. If the temperature gauge reads “H,”
WHEEL AND TIRE TORQUE SPECIFICATIONS 6
pull over and stop the vehicle. Idle the vehicle with
the air conditioner turned off until the pointer drops Proper lug nut/bolt torque is very important to ensure
back into the normal range. If the pointer remains on that the wheel is properly mounted to the vehicle. Any
the “H,” turn the engine off immediately and call for time a wheel has been removed and reinstalled on the
service. vehicle the lug nuts/bolts should be torqued using a
properly calibrated torque wrench.
Torque Specifications
Lug Nut/Bolt Torque **Lug Nut/ Lug Nut/

Bolt Size Bolt Socket
Size
130 Ft-Lbs (176 N·m) M14 x 1.50 22 mm
**Use only Chrysler recommended lug nuts/bolts and
clean or remove any dirt or oil before tightening.
Inspect the wheel mounting surface prior to mounting
the tire and remove any corrosion or loose particles.
Wheel Mounting Surface

Tighten the lug nuts/bolts in a star pattern until each
nut/bolt has been tightened twice.
After 25 miles (40 km) check the lug nut/bolt torque to be
sure that all the lug nuts/bolts are properly seated
against the wheel.
JACKING AND TIRE CHANGING
WARNING!
• Do not attempt to change a tire on the side of the
vehicle close to moving traffic. Pull far enough off
the road to avoid the danger of being hit when
operating the jack or changing the wheel.
• Being under a jacked-up vehicle is dangerous. The
vehicle could slip off the jack and fall on you. You 6
could be crushed. Never put any part of your body
under a vehicle that is on a jack. If you need to get
Torque Patterns under a raised vehicle, take it to a service center
where it can be raised on a lift.
WARNING! • Never start or run the engine while the vehicle is
To avoid the risk of forcing the vehicle off the jack, on a jack.
do not tighten the lug nuts fully until the vehicle has • The jack is designed to be used as a tool for
been lowered. Failure to follow this warning may changing tires only. The jack should not be used to
result in personal injury.
(Continued)
lift the vehicle for service purposes. The vehicle
should be jacked on a firm level surface only.
Avoid ice or slippery areas.
Jack Location/Spare Tire Stowage

The jack and spare tire are both stowed under an access
cover in the trunk. Follow these steps to access the jack
and spare tire.
NOTE: The spare tire must be removed in order to
access the jack.
Opening The Access Panel
1. Open the trunk. 3. Remove the fastener securing the spare tire.
2. Lift the access cover using the pull strap.
Spare Tire Fastener Jack Fastener

4. Remove the spare tire. 6. Remove the jack and lug wrench assembly from under
the spare tire. Turn the jack screw to the left to loosen
5. Remove the fastener securing the jack.
the lug wrench, and remove the wrench from the jack
assembly.
2. Turn on the Hazard Warning flasher.
WARNING!
3. Set the parking brake.
A loose tire or jack thrown forward in a collision or
hard stop could endanger the occupants of the ve- 4. Place the shift lever into PARK.
hicle. Always stow the jack parts and the spare tire in 5. Turn OFF the ignition.
the places provided. Have the deflated (flat) tire
repaired or replaced immediately. 6. Block both the front and rear of the wheel diagonally
opposite of the jacking position. For ex-
Preparations For Jacking ample, if changing the right front tire,
1. Park the vehicle on a firm, level surface as far from the block the left rear wheel.
edge of the roadway as possible. Avoid icy or slippery
areas.
NOTE: Passengers should not remain in the vehicle
WARNING! when the vehicle is being jacked.
Do not attempt to change a tire on the side of the

vehicle close to moving traffic, pull far enough off
the road to avoid being hit when operating the jack
or changing the wheel.
Jacking And Changing A Tire
WARNING! • Do not let anyone sit in the vehicle when it is on a
jack.
Carefully follow these tire changing warnings to • Do not get under the vehicle when it is on a jack. If
help prevent personal injury or damage to your you need to get under a raised vehicle, take it to a
vehicle: service center where it can be raised on a lift.
• Always park on a firm, level surface as far from the • Only use the jack in the positions indicated and for
edge of the roadway as possible before raising the lifting this vehicle during a tire change.
vehicle. • If working on or near a roadway, be extremely 6
• Turn on the Hazard Warning flasher. careful of motor traffic.
• Block the wheel diagonally opposite the wheel to
be raised.
• Set the parking brake firmly and set an automatic
transmission in PARK; a manual transmission in
REVERSE.
• Never start or run the engine with the vehicle on a
jack.
Jack Warning Label
(Continued)
1. Remove the spare tire, jack, and lug wrench.
CAUTION!
2. If equipped with aluminum wheels where the center
Do not attempt to raise the vehicle by jacking on cap covers the lug nuts, use the lug wrench to pry the
locations other than those indicated in the Jacking center cap off carefully before raising the vehicle.
Instructions for this vehicle.
3. Before raising the vehicle, use the lug wrench to
loosen, but not remove, the lug nuts on the wheel with
the flat tire. Turn the lug nuts counterclockwise one
turn while the wheel is still on the ground.
4. Place the jack underneath the lift area that is closest to
the flat tire. Turn the jack screw clockwise to firmly
engage the jack saddle with the lift area of the sill
flange.
NOTE: If the vehicle is too low for jack placement, slide
the jack on its side and rotate it up into position.
Jacking Locations
Front Jacking Location Rear Jacking Location

5. Raise the vehicle just enough to remove the flat tire
and install the spare tire.
WARNING!
Raising the vehicle higher than necessary can make
the vehicle less stable. It could slip off the jack and
hurt someone near it. Raise the vehicle only enough
to remove the tire.
6. Remove the lug nuts and tire.

7. Mount the spare tire.
CAUTION!
Be sure to mount the spare tire with the valve stem Mounting Spare Tire
facing outward. The vehicle could be damaged if the
spare tire is mounted incorrectly.
NOTE: 9. Lower the vehicle to the ground by turning the jack
• For vehicles so equipped, do not attempt to install a handle counterclockwise.
center cap or wheel cover on the compact spare. 10. Refer to Torque Specifications for proper lug nut
• Refer to “Compact Spare Tire” and to “Limited-Use torque.
Spare” under “Tires—General Information” in 11. Stow the jack, tools and flat tire. Make sure the base
“Starting and Operating” for additional warnings, of the jack faces the front of the vehicle before
cautions, and information about the spare tire, its tightening down the fastener.
use, and operation.
8. Install the lug nuts with the cone shaped end of the lug WARNING! 6
nut toward the wheel. Lightly tighten the lug nuts.
• A loose tire or jack thrown forward in a collision or
hard stop could endanger the occupants of the
WARNING! vehicle.
To avoid the risk of forcing the vehicle off the jack, • Always stow the jack parts and the spare tire in the
do not tighten the lug nuts fully until the vehicle has places provided. Have the deflated (flat) tire re-
been lowered. Failure to follow this warning may paired or replaced immediately.
result in personal injury.
Road Tire Installation 5. After 25 miles (40 km) check the lug nut torque with a
torque wrench to ensure that all lug nuts are properly
1. Mount the road tire on the axle.
seated against the wheel.
2. Install the remaining lug nuts with the cone shaped
end of the nut toward the wheel. Lightly tighten the JUMP-STARTING PROCEDURES
lug nuts. If your vehicle has a discharged battery it can be jump-
started using a set of jumper cables and a battery in
WARNING! another vehicle or by using a portable battery booster
pack. Jump-starting can be dangerous if done improperly
To avoid the risk of forcing the vehicle off the jack,
so please follow the procedures in this section carefully.
do not tighten the lug nuts fully until the vehicle has
been lowered. Failure to follow this warning may NOTE: When using a portable battery booster pack
result in personal injury. follow the manufacturer’s operating instructions and
precautions.
3. Lower the vehicle to the ground by turning the jack
handle counterclockwise. CAUTION!
4. Refer to Torque Table for proper lug nut torque. Do not use a portable battery booster pack or any
other booster source with a system voltage greater
(Continued)
than 12 Volts or damage to the battery, starter motor,
alternator or electrical system may occur.
WARNING!
Do not attempt jump-starting if the battery is frozen.
It could rupture or explode and cause personal injury.
6
Preparations For Jump-Start
The battery is stored under an access cover in the trunk.
Remote battery posts are located on the right side of the Remote Battery Post Locations
engine compartment for jump-starting. 1 — Remote Positive (+) Post
NOTE: The remote battery posts are viewed by standing 2 — Remote Negative (-) Post
on the right side of the vehicle looking over the fender.
3. If using another vehicle to jump-start the battery, park
WARNING!
the vehicle within the jumper cables reach, set the
• Take care to avoid the radiator cooling fan when- parking brake and make sure the ignition is OFF.
ever the hood is raised. It can start anytime the
ignition switch is ON. You can be injured by WARNING!
moving fan blades.
Do not allow vehicles to touch each other as this
• Remove any metal jewelry such as watch bands or
could establish a ground connection and personal
bracelets that might make an inadvertent electrical
injury could result.
contact. You could be seriously injured.
• Batteries contain sulfuric acid that can burn your Jump-Starting Procedure
skin or eyes and generate hydrogen gas which is
flammable and explosive. Keep open flames or
WARNING!
sparks away from the battery.
Failure to follow this jump-starting procedure could
1. Set the parking brake, shift the automatic transmission result in personal injury or property damage due to
into PARK and turn the ignition to LOCK. battery explosion.
2. Turn off the heater, radio, and all unnecessary electri-
cal accessories.
CAUTION! WARNING!
Failure to follow these procedures could result in Do not connect the jumper cable to the negative (-)
damage to the charging system of the booster vehicle post of the discharged battery. The resulting electri-
or the discharged vehicle. cal spark could cause the battery to explode and
could result in personal injury. Only use the specific
Connecting The Jumper Cables ground point, do not use any other exposed metal
1. Connect the positive (+) end of the jumper cable to the parts.
remote positive (+) post of the vehicle with the dis-
5. Start the engine in the vehicle that has the booster 6
charged battery.
battery, let the engine idle a few minutes, and then
2. Connect the opposite end of the positive (+) jumper start the engine in the vehicle with the discharged
cable to the positive (+) post of the booster battery. battery.
3. Connect the negative (-) end of the jumper cable to the
negative (-) post of the booster battery.
4. Connect the opposite end of the negative (-) jumper
cable to the remote negative (-) post of the vehicle with
the discharged battery.
6. Once the engine is started, remove the jumper cables
CAUTION!
in the reverse sequence:
Disconnecting The Jumper Cables Accessories plugged into the vehicle power outlets
draw power from the vehicle’s battery, even when not
1. Disconnect the negative (-) end of the jumper cable in use (i.e., cellular phones, etc.). Eventually, if
from the remote negative (-) post of the vehicle with plugged in long enough without engine operation,
the discharged battery. the vehicle’s battery will discharge sufficiently to
2. Disconnect the opposite end of the negative (-) jumper degrade battery life and/or prevent the engine from
cable from the negative (-) post of the booster battery. starting.
3. Disconnect the positive (+) end of the jumper cable FREEING A STUCK VEHICLE
from the positive (+) post of the booster battery.
If your vehicle becomes stuck in mud, sand, or snow, it
4. Disconnect the opposite end of the positive (+) jumper can often be moved using a rocking motion. Turn the
cable from the remote positive (+) post of the vehicle steering wheel right and left to clear the area around the
with the discharged battery. front wheels. Then shift back and forth between DRIVE
If frequent jump-starting is required to start your vehicle and REVERSE while gently pressing the accelerator. Use
you should have the battery and charging system in- the least amount of accelerator pedal pressure that will
spected at your authorized dealer. maintain the rocking motion, without spinning the
wheels or racing the engine.
NOTE: For vehicles with 8-speed transmission: Shifts NOTE: Press the ⬙ESC Off⬙ switch, to place the Electronic
between DRIVE and REVERSE can only be achieved at Stability Control (ESC) system in ⬙Partial Off⬙ mode,
wheel speeds of 5 mph (8 km/h) or less. Whenever the before rocking the vehicle. Refer to “Electronic Brake
transmission remains in NEUTRAL for more than 2 Control” in “Starting And Operating” for further infor-
seconds, you must press the brake pedal to engage mation. Once the vehicle has been freed, press the ⬙ESC
DRIVE or REVERSE. Off⬙ switch again to restore ⬙ESC On⬙ mode.
CAUTION! CAUTION!
Racing the engine or spinning the wheels may lead to • When “rocking” a stuck vehicle by shifting be- 6
transmission overheating and failure. Allow the en- tween DRIVE and REVERSE, do not spin the
gine to idle with the transmission in NEUTRAL for at wheels faster than 15 mph (24 km/h), or drivetrain
least one minute after every five rocking-motion damage may result.
cycles. This will minimize overheating and reduce • Revving the engine or spinning the wheels too fast
the risk of transmission failure during prolonged may lead to transmission overheating and failure.
efforts to free a stuck vehicle. It can also damage the tires. Do not spin the wheels
above 30 mph (48 km/h) while in gear (no trans-
mission shifting occurring).
SHIFT LEVER OVERRIDE — 5 SPEED
WARNING!
TRANSMISSION
Fast spinning tires can be dangerous. Forces gener- If a malfunction occurs and the shift lever cannot be
ated by excessive wheel speeds may cause damage, or moved out of the PARK position, you can use the
even failure, of the axle and tires. A tire could following procedure to temporarily move the shift lever:
explode and injure someone. Do not spin your vehi-
cle’s wheels faster than 30 mph (48 km/h) or for 1. Turn the engine OFF.
longer than 30 seconds continuously without stop- 2. Firmly apply the parking brake.
ping when you are stuck and do not let anyone near
a spinning wheel, no matter what the speed. 3. Remove the rubber liner from the storage tray (located
next to the shifter on the center console).
4. Press and maintain firm pressure on the brake pedal.
5. Insert a screwdriver or similar tool into the access port
(in the left side of the storage bin), and push and hold
the override release lever in.
MANUAL PARK RELEASE — 8 SPEED
TRANSMISSION
WARNING!
Always secure your vehicle by fully applying the
parking brake, before activating the Manual Park
Release. Activating the Manual Park Release will
allow your vehicle to roll away if it is not secured by
the parking brake or by proper connection to a tow 6
vehicle. Activating the Manual Park Release on an
unsecured vehicle could lead to serious injury or
Shift Lever Override death for those in or around the vehicle.
6. Move the shift lever to the NEUTRAL position. In order to push or tow the vehicle in cases where the
7. The vehicle may then be started in NEUTRAL. transmission will not shift out of PARK (such as a dead
battery), a Manual Park Release is available.
8. Reinstall the rubber storage bin liner.
Follow these steps to use the Manual Park Release: 3. Using a small screwdriver or similar tool, fish the
tether strap up through the opening in the console
1. Firmly apply the parking brake.
base.
2. Remove the console storage bin to access the Manual
4. Insert the screwdriver into the slot in the center of the
Park Release lever.
lever, and disengage the lever locking tab by pushing
it to the right.
Console Storage Bin

Locking Tab
5. While holding the locking tab in the disengaged To Reset The Manual Park Release:
position, pull the tether strap to rotate the lever up and
1. Push the latch (at the base of the lever, on the rear side)
rearward, until it locks in place in the vertical position.
rearward (away from the lever) to unlatch the lever.
The vehicle is now out of PARK and can be towed.
Release the parking brake only when the vehicle is 2. Rotate the Manual Park Release lever forward and
securely connected to a tow vehicle. down, to its original position, until the locking tab
snaps into place to secure the lever.
3. Pull up gently on the tether strap to confirm that the
lever is locked in its stowed position.
6
4. Tuck the tether strap into the base of the console.
Reinstall the console storage bin.
Tether Strap
TOWING A DISABLED VEHICLE
This section describes procedures for towing a disabled vehicle using a commercial wrecker service.
Towing Condition Wheels OFF the RWD MODELS AWD MODELS

Ground
Flat Tow NONE IF Transmission is operable: NOT ALLOWED
Wheel Lift Front • Transmission in NEUTRAL NOT ALLOWED
• 30 mph (48 km/h) max
speed
• 15 mi (24 km) max distance
(5-speed trans)
• 30 mi (48 km) max distance
(8-speed trans)
Rear OK • Ignition in ON/RUN
position
• Transmission in
NEUTRAL
Flatbed ALL BEST METHOD BEST METHOD
Proper towing or lifting equipment is required to prevent
CAUTION!
damage to your vehicle. Use only tow bars and other
equipment designed for this purpose, following equip- • Do not use sling type equipment when towing.
ment manufacturer’s instructions. Use of safety chains is Damage to the fascia will occur.
mandatory. Attach a tow bar or other towing device to • When securing the vehicle to a flatbed truck, do not
main structural members of the vehicle, not to bumpers attach to the front or rear suspension components.
or associated brackets. State and local laws regarding Damage to your vehicle may result from improper
vehicles under tow must be observed. towing.
If you must use the accessories (wipers, defrosters, etc.) • Do not push or tow this vehicle with another
vehicle as damage to the bumper fascia and trans- 6
while being towed, the ignition must be in the ON/RUN
position, not the ACC position. mission may result.
• The ignition switch must be in the ON/RUN posi-
If the vehicle’s battery is discharged, refer to “Manual tion, not in the OFF or ACC position.
Park Release” or “Shift Lever Override” in this section for • If the vehicle being towed requires steering, the
instructions on shifting the transmission out of PARK for ignition switch must be in the ON/RUN position,
towing. not in the OFF or ACC position.
• The manufacturer does not recommend towing this
vehicle using a tow dolly. Vehicle damage may
occur.
All Wheel Drive (AWD) Models
The manufacturer recommends towing your vehicle with • Damage from improper towing is not covered un-
all four wheels OFF the ground using a flatbed. der the New Vehicle Limited Warranty.
If the transmission and drivetrain are operable, vehicles
equipped with AWD can also be towed with the ignition Rear-Wheel Drive (RWD) Models
in the ON/RUN position, the transmission in NEUTRAL The manufacturer recommends towing your vehicle with
(not in PARK!), and the rear wheels OFF the ground with all four wheels OFF the ground using a flatbed.
no limitation on speed or distance. Since the ignition
If flatbed equipment is not available, and the transmis-
MUST be in the ON/RUN position to tow in this manner,
sion is operable, this vehicle may be towed (with rear
AWD vehicles must be towed with ALL FOUR wheels
wheels on the ground) under the following conditions:
OFF the ground (e.g. on a flatbed truck) if the Key Fob is
unavailable. • The transmission must be in NEUTRAL.
CAUTION! • The towing speed must not exceed 30 mph (48 km/h).
• Towing this vehicle using any other method could • The towing distance must not exceed 15 miles (24 km)
result in extensive damage to the transfer case for 5-speed transmission, or 30 miles (48 km) for
and/or transmission. 8-speed transmission.
(Continued)
If the transmission is not operable, or the vehicle must be Without The Key Fob
towed faster than 30 mph (48 km/h) or farther than 15 Special care must be taken when the vehicle is towed
miles (24 km) for 5-speed transmission, or 30 miles with the ignition in the LOCK/OFF position. The only
(48 km) for 8-speed transmission, tow with the rear approved method of towing without the Key Fob is with
wheels OFF the ground (on a flatbed, or with the rear a flatbed truck. Proper towing equipment is necessary to
wheels raised using a wheel lift and the transmission in prevent damage to the vehicle.
NEUTRAL).
CAUTION!
6
Towing this vehicle in violation of the above require-
ments can cause severe transmission damage. Dam-
age from improper towing is not covered under the
New Vehicle Limited Warranty.
MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE
CONTENTS
䡵 ENGINE COMPARTMENT — 3.6L . . . . . . . . . .539 ▫ Engine Air Cleaner Filter . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .549
䡵 ENGINE COMPARTMENT — 5.7L . . . . . . . . . .540 ▫ Maintenance-Free Battery . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .549
䡵 ONBOARD DIAGNOSTIC SYSTEM — OBD II . .541 ▫ Air Conditioner Maintenance . . . . . . . . . . . . .551
䡵 EMISSIONS INSPECTION AND MAINTENANCE ▫ A/C Air Filter . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .552
PROGRAMS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .541
▫ Body Lubrication . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .554 7
䡵 REPLACEMENT PARTS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .543
▫ Windshield Wiper Blades . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .555
䡵 DEALER SERVICE . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .543
▫ Adding Washer Fluid . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .555
䡵 MAINTENANCE PROCEDURES . . . . . . . . . . .544
▫ Exhaust System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .556
▫ Engine Oil . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .545
▫ Cooling System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .558
▫ Engine Oil Filter . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .548
▫ Brake System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .564
538 MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE
▫ Automatic Transmission . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .566 ▫ Front Low Beam Headlamp, High Beam
Headlamp, Park/Turn Lamp, And Side Marker
▫ All Wheel Drive (AWD) — If Equipped . . . . .568
Lamp — Models With Halogen Headlamps . . .590
▫ Rear Axle . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .569
▫ Front Low Beam Headlamp And Park/Turn Lamp
▫ Appearance Care And Protection From — Models With High Intensity Discharge
Corrosion . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .569 Headlamps (HID) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .590
䡵 FUSES . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .576 ▫ Backup Lamps. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .591
▫ Front Power Distribution Center (Fuses) . . . . .576 ▫ License Lamp . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .592
▫ Rear Power Distribution Center (Fuses) . . . . .581 䡵 FLUID CAPACITIES . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .593
䡵 VEHICLE STORAGE . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .588 䡵 FLUIDS, LUBRICANTS AND GENUINE
PARTS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .594
䡵 REPLACEMENT BULBS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .588
▫ Engine . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .594
䡵 BULB REPLACEMENT . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .589
▫ Chassis . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .595
MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE 539
ENGINE COMPARTMENT — 3.6L
1 — Remote Jump Start (Positive Battery Post) 4 — Engine Oil Dipstick 7 — Air Cleaner Filter
2 — Power Distribution Center (Fuses) 5 — Brake Fluid Reservoir Access Cover 8 — Engine Oil Fill
3 — Remote Jump Start (Negative Battery 6 — Engine Coolant Reservoir 9 — Washer Fluid Reservoir
Post)
ENGINE COMPARTMENT — 5.7L
1 — Remote Jump Start (Positive Battery 4 — Brake Fluid Reservoir Access Cover 7 — Engine Oil Fill
Post)
2 — Power Distribution Center (Fuses) 5 — Engine Coolant Reservoir 8 — Engine Oil Dipstick
3 — Remote Jump Start (Negative Battery 6 — Air Cleaner Filter 9 — Washer Fluid Reservoir
Post)
ONBOARD DIAGNOSTIC SYSTEM — OBD II
CAUTION!
Your vehicle is equipped with a sophisticated onboard
diagnostic system called OBD II. This system monitors • Prolonged driving with the MIL on could cause
the performance of the emissions, engine, and automatic further damage to the emissions control system. It
transmission control systems. When these systems are could also affect fuel economy and driveability.
operating properly, your vehicle will provide excellent The vehicle must be serviced before any emissions
performance and fuel economy, as well as engine emis- tests can be performed.
sions well within current government regulations. • If the MIL is flashing while the engine is running,
severe catalytic converter damage and power loss
If any of these systems require service, the OBD II system will soon occur. Immediate service is required.
will turn on the “Malfunction Indicator Light (MIL).” It
will also store diagnostic codes and other information to EMISSIONS INSPECTION AND MAINTENANCE 7
assist your service technician in making repairs. Al- PROGRAMS
though your vehicle will usually be drivable and not
need towing, see your authorized dealer for service as In some localities, it may be a legal requirement to pass
soon as possible. an inspection of your vehicle’s emissions control system.
Failure to pass could prevent vehicle registration.
For states that require an Inspection and Mainte-
nance (I/M), this check verifies the “Malfunction
Indicator Light (MIL)” is functioning and is not on when 2. As soon as you cycle the ignition switch to the ON
the engine is running, and that the OBD II system is position, you will see the MIL symbol come on as part
ready for testing. of a normal bulb check.
Normally, the OBD II system will be ready. The OBD II 3. Approximately 15 seconds later, one of two things will
system may not be ready if your vehicle was recently happen:
serviced, recently had a dead battery or a battery replace-
• The MIL will flash for about 10 seconds and then
ment. If the OBD II system should be determined not
return to being fully illuminated until you turn OFF
ready for the I/M test, your vehicle may fail the test.
the ignition or start the engine. This means that your
Your vehicle has a simple ignition actuated test, which vehicle’s OBD II system is not ready and you should
you can use prior to going to the test station. To check if not proceed to the I/M station.
your vehicle’s OBD II system is ready, you must do the
• The MIL will not flash at all and will remain fully
following:
illuminated until you turn OFF the ignition or start the
1. Cycle the ignition switch to the ON position, but do engine. This means that your vehicle’s OBD II system
not crank or start the engine. is ready and you can proceed to the I/M station.
NOTE: If you crank or start the engine, you will have to If your OBD II system is not ready, you should see your
start this test over. authorized dealer or repair facility. If your vehicle was
recently serviced or had a battery failure or replacement,
you may need to do nothing more than drive your DEALER SERVICE
vehicle as you normally would in order for your OBD II Your authorized dealer has the qualified service person-
system to update. A recheck with the above test routine nel, special tools, and equipment to perform all service
may then indicate that the system is now ready. operations in an expert manner. Service Manuals are
Regardless of whether your vehicle’s OBD II system is available which include detailed service information for
ready or not, if the MIL is illuminated during normal your vehicle. Refer to these Service Manuals before
vehicle operation you should have your vehicle serviced attempting any procedure yourself.
before going to the I/M station. The I/M station can fail NOTE: Intentional tampering with emissions control
your vehicle because the MIL is on with the engine systems may void your warranty and could result in civil
running. penalties being assessed against you.
7
REPLACEMENT PARTS
WARNING!
Use of genuine MOPAR® parts for normal/scheduled
maintenance and repairs is highly recommended to en- You can be badly injured working on or around a
sure the designed performance. Damage or failures motor vehicle. Only do service work for which you
caused by the use of non-MOPAR® parts for mainte- have the knowledge and the proper equipment. If you
nance and repairs will not be covered by the New Vehicle have any doubt about your ability to perform a service
Limited Warranty. job, take your vehicle to a competent mechanic.
MAINTENANCE PROCEDURES
The pages that follow contain the required maintenance • Your vehicle has been built with improved fluids
services determined by the engineers who designed your that protect the performance and durability of your
vehicle. vehicle and also allow extended maintenance inter-
Besides those maintenance items specified in the fixed vals. Do not use chemical flushes in these compo-
“Maintenance Schedule”, there are other components nents as the chemicals can damage your engine,
which may require servicing or replacement in the future. transmission, power steering or air conditioning.
Such damage is not covered by the New Vehicle
CAUTION! Limited Warranty. If a flush is needed because of
component malfunction, use only the specified
• Failure to properly maintain your vehicle or per- fluid for the flushing procedure.
form repairs and service when necessary could
result in more costly repairs, damage to other
components or negatively impact vehicle perfor-
mance. Immediately have potential malfunctions
examined by an authorized dealer or qualified
repair center.
(Continued)
Engine Oil Checking Oil Level — 5.7L Engine
Checking Oil Level — 3.6L Engine To assure proper engine lubrication, the engine oil must
be maintained at the correct level. Check the oil level at
To assure proper engine lubrication, the engine oil must
regular intervals, such as every fuel stop. The best time to
be maintained at the correct level. Check the oil level at
check the engine oil level is about five minutes after a
regular intervals, such as every fuel stop. The best time to
fully warmed engine is shut off.
check the engine oil level is about five minutes after a
fully warmed engine is shut off. Checking the oil while the vehicle is on level ground will
improve the accuracy of the oil level readings. Maintain
Checking the oil while the vehicle is on level ground will
the oil level in the “SAFE” range. Adding 1.0 qt (1.0 L) of
improve the accuracy of the oil level readings. Maintain
oil when the reading is at the bottom of the “SAFE” range
the oil level between the MIN and MAX markings on the 7
will result in an oil level at the top of the “SAFE” range
dipstick. Adding 1.0 qt (1.0 L) of oil when the reading is
on these engines.
at the MIN mark will result in a MAX reading on these
engines.
CAUTION!
CAUTION! Overfilling or underfilling will cause oil aeration or
loss of oil pressure. This could damage your engine.
Overfilling or underfilling will cause oil aeration or
loss of oil pressure. This could damage your engine.
Change Engine Oil American Petroleum Institute (API) Engine Oil
The oil change indicator system will remind you that it is Identification Symbol
time to take your vehicle in for scheduled maintenance.
Refer to the “Maintenance Schedule” for further informa- This symbol means that the oil has
tion. been certified by the American
Petroleum Institute (API). The
NOTE: Under no circumstances should oil change in-
manufacturer only recommends
tervals exceed 10,000 miles (16,000 km) or twelve
API Certified engine oils.
months, whichever occurs first.
Engine Oil Selection
For best performance and maximum protection under all
types of operating conditions, the manufacturer only
CAUTION!
recommends engine oils that are API Certified and meet
the requirements of Chrysler Material Standard MS-6395. Do not use chemical flushes in your engine oil as the
chemicals can damage your engine. Such damage is
not covered by the New Vehicle Limited Warranty.
Engine Oil Viscosity — 3.6L Engine Engine Oil Viscosity — 5.7L Engine
MOPAR® SAE 5W-20 engine oil approved to Chrysler MOPAR® SAE 5W-20 engine oil or equivalent such as
Material Standard MS-6395 such as Pennzoil®, Shell Pennzoil® or Shell Helix® is recommended for all oper-
Helix® or equivalent is recommended for all operating ating temperatures. This engine oil improves low tem-
temperatures. This engine oil improves low temperature perature starting and vehicle fuel economy.
starting and vehicle fuel economy.
The engine oil filler cap also shows the recommended
The engine oil filler cap also shows the recommended engine oil viscosity for your engine. For information on
engine oil viscosity for your engine. For information on engine oil filler cap location, refer to “Engine Compart-
engine oil filler cap location, refer to the “Engine Com- ment” in “Maintaining Your Vehicle” for further informa-
partment” illustration in this section. tion.
7
NOTE: MOPAR® SAE 5W-30 engine oil approved to NOTE: Vehicles equipped with a 5.7L engine must use
Chrysler Material Standard MS-6395 such as Pennzoil®, SAE 5W-20 oil. Failure to do so may result in improper
Shell Helix® or equivalent may be used when SAE 5W-20 operation of the Fuel Saver Technology. Refer to “Fuel
engine oil meeting MS-6395 is not available. Saver Technology – If Equipped” in “Starting and Oper-
ating” for further information.
Lubricants that do not have both, the engine oil certifi- indiscriminately discarded, can present a problem to the
cation mark and the correct SAE viscosity grade number environment. Contact your authorized dealer, service
should not be used. station or governmental agency for advice on how and
where used oil and oil filters can be safely discarded in
Synthetic Engine Oils
your area.
You may use synthetic engine oils provided the recom-
Engine Oil Filter
mended oil quality requirements are met, and the recom-
mended maintenance intervals for oil and filter changes The engine oil filter should be replaced with a new filter
are followed. at every engine oil change.
Materials Added To Engine Oil Engine Oil Filter Selection
The manufacturer strongly recommends against the ad- This manufacturer’s engines have a full-flow type oil
dition of any additives (other than leak detection dyes) to filter. Use a filter of this type for replacement. The quality
the engine oil. Engine oil is an engineered product and its of replacement filters varies considerably. Only high
performance may be impaired by supplemental addi- quality filters should be used to assure most efficient
tives. service. MOPAR® engine oil filters are a high quality oil
filter and are recommended.
Disposing Of Used Engine Oil And Oil Filters
Care should be taken in disposing of used engine oil and
oil filters from your vehicle. Used oil and oil filters,
Engine Air Cleaner Filter Engine Air Cleaner Filter Selection
Refer to the “Maintenance Schedule” for the proper The quality of replacement engine air cleaner filters
maintenance intervals. varies considerably. Only high quality filters should be
used to assure most efficient service. MOPAR® engine air
WARNING! cleaner filters are a high quality filter and are recom-
mended.
The air induction system (air cleaner, hoses, etc.) can
provide a measure of protection in the case of engine Maintenance-Free Battery
backfire. Do not remove the air induction system (air Your vehicle is equipped with a maintenance-free battery.
cleaner, hoses, etc.) unless such removal is necessary You will never have to add water, nor is periodic main-
for repair or maintenance. Make sure that no one is tenance required.
near the engine compartment before starting the 7
vehicle with the air induction system (air cleaner, NOTE: The battery is stored under an access cover in
hoses, etc.) removed. Failure to do so can result in the trunk. Remote battery terminals are located in the
serious personal injury. engine compartment for jump starting. Refer to “Jump-
Starting Procedures” in “What To Do In Emergencies”
for further information.
over a battery when attaching clamps. If acid
splashes in eyes or on skin, flush the area imme-
diately with large amounts of water.
• Battery gas is flammable and explosive. Keep
flame or sparks away from the battery. Do not use
a booster battery or any other booster source with
an output greater than 12 Volts. Do not allow cable
clamps to touch each other.
• Battery posts, terminals, and related accessories
contain lead and lead compounds. Wash hands
Battery Location after handling.
• The battery in this vehicle has a vent hose that
WARNING! should not be disconnected and should only be
• Battery fluid is a corrosive acid solution and can replaced with a battery of the same type (vented).
burn or even blind you. Do not allow battery fluid
to contact your eyes, skin, or clothing. Do not lean
(Continued)
test. Drive belt tension should also be checked at this
CAUTION!
time.
• It is essential when replacing the cables on the
battery that the positive cable is attached to the WARNING!
positive post and the negative cable is attached to
• Use only refrigerants and compressor lubricants
the negative post. Battery posts are marked positive
approved by the manufacturer for your air condi-
(+) and negative (-) and are identified on the
tioning system. Some unapproved refrigerants are
battery case. Cable clamps should be tight on the
flammable and can explode, injuring you. Other
terminal posts and free of corrosion.
unapproved refrigerants or lubricants can cause the
• If a “fast charger” is used while the battery is in the
system to fail, requiring costly repairs. Refer to
vehicle, disconnect both vehicle battery cables be-
Warranty Information Book, located on the DVD, 7
fore connecting the charger to the battery. Do not
for further warranty information.
use a “fast charger” to provide starting voltage.
• The air conditioning system contains refrigerant
Air Conditioner Maintenance under high pressure. To avoid risk of personal
injury or damage to the system, adding refrigerant
For best possible performance, your air conditioner or any repair requiring lines to be disconnected
should be checked and serviced by an authorized dealer should be done by an experienced technician.
at the start of each warm season. This service should
include cleaning of the condenser fins and a performance
Refrigerant Recovery And Recycling HFO 1234yf
CAUTION!
— If Equipped
Do not use chemical flushes in your air conditioning HFO 1234yf Air Conditioning Refrigerant is a hydro-
system as the chemicals can damage your air condi- fluorocarbon (HFC) that is endorsed by the Environmen-
tioning components. Such damage is not covered by tal Protection Agency and is an ozone-saving product
the New Vehicle Limited Warranty. with a low GWP (Global Warming Potential). However,
the manufacturer recommends that air conditioning ser-
Refrigerant Recovery And Recycling R134a — If
vice be performed by authorized dealer or other service
Equipped
facilities using recovery and recycling equipment.
R-134a Air Conditioning Refrigerant is a hydrofluoro-
carbon (HFC) that is endorsed by the Environmental NOTE: Use only manufacturer approved A/C system
Protection Agency and is an ozone-saving product. How- PAG compressor oil, and refrigerants.
ever, the manufacturer recommends that air conditioning A/C Air Filter
service be performed by authorized dealer or other
The filter is located in the fresh air inlet under the hood,
service facilities using recovery and recycling equipment.
behind a removable panel in the cowl on the passenger
NOTE: Use only manufacturer approved A/C system side of the vehicle, next to the windshield wipers. When
PAG compressor oil, and refrigerants. installing a new filter, ensure its proper orientation.
1. Remove the access door in the cowl screen by pressing
the retaining clips.
7
Filter Access Cover
3. Remove the used filter.
Access Door
4. Install the new filter with arrows pointing in the
2. Unsnap both ends and lift the filter access cover. direction of airflow, which is toward the rear of the
vehicle (text and arrows on the filter will indicate this).
Body Lubrication
Locks and all body pivot points, including such items as
seat tracks, door hinge pivot points and rollers, liftgate,
tailgate, decklid, sliding doors and hood hinges, should
be lubricated periodically with a lithium based grease,
such as MOPAR® Spray White Lube to assure quiet, easy
operation and to protect against rust and wear. Prior to
the application of any lubricant, the parts concerned
should be wiped clean to remove dust and grit; after
lubricating excess oil and grease should be removed.
Particular attention should also be given to hood latching
components to ensure proper function. When performing
A/C Air Filter
other underhood services, the hood latch, release mecha-
5. Close the filter access cover.
nism and safety catch should be cleaned and lubricated.
Refer to the “Maintenance Schedule” for the proper
The external lock cylinders should be lubricated twice a
maintenance intervals.
year, preferably in the Fall and Spring. Apply a small
amount of a high quality lubricant, such as MOPAR®
Lock Cylinder Lubricant directly into the lock cylinder.
Windshield Wiper Blades Adding Washer Fluid
Clean the rubber edges of the wiper blades and the The windshield washer fluid reservoir is located in the
windshield periodically with a sponge or soft cloth and a front of the engine compartment. Be sure to check the
mild nonabrasive cleaner. This will remove accumula- fluid level at regular intervals. Fill the reservoir with
tions of salt or road film. windshield washer solvent (not radiator antifreeze) and
Operation of the wipers on dry glass for long periods operate the system for a few seconds to flush out the
residual water.
may cause deterioration of the wiper blades. Always use
washer fluid when using the wipers to remove salt or dirt When refilling the washer fluid reservoir, apply some
from a dry windshield. washer fluid to a cloth or towel and wipe the wiper
blades clean. This will help blade performance.
Avoid using the wiper blades to remove frost or ice from
7
the windshield. Keep the blade rubber out of contact with To prevent freeze-up of your windshield washer system
petroleum products such as engine oil, gasoline, etc. in cold weather, select a solution or mixture that meets or
exceeds the temperature range of your climate. This
NOTE: Life expectancy of wiper blades varies depend-
rating information can be found on most washer fluid
ing on geographical area and frequency of use. Poor
containers.
performance of blades may be present with chattering,
marks, water lines or wet spots. If any of these conditions The fluid reservoir will hold nearly 1 gal (4 L) of washer
are present, clean the wiper blades or replace as neces- fluid when the message “Low Washer Fluid” appears in
sary.
the Electronic Vehicle Information Center (EVIC) (if have an authorized technician inspect the complete ex-
equipped). haust system and adjacent body areas for broken, dam-
aged, deteriorated, or mispositioned parts. Open seams
WARNING! or loose connections could permit exhaust fumes to seep
into the passenger compartment. In addition, have the
Commercially available windshield washer solvents exhaust system inspected each time the vehicle is raised
are flammable. They could ignite and burn you. Care for lubrication or oil change. Replace as required.
must be exercised when filling or working around
the washer solution. WARNING!
Exhaust System • Exhaust gases can injure or kill. They contain
The best protection against carbon monoxide entry into carbon monoxide (CO), which is colorless and
the vehicle body is a properly maintained engine exhaust odorless. Breathing it can make you unconscious
system. and can eventually poison you. To avoid breathing
CO, refer to “Safety Tips/Exhaust Gas” in “Things
If you notice a change in the sound of the exhaust system; To Know Before Starting Your Vehicle” for further
or if the exhaust fumes can be detected inside the vehicle; information.
or when the underside or rear of the vehicle is damaged;
(Continued)
WARNING! (Continued) CAUTION! (Continued)

• A hot exhaust system can start a fire if you park In the event of engine malfunction, particularly
over materials that can burn. Such materials might involving engine misfire or other apparent loss of
be grass or leaves coming into contact with your performance, have your vehicle serviced promptly.
exhaust system. Do not park or operate your ve- Continued operation of your vehicle with a severe
hicle in areas where your exhaust system can con- malfunction could cause the converter to overheat,
tact anything that can burn. resulting in possible damage to the converter and
vehicle.
CAUTION! Under normal operating conditions, the catalytic con-
• The catalytic converter requires the use of un- verter will not require maintenance. However, it is im- 7
leaded fuel only. Leaded gasoline will destroy the portant to keep the engine properly tuned to assure
effectiveness of the catalyst as an emissions control proper catalyst operation and prevent possible catalyst
device and may seriously reduce engine perfor- damage.
mance and cause serious damage to the engine. NOTE: Intentional tampering with emissions control
• Damage to the catalytic converter can result if your systems can result in civil penalties being assessed
vehicle is not kept in proper operating condition. against you.
(Continued)
In unusual situations involving grossly malfunctioning Cooling System
engine operation, a scorching odor may suggest severe
and abnormal catalyst overheating. If this occurs, stop WARNING!
the vehicle, turn off the engine and allow it to cool.
Service, including a tune-up to manufacturer’s specifica- • When working near the radiator cooling fan, dis-
tions, should be obtained immediately. connect the fan motor lead or cycle the ignition
switch to the LOCK position. The fan is tempera-
To minimize the possibility of catalytic converter dam- ture controlled and can start at any time the igni-
age: tion switch is in the ON position.
• Do not shut off the engine or interrupt the ignition, • You or others can be badly burned by hot engine
when the transmission is in gear and the vehicle is in coolant (antifreeze) or steam from your radiator. If
motion. you see or hear steam coming from under the hood,
do not open the hood until the radiator has had
• Do not try to start the engine by pushing or towing the
time to cool. Never try to open a cooling system
vehicle.
pressure cap when the radiator is hot.
• Do not idle the engine with any spark plug wires
disconnected or removed, such as when diagnostic Coolant Checks
testing, or for prolonged periods during very rough Check engine coolant (antifreeze) protection every 12
idle or malfunctioning operating conditions. months (before the onset of freezing weather, where
applicable). If the engine coolant (antifreeze) is dirty, the bottle. DO NOT REMOVE THE COOLANT PRESSURE
system should be drained, flushed, and refilled with CAP WHEN THE COOLING SYSTEM IS HOT.
fresh OAT coolant (conforming to MS-12106) only ac-
Cooling System — Drain, Flush And Refill
cording to Chrysler Service Manual procedure or by an
authorized dealer. Check the front of the radiator for any If the engine coolant (antifreeze) is dirty or contains
accumulation of bugs, leaves, etc. If dirty, clean by gently visible sediment, have an authorized dealer clean and
spraying water from a garden hose vertically down the flush with OAT coolant (antifreeze) (conforming to MS-
face of the condenser. 12106).
Check the coolant recovery bottle tubing for brittle rub- Refer to the “Maintenance Schedule” for the proper
ber, cracking, tears, cuts, and tightness of the connection maintenance intervals.
at the bottle and radiator. Inspect the entire system for NOTE: Some vehicles require special tools to add coolant 7
leaks. properly. Failure to fill these systems properly could lead
With the engine at normal operating temperature (but to severe internal engine damage. If any coolant is
not running), check the cooling system pressure cap for needed to be added to the system please contact your
proper vacuum sealing by draining a small amount of local authorized dealer.
engine coolant (antifreeze) from the radiator drain cock.
If the cap is sealing properly, the engine coolant (anti-
freeze) will begin to drain from the coolant recovery
Selection Of Coolant
Refer to “Fluids, Lubricants, and Genuine Parts” in OAT coolant (conforming to MS-12106), by an
“Maintaining Your Vehicle” for further information. authorized dealer as soon as possible.
• Do not use water alone or alcohol-based engine
CAUTION! coolant (antifreeze) products. Do not use additional
• Mixing of engine coolant (antifreeze) other than rust inhibitors or antirust products, as they may not
specified Organic Additive Technology (OAT) en- be compatible with the radiator engine coolant and
gine coolant (antifreeze), may result in engine may plug the radiator.
damage and may decrease corrosion protection. • This vehicle has not been designed for use with
Organic Additive Technology (OAT) engine cool- propylene glycol-based engine coolant (antifreeze).
ant is different and should not be mixed with Use of propylene glycol-based engine coolant (an-
Hybrid Organic Additive Technology (HOAT) en- tifreeze) is not recommended.
gine coolant (antifreeze) or any “globally compat-
Adding Coolant
ible” coolant (antifreeze). If a non-OAT engine
coolant (antifreeze) is introduced into the cooling Your vehicle has been built with an improved engine
system in an emergency, the cooling system will coolant (OAT coolant conforming to MS-12106) that
need to be drained, flushed, and refilled with fresh allows extended maintenance intervals. This engine cool-
ant (antifreeze) can be used up to ten years or 150,000
(Continued)
miles (240,000 km) before replacement. To prevent reduc- • Use only high purity water such as distilled or deion-
ing this extended maintenance period, it is important that ized water when mixing the water/engine coolant
you use the same engine coolant (OAT coolant conform- (antifreeze) solution. The use of lower quality water
ing to MS-12106) throughout the life of your vehicle. will reduce the amount of corrosion protection in the
engine cooling system.
Please review these recommendations for using Organic
Additive Technology (OAT) engine coolant (antifreeze) Please note that it is the owner’s responsibility to main-
that meets the requirements of Chrysler Material Stan- tain the proper level of protection against freezing ac-
dard MS-12106. When adding engine coolant (antifreeze): cording to the temperatures occurring in the area where
the vehicle is operated.
• We recommend using MOPAR® Antifreeze/Coolant
10 Year/150,000 Mile Formula OAT (Organic Additive NOTE:
Technology) that meets the requirements of Chrysler 7
• Some vehicles require special tools to add coolant
Material Standard MS-12106.
properly. Failure to fill these systems properly could
• Mix a minimum solution of 50% OAT engine coolant lead to severe internal engine damage. If any coolant is
that meets the requirements of Chrysler Material Stan- needed to be added to the system please contact your
dard MS-12106 and distilled water. Use higher concen- local authorized dealer.
trations (not to exceed 70%) if temperatures below
• Mixing engine coolant (antifreeze) types is not recom-
−34° F (−37° C) are anticipated.
mended and can result in cooling system damage. If
HOAT and OAT coolant are mixed in an emergency,
have a authorized dealer drain, flush, and refill with
OAT coolant (conforming to MS-12106) as soon as an overheated engine. Heat causes pressure to
possible. build up in the cooling system. To prevent scalding
or injury, do not remove the pressure cap while the
Cooling System Pressure Cap system is hot or under pressure.
The cap must be fully tightened to prevent loss of engine • Do not use a pressure cap other than the one
coolant (antifreeze), and to ensure that engine coolant specified for your vehicle. Personal injury or en-
(antifreeze) will return to the radiator from the coolant gine damage may result.
recovery tank.
Disposal Of Used Engine Coolant
The cap should be inspected and cleaned if there is any
Used ethylene glycol-based engine coolant (antifreeze) is
accumulation of foreign material on the sealing surfaces.
a regulated substance requiring proper disposal. Check
with your local authorities to determine the disposal
WARNING!
rules for your community. To prevent ingestion by ani-
• Do not open hot engine cooling system. Never add mals or children, do not store ethylene glycol-based
engine coolant (antifreeze) when the engine is engine coolant in open containers or allow it to remain in
overheated. Do not loosen or remove the cap to cool
(Continued)
puddles on the ground. If ingested by a child or pet, seek When additional engine coolant (antifreeze) is needed to
emergency assistance immediately. Clean up any ground maintain the proper level, only OAT coolant that meets
spills immediately. the requirements of Chrysler Material Standard MS-
12106 should be added to the coolant bottle. Do not
Coolant Level
overfill.
The coolant bottle provides a quick visual method for
determining that the coolant level is adequate. With the Points To Remember
engine OFF and cold, the level of the engine coolant NOTE: When the vehicle is stopped after a few miles/
(antifreeze) in the bottle should be between the ranges kilometers of operation, you may observe vapor coming
indicated on the bottle. from the front of the engine compartment. This is nor-
mally a result of moisture from rain, snow, or high
The radiator normally remains completely full, so there is 7
humidity accumulating on the radiator and being vapor-
no need to remove the radiator/coolant pressure cap
ized when the thermostat opens, allowing hot engine
unless checking for engine coolant (antifreeze) freeze
coolant (antifreeze) to enter the radiator.
point or replacing coolant. Advise your service attendant
of this. As long as the engine operating temperature is If an examination of your engine compartment shows no
satisfactory, the coolant bottle need only be checked once evidence of radiator or hose leaks, the vehicle may be
a month. safely driven. The vapor will soon dissipate.
• Do not overfill the coolant expansion bottle.
• Check the coolant freeze point in the radiator and in • Do not change the thermostat for Summer or Winter
the coolant expansion bottle. If engine coolant (anti- operation. If replacement is ever necessary, install
freeze) needs to be added, the contents of the coolant ONLY the correct type thermostat. Other designs may
expansion bottle must also be protected against freez- result in unsatisfactory engine coolant (antifreeze)
ing. performance, poor gas mileage, and increased emis-
sions.
• If frequent engine coolant (antifreeze) additions are
required, the cooling system should be pressure tested Brake System
for leaks.
In order to assure brake system performance, all brake
• Maintain engine coolant (antifreeze) concentration at a system components should be inspected periodically.
minimum of 50% OAT coolant (conforming to MS- Refer to the “Maintenance Schedule” for the proper
12106) and distilled water for proper corrosion protec- maintenance intervals.
tion of your engine which contains aluminum compo-
nents. WARNING!
• Make sure that the coolant expansion bottle overflow Riding the brakes can lead to brake failure and
hoses are not kinked or obstructed. possibly a collision. Driving with your foot resting or
• Keep the front of the radiator clean. If your vehicle is riding on the brake pedal can result in abnormally
equipped with air conditioning, keep the front of the
condenser clean. (Continued)
Add enough fluid to bring the level up to the require-
ments described on the brake fluid reservoir. With disc
high brake temperatures, excessive lining wear, and brakes, fluid level can be expected to fall as the brake
possible brake damage. You would not have your full pads wear. However, low fluid level may be caused by a
braking capacity in an emergency. leak and a checkup may be needed.
Master Cylinder — Brake Fluid Level Check Use only manufacturer’s recommended brake fluid. Re-
fer to “Fluids, Lubricants, and Genuine Parts” in “Main-
Check the fluid level in the master cylinder immediately
taining Your Vehicle” for further information.
if the brake system warning light indicates system fail-
ure.
WARNING!
Check the fluid level in the master cylinder when per- 7
forming underhood services. • Use only manufacturer’s recommended brake
fluid. Refer to “Fluids, Lubricants, and Genuine
Clean the top of the master cylinder area before removing Parts” in “Maintaining Your Vehicle” for further
the cap. Add fluid to bring the level up to the top of the information. Using the wrong type of brake fluid
“FULL” mark on the side of the master cylinder reservoir. can severely damage your brake system and/or
Overfilling of fluid is not recommended because it may impair its performance. The proper type of brake
cause leaking in the system. fluid for your vehicle is also identified on the
(Continued)

original factory installed hydraulic master cylinder • Do not allow petroleum based fluid to contaminate
reservoir. the brake fluid. Brake seal components could be
• To avoid contamination from foreign matter or damaged, causing partial or complete brake failure.
moisture, use only new brake fluid or fluid that has This could result in a collision.
been in a tightly closed container. Keep the master
cylinder reservoir cap secured at all times. Brake Use only brake fluid that has been in a tightly closed
fluid in a open container absorbs moisture from the container to avoid contamination from foreign matter or
air resulting in a lower boiling point. This may moisture.
cause it to boil unexpectedly during hard or pro- Automatic Transmission
longed braking, resulting in sudden brake failure.
This could result in a collision. Selection Of Lubricant
• Overfilling the brake fluid reservoir can result in It is important to use the proper transmission fluid to
spilling brake fluid on hot engine parts, causing ensure optimum transmission performance and life. Use
the brake fluid to catch fire. Brake fluid can also only the manufacturer’s specified transmission fluid.
damage painted and vinyl surfaces, care should be Refer to “Fluids, Lubricants, and Genuine Parts” in this
taken to avoid its contact with these surfaces. section for fluid specifications. It is important to maintain
the transmission fluid at the correct level using the
(Continued)
recommended fluid. No chemical flushes should be used Automatic Transmission Fluid (ATF) is an engineered
in any transmission; only the approved lubricant should product and its performance may be impaired by supple-
be used. mental additives. Therefore, do not add any fluid addi-
tives to the transmission. The only exception to this
CAUTION! policy is the use of special dyes for diagnosing fluid
leaks. Avoid using transmission sealers as they may
Using a transmission fluid other than the manufac- adversely affect seals.
turer’s recommended fluid may cause deterioration
in transmission shift quality and/or torque converter CAUTION!
shudder, and will require more frequent fluid and
filter changes. Refer to “Fluids, Lubricants, and Do not use chemical flushes in your transmission as
Genuine Parts” in this section for fluid specifica- the chemicals can damage your transmission compo- 7
tions. nents. Such damage is not covered by the New
Vehicle Limited Warranty.
Special Additives
The manufacturer strongly recommends against using Fluid Level Check
any special additives in the transmission. The fluid level is preset at the factory and does not
require adjustment under normal operating conditions.
Routine fluid level checks are not required, therefore the
transmission has no dipstick. Your authorized dealer can In addition, change the fluid and filter if the fluid
check your transmission fluid level using special service becomes contaminated (with water, etc.), or if the trans-
tools. mission is disassembled for any reason.
If you notice fluid leakage or transmission malfunction, Fluid And Filter Changes — 8-Speed Transmission
visit your authorized dealer immediately to have the Under normal operating conditions, the fluid installed at
transmission fluid level checked. Operating the vehicle the factory will provide satisfactory lubrication for the
with an improper fluid level can cause severe transmis- life of the vehicle. Routine fluid and filter changes are not
sion damage. required. However, change the fluid and filter if the fluid
becomes contaminated (with water, etc.), or if the trans-
CAUTION! mission is disassembled for any reason.
If a transmission fluid leak occurs, visit your autho- All Wheel Drive (AWD) — If Equipped
rized dealer immediately. Severe transmission dam-
age may occur. Your authorized dealer has the proper The all wheel drive system consists of a transfer case and
tools to adjust the fluid level accurately. front differential. The exterior surface of these compo-
nents should be inspected for evidence of fluid leaks.
Fluid And Filter Changes — 5-Speed Transmission Confirmed leaks should be repaired as soon as possible.
Refer to the “Maintenance Schedule” for the proper The transfer case fluid fill/inspection plug is located in
maintenance intervals. the middle of the rear housing. To inspect the transfer
case fluid level, remove the fill/inspection plug. The fluid level. Refer to “Fluids, Lubricants, and Genuine
fluid level should be even with the bottom of the hole. Parts” in “Maintaining Your Vehicle” for further informa-
Use this plug to add fluid as required. tion.
The front differential fill plug is located on the outer Fluid Level Check
cover near the halfshaft attachment. To inspect the differ-
Check the fluid level by removing the fill plug on the
ential fluid level, remove the fill plug. The fluid level
axle. The fluid level should be at the bottom of the fill
should be even with or slightly below the bottom of the
hole. Add fluid, if necessary, to maintain the proper level.
hole.
Refer to “Fluids, Lubricants, and Genuine Parts” in
Fluid Changes “Maintaining Your Vehicle” for further information.
Refer to the “Maintenance Schedule” for the proper Change Axle Fluid 7
maintenance intervals.
Refer to the “Maintenance Schedule” for the proper
Rear Axle maintenance intervals.
For normal service, periodic fluid level checks are not Appearance Care And Protection From Corrosion
required. When the vehicle is serviced for other reasons
Protection Of Body And Paint From Corrosion
the exterior surfaces of the axle assembly should be
inspected. If gear oil leakage is suspected inspect the Vehicle body care requirements vary according to geo-
graphic locations and usage. Chemicals that make roads
passable in snow and ice, and chemicals that are sprayed • Stone and gravel impact.
on trees and road surfaces during other seasons, are • Insects, tree sap and tar.
highly corrosive to the metal in your vehicle. Outside
parking, which exposes your vehicle to airborne contami- • Salt in the air near seacoast localities.
nants, road surfaces on which the vehicle is operated, • Atmospheric fallout/industrial pollutants.
extreme hot or cold weather and other extreme condi-
tions will have an adverse effect on paint, metal trim, and Washing
underbody protection. • Wash your vehicle regularly. Always wash your ve-
hicle in the shade using MOPAR® Car Wash, or a mild
The following maintenance recommendations will enable
car wash soap, and rinse the panels completely with
you to obtain maximum benefit from the corrosion
clear water.
resistance built into your vehicle.
• If insects, tar, or other similar deposits have accumu-
What Causes Corrosion?
lated on your vehicle, use MOPAR® Super Kleen Bug
Corrosion is the result of deterioration or removal of and Tar Remover to remove.
paint and protective coatings from your vehicle.
• Use a high quality cleaner wax, such as MOPAR®
The most common causes are: Cleaner Wax to remove road film, stains and to protect
• Road salt, dirt and moisture accumulation. your paint finish. Take care never to scratch the paint.
• Avoid using abrasive compounds and power buffing • It is important that the drain holes in the lower edges
that may diminish the gloss or thin out the paint finish. of the doors, rocker panels, and trunk be kept clear and
open.
• If you detect any stone chips or scratches in the paint,
CAUTION! touch them up immediately. The cost of such repairs is
• Do not use abrasive or strong cleaning materials considered the responsibility of the owner.
such as steel wool or scouring powder that will • If your vehicle is damaged due to a collision or similar
scratch metal and painted surfaces. cause that destroys the paint and protective coating,
• Use of power washers exceeding 1,200 psi (8 274 have your vehicle repaired as soon as possible. The
kPa) can result in damage or removal of paint and cost of such repairs is considered the responsibility of
decals. the owner. 7
Special Care • If you carry special cargo such as chemicals, fertilizers,

de-icer salt, etc., be sure that such materials are well
• If you drive on salted or dusty roads or if you drive
packaged and sealed.
near the ocean, hose off the undercarriage at least once
a month. • If a lot of driving is done on gravel roads, consider
mud or stone shields behind each wheel.
• Use MOPAR® Touch Up Paint on scratches as soon as
CAUTION!
possible. Your authorized dealer has touch up paint to
match the color of your vehicle. Do not use scouring pads, steel wool, a bristle brush,
Wheel And Wheel Trim Care or metal polishes. Do not use oven cleaner. These
products may damage the wheel’s protective finish.
• All wheels and wheel trim, especially aluminum and Avoid automatic car washes that use acidic solutions
chrome plated wheels, should be cleaned regularly or harsh brushes that may damage the wheel’s pro-
with a mild soap and water to prevent corrosion. tective finish. Only MOPAR® Wheel Cleaner or
• To remove heavy soil and/or excessive brake dust, use equivalent is recommended.
MOPAR® Wheel Cleaner. Stain Repel Fabric Cleaning Procedure — If
NOTE: If your vehicle is equipped with Dark Vapor Equipped
Chrome wheels DO NOT USE wheel cleaners, abrasives Stain Repel seats may be cleaned in the following man-
or polishing compounds. They will permanently damage ner:
this finish and such damage is not covered by the New
Vehicle Limited Warranty. USE ONLY MILD SOAP AND • Remove as much of the stain as possible by blotting
WATER WITH A SOFT CLOTH. Used on a regular basis with a clean, dry towel.
this is all that is required to maintain this finish. • Blot any remaining stain with a clean, damp towel.
• For tough stains, apply MOPAR® Total Clean, or a Your leather upholstery can be best preserved by regular
mild soap solution to a clean, damp cloth and remove cleaning with a damp soft cloth. Small particles of dirt
stain. Use a fresh, damp towel to remove soap residue. can act as an abrasive and damage the leather upholstery
and should be removed promptly with a damp cloth.
• For grease stains, apply MOPAR® Multi-Purpose
Stubborn soils can be removed easily with a soft cloth
Cleaner to a clean, damp cloth and remove stain. Use
and MOPAR® Total Clean. Care should be taken to avoid
a fresh, damp towel to remove soap residue.
soaking your leather upholstery with any liquid. Please
• Do not use any harsh solvents or any other form of do not use polishes, oils, cleaning fluids, solvents, deter-
protectants on Stain Repel products. gents, or ammonia-based cleaners to clean your leather
upholstery. Application of a leather conditioner is not
Interior Care
required to maintain the original condition.
Use MOPAR® Total Clean to clean fabric upholstery and 7
carpeting. WARNING!
Use MOPAR® Total Clean to clean vinyl upholstery. Do not use volatile solvents for cleaning purposes.
MOPAR® Total Clean is specifically recommended for Many are potentially flammable, and if used in
leather upholstery. closed areas they may cause respiratory harm.
Glass Surfaces
CAUTION!
All glass surfaces should be cleaned on a regular basis
Do not use Alcohol and Alcohol-based and/or Keton with MOPAR® Glass Cleaner, or any commercial
based cleaning products to clean leather seats, as household-type glass cleaner. Never use an abrasive type
damage to the seat may result. cleaner. Use caution when cleaning the inside rear win-
dow equipped with electric defrosters or the right rear
Cleaning Headlights
quarter window equipped with the radio antenna. Do
Your vehicle is equipped with plastic headlights and fog not use scrapers or other sharp instrument that may
lights that are lighter and less susceptible to stone break- scratch the elements.
age than glass headlights.
When cleaning the rear view mirror, spray cleaner on the
Plastic is not as scratch resistant as glass and therefore towel or rag that you are using. Do not spray cleaner
different lens cleaning procedures must be followed. directly on the mirror.
To minimize the possibility of scratching the lenses and Cleaning Plastic Instrument Cluster Lenses
reducing light output, avoid wiping with a dry cloth. To
The lenses in front of the instruments in this vehicle are
remove road dirt, wash with a mild soap solution fol-
molded in clear plastic. When cleaning the lenses, care
lowed by rinsing.
must be taken to avoid scratching the plastic.
Do not use abrasive cleaning components, solvents, steel
wool or other aggressive material to clean the lenses.
1. Clean with a wet soft rag. A mild soap solution may be
WARNING!
used, but do not use high alcohol content or abrasive
cleaners. If soap is used, wipe clean with a clean damp A frayed or torn belt could rip apart in a collision and
rag. leave you with no protection. Inspect the belt system
periodically, checking for cuts, frays, or loose parts.
2. Dry with a soft cloth.
Damaged parts must be replaced immediately. Do
Seat Belt Maintenance not disassemble or modify the system. Seat belt
Do not bleach, dye, or clean the belts with chemical assemblies must be replaced after a collision if they
solvents or abrasive cleaners. This will weaken the fabric. have been damaged (i.e., bent retractor, torn web-
Sun damage can also weaken the fabric. bing, etc.).
If the belts need cleaning, use MOPAR® Total Clean, a Cleaning The Center Console Cupholders 7
mild soap solution, or lukewarm water. Do not remove Clean with a damp cloth or towel using a mild detergent
the belts from the vehicle to wash them. Dry with a soft with the cupholder in the center console.
cloth.
NOTE: The cupholder cannot be removed.
Replace the belts if they appear frayed or worn or if the
buckles do not work properly.
FUSES
WARNING! • If a general protection fuse for safety systems (air
bag system, braking system), power unit systems
• When replacing a blown fuse, always use an ap- (engine system, gearbox system) or steering system
propriate replacement fuse with the same amp blows, contact an authorized dealer.
rating as the original fuse. Never replace a fuse
with another fuse of higher amp rating. Never Front Power Distribution Center (Fuses)
replace a blown fuse with metal wires or any other The Front Power Distribution Center is located in the
material. Failure to use proper fuses may result in engine compartment. This module contains fuses and
serious personal injury, fire and/or property dam- relays.
age.
• Before replacing a fuse, make sure that the ignition
is off and that all the other services are switched off
and/or disengaged.
• If the replaced fuse blows again, contact an autho-
rized dealer.
(Continued)
CAUTION!
• When installing the power distribution center
cover, it is important to ensure the cover is properly
positioned and fully latched. Failure to do so may
allow water to get into the power distribution
center and possibly result in an electrical system
failure.
• When replacing a blown fuse, it is important to use
only a fuse having the correct amperage rating. The
use of a fuse with a rating other than indicated may
result in a dangerous electrical system overload. If 7
Front Power Distribution Center a properly rated fuse continues to blow, it indicates
a problem in the circuit that must be corrected.
Cavity Cartridge Fuse Mini-Fuse Description

1 – – Fuse – Spare
2 40 Amp Green – Radiator Fan #1
3 50 Amp Red – Power Steering #1
4 30 Amp Pink – Starter
5 40 Amp Green – Anti-Lock Brakes
6 25 Amp Natural – Anti-Lock Brakes
9 – 20 Amp Yellow All-Wheel Drive Module – If Equipped
10 – 10 Amp Red Security
11 – 20 Amp Yellow Horns
12 – 10 Amp Red Air Conditioning Clutch
15 – 25 Amp Natural Transmission

18 50 Amp Red – Radiator Fan #2
19 50 Amp Red – Power Steering #2
20 30 Amp Pink – Wiper Motor
21 30 Amp Pink – Headlamp Washers
28 – 25 Amp Natural Fuel Pump 7
29 – 15 Amp Blue Transmission Shifter
31 – 25 Amp Natural Engine Module
34 – 25 Amp Natural Powertrain #1

35 – 20 Amp Yellow Powertrain #2
36 – 10 Amp Red Anti-Lock Brake Module
37 – 10 Amp Red Engine Controller/Rad Fan Relays
38 – 10 Amp Red Airbag Module
39 – 10 Amp Red Power Steering Module/AC Clutch Relay
48 – 10 Amp Red AWD Module/Front Axle Disconnect
51 – 20 Amp Yellow Vacuum Pump
Rear Power Distribution Center (Fuses)
There is also a power distribution center located in the
trunk under the spare tire access panel. This center
contains fuses and relays.
7
Rear Power Distribution Center
Opening The Access Cover

CAUTION!
• When installing the power distribution center
cover, it is important to ensure the cover is properly
positioned and fully latched. Failure to do so may
allow water to get into the power distribution
center and possibly result in an electrical system
failure.
• When replacing a blown fuse, it is important to use
only a fuse having the correct amperage rating. The
use of a fuse with a rating other than indicated may
result in a dangerous electrical system overload. If
a properly rated fuse continues to blow, it indicates
a problem in the circuit that must be corrected.

2 60 Amp Yellow — Front PDC Feed #1
3 — — Fuse – Spare
4 60 Amp Yellow — Front PDC Feed #2
5 30 Amp Pink — Sunroof
6 40 Amp Green — Exterior Lighting #1
7 40 Amp Green — Exterior Lighting #2
8 30 Amp Pink — Interior Lighting/Washer
Pump
9 30 Amp Pink — Power Locks 7
10 30 Amp Pink — Driver Door
11 30 Amp Pink — Passenger Door
12 — 20 Amp Yellow Cigar Lighters, Instrument
Panel & Power Outlet Con-
sole Rear
15 40 Amp Green — HVAC Blower

16 — — Fuse — Spare
23 — 10 Amp Red Fuel Door/Diagnostic Port
24 — 15 Amp Blue Radio Screen
25 — 10 Amp Red Tire Pressure Monitor
27 — 25 Amp Natural Amplifier
31 — 25 Amp Natural Power Seats
32 — 15 Amp Blue HVAC Module/Cluster

33 — 15 Amp Blue Ignition Switch/Wireless
Module
34 — 10 Amp Red Steering Column Module/
Clock
35 — 10 Amp Red Battery Sensor
37 — 15 Amp Blue Radio
38 — 20 Amp Yellow Power Outlet Inside Arm Rest
40 — — Fuse — Spare 7
42 30 Amp Pink — Rear Defrost
43 — 25 Amp Natural Rear Heated Seats/Steering
Wheel
44 — 10 Amp Red Park Assist/Blind Spot/
Camera

45 — 15 Amp Blue Cluster/Rearview Mirror/
Compass
46 — 10 Amp Red Adaptive Cruise Control
47 — 10 Amp Red Adaptive Front Lighting
48 — 20 Amp Yellow Active Suspension
51 — 20 Amp Yellow Front Heated Seats
52 — 10 Amp Red Heated Cupholders/Rear
Heated Seat Switches
53 — 10 Amp Red HVAC Module/In Car Tem-
perature Sensor

58 — 10 Amp Red Airbag Module
64 — 25 Amp Natural Rear Windows
65 — 10 Amp Red Airbag Module 7
67 — 15 Amp Blue Run Sense
68 — 15 Amp Blue Illumination/Rear Sunshade
VEHICLE STORAGE Interior Bulbs
If you are leaving your vehicle dormant for more than 21 Bulb Number
days, you may want to take these steps to protect your Rear Courtesy/Reading W5W
battery. Lamps
• Disconnect the negative cable from the battery. Rear Compartment 562
(Trunk) Lamp
• Anytime you store your vehicle, or keep it out of
service (e.g., vacation) for two weeks or more, run the Overhead Console Read- 578
air conditioning system at idle for about five minutes ing Lamp
in the fresh air and high blower setting. This will Visor Vanity Lamps A6220
ensure adequate system lubrication to minimize the Glove Box Lamp – If 194
possibility of compressor damage when the system is Equipped
started again. Door Courtesy 562
REPLACEMENT BULBS Shift Indicator Lamp JKLE14140
All of the interior bulbs are glass wedge base or glass Optional Door Map LED (Serviced at
cartridge types. Aluminum base bulbs are not approved Pocket/Cup Holder Authorized Dealer)
and should not be used for replacement. For lighted switches, see your authorized dealer for
replacement instructions.
Exterior Bulbs Bulb Number
Bulb Number Rear Stop/Turn Lamp LED (Serviced at
Low Beam Headlamp H11 Authorized Dealer)
(Standard Halogen) Rear Side Marker 168
Low Beam Headlamp – D3S (Serviced at Backup Lamp 3157
High Intensity Discharge Authorized Dealer) Center High-Mount Stop LED (Serviced at
(HID) Lamp (CHMSL) Authorized Dealer)
High Beam Headlamp 9005 License 168
Front Park/Turn Lamp 3157A
Front Fog Lamp – If PSX24W BULB REPLACEMENT
7
Equipped NOTE: Lens fogging can occur under certain atmo-
Front Side Marker 168 spheric conditions. This will usually clear as atmospheric
Rear Tail Lamp LED (Serviced at conditions change to allow the condensation to change
Authorized Dealer) back into a vapor. Turning the lamps on will usually
accelerate the clearing process.
Front Low Beam Headlamp, High Beam 3. Disconnect the bulb from the socket assembly and
Headlamp, Park/Turn Lamp, And Side Marker install the replacement bulb.
Lamp — Models With Halogen Headlamps
4. Reinstall the bulb and socket assembly into the head-
1. Open the hood. lamp assembly, and then turn it clockwise.
NOTE: Removal of the air cleaner filter housing may be Front Low Beam Headlamp And Park/Turn Lamp
necessary prior to replacing bulbs in the headlamp — Models With High Intensity Discharge
assembly on the driver side of the vehicle. Headlamps (HID)
2. Twist the appropriate bulb and socket assembly coun- HID Headlamps
terclockwise, and then pull it out of the headlamp The headlamps are a type of high voltage discharge tube.
assembly. High voltage can remain in the circuit even with the
headlamp switch off and the key removed. Because of
CAUTION! this, you should not attempt to service a headlamp bulb
Do not touch the new bulb with your fingers. Oil yourself. If a headlamp bulb fails, take your vehicle to
contamination will severely shorten bulb life. If the an authorized dealer for service.
bulb comes in contact with an oily surface, clean the
bulb with rubbing alcohol.
WARNING!
A transient high voltage occurs at the bulb sockets of
HID headlamps when the headlight switch is turned
ON. It may cause serious electrical shock or electro-
cution if not serviced properly. See your authorized
dealer for service.
NOTE: On vehicles equipped with HID headlamps,

when the headlamps are turned on, there is a blue hue to
the lights. This diminishes and becomes more white after
approximately 10 seconds, as the system charges. 7
Fastener Cover
Backup Lamps
3. Remove cover.
1. Open trunk.
4. Twist the bulb one quarter turn to remove.
2. Remove fastener from cover.
5. Reinstall new bulb.
6. Install cover and fastener.
License Lamp
1. Remove the screws securing the lamp to the rear
fascia.
2. Remove the bulb and socket assembly.
3. Disconnect the bulb from the socket assembly and
install the replacement bulb.
Socket Assembly
1 — License Lamp Bulb
2 — Socket
4. Reinstall the bulb and socket assembly.

5. Reattach the lamp to the rear fascia, and then install
the screws.
FLUID CAPACITIES
U.S. Metric
Fuel (Approximate)
All Engines 19 Gallons 72 Liters
Engine Oil With Filter
3.6 Liter Engine (SAE 5W-20, API Certified) 6 Quarts 5.6 Liters
5.7 Liter Engine (SAE 5W-20, API Certified) 7 Quarts 6.6 Liters
Cooling System *
3.6 Liter Engine – We recommend you use MOPAR® Antifreeze/Engine 10 Quarts 9.5 Liters 7
Coolant 10 Year/150,000 Mile Formula or equivalent.
5.7 Liter Engine without Severe Duty II Cooling System – We recommend you 14.5 Quarts 13.9 Liters
use MOPAR® Antifreeze/Engine Coolant 10 Year/150,000 Mile Formula.
5.7 Liter Engine with Severe Duty II Cooling System – We recommend you 15 Quarts 14.3 Liters
use MOPAR® Antifreeze/Engine Coolant 10 Year/150,000 Mile Formula.
* Includes heater and coolant recovery bottle filled to MAX level.
FLUIDS, LUBRICANTS AND GENUINE PARTS
Engine
Component Fluid, Lubricant, or Genuine Part
Engine Coolant We recommend you use MOPAR® Antifreeze/Coolant 10 Year/150,000 Mile
Formula OAT (Organic Additive Technology).
Engine Oil – 3.6L Engine We recommend you use API Certified SAE 5W-20 Engine Oil, meeting the require-
ments of Chrysler Material Standard MS-6395 such as MOPAR®, Pennzoil®, and
Shell Helix®. Refer to your engine oil filler cap for correct SAE grade.
Engine Oil – 5.7L Engine We recommend you use API Certified SAE 5W-20 Engine Oil, meeting the require-
ments of Chrysler Material Standard MS-6395 such as MOPAR®, Pennzoil®, and
Shell Helix®. Refer to your engine oil filler cap for correct SAE grade.
Engine Oil Filter MOPAR® Engine Oil Filter or equivalent.
Spark Plugs – 3.6L Engine We recommend you use MOPAR® Spark Plugs (Gap 0.043 in [1.1 mm]).
Spark Plugs – 5.7L Engine We recommend you use MOPAR® Spark Plugs (Gap 0.043 in [1.1 mm]).
Fuel Selection – 3.6L Engine 87 Octane.
Fuel Selection – 5.7L Engine 87 Octane Acceptable – 89 Octane Recommended.
Chassis
Component Fluid, Lubricant, Or Genuine Part

Automatic Transmission – 8-Speed Use only MOPAR® ZF 8&9 Speed ATF™ Automatic Transmission Fluid,
Transmission or equivalent. Failure to use the correct fluid may affect the function or
performance of your transmission.
Automatic Transmission – 5-Speed Use only ATF+4® Automatic Transmission Fluid. Failure to use ATF+4®
Transmission fluid may affect the function or performance of your transmission. We
recommend MOPAR® ATF+4® fluid.
Brake Master Cylinder We recommend you use MOPAR® DOT 3 and SAE J1703. If DOT 3 brake
fluid is not available, then DOT 4 is acceptable. 7
Power Steering Reservoir We recommend you use MOPAR® Hydraulic Fluid or equivalent meet-
ing MS-11655, such as Fuchs EG ZH 3044 or Pentosin CHF 11s.
Front Axle We recommend you use API GL-5 SAE 75W90 Synthetic Gear Lubricant.
Rear Axle We recommend you use API GL-5 SAE 75W140 Synthetic Gear Lubricant.
Transfer Case We recommend you use MOPAR® Transfer Case Lubricant for
BorgWarner 44–40.
MAINTENANCE SCHEDULES
CONTENTS
䡵 MAINTENANCE SCHEDULE . . . . . . . . . . . . .598 ▫ Maintenance Chart. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .600
8
598 MAINTENANCE SCHEDULES
MAINTENANCE SCHEDULE On Electronic Vehicle Information Center (EVIC)
equipped vehicles, “Oil Change Required” will be dis-
Your vehicle is equipped with an automatic oil change
played in the EVIC and a single chime will sound,
indicator system. The oil change indicator system will
indicating that an oil change is necessary.
remind you that it is time to take your vehicle in for
scheduled maintenance. On Non-EVIC equipped vehicles, “Change Oil” will flash
in the instrument cluster odometer and a single chime
Based on engine operation conditions, the oil change
will sound, indicating that an oil change is necessary.
indicator message will illuminate. This means that ser-
vice is required for your vehicle. Operating conditions Your authorized dealer will reset the oil change indicator
such as frequent short-trips, trailer tow, extremely hot or message after completing the scheduled oil change. If a
cold ambient temperatures, and E85 fuel usage will scheduled oil change is performed by someone other
influence when the “Change Oil” or “Oil Change Re- than your authorized dealer, the message can be reset by
quired” message is displayed. Severe Operating Condi- referring to the steps described under “Electronic Vehicle
tions can cause the change oil message to illuminate as Information Center (EVIC)” in “Understanding Your
early as 3,500 miles (5,600 km) since last reset. Have your Instrument Panel” for further information.
vehicle serviced as soon as possible, within the next 500
NOTE: Under no circumstances should oil change inter-
miles (805 km).
vals exceed 10,000 miles (16,000 km) or twelve months,
whichever comes first.
MAINTENANCE SCHEDULES 599
Severe Duty All Models At Every Oil Change Interval As Indicated By Oil
Change Engine Oil at 4000 miles (6,500 km) if the vehicle Change Indicator System:
is operated in a dusty and off road environment. This • Change oil and filter
type of vehicle use is considered Severe Duty • Rotate the tires. Rotate at the first sign of irregular
Once A Month Or Before A Long Trip: wear, even if it occurs before your next scheduled
service
• Check engine oil level
• Inspect battery and clean and tighten terminals as
• Check windshield washer fluid level required
• Check tire pressure and look for unusual wear or • Inspect brake pads, shoes, rotors, drums, hoses
damage. Rotate tires at the first sign of irregular wear, and park brake
even if it occurs before your next scheduled service. • Inspect engine cooling system protection and
• Check the fluid levels of the coolant reservoir, brake hoses 8
master cylinder, and power steering and fill as needed. • Inspect exhaust system
• Check function of all interior and exterior lights • Inspect engine air cleaner if using in dusty or
off-road conditions
Required Maintenance Intervals.
Refer to the maintenance schedules on the following
page for the required maintenance intervals.
Maintenance Chart
100,000
120,000
130,000
140,000
150,000
110,000
Mileage or time passed (whichever comes first)
20,000
30,000
40,000
50,000
60,000
70,000
80,000
90,000
Or Years: 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15
128,000
144,000
160,000
176,000
192,000
208,000
224,000
240,000
Or Kilometers: 112,000
32,000
48,000
64,000
80,000
96,000
Additional Inspections
Inspect the CV joints. X X X X X
Inspect front suspension, tie rod ends, boot seals,
X X X X X X X
and replace if necessary.
Inspect the rear axle fluid. Inspect the front axle
X X X X
fluid (All Wheel Drive Only).
Inspect the brake linings, replace as necessary. X X X X X X X
Adjust park brake on vehicles equipped with four
X X X X X X X
wheel disc brakes.
Inspect transfer case fluid (All Wheel Drive Only). X X X
100,000
120,000
130,000
140,000
150,000
110,000
20,000
30,000
40,000
50,000
60,000
70,000
80,000
90,000
Or Years: 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15
128,000
144,000
160,000
176,000
192,000
208,000
224,000
240,000
112,000
Or Kilometers:
32,000
48,000
64,000
80,000
96,000
Inspect the transfer case fluid. Change the transfer

case fluid; if using your vehicle for any of the fol-
X X
lowing: police, taxi, fleet, off-road, or frequent
trailer towing. (All Wheel Drive Only).
Additional Maintenance
Replace engine air filter. X X X X X 8
Replace cabin/air conditioning filter. X X X X X X X
Replace spark plugs (3.6L engine).** X
Replace spark plugs (5.7L engine).** X
Flush and replace the engine coolant at 10 years
or 150,000 miles (240,000 km) whichever comes X X
first.
100,000
120,000
130,000
140,000
150,000
110,000
20,000
30,000
40,000
50,000
60,000
70,000
80,000
90,000
Or Years: 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15
128,000
144,000
160,000
176,000
192,000
208,000
224,000
240,000
112,000
Or Kilometers:
32,000
48,000
64,000
80,000
96,000
Change automatic transmission fluid and filter if

using your vehicle for any of the following: police,
X
taxi, fleet, off-road, or frequent trailer towing (five-
speed only).
Change automatic transmission fluid and filter
X
(five-speed only).
Change transfer case fluid if using your vehicle for
any of the following: police, taxi, fleet, off-road, or X X
frequent trailer towing (All Wheel Drive Only).
100,000
120,000
130,000
140,000
150,000
110,000
20,000
30,000
40,000
50,000
60,000
70,000
80,000
90,000
Or Years: 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15
128,000
144,000
160,000
176,000
192,000
208,000
224,000
240,000
112,000
Or Kilometers:
32,000
48,000
64,000
80,000
96,000
Change the rear axle fluid and on models

equipped with All Wheel Drive (AWD) change the
front axle fluid if using your vehicle for any of the X X X
following: police, taxi, fleet, off-road, or frequent
trailer towing.
Inspect and replace PCV valve if necessary. X
8
** The spark plug change interval is mileage based only,
yearly intervals do not apply.
WARNING!
• You can be badly injured working on or around a
motor vehicle. Do only service work for which you
have the knowledge and the right equipment. If
you have any doubt about your ability to perform a
service job, take your vehicle to a competent me-
chanic.
• Failure to properly inspect and maintain your ve-
hicle could result in a component malfunction and
effect vehicle handling and performance. This
could cause an accident.
IF YOU NEED CONSUMER ASSISTANCE
CONTENTS
䡵 SUGGESTIONS FOR OBTAINING SERVICE FOR ▫ Customer Assistance For The Hearing Or Speech
YOUR VEHICLE . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .607 Impaired (TDD/TTY). . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .609
▫ Prepare For The Appointment. . . . . . . . . . . . .607 ▫ Service Contract . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .609
▫ Prepare A List . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .607 䡵 WARRANTY INFORMATION . . . . . . . . . . . . .610
▫ Be Reasonable With Requests . . . . . . . . . . . . .607 䡵 MOPAR® PARTS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .611
䡵 IF YOU NEED ASSISTANCE . . . . . . . . . . . . . .607 䡵 REPORTING SAFETY DEFECTS . . . . . . . . . . . .611
▫ Chrysler Group LLC Customer Center. . . . . . .608 ▫ In The 50 United States And Washington, D.C. . . .611
9
▫ Chrysler Canada Inc. Customer Center . . . . . .608 ▫ In Canada . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .611
▫ In Mexico Contact:. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .609 䡵 PUBLICATION ORDER FORMS . . . . . . . . . . . .612
606 IF YOU NEED CONSUMER ASSISTANCE
䡵 DEPARTMENT OF TRANSPORTATION UNIFORM ▫ Traction Grades . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .613
TIRE QUALITY GRADES . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .613
▫ Temperature Grades. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .614
▫ Treadwear. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .613
IF YOU NEED CONSUMER ASSISTANCE 607
SUGGESTIONS FOR OBTAINING SERVICE FOR Be Reasonable With Requests
YOUR VEHICLE If you list a number of items and you must have your
Prepare For The Appointment vehicle by the end of the day, discuss the situation with
the service advisor and list the items in order of priority.
If you are having warranty work done, be sure to have
At many authorized dealers, you may obtain a rental
the right papers with you. Take your warranty folder. All
vehicle at a minimal daily charge. If you need a rental, it
work to be performed may not be covered by the
is advisable to make these arrangements when you call
warranty. Discuss additional charges with the service
for an appointment.
manager. Keep a maintenance log of your vehicle’s
service history. This can often provide a clue to the IF YOU NEED ASSISTANCE
current problem.
The manufacturer and its authorized dealer are vitally
Prepare A List interested in your satisfaction. We want you to be happy
Make a written list of your vehicle’s problems or the with our products and services.
specific work you want done. If you’ve had an accident Warranty service must be done by an authorized dealer. 9
or work done that is not on your maintenance log, let the We strongly recommend that you take the vehicle to an
service advisor know. authorized dealer. They know your vehicle the best, and
are most concerned that you get prompt and high quality
service. The manufacturer’s authorized dealer have the
facilities, factory-trained technicians, special tools, and • Authorized dealer name
the latest information to ensure the vehicle is fixed
• Vehicle Identification Number (VIN)
correctly and in a timely manner.
• Vehicle delivery date and mileage
This is why you should always talk to an authorized
dealer service manager first. Most matters can be re- Chrysler Group LLC Customer Center
solved with this process. P.O. Box 21–8004
• If for some reason you are still not satisfied, talk to the Auburn Hills, MI 48321–8004
general manager or owner of the authorized dealer.
They want to know if you need assistance. Phone: (800) 423–6343
• If an authorized dealer is unable to resolve the con- Chrysler Canada Inc. Customer Center
cern, you may contact the manufacturer’s customer P.O. Box 1621
center.
Windsor, Ontario N9A 4H6
Any communication to the manufacturer’s customer cen-
Phone: (800) 465–2001 English / (800) 387–9983 French
ter should include the following information:
• Owner’s name and address
• Owner’s telephone number (home and office)
In Mexico Contact: Canadian residents with hearing difficulties that require
assistance can use the special needs relay service offered
Av. Prolongacion Paseo de la Reforma, 1240
by Bell Canada. For TTY teletypewriter users, dial 711
Sante Fe C.P. 05109 and for Voice callers, dial 1-800-855-0511 to connect with
Mexico, D. F. a Bell Relay Service operator.
In Mexico City: 5081-7568 Service Contract

Outside Mexico City: 1-800-505-1300 You may have purchased a service contract for a vehicle
to help protect you from the high cost of unexpected
Customer Assistance For The Hearing Or Speech repairs after the manufacturer’s New Vehicle Limited
Impaired (TDD/TTY) Warranty expires. The manufacturer stands behind only
To assist customers who have hearing difficulties, the the manufacturer’s service contracts. If you purchased a
manufacturer has installed special TDD (Telecommuni- manufacturer’s service contract, you will receive Plan
cation Devices for the Deaf) equipment at its customer Provisions and an Owner Identification Card in the mail
center. Any hearing or speech impaired customer, who within three weeks of the vehicle delivery date. If you 9
has access to a TDD or a conventional teletypewriter have any questions about the service contract, call the
(TTY) in the United States, can communicate with the manufacturer’s Service Contract National Customer
manufacturer by dialing 1–800–380–CHRY. Hotline at 1-800-521-9922 (Canadian residents, call (800)
465–2001 English / (800) 387–9983 French).
The manufacturer will not stand behind any service
WARNING!
contract that is not the manufacturer’s service contract. It
is not responsible for any service contract other than the Engine exhaust, some of its constituents, and certain
manufacturer’s service contract. If you purchased a ser- vehicle components contain, or emit, chemicals
vice contract that is not a manufacturer’s service contract, known to the State of California to cause cancer and
and you require service after the manufacturer’s New birth defects, or other reproductive harm. In addi-
Vehicle Limited Warranty expires, please refer to the tion, certain fluids contained in vehicles and certain
contract documents, and contact the person listed in products of component wear contain, or emit, chemi-
those documents. cals known to the State of California to cause cancer
We appreciate that you have made a major investment and birth defects, or other reproductive harm.
when you purchased the vehicle. An authorized dealer
has also made a major investment in facilities, tools, and WARRANTY INFORMATION
training to assure that you are absolutely delighted with See the Warranty Information Booklet, located on the
the ownership experience. You will be pleased with their DVD, for the terms and provisions of Chrysler Group
sincere efforts to resolve any warranty issues or related LLC warranties applicable to this vehicle and market.
concerns.
MOPAR® PARTS campaign. However, NHTSA cannot become involved in
individual problems between you, your authorized
MOPAR® fluids, lubricants, parts, and accessories are
dealer, and the manufacturer.
available from an authorized dealer. They are recom-
mended for your vehicle in order to help keep the vehicle To contact NHTSA, you may either call the Auto Safety
operating at its best. Hotline toll free at 1–888–327–4236 (TTY: 1–800–424– 9153),
or go to http://www.safercar.gov; or write to: Administra-
REPORTING SAFETY DEFECTS tor, NHTSA, 1200 New Jersey Avenue, SE., West Building,
In The 50 United States And Washington, D.C. Washington, D.C. 20590. You can also obtain other infor-
mation about motor vehicle safety from http://
If you believe that your vehicle has a defect that could www.safercar.gov.
cause a crash or cause injury or death, you should
immediately inform the National Highway Traffic Safety In Canada
Administration (NHTSA) in addition to notifying the If you believe that your vehicle has a safety defect, you
manufacturer. should contact the Customer Service Department imme-
9
If NHTSA receives similar complaints, it may open an diately. Canadian customers who wish to report a safety
investigation, and if it finds that a safety defect exists in defect to the Canadian government should contact Trans-
a group of vehicles, it may order a recall and remedy port Canada, Motor Vehicle Defect Investigations and
Recalls at 1-800-333-0510 or go to http://www.tc.gc.ca/
roadsafety/
PUBLICATION ORDER FORMS Diagnostic Procedure Manuals
To order the following manuals, you may use either the Diagnostic Procedure Manuals are filled with diagrams,
website or the phone numbers listed below. Visa, Mas- charts and detailed illustrations. These practical manuals
tercard, American Express, and Discover orders are ac- make it easy for students and technicians to find and fix
cepted. If you prefer mailing your payment, please call problems on computer-controlled vehicle systems and
for an order form. features. They show exactly how to find and correct
problems the first time, using step-by-step troubleshoot-
NOTE: A street address is required when ordering
manuals (no P.O. Boxes). ing and drivability procedures, proven diagnostic tests
and a complete list of all tools and equipment.
Service Manuals
Owner’s Manuals
These comprehensive Service Manuals provide the infor-
These Owner’s Manuals have been prepared with the
mation that students and professional technicians need in
assistance of service and engineering specialists to ac-
diagnosing/troubleshooting, problem solving, maintain-
quaint you with specific Chrysler Group LLC vehicles.
ing, servicing, and repairing Chrysler Group LLC ve-
Included are starting, operating, emergency and mainte-
hicles. A complete working knowledge of the vehicle,
system, and/or components is written in straightforward nance procedures as well as specifications, capabilities
and safety tips.
language with illustrations, diagrams, and charts.
Call toll free at: Treadwear
• 1–800–890–4038 (U.S.) The Treadwear grade is a comparative rating, based on
the wear rate of the tire when tested under controlled
• 1–800–387–1143 (Canada) conditions on a specified government test course. For
Or example, a tire graded 150 would wear one and one-half
times as well on the government course as a tire graded
Visit us on the Worldwide Web at: 100. The relative performance of tires depends upon the
• www.techauthority.com actual conditions of their use, however, and may depart
significantly from the norm due to variations in driving
DEPARTMENT OF TRANSPORTATION UNIFORM habits, service practices, and differences in road charac-
TIRE QUALITY GRADES teristics and climate.
The following tire grading categories were established by Traction Grades
the National Highway Traffic Safety Administration. The
The Traction grades, from highest to lowest, are AA, A, B,
specific grade rating assigned by the tire’s manufacturer
and C. These grades represent the tire’s ability to stop on 9
in each category is shown on the sidewall of the tires on
your vehicle. wet pavement, as measured under controlled conditions
on specified government test surfaces of asphalt and
All passenger car tires must conform to Federal safety concrete. A tire marked C may have poor traction perfor-
requirements in addition to these grades. mance.
Vehicle Safety Standard No. 109. Grades B and A repre-
WARNING!
sent higher levels of performance on the laboratory test
The traction grade assigned to this tire is based on wheel, than the minimum required by law.
straight-ahead braking traction tests, and does not
include acceleration, cornering, hydroplaning, or WARNING!
peak traction characteristics.
The temperature grade for this tire is established for
Temperature Grades a tire that is properly inflated and not overloaded.
Excessive speed, under-inflation, or excessive load-
The temperature grades are A (the highest), B, and C, ing, either separately or in combination, can cause
representing the tire’s resistance to the generation of heat heat buildup and possible tire failure.
and its ability to dissipate heat, when tested under
controlled conditions on a specified indoor laboratory
test wheel. Sustained high temperature can cause the
material of the tire to degenerate and reduce tire life, and
excessive temperature can lead to sudden tire failure. The
grade C corresponds to a level of performance, which all
passenger car tires must meet under the Federal Motor
INDEX
10
616 INDEX
About Your Brakes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .431 Air Conditioning System. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .388, 551
ABS (Anti-Lock Brake System) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .433 Air Pressure, Tires. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .456
Adaptive Cruise Control (ACC) (Cruise Control) . . .246 Alarm
Adding Engine Coolant (Antifreeze) . . . . . . . . . . . .560 Arm The System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .19
Adding Fuel . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .488 Alarm Light . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .326
Adding Washer Fluid . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .555 Alarm, Panic . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .24
Additives, Fuel . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .483 Alarm (Security Alarm) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .18
Adjustable Pedals . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .240 Alarm System (Security Alarm) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .18
Airbag . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .59, 69 All Wheel Drive (AWD) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .425, 568
Airbag Deployment . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .70 Alterations/Modifications, Vehicle . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .7
Airbag Light . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .67, 72, 99, 325 Antifreeze (Engine Coolant). . . . . . . . . . . . . . .560, 593
Airbag Maintenance . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .72 Disposal . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .562
Airbag, Side . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .63, 66, 69 Anti-Lock Brake System (ABS). . . . . . . . . . . . .433, 435
Airbag, Window (Side Curtain) . . . . . . . . . . .63, 66, 69 Anti-Lock Warning Light . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .325
Air Cleaner, Engine (Engine Air Cleaner Filter) . . . .549 Appearance Care . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .569
Air Conditioner Maintenance . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .551 Arming System (Security Alarm) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .18
Air Conditioning Filter . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .391, 552 Assist, Hill Start . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .440
Air Conditioning, Operating Tips . . . . . . . . . . . . . .392 Auto Down Power Windows . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .40
Air Conditioning Refrigerant . . . . . . . . . . . . . .551, 552 Automatic Dimming Mirror . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .110
INDEX 617
Automatic Door Locks . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .32 Battery . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .549
Automatic Headlights . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .222 Keyless Transmitter Replacement (RKE) . . . . . . . .25
Automatic Oil Change Indicator . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .340 Location . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .549
Automatic Temperature Control (ATC) . . . . . . . . . .388 Remote Battery Replacement . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .25
Automatic Transmission . . . . . . . . . . . . . .405, 414, 568 Transmitter Battery Replacement . . . . . . . . . . . . .25
Adding Fluid . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .568, 595 Belts, Seat . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .48, 99
Autostick . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .421 Bluetooth®
Fluid and Filter Changes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .568 Connecting To A Particular Mobile Phone Or Audio
Fluid Change . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .568 Device After Pairing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .158
Fluid Level Check . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .566, 567 Connect Or Disconnect Link Between the Uconnect®
Fluid Type . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .595 Phone And Mobile Phone . . . . . . . . . . . . . .144, 174
Special Additives . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .567 Pair (Link) Uconnect® Phone To A Mobile
Automatic Transmission Limp Home Mode . . . . . . .413 Phone . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .130, 155
Autostick . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .421 Body Mechanism Lubrication . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .554
Auto Unlock, Doors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .32 B-Pillar Location . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .451
Auto Up Power Windows . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .41 Brake Assist System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .436
Axle Fluid . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .595 Brake Control System, Electronic . . . . . . . . . . . . . .435 10
Axle Lubrication (Axle Fluid) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .595 Brake Fluid . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .595
Brake, Parking . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .431
618 INDEX
Brake System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .564 Cellular Phone . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .379
Anti-Lock (ABS) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .433 Certification Label. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .492
Fluid Check . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .565, 595 Chains, Tire . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .466
Master Cylinder . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .565 Changing A Flat Tire . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .513
Parking . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .431 Chart, Tire Sizing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .446
Warning Light . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .326 Check Engine Light (Malfunction Indicator
Brake/Transmission Interlock . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .405 Light) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .323, 541
Brightness, Interior Lights . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .230 Checking Your Vehicle For Safety . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .97
Bulb Replacement. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .588, 589 Checks, Safety . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .97
Bulbs, Light . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .101, 588 Child Restraint . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .74
Child Restraints
Camera, Rear . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .283 Child Seat Installation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .92
Capacities, Fluid . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .593 Install A LATCH-compatible Child Restraint . . . . .87
Caps, Filler Installing Child Restraints Using The Vehicle Seat
Oil (Engine) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .547 Belt . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .89
Radiator (Coolant Pressure) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .562 Lower Anchors And Tethers For Children . . . . . . .81
Carbon Monoxide Warning . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .98, 484 Child Safety Locks . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .33
Cargo (Vehicle Loading) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .492 Clean Air Gasoline . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .481
Car Washes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .570
INDEX 619
Cleaning Disposal of Used Coolant . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .562
Wheels . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .572 Drain, Flush, and Refill . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .559
Climate Control . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .380 Inspection . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .563
Coin Holder . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .309 Points to Remember . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .563
Cold Weather Operation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .401 Pressure Cap . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .562
Compact Disc (CD) Maintenance . . . . . . . . . . . . . .379 Radiator Cap . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .562
Compact Spare Tire . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .461 Selection of Coolant (Antifreeze) . . . . . .560, 593, 594
Computer, Trip/Travel. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .343 Corrosion Protection . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .569
Connector Cruise Control (Speed Control). . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .246
UCI . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .375 Cupholders . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .305, 575
Universal Consumer Interface (UCI) . . . . . . . . . .375 Customer Assistance . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .607
Conserving Fuel . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .341 Customer Programmable Features . . . . . . . . . .345, 359
Console, Floor . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .309
Contract, Service . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .609 Data Recorder, Event . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .73
Coolant Pressure Cap (Radiator Cap) . . . . . . . . . . .562 Daytime Brightness, Interior Lights. . . . . . . . . . . . .231
Cooling System. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .558 Daytime Running Lights . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .224
Adding Coolant (Antifreeze) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .560 Dealer Service. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .543 10
Coolant Capacity . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .593 Deck Lid, Emergency Release . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .44
Coolant Level . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .558, 563 Deck Lid, Power Release . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .43
620 INDEX
Defroster, Rear Window. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .312 Driving
Defroster, Windshield . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .99, 385 Through Flowing, Rising, or Shallow Standing
Delay (Intermittent) Wipers . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .232 Water . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .427
Diagnostic System, Onboard . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .541 Driving to Achieve Maximum Fuel Economy. . . . . .341
Dimmer Switch, Headlight. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .227
Dipsticks E-85 Fuel . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .485
Oil (Engine) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .545 Electrical Power Outlets. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .301
Disabled Vehicle Towing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .532 Electric Rear Window Defrost. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .312
Disposal Electric Remote Mirrors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .113
Antifreeze (Engine Coolant) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .562 Electronic Brake Control System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .435
Door Locks Anti-Lock Brake System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .435
Child-Protection Door Lock — Rear Doors . . . . . .33 Brake Assist System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .436
Door Locks . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .23, 30 Traction Control System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .436
Key Fob . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .30 Electronic Power Distribution Center (Fuses) . . . . . .576
Key Fob Emergency Key . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .25 Electronic Speed Control (Cruise Control) . . . . .242, 246
Remote . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .30 Electronic Stability Control (ESC) . . . . . . . . . . . . . .437
Remote Keyless Entry (RKE) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .30 Electronic Vehicle Information Center
Door Locks, Automatic . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .32 Instrument Cluster Display . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .29
Electronic Vehicle Information Center (EVIC) . . . . . .329
INDEX 621
Electronic Vehicle Information Center (EVIC) . . . .329 Break-In Recommendations . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .96
Electronic Vehicle Information Center (EVIC) Setup Checking Oil Level . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .545
Menu . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .329 Compartment . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .539, 540
EVIC Display . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .332 Compartment Identification . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .539
EVIC Messages . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .329, 332 Coolant (Antifreeze) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .558, 594
Remote Start . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .29 Cooling . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .558
Emergency Deck Lid Release . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .44 Exhaust Gas Caution . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .98, 484
Emergency, In Case of Fails to Start . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .401
Freeing Vehicle When Stuck . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .526 Flooded, Starting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .401
Hazard Warning Flasher . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .510 Fuel Requirements . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .480
Jacking . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .513 Jump Starting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .522
Jump Starting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .522 Oil . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .545, 593, 594
Overheating . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .510 Oil Change Interval . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .340
Towing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .532 Oil Filler Cap . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .547
Emergency Trunk Release . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .44 Oil Selection . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .546, 593
Emission Control System Maintenance . . . . . . . . . .541 Oil Synthetic . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .548
Engine . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .540 Overheating . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .510 10
Air Cleaner . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .549 Starting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .398
Block Heater . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .402 Temperature Gauge . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .328
622 INDEX
Engine Oil Viscosity . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .547 Flashers
Engine Oil Viscosity Chart . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .547 Hazard Warning . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .510
Enhanced Accident Response Feature . . . . . . . . . . . .70 Turn Signal . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .101, 226, 320
Entry System, Illuminated . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .21 Flash-To-Pass . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .227
Ethanol . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .481 Flexible Fuel Vehicles
Event Data Recorder . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .73 Cruising Range . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .487
Exhaust Gas Caution . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .98, 484 Engine Oil . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .486
Exhaust System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .98, 556 Fuel Requirements . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .485, 486
Exterior Folding Mirrors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .112 Maintenance . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .488
Exterior Lighting. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .221 Replacement Parts . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .487
Exterior Lights . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .101 Starting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .487
Flooded Engine Starting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .401
Filler Location Fuel . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .324 Floor Console . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .309
Filters Fluid, Brake . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .595
Air Cleaner . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .549 Fluid Capacities . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .593
Air Conditioning . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .391, 552 Fluid Leaks . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .101
Engine Oil . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .548, 594 Fluid Level Checks . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .569
Engine Oil Disposal . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .548 Automatic Transmission . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .567
Brake . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .565
INDEX 623
Cooling System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .558 Octane Rating . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .480, 594
Engine Oil . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .545 Requirements . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .480
Transfer Case . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .568 Saver Mode . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .341
Fluids, Lubricants and Genuine Parts . . . . . . . . . . .594 Specifications . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .594
Fog Lights . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .225, 320 Tank Capacity . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .593
Folding Rear Seat . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .213 Fuel, Flexible . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .485
Forward Collision Warning . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .272, 334 Fuel Optimizer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .341
Freeing A Stuck Vehicle . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .526 Fuel Saver . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .341
Fuel . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .480 Fuses . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .576
Additives . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .483
Clean Air . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .481 Garage Door Opener (HomeLink®) . . . . . . . . .288, 295
Conserving . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .341 Gasoline, Clean Air . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .481
Ethanol . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .481 Gasoline (Fuel) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .480
Filler Door (Gas Cap) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .324 Conserving . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .341
Gasoline . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .480 Gasoline, Reformulated . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .481
Gauge . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .325 Gauges
Light . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .335 Coolant Temperature . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .328 10
Materials Added . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .483 Fuel . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .325
Methanol . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .481 Speedometer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .324
624 INDEX
Tachometer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .320 On With Wipers . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .222, 234
Gear Ranges . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .408, 415 Passing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .227
Gear Select Lever Override . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .528 Switch . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .221
General Information . . . . . . . . . . . . .149, 187, 269, 479 Time Delay . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .224
Glass Cleaning . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .574 Washers . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .555
Gross Axle Weight Rating . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .493, 495 Headlight Washers . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .555
Gross Vehicle Weight Rating . . . . . . . . . . . . . .493, 495 Head Restraints . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .211
GVWR . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .493 Head Rests . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .211
Heated Mirrors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .114
Hazard Heated Seats. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .204
Driving Through Flowing, Rising, or Shallow Stand- Heater, Engine Block . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .402
ing Water . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .427 High Beam/Low Beam Select (Dimmer) Switch . . . .227
Hazard Warning Flasher . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .510 Hill Start Assist. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .440
Headlights . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .590 Hitches
Automatic . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .222 Trailer Towing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .498
Cleaning . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .574 Holder, Coin. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .309
Delay . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .224
High Beam/Low Beam Select Switch . . . . . . . . .227 Ignition
Lights On Reminder . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .225 Key . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .12
INDEX 625
Illuminated Entry . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .21 Key Fob. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .13
Immobilizer (Sentry Key) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .16 Arm The Alarm . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .19
Infant Restraint . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .74 Lock The Doors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .23
Information Center, Vehicle . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .329 Panic Alarm . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .24
Inside Rearview Mirror . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .110 Programming Additional Key Fobs . . . . . . . . .18, 25
Instrument Cluster . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .320 Programming Additional Transmitters . . . . . . .18, 25
Instrument Panel and Controls . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .317 Remote Battery Replacement . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .25
Instrument Panel Lens Cleaning . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .574 Unlatch The Trunk . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .24
Interior Appearance Care . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .573 Unlock The Doors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .22
Interior Lights . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .230 Key-In Reminder . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .15
Intermittent Wipers (Delay Wipers). . . . . . . . . . . . .232 Keyless Enter-N-Go . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .34, 399
Introduction . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .4Keyless Enter-N-Go™
iPod®/USB/MP3 Control . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .375 Enter The Trunk . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .24
Bluetooth® Streaming Audio . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .157 Lock The Vehicle’s Doors . . . . . . . . . . . .23, 352, 368
Passive Entry Programming . . . . . . . . . .34, 352, 368
Jack Location . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .514 Unlock From The Passenger Side . . . . . . . . . . . . .22
Jack Operation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .513 Keyless Enter-N-Go™™ 10
Jump Starting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .522 Keyless Enter-N-Go™™ . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .34
Passive Entry . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .34
626 INDEX
Unlock From The Driver’s Side . . . . . . . . . . . . . .22 Airbag . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .67, 72, 99, 325
Keyless Entry System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .22 Alarm . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .326
Keyless Go. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .12 Anti-Lock . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .325
Key, Replacement . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .17 Automatic Headlights . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .222
Keys . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .12 Brake Assist Warning . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .443
Key, Sentry (Immobilizer) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .16 Brake Warning . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .326
Kicker Sound System. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .376 Bulb Replacement . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .589
Knee Bolster. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .59 Daytime Running . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .224
Dimmer Switch, Headlight . . . . . . . . . . . . .226, 227
Lane Change and Turn Signals . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .226 Electronic Stability Program (ESP) Indicator . . . . .443
Lane Change Assist . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .227 Exterior . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .101
Lap/Shoulder Belts. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .48 Fog . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .225, 320
Latches . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .101 Hazard Warning Flasher . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .510
Latch Plate. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .50 Headlights . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .221, 590
Lead Free Gasoline . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .480 Headlights On Reminder . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .225
Leaks, Fluid . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .101 Headlights On With Wipers . . . . . . . . . . . . .222, 234
Life of Tires . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .464 Headlight Switch . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .221
Light Bulbs . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .101, 588 High Beam . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .227
Lights . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .101, 221 High Beam Indicator . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .320
INDEX 627
High Beam/Low Beam Select . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .227 Traction Control . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .443
Illuminated Entry . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .21 Turn Signal . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .101, 226
Instrument Cluster . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .221 Vanity Mirror . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .114
Intensity Control . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .230 Warning (Instrument Cluster Description) . . . . . .320
Interior . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .230 Loading Vehicle . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .492, 494
License . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .592 Capacities . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .494
Lights On Reminder . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .225 Tires . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .451
Low Fuel . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .335 Load Leveling System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .313
Malfunction Indicator (Check Engine) . . . . . . . . .323 Locks . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .30
Map Reading . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .228 Automatic Door . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .32
Parade Mode (Daytime Brightness) . . . . . . . . . . .231 Auto Unlock . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .32
Passing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .227 Child Protection . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .33
Reading . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .228, 286 Door . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .30
Seat Belt Reminder . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .328 Power Door . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .31
Security Alarm . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .326 Low Tire Pressure System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .469
Service . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .588, 589 Lubrication, Body . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .554
Service Engine Soon (Malfunction Indicator) . . . .323 Lug Nuts . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .511 10
SmartBeams . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .223
Tire Pressure Monitoring (TPMS) . . . . . . . . .322, 469 Maintenance Free Battery. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .549
628 INDEX
Maintenance Procedures . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .544 Mode
Maintenance Schedule . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .598 Fuel Saver . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .341
Malfunction Indicator Light (Check Engine) . . .323, 541 Modifications/Alterations, Vehicle . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .7
Manual, Service . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .612 Monitor, Tire Pressure System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .469
Master Cylinder (Brakes) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .565 Mopar Parts . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .543, 611
Memory Feature (Memory Seat) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .215 MTBE/ETBE . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .481
Memory Seat . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .215 Multi-Function Control Lever . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .226
Memory Seats and Radio . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .215
Methanol . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .481 New Vehicle Break-In Period . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .96
Mini-Trip Computer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .343
Mirrors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .110 Occupant Restraints . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .45, 66, 70
Automatic Dimming . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .110 Occupant Restraints (Sedan) . . . . . . . . . . . . .63, 66, 69
Electric Powered . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .113 Octane Rating, Gasoline (Fuel). . . . . . . . . . . . .480, 594
Electric Remote . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .113 Odometer. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .321
Exterior Folding . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .112 Oil Change Indicator . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .321, 340
Heated . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .114 Oil Change Indicator, Reset . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .321, 340
Outside . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .111 Oil, Engine . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .545, 594
Rearview . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .110 Capacity . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .593
Vanity . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .114 Change Interval . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .340, 546
INDEX 629
Checking . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .545 Owner’s Manual (Operator Manual) . . . . . . . . . .4, 612
Dipstick . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .545
Disposal . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .548 Paint Care . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .569
Filter . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .548, 594 Panic Alarm . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .24
Filter Disposal . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .548 Parking Brake. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .431
Identification Logo . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .546 ParkSense® System, Rear. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .275
Materials Added to . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .548 Passing Light . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .227
Recommendation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .546, 593 Passive Entry . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .34
Synthetic . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .548 Pedals, Adjustable. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .240
Viscosity . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .547, 593 Pets. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .96
Oil Filter, Selection . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .548 Pets, Transporting. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .96
Onboard Diagnostic System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .541 Phone (Pairing). . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .157
Operating Precautions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .541 Phone (Uconnect®). . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .125, 150
Operator Manual (Owner’s Manual) . . . . . . . . . . . . .4 Placard, Tire and Loading Information . . . . . . . . . .451
Outside Rearview Mirrors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .111 Power
Overdrive. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .421 Deck Lid Release . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .43
Overdrive OFF Switch . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .421 Distribution Center (Fuses) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .581 10
Overheating, Engine . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .329, 510 Door Locks . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .31
Mirrors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .113
630 INDEX
Outlet (Auxiliary Electrical Outlet) . . . . . . . . . . .301 Rear Camera . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .283
Seats . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .201 Rear Cupholder . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .306
Steering . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .429 Rear ParkSense System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .275
Sunroof . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .297 Rear Seat, Folding . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .213
Tilt/Telescoping Steering Column . . . . . . . . . . . .237 Rear Window Defroster . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .312
Windows . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .39 Rear Window Features . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .312
Power Steering Fluid . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .595 Recorder, Event Data . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .73
Pregnant Women and Seat Belts . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .58 Recreational Towing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .508
Preparation for Jacking . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .516 Reformulated Gasoline . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .481
Pretensioners Refrigerant . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .552
Seat Belts . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .57 Reminder, Lights On . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .225
Programming Transmitters (Remote Keyless Entry) . .22 Reminder, Seat Belt. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .57
Remote Control
Radial Ply Tires . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .458 Starting System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .27
Radiator Cap (Coolant Pressure Cap) . . . . . . . . . . .562 Remote Keyless Entry (RKE) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .22
Radio Operation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .379 Arm The Alarm . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .19
Radio Remote Controls . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .377 FCC General Information . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .26
Rain Sensitive Wiper System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .234 Lock The Doors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .23
Rear Axle (Differential) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .569 Panic Alarm . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .24
INDEX 631
Programming Additional Key Fobs . . . . . . . . .18, 25 Replacement Parts. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .543
Programming Additional Transmitters . . . . . . .18, 25 Replacement Tires . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .465
Remote Battery Replacement . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .25 Reporting Safety Defects . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .611
Transmitter Battery Replacement . . . . . . . . . . . . .25 Resetting Oil Change Indicator . . . . . . . . . . . .321, 340
Unlatch The Trunk . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .24 Restraint, Head . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .211
Unlock The Doors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .22 Restraints, Child . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .74
Remote Sound System (Radio) Controls . . . . . . . . .377 Restraints, Occupant . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .45
Remote Starting Rocking Vehicle When Stuck . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .526
EVIC Remote Start Abort Message . . . . . . . . . . . .28 Rotation, Tires . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .468
Exit Remote Start Mode . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .29
How To Use Remote Start . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .27 Safety Checks Inside Vehicle . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .99
To Exit Remote Start Mode And Drive The Safety Checks Outside Vehicle . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .101
Vehicle . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .29 Safety Defects, Reporting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .611
Uconnect® Customer Programmable Features . . .371 Safety, Exhaust Gas. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .98
Uconnect® Settings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .371 Safety Information, Tire . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .444
Remote Starting System. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .27 Safety Tips . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .97
Remote Trunk Release. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .43 Schedule, Maintenance . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .598 10
Replacement Bulbs . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .588 Seat Belt Maintenance . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .575
Replacement Keys . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .17 Seat Belt Reminder . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .57
632 INDEX
Seat Belts . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .45, 48, 99 Rear Folding . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .213
Adjustable Upper Shoulder Anchorage . . . . . . . . .54 Seatback Release . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .213
And Pregnant Women . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .58 Tilting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .201
Child Restraint . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .74 Security Alarm . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .18
Extender . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .59 Arm The System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .19
Front Seat . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .48, 50 Selection of Coolant (Antifreeze). . . . . . . . . . . . . . .594
Inspection . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .99 SENTRY KEY®
Operating Instructions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .50 FCC General Information . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .18
Pretensioners . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .57 Key Programming . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .18
Rear Seat . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .48 Sentry Key (Immobilizer) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .16
Untwisting Procedure . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .54 Sentry Key Replacement . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .17
Seats . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .201 Service Assistance . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .607
Adjustment . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .201 Service Contract . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .609
Easy Entry . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .219 Service Engine Soon Light (Malfunction Indicator) . .323
Head Restraints . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .211 Service Manuals . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .612
Heated . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .204 Shifting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .403
Height Adjustment . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .201 Automatic Transmission . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .403
Memory . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .215 Shift Lever Override . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .528
Power . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .201 Shoulder Belts . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .48
INDEX 633
Shoulder Belt Upper Anchorage . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .54 Engine Fails to Start . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .401
Side Airbag . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .69 Remote . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .27
Side View Mirror Adjustment . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .111 Starting and Operating . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .398
Signals, Turn . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .101, 226, 320 Starting Procedures . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .398
SmartBeams . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .223 Steering
Snow Chains (Tire Chains) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .466 Column Controls . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .226
Snow Tires . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .459 Column Lock . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .236
Sound System Power . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .429
Kicker . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .376 Tilt Column . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .236, 237
Spare Tire . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .461, 462, 514 Wheel, Heated . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .238
Spark Plugs . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .594 Wheel, Tilt . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .236, 237
Specifications Steering Wheel Audio Controls . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .377
Fuel (Gasoline) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .594 Steering Wheel Mounted Sound System Controls . . .377
Oil . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .594 Storage . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .588
Speed Control (Cruise Control) . . . . . . . . . . . .242, 246 Storage, Vehicle . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .390, 588
Speedometer. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .324 Storing Your Vehicle . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .588
Starting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .27, 398 Stuck, Freeing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .526 10
Automatic Transmission . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .398 Sunglasses Storage . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .287
Cold Weather . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .401 Sun Roof . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .297
634 INDEX
Supplemental Restraint System - Airbag . . . . . . . . . .59 High Speed . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .458
Synthetic Engine Oil . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .548 Inflation Pressures . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .456
System, Remote Starting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .27 Jacking . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .513, 516
Life of Tires . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .464
Tachometer. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .320 Load Capacity . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .451, 452
Telescoping Steering Column. . . . . . . . . . . . . .236, 237 Pressure Monitor System (TPMS) . . . . . . . . . . . .469
Temperature Control, Automatic (ATC) . . . . . . . . . .388 Pressure Warning Light . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .322
Temperature Gauge, Engine Coolant. . . . . . . . .328, 511 Quality Grading . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .613
Tilt Steering Column. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .236, 237 Radial . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .458
Time Delay, Headlight . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .224 Replacement . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .465
Tire and Loading Information Placard . . . . . . . . . . .451 Rotation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .468
Tire Markings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .444 Safety . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .444, 455
Tires . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .101, 455, 613 Sizes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .446
Aging (Life of Tires) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .464 Snow Tires . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .459
Air Pressure . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .455 Spare Tire . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .514
Chains . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .466 Spinning . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .463
Changing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .513 Trailer Towing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .503
Compact Spare . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .461 Tread Wear Indicators . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .463
General Information . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .455 Tire Safety Information . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .444
INDEX 635
Tongue Weight/Trailer Weight . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .500 Fluid . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .568, 595
Towing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .494 Maintenance . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .569
Disabled Vehicle . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .532 Transmission
Guide . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .499 Automatic . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .403, 405, 414, 566
Recreational . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .508 Fluid . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .566, 595
Weight . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .499 Maintenance . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .566
Towing Vehicle Behind a Motorhome . . . . . . . . . . .508 Shifting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .403
Traction . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .426 Transmitter Battery Service (Remote Keyless Entry) . .25
Traction Control . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .436 Transmitter Programming (Remote Keyless
Trailer Towing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .494 Entry) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .22, 25
Cooling System Tips . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .507 Transmitter, Remote Keyless Entry (RKE) . . . . . . . . .22
Hitches . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .498 Tread Wear Indicators . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .463
Minimum Requirements . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .501 Trip Odometer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .321
Tips . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .506 Trunk Lid (Deck Lid) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .43, 44
Trailer and Tongue Weight . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .500 Trunk Release, Emergency . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .44
Wiring . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .504 Trunk Release Remote Control . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .43
Trailer Towing Guide. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .499 Turn Signals. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .226, 320 10
Trailer Weight . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .499
Transfer Case . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .568 UCI Connector . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .375
636 INDEX
Uconnect® Universal Consumer Interface (UCI) Connector . . . .375
Advanced Phone Connectivity . . . . . . . . . . .144, 174 Unleaded Gasoline . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .480
Customer Programmable Features . . . . . . . . . . .371 Untwisting Procedure, Seat Belt . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .54
Operation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .128, 153
Phone Call Features . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .135, 164 Vanity Mirrors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .114
Phone Features . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .139, 169 Vehicle Certification Label . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .492
Screen Activated Features . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .345 Vehicle Identification Number (VIN) . . . . . . . . . . . . .6
Things You Should Know About Your Uconnect® Vehicle Loading . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .452, 492, 494
Phone . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .145, 175 Vehicle Modifications/Alterations . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .7
Uconnect® Settings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .23, 24, 371 Vehicle Security Alarm (Security Alarm) . . . . . . . . . .18
Uconnect® phone . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .125 Vehicle Storage. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .390, 588
Uconnect® Phone . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .150 Viscosity, Engine Oil . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .547
Uconnect® Settings Voice Command . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .187
Customer Programmable Features . . . . . . . . . .23, 32
Customer Programmable Features . . . . . .34, 352, 368 Warning Flasher, Hazard . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .510
Passive Entry Programming . . . . . . . . . .34, 352, 368 Warning Lights (Instrument Cluster Description) . . .320
Uconnect® Settings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .352, 368 Warnings and Cautions. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .6
Uconnect® Voice Command. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .187 Warranty Information . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .610
Uniform Tire Quality Grades . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .613
INDEX 637
Washer Windshield Defroster . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .99
Adding Fluid . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .555 Windshield Washers . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .232, 233
Washers, Windshield. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .233, 555 Fluid . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .555
Washing Vehicle . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .570 Windshield Wiper Blades . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .555
Water Windshield Wipers . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .232
Driving Through . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .427 Wiper Blade Replacement . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .555
Wheel and Wheel Trim . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .572 Wipers, Intermittent . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .232
Wheel and Wheel Trim Care . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .572 Wipers, Rain Sensitive . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .234
Wind Buffeting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .43, 300
Window Fogging . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .390
Windows . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .39
Power . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .39
Reset Auto-Up . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .41
Wind Buffeting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .43
10
With respect to any Vehicles Sold in Canada, the name Chrysler tures and equipment that are either standard or optional on INSTALLATION OF RADIO TRANSMITTING EQUIPMENT
Group LLC shall be deemed to be deleted and the name Chrysler this vehicle. This manual may also include a description of Special design considerations are incorporated into this vehi- The antenna cable should be as short as practical and routed
Canada Inc. used in substitution therefore. features and equipment that are no longer available or were cle’s electronic system to provide immunity to radio frequency away from the vehicle wiring when possible. Use only fully
not ordered on this vehicle. Please disregard any features signals. Mobile two-way radios and telephone equipment must shielded coaxial cable.
DRIVING AND ALCOHOL and equipment described in this manual that are not on this be installed properly by trained personnel. The following must
Drunken driving is one of the most frequent causes of acci- Carefully match the antenna and cable to the radio to ensure a
vehicle. be observed during installation.
dents. low Standing Wave Ratio (SWR).
Your driving ability can be seriously impaired with blood alcohol Chrysler Group LLC reserves the right to make changes in The positive power connection should be made directly to the
Mobile radio equipment with output power greater than normal
levels far below the legal minimum. If you are drinking, don’t design and specifications, and/or make additions to or im- battery and fused as close to the battery as possible. The
may require special precautions.
drive. Ride with a designated non-drinking driver, call a cab, a provements to its products without imposing any obligation negative power connection should be made to body sheet metal
friend, or use public transportation. upon itself to install them on products previously manufac- adjacent to the negative battery connection. This connection All installations should be checked for possible interference
tured. should not be fused. between the communications equipment and the vehicle’s
electronic systems.
WARNING! Antennas for two-way radios should be mounted on the roof or
the rear area of the vehicle. Care should be used in mounting
Driving after drinking can lead to an accident. Your per- antennas with magnet bases. Magnets may affect the accuracy
ceptions are less sharp, your reflexes are slower, and your or operation of the compass on vehicles so equipped.
With respect to any Vehicles Sold in Canada, the name Chrysler tures and equipment that are either standard or optional on INSTALLATION OF RADIO TRANSMITTING EQUIPMENT
Group LLC shall be deemed to be deleted and the name Chrysler this vehicle. This manual may also include a description of Special design considerations are incorporated into this vehi- The antenna cable should be as short as practical and routed
Canada Inc. used in substitution therefore. features and equipment that are no longer available or were cle’s electronic system to provide immunity to radio frequency away from the vehicle wiring when possible. Use only fully
not ordered on this vehicle. Please disregard any features signals. Mobile two-way radios and telephone equipment must shielded coaxial cable.
DRIVING AND ALCOHOL and equipment described in this manual that are not on this be installed properly by trained personnel. The following must
Drunken driving is one of the most frequent causes of acci- Carefully match the antenna and cable to the radio to ensure a
vehicle. be observed during installation.
dents. low Standing Wave Ratio (SWR).
Your driving ability can be seriously impaired with blood alcohol Chrysler Group LLC reserves the right to make changes in The positive power connection should be made directly to the
Mobile radio equipment with output power greater than normal
levels far below the legal minimum. If you are drinking, don’t design and specifications, and/or make additions to or im- battery and fused as close to the battery as possible. The
may require special precautions.
drive. Ride with a designated non-drinking driver, call a cab, a provements to its products without imposing any obligation negative power connection should be made to body sheet metal
friend, or use public transportation. upon itself to install them on products previously manufac- adjacent to the negative battery connection. This connection All installations should be checked for possible interference
tured. should not be fused. between the communications equipment and the vehicle’s
electronic systems.
WARNING! Antennas for two-way radios should be mounted on the roof or
the rear area of the vehicle. Care should be used in mounting
Driving after drinking can lead to an accident. Your per- antennas with magnet bases. Magnets may affect the accuracy
ceptions are less sharp, your reflexes are slower, and your or operation of the compass on vehicles so equipped.
COVER INCOVER IN
2014 Dar t
2014
OWNER’S MANUAL
Dar t
Chrysler Group LLC
14D481-126-AD
14PFD41-126-AA Fourth Edition
First Rev. 1
Edition Printed in
Printed in U.S.A.
U.S.A.
1409672cv1 14PFD41-126-AA Dart Chrysler 1" gutter 09/03/2013 10:49:27
2014 Dar t
2014
OWNER’S MANUAL
Dar t
Chrysler Group LLC
14PFD41-126-AA First Edition Printed in U.S.A.

2014E Charger OM 4th R1

Uploaded by

Copyright:

Available Formats

2014E Charger OM 4th R1

Uploaded by

Document Information

Copyright

Available Formats

Share this document

Share or Embed Document

Sharing Options

Did you find this document useful?

Is this content inappropriate?

Copyright:

Available Formats

2014E Charger OM 4th R1

Uploaded by

Copyright:

Available Formats

2014 Charger

2 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9 2

3 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 103 3

4 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 315 4

5 STARTING AND OPERATING . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 393 5

6 WHAT TO DO IN EMERGENCIES . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 509 6

7 MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 537 7

8 MAINTENANCE SCHEDULES . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 597 8

VEHICLE IDENTIFICATION NUMBER

REMOTE KEYLESS ENTRY (RKE)

Grab The Door Handle To Unlock

Do NOT Grab The Handle When Locking

Press The Door Handle Button To Lock

Power Window Switches

TRUNK SAFETY WARNING

Pulling Out The Lap/Shoulder Belt Latch Plate

Inserting Latch Plate Into Buckle (Continued)

Removing Slack From Belt

Adjusting Upper Shoulder Belt

Supplemental Seat-Mounted Side Air Bag Label

Child Size, Height, Weight Or Age Recommended Type Of Child Restraint

Use any attachment method shown with an “X” Below

Lower Anchorage Symbol 2 anchorages per seating

The lower anchorages are round bars that are 2

There are tether strap anchorages behind each

Tether Strap Anchorages

Adjustable Headrest Release Push Button Adjustable Headrest Downward Position

WARNING! WARNING! (Continued)

Illuminated Vanity Mirror

Rear Detection Zones

BSM Warning Light

Rear Cross Path

Add From Mobile

• Low-To-Medium Vehicle Speed

• Low-To-Medium Blower Setting In a convertible vehicle, system performance may be

Voice Text List

Voice Text Reply

Front Heated Seat Operation — Vehicles Equipped

Rear Head Restraints

Folded Rear Seatback

TO OPEN AND CLOSE THE HOOD

Fog Light Switch

Front Map/Reading Light Switches

Courtesy Lights Ambient Light

Interior Light Defeat (OFF)

TILT/TELESCOPING STEERING COLUMN

Tilt/Telescoping Control Handle

POWER TILT/TELESCOPING STEERING COLUMN

Controls Soft-Key Heated Steering Wheel Soft-Key

1 — DISTANCE SETTING 4 — CANCEL

Adaptive Cruise Control (ACC) Ready

To Set A Desired ACC Speed

Adaptive Cruise Control (ACC) OFF

WARNING! U.S. Speed (mph)

Distance Set 3 (long) Distance Set 2 (medium)

Brake Alert 2 Brake Alert 1

Turn Or Bend Example

Lane Changing Example

Narrow Vehicle Example

ACC/FCW Unavailable, Service Required Warning